Toshiba Telephone DK8 User Manual
Digital Key Telephone Systems  
DK8 & DK16  
INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL  
© COPYRIGHT 1993  
TOSHIBA AMERICA INFORMATION SYSTEMS, INC.  
Telecommunication Systems Division  
All rights reserved. No part of this manual, covered by the copyrights hereon,  
may be reproduced in any form or by any means—graphic, electronic, or  
mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or information retrieval  
systems—with the exception of the System Record forms, without written  
permission of the publisher of this material.  
DK8-MA-IN/MT-R1  
4025021  
SERIAL NO. DK8 & DK16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES  
DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS  
INSTALLATION-INTRODUCTION  
SECTION 100-816-201  
MARCH 1993  
INSTALLATION  
Chapter One — Introduction  
Chapter Two — Site Requirements  
Chapter Three — System Configuration  
Chapter Four — DK8 KSU and PCB Installation  
Chapter Five — DK16 KSU and PCB Installation  
Section 100-816-201  
Section 100-816-202  
Section 100-816-203  
Section 100-816-204  
Section 100-816-205  
Section 100-816-206  
Section 100-816-207  
Section 100-816-208  
Chapter Six  
— Station Apparatus Installation  
Chapter Seven — Peripheral Installation  
Chapter Eight — Wiring Diagrams  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES  
DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS  
INSTALLATION-INTRODUCTION  
SECTION 100-816-201  
MARCH 1993  
INSTALLATION  
CHAPTER ONE  
INTRODUCTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-INTRODUCTION  
SECTION 100-816-201  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
SUBJECT  
PARAGRAPH  
PAGE  
1
PURPOSE ..............................................................................................................  
ORGANIZATION ....................................................................................................  
REFERENCE DOCUMENTATION ........................................................................  
General Description ............................................................................................  
Programming ......................................................................................................  
User Guides........................................................................................................  
Fault Finding Procedures ...................................................................................  
Remote Maintenance and Administration...........................................................  
SYSTEM MNEMONICS/TERMS............................................................................  
1-1  
1-1  
1-1  
1-1  
1-1  
1-1  
1-1  
1-1  
1-1  
2
3
3.10  
3.20  
3.30  
3.40  
3.50  
4
4.10  
Use of Notes, Important Notes, Cautions, and Warnings.................................... 1-5  
1-i  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-INTRODUCTION  
SECTION 100-816-201  
MARCH 1993  
telephones, standard telephones, direct station  
selection consoles, add-on modules and data in-  
terface units.  
1 PURPOSE  
1.00 The purpose of this section is to provide  
detailed step-by-step instructions for installing the  
STRATA DK8 and STRATA DK16 systems.  
3.40 Fault Finding Procedures: Hardware trou-  
bleshooting and diagnostic information presented  
in flowchart form.  
1.01 This chapter provides an overview of the  
entire installation section, and includes a list of  
reference documentation that supports the in-  
stalled system; a list of system mnemonics is also  
provided.  
3.50 RemoteMaintenanceandAdministration:  
Programming and maintenance procedures spe-  
ciallyadaptedforremotemaintenanceandadmin-  
istration terminal use. Detailed, step-by-step in-  
structionsareprovided, completewiththeterminal  
responses.  
2 ORGANIZATION  
2.00 This manual is organized in modular chap-  
ters for easy removal and replacement of updated  
materials. The chapters are as follows:  
4 SYSTEM MNEMONICS/TERMS  
4.00 Mnemonics are used to identify the system’s  
hardware, operation, and features. The following  
alphabeticallistingdescribesthemnemonicsused  
in this manual.  
Chapter One  
Chapter Two  
- Introduction  
- Site Requirements  
Chapter Three - System Configuration  
Chapter Four  
Chapter Five  
Chapter Six  
- STRATA DK8 KSU and PCB  
Installation  
ADM: Add-on Module—A telephone upgrade that  
provides 20 Direct Station Selection (DSS) but-  
tonswithbusyLEDindicationonSTRATADK16  
and 10 DSS buttons plus 8 speed dial buttons  
(one for every station), one night transfer and  
one all call page button on STRATA DK8. Can  
be installed on any or all 2000-series Digital  
Telephones in the system. Attaches to the tele-  
phone and uses the same port assigned to the  
telephone. ADM buttons are fixed and cannot  
be changed in system programming.  
- STRATADK16KSUandPCB  
Installation  
- Station Apparatus Installation  
Chapter Seven - Peripherals Installation  
Chapter Eight - System Wiring and Main Dis-  
tributionFrameArrangements  
3 REFERENCE DOCUMENTATION  
3.00 The STRATA DK8 and DK16 digital key  
systems are supported by the following comple-  
ment of reference documentation:  
BPS: Bits Per Second—Unit of measure that re-  
fers to the transmission speed (baud rate) of  
electronic signals. It is used when describing  
data interface unit and modem operation.  
3.10 General Description: An overview of the  
STRATA DK8 and DK16 systems and their fea-  
tures.  
CO: Central Office—The facility which houses  
switching equipment that provides telephone  
service (CO lines, Centrex lines, etc.) for the  
immediate geographical area.  
3.20 Programming: Detailed step-by-step in-  
structions on how to enter data in the System  
Record sheets, and how to program the system  
from the completed System Record Sheets. LCD  
responses are included to provide clear guidance  
for the programmer.  
CO Line: A term used to define the STRATA  
hardware circuit that connects to the Central  
Office network line pair. Each CO line is as-  
signed a CO line number in system software.  
3.30 User Guides: Detailed step-by-step guides  
on how to operate digital telephones, electronic  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-INTRODUCTION  
SECTION 100-816-201  
MARCH 1993  
CODECs:Coder/Decoders—Semiconductorsthat  
allow the system to process analog-to-digital  
and digital-to-analog conversions.  
TherearetwotypesofDSSconsoles:theDDSS  
consoleandtheHDSSconsole.Thechiefdiffer-  
ence between them is that the DDSS console  
can be connected to designated digital tele-  
phone circuits, while the HDSS console can  
onlybeconnectedtodesignatedelectronictele-  
phone circuits.  
DDCB: Digital Door Phone/Lock Control Unit—A  
peripheral hardware unit that can be connected  
to designated digital telephone circuits/ports.  
The DDCB has three interfaces, two of which  
are dedicated to door phones (MDFB), and one  
that can be connected to a MDFB or a door lock.  
DTMF: Dual-tone Multi-frequency—Push-button  
dialing.  
DISA: Direct Inward System Access—A feature  
available for CO lines that allows an outside  
party to access a STRATA system’s internal  
stations or outgoing CO lines without going  
throughanoperatororautomatedattendant. An  
optional security code and/or account codes  
may be set to prevent unauthorized access to  
outgoing CO lines for through system calling.  
DVSU: Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade—A sub-  
assembly that allows a digital telephone to re-  
ceive Off-hook Call Announce.  
EOCU:Off-hookCallAnnounceUpgrade(STRATA  
DK16 only)—An optional subassembly to the  
ElectronicTelephoneInterfaceUnitPCB(PEKU)  
orStandard/ElectronicTelephoneInterfaceUnit  
(PESU)thatprovidessupportforelectronictele-  
phones that must receive Off-hook Call An-  
nounce. Electronic telephones that must re-  
ceive Off-hook Call Announce must also have  
anHVSU2subassemblyorthecombinedHVSU/  
HVSI subassemblies.  
DK: Digital Key.  
DKSU8: Key Service Unit (STRATA DK8 only)—  
The standard key service unit which includes  
the system's motherboard, power supply, two  
CO line circuits, four digital telephone circuits,  
relay service, and interface for Music-on-hold  
(MOH)/Background Music (BGM) and External  
Page.  
FCC: Federal Communication Commission—The  
telecommunicationindustry’sfederalregulatory  
agency. All Toshiba hardware is FCC listed or  
approved.  
DKSUB16:BaseKeyServiceUnit(STRATADK16  
only)—The standard key service unit which in-  
cludes the system's motherboard, power sup-  
ply, four CO line circuits, eight digital telephone  
circuits, relay service, and interface for Music-  
on-hold (MOH)/Background Music (BGM) and  
External Page.  
HESB: External Speaker Box—A speaker/ampli-  
fier that can be configured with the system and  
telephones to provide a variety of functions.  
HESC-65A: A cable that connects an HHEU-  
equipped digital telephone or electronic tele-  
phone to an HESB for a Loud Ringing Bell .  
DKSUE16:ExpansionKeyServiceUnit(STRATA  
DK16only)—Theoptionalkeyserviceunitwhich  
hasfouruniversalslotsthatcansupportCOline,  
station,andexternaloptionprintedcircuitboards  
that are compatible with the larger STRATA DK  
systems (DK24/DK56/DK96).  
HHEU: Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Jack Interface  
Upgrade—Asmallsubassemblyforuseinsidea  
digital telephone or a 6500-series electronic  
telephone that allows a speaker (HESB) and/or  
a headset to be installed with the station.  
DSS: Direct Station Selection Console (STRATA  
DK16 only)—A console designed to facilitate  
theprocessingofaheavyloadofincomingcalls.  
HVSU2: Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade—A  
subassembly that enables an electronic tele-  
phone to receive Off-hook Call Announce.  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-INTRODUCTION  
SECTION 100-816-201  
MARCH 1993  
IMDU: Remote Maintenance Modem Interface  
Unit (STRATA DK16 only)—A subassembly  
installed on a PIOU or PIOUS PCB in the op-  
tional DK16 Expansion Key Service Unit that  
allowsthesystemtobeconnectedwitharemote  
maintenance/administration terminal.  
LED: Light Emitting Diode—Status indicators lo-  
catedonprintedcircuitboards,digitaltelephones,  
and electronic telephones.  
LSI: Large Scale Integration—Related to circuit  
design technology. STRATA DK8 and STRATA  
DK16 printed circuit boards use LSI circuit de-  
sign.  
KCDU: CO Line/Digital Telephone Interface Unit  
(STRATA DK16 only)—Optional printed circuit  
board providing two loop start CO line circuits  
and four digital telephone circuits that can be  
installed in the Expansion Unit. The digital tele-  
phone circuits support the same devices as the  
PDKU except for the DDSS console.  
MDF: Main Distribution Frame—The wiring frame  
usually located in a phone closet.  
MDFB: Door Phone Box—A peripheral two-way  
speaker box option. Each MDFB connects to a  
DDCB. A DDCB can support as many as three  
MDFBs.  
KCOU: CO Line Interface Unit (STRATA DK16  
only)—Factory-installedprintedcircuitboardthat  
comes standard with the Base Key Service Unit  
to provide four loop start CO line circuits. Avail-  
able as a spare unit for field replacements.  
OCA: Off-hook Call Announce.  
PBX: Private Branch Exchange—Industry-stan-  
dard term which refers to a telephone switch,  
usuallyon-premises, whichservesanindividual  
company, and is connected to a public tele-  
phone exchange through the CO.  
KFCU: (STRATA DK16 only) Option feature car-  
tridge that plugs into the Base Unit to provide  
feature upgrades to DK16.  
KPSU16:(STRATADK16only)Powersupplythat  
comes factory-installed in the Base Key Service  
Unit. This power supply provides power to the  
entire system, in its standard and expanded  
configurations. Available as a spare unit for field  
replacements.  
PCB: Printed Circuit Board.  
PCM: Pulse Code Modulation—A widely used  
form of digital telephone switching.  
PCOU1: CO Line Interface Unit (STRATA DK16  
only)—A printed circuit board that can be in-  
stalled in the optional Expansion Key Service  
Unit to provide the system with four loop start  
CO lines circuits.  
K4RCU: (STRATA DK16 only) Optional unit that  
can be installed in the Base Key Service Unit to  
provide a 4-circuit Dual-tone Multi-frequency  
receiver for CO lines and standard telephones.  
It also provides busy tone detection for Auto  
Busy Redial.  
PCOU2: (STRATA DK16 only) The PCOU2 is a  
direct replacement for the PCOU1. Their fit/  
form/function is identical; however, for manu-  
facturing reasons, the PCOU1 was phased out  
in favor of the PCOU2.  
KSTU: Standard Telephone Interface Unit  
(STRATA DK16 only)—Optional printed circuit  
board that can be installed in the Base Key  
Service Unit to provide four standard telephone  
circuits.  
PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2: Integrated Data Interface  
Unit—Replaces the normal digital telephone  
base to enable the telephone to transmit and  
receive data between a terminal/personal com-  
puter connected to the telephone and data  
devices connected to other PDIU-DIs, or to  
modems, printers, and computers connected to  
LCD: Liquid Crystal Display—Display used for  
messaging, identification, and status that ap-  
pearsonsomedigitalandelectronictelephones.  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-INTRODUCTION  
SECTION 100-816-201  
MARCH 1993  
Stand-alone Data Interface Units (PDIU-DSs).  
The PDIU-DI is also used to provide personal  
computer access to outside dial-up data ser-  
vices and/or bulletin boards.  
supportthesamesingle-linedevicesastheKSTU  
and the PSTU.  
PFT: Power Failure Transfer Interface—Dedicated  
standard telephone interface located on the  
motherboard in the DKSUB16 (STRATA DK16)  
or DKSU8 (STRATA DK8) to provide emergency  
service during a system power failure.  
NOTE:  
The PDIU-DI and the PDIU-DI2 are identical,  
except that the PDIU-DI attaches to 1000-  
series Digital Telephones, while the PDIU-  
DI2 attaches to 2000-series Digital Tele-  
phones.  
PIOU:OptionInterfaceUnit(STRATADK16only)—  
Aprintedcircuitboardthatcanbeinstalledinthe  
optional Expansion Key Service Unit to provide  
supportand/orcircuitinterfaceforoptionalhard-  
ware peripherals and upgrades.  
PDIU-DS:Stand-aloneDataInterfaceUnit—Used  
for modem pooling, printer sharing, and access  
to a host/mainframe computer.  
PIOUS: (STRATA DK16 only) The same as the  
PIOU, except the PIOUS has one external pag-  
ing interface zone, while the PIOU has four.  
PDKU1:DigitalTelephoneInterfaceUnit(STRATA  
DK16 only)—A printed board that can be in-  
stalled in the optional Expansion Key Service  
Unit to provide the system with eight digital  
telephone circuits. In addition to digital tele-  
phones, the PDKU can support data interface  
units (Stand-alone and Integrated), a digital  
DSS console (DDSS), and a digital door phone/  
lock control unit (DDCB).  
NOTE:  
The system cannot support the PIOU and  
PIOUS simultaneously. Only one or the other  
can be installed.  
PORT: There are two types of ports: physical and  
logical. Aphysicalportisanactualstationcircuit  
location; a logical port is the set of characteris-  
tics—features, station intercom number, etc.—  
assigned to the physical port. Logical ports are  
mobile. They can be moved from one physical  
port to another.  
PDKU2:DigitalTelephoneInterfaceUnit(STRATA  
DK16 only)—Provides same function as the  
PDKU1, except that the PDKU1 can only sup-  
port data interface units on Circuits 1 ~ 7, while  
the PDKU2 can support data interface units on  
Circuits 1 ~ 8.  
PBTC: A Toshiba-supplied cable used to connect  
customer-supplied batteries to the power sup-  
plyintheDKSUBforemergencyreservepower.  
PEKU: Electronic Telephone Interface Unit  
(STRATA DK16 only)—An optional PCB that  
provides the system with eight electronic tele-  
phone circuits, which can support electronic  
telephones, a Background Music source, an  
electronic DSS console (HDSS), and an ampli-  
fier for two CO line conference calls.  
PPTC: (STRATA DK16 only) A Toshiba-supplied  
adapter that is used to connect the modular  
SMDR and/or maintenance ports to the DB-25  
connector of a printer, terminal, modem or call  
accounting machine. The SMDR/Maintenance  
(TTY)portislocatedontheoptionalQSMUPCB  
(STRATA DK8), or PIOU or PIOUS PCB  
(STRATA DK16).  
PESU:Standard/ElectronicInterfaceUnit(STRATA  
DK16 only)—A printed circuit board with two  
standard telephone circuits and four electronic  
telephone circuits that can be installed in the  
optional Expansion Key Service Unit. The elec-  
tronic telephone circuits can support the same  
devices as the PEKU, except for the HDSS  
console. The standard telephone circuits can  
PSTU1: Standard Telephone Interface Unit  
(STRATA DK16 only)—A printed circuit board  
withabuilt-inringgeneratorthatcanbeinstalled  
in the optional Expansion Key Service Unit to  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-INTRODUCTION  
SECTION 100-816-201  
MARCH 1993  
provide interface for eight standard telephones  
or optional hardware peripherals (voice mail  
devices,faxmachine,BackgroundMusicsource,  
etc).  
(STRATA DK8 only)—Optional printed circuit  
board that can be installed in the KSU to provide  
two standard telephone circuits.  
RAM: Random Access Memory—Refers to the  
type of system memory that holds individual  
systemconfigurationandfeatureprogramming.  
RAM is read/write memory, and can be easily  
revised in programming.  
PSTU2: Standard Telephone Interface Unit  
(STRATADK16only)—Providesthesamefunc-  
tion as the PSTU with the addition of a switch to  
select high or low ringing generator voltage.  
QCDU: CO Line/Digital Telephone Interface Unit  
(STRATA DK8 only)—Optional printed circuit  
board providing one loop start CO line circuit  
and two digital telephone circuits that can be  
installed in the KSU. A maximum of two QCDUs  
may be installed in the DK8.  
ROM: Read Only Memory—Refers to the type of  
system memory that holds static software that  
comprises the mechanics of the features’ func-  
tions. ROM is only revised by Toshiba software  
engineers.  
4.10 Use of Notes, Important Notes, Cautions,  
and Warnings  
QCNU: Conference Unit (STRATA DK8 only)—  
Standard factory-installed printed circuit board  
provides two conference circuits that can be  
installed in the KSU. The PCB allows two simul-  
taneous conferences: four parties for the first,  
and three parties for the second simultaneous  
conference.  
4.11 Notescallattentiontospecificitemstoelabo-  
rate, or to refer the reader to other information.  
4.12 Important Notes are used when the informa-  
tion is considered to be very important.  
QPSU: (STRATA DK8 only)—Power supply that  
comes factory-installed in the KSU. This power  
supply provides power to the entire system.  
Available as a spare unit for field replacements.  
4.13 Cautions call attention to the possibility of  
equipment being damaged if the instructions are  
not followed closely.  
4.14 Warnings are used when the given tasks  
involved could cause the possibility of personal  
injury or death to the technician.  
QRCU: Optional printed circuit board that can be  
installed in the KSU to provide a 3-circuit Dual-  
tone Multi-frequency receiver for DISA CO lines  
and standard telephones. It also provides busy  
tone detection for Auto Busy Redial.  
QSMU: SMDR/TTY Interface Unit (STRATA DK8  
only)—Optional printed circuit board which  
provides either SMDR, or Remote Maintenance  
Terminal (TTY) or external modem interface.  
QSMU configuration is selectable in system  
programming.  
QSTU: Standard Telephone Interface Unit  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-SITE REQUIREMENTS  
SECTION 100-816-202  
MARCH 1993  
TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES  
DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS  
INSTALLATION  
CHAPTER TWO  
SITE REQUIREMENTS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-SITE REQUIREMENTS  
SECTION 100-816-202  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
SUBJECT  
PARAGRAPH  
PAGE  
1
GENERAL ..............................................................................................................  
2-1  
2-1  
2-1  
2-1  
2
3
INPUT POWER REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................  
SITE CONSIDERATIONS ......................................................................................  
Clearance and Location Requirements ..............................................................  
3.00  
3.10  
4
4.10  
4.20  
Electrical/Environmental Requirements and Characteristics............................... 2-2  
GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................................  
Third Wire Ground Test ......................................................................................  
Alternate or Additional Ground ...........................................................................  
2-2  
2-2  
2-4  
TABLE LIST  
TITLE  
TABLE  
2-A  
PAGE  
SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL/ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS.............. 2-3  
FIGURE LIST  
FIGURE  
2-1  
TITLE  
PAGE  
DK8 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT AND HPFB MINIMUM CLEARANCE  
REQUIREMENTS...................................................................................................  
2-1  
2-2  
2-3  
BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT MINIMUM CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS .............. 2-1  
DK16 COMBINED BASE AND EXPANSION KEY SERVICE UNIT  
MINIMUM CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS ..........................................................  
KSU GROUNDING DIAGRAM ...............................................................................  
2-2  
2-3  
2-4  
2-i  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-SITE REQUIREMENTS  
SECTION 100-816-202  
MARCH 1993  
2.02 An option Reserve Power Battery and  
Charger (HPFB) is available for use with the  
STRATA DK8 to serve as a power failure backup.  
For the STRATA DK16, a reserve power source  
(two customer-supplied 12-volt batteries) may be  
connected to the system to serve as a power  
failure backup.  
1 GENERAL  
1.00 This chapter defines the installation site re-  
quirements necessary to ensure a proper operat-  
ing environment for the STRATA DK8 and DK16.  
Also included are grounding requirements.  
2 INPUT POWER REQUIREMENTS  
2.00 The system requires an input power source  
of117VACnominal(85VAC~135VAC), 50/60Hz,  
15 amps. The AC outlet is recommended to be  
dedicated and unswitched, with a solid third wire  
ground (refer to Paragraph 4). This is to eliminate  
interference from branch circuit motor noise or the  
like, and to prevent accidental power-off.  
3 SITE CONSIDERATIONS  
3.00 Clearance and Location Requirements  
3.01 The key service units must be wall mounted.  
Figure 2-1 shows the minimum clearance require-  
ments for the STRATA DK8 system, and includes  
the recommended mounting location and clear-  
ance requirements for the optional HPFB. Figures  
2-2 (Base Key Service Unit) and 2-3 (Base and  
Expansion Key Service Unit together) show the  
minimum clearance requirements for the standard  
2.01 To avoid accidental power turn-off, it is rec-  
ommended that an ON/OFF wall switch not be  
used on this dedicated AC circuit.  
DK8 KEY SERVICE UNIT  
AND HPFB CLEARANCE  
FRONT VIEW  
DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT CLEARANCE  
FRONT VIEW  
2"  
HPFB  
2"  
12.25"  
2"  
2"  
2"  
DK 8 KSU  
DK 16  
BASE KSU  
16.4"  
18"  
2"  
2"  
2"  
TOP VIEW  
10"  
2"  
TOP VIEW  
3"  
3.5"  
WALL  
WALL  
FIGURE 2-1  
DK8 KEY SERVICE UNIT AND HPFB  
MINIMUM CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS  
FIGURE 2-2  
DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT  
MINIMUM CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-SITE REQUIREMENTS  
SECTION 100-816-202  
MARCH 1993  
3.03 If reserve power is to be installed for the  
STRATA DK16, the batteries will require a well-  
ventilated location close (within nine feet) to the  
DKSUB16 (the optional Toshiba-supplied battery  
cable is 9 feet in length). The STRATA DK8  
reserve battery (HPFB) should be mounted di-  
rectly above the DKSU8 as shown in Figure 2-1.  
DK16 BASE AND EXPANSION  
UNIT CLEARANCE  
FRONT VIEW  
20"  
2"  
2"  
2"  
EXP  
BASE  
18"  
3.10 Electrical/Environmental Requirements  
and Characteristics  
3.11 The electrical/environmental requirements  
and characteristics for each system are provided  
in Table 2-A.  
2"  
TOP VIEW  
EXP  
BASE  
3.5"  
WALL  
4 GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS  
4.00 The systems require a solid earth ground for  
proper operation. Failure to provide ground may  
lead to confusing trouble symptoms and, in ex-  
treme cases, system failure. The AC power cord  
contains a conductor for the "third wire ground"  
provided by the commercial power outlet. The  
third-wire ground should be the only ground nec-  
essary for the DK8/DK16; this ground must origi-  
nate at the buildings main power distribution panel  
and have a solid connection to earth ground.  
(Figure 2-4)  
FIGURE 2-3  
DK16 COMBINED BASE AND  
EXPANSION KEY SERVICE UNIT  
MINIMUM CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS  
and optioned STRATA DK16 system. Refer to  
Chapter 4 for DK16 key service unit wall mounting  
instructions.  
4.10 Third Wire Ground Test  
4.11 Test the "third wire ground" for continuity by  
either measuring the resistance between the third  
prong terminal (earth ground) and a metal cold  
water pipe (maximum: 1 ohm), or by using a  
commercially available earth ground indicator. If  
neither procedure is possible, perform the follow-  
ing earth ground test procedure:  
3.02 Thefollowingconditionsmustbeconsidered  
whenselectingalocationforthekeyserviceunit(s):  
The location MUST BE:  
Dry and clean  
Well ventilated  
Well illuminated  
Easily accessible  
WARNING!  
The location MUST NOT BE:  
Hazardous voltages that may cause death  
or injury are exposed during the following  
test. UsegreatcarewhenworkingwithAC  
power line voltage.  
Subject to extreme heat or cold  
Subject to corrosive fumes, dust, or other air-  
borne contaminants  
Subject to excessive vibration  
Next to television, radio, office automation, or  
high frequency equipment  
1) Obtain a suitable voltmeter, and set it for a  
possible reading of up to 250 VAC.  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-SITE REQUIREMENTS  
SECTION 100-816-202  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE 2-A  
SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL/ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS  
GENERAL  
Primary power  
85 ~ 135VAC  
Input AC  
50/60 Hz  
AC frequency  
DK8-46 watts maximum, DK16-75 watts maximum  
Power  
Environmental specifications  
Operating temperature  
Operating humidity  
Storage temperature  
32 ~ 104°F (0 ~ 40°C)  
20 ~ 80% relative humidity without condensation  
- 4 ~ 158°F (-20 ~ 70°C)  
Power supply  
DK16  
DK8  
DC voltage output  
specification  
–24VDC: (–26.3 ~ –27.8VDC) +24VDC: (+26.3 ~ +27.8VDC)  
+5VDC: ( +4.5 ~ +5.5VDC) +5VDC: ( +4.5 ~ +5.5VDC)  
–5VDC: ( –4.5 ~ –5.5VDC) Note: +5V converter  
on KSU PCB  
Battery charger characteristics  
(DK16 only)  
Charger: current limiting  
Nominal float voltage: 2.275 volts/cell  
Charge current: 0.7 amps maximum  
Battery discharge cut-off voltage: 20.5 ± 0.5VDC  
Square wave output with high/low option jumper:  
QSTU, KSTU, PSTU or PESU (circuits 1 & 2)  
Low position, 130 ± 20VDC peak–to–peak (no-load)  
High position, 190 ± 25VDC peak–to–peak (no-load)  
Ring voltage  
Two ringers maximum per circuit, high or low position  
Ringing capability  
2) Connect the meter probes between the two  
main AC voltage terminals (white and black  
wires)onthewalloutlet. Thereadingobtained  
should be between 100 ~ 120 VAC.  
GROUND 1 THIRD WIRE GROUND  
TO AC POWER CORD  
THIRD WIRE  
AC GROUND  
DK8 OR DK16 KSU  
3) Move one of the meter probes to the third  
terminal (green wire ground). Either the same  
reading or a reading of zero volts should be  
obtained.  
POWER  
SUPPLY  
A
ELECTRICAL  
4) If the reading is zero volts, leave one probe on  
the ground terminal and move the other probe  
to the second voltage terminal.  
SYSTEM GROUND  
CAUTION!  
FG  
If a reading of zero volts is obtained on  
bothvoltageterminals(whitewiretogreen  
wire,blackwiretogreenwire),theoutletis  
not properly grounded. Omit steps 5 and  
6, and proceed directly to step 7.  
FIGURE 2-4  
KSU GROUNDING DIAGRAM  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-SITE REQUIREMENTS  
SECTION 100-816-202  
MARCH 1993  
5) If a reading of zero volts on one terminal, and  
a reading of 100 ~ 120 VAC on the other  
terminalisobtained,removebothprobesfrom  
the outlet.  
4.20 Alternate or Additional Ground  
4.21 If the “third wire” AC ground can not practi-  
cally be improved or if extreme motor noise or  
otherdisturbancecausessystemmalfunction, orif  
local area lightning storms exist, a separate direct  
ground may be warranted.  
6) Setthemetertothe“OHMS/Rx1”scale. Place  
one probe on the ground terminal, and the  
other probe on the terminal that produced a  
reading of zero volts. The reading should be  
less than 1 ohm.  
4.22 Connectaseparateearthgroundfromacold  
waterpipeorearthgroundingroddirectlytotheFG  
screw terminal on the DK8/DK16 power supply.  
See Figure 4-5 of Section 100-816-204 (for  
STRATA DK8) or Figure 5-8 of Section 100-816-  
205 (for STRATA DK16).  
CAUTION!  
If the reading is more than one ohm, then  
the outlet is not adequately grounded.  
7) If the above tests show the outlet is not prop-  
erly grounded, the condition should be cor-  
rected (per Article 250 of the National Electri-  
cal Code) by a qualified electrician before the  
system is connected.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION  
SECTION 100-816-203  
MARCH 1993  
TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES  
DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS  
INSTALLATION  
CHAPTER THREE  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION  
SECTION 100-816-203  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
SUBJECT  
PARAGRAPH  
1
PAGE  
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................... 3-1  
SYSTEM CAPACITY................................................................................................ 3-1  
Total System Capacity.......................................................................................... 3-1  
The DK8 Key Service Unit.................................................................................... 3-1  
The DK16 Base Key Service Unit......................................................................... 3-1  
The DK16 Expansion Key Service Unit ................................................................ 3-1  
STATION CONSIDERATIONS ................................................................................ 3-5  
Telephone Circuit (Port) Types............................................................................. 3-5  
Digital Telephone Circuit Connections ................................................................. 3-5  
Electronic Telephone Circuit Connections (STRATA DK16 Only) ........................ 3-8  
Standard Telephone Circuit Options .................................................................... 3-8  
TELEPHONE UPGRADES ...................................................................................... 3-9  
Digital Telephone Upgrades ................................................................................. 3-9  
Electronic Telephone Upgrades ........................................................................... 3-9  
CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES ............................................................................... 3-9  
Strata DK8 - Example 1 (Small Retail Store)........................................................ 3-9  
Strata DK8 - Example 2 (Home Office) ................................................................ 3-9  
Strata DK16 - Example 1 (Bank) .......................................................................... 3-10  
Strata DK16 - Example 2 (Office/Warehouse)...................................................... 3-10  
CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET ........................................................................... 3-10  
2
2.00  
2.10  
2.20  
2.30  
3
3.10  
3.20  
3.30  
3.40  
4
4.10  
4.20  
5
5.10  
5.20  
5.40  
5.50  
6
TABLE LIST  
TABLE  
3-A  
3-B  
TITLE  
PAGE  
DK8 CO LINE/STATION CONFIGURATION GUIDE ............................................... 3-2  
DK16 CO LINE/STATION CONFIGURATION GUIDE (BASE AND  
EXPANSION UNIT) .................................................................................................. 3-2  
DK8 KEY SERVICE UNIT COMPONENTS ............................................................. 3-3  
DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT COMPONENTS................................................. 3-4  
DK16 EXPANSION KEY SERVICE UNIT PCBs ...................................................... 3-5  
INTERFACE OPTION .............................................................................................. 3-6  
STRATA DK8 STATION APPARATUS OVERVIEW ............................................... 3-6  
STRATA DK16 STATION APPARATUS OVERVIEW ............................................. 3-7  
3-C  
3-D  
3-E  
3-F  
3-G  
3-H  
WORKSHEETS  
NUMBER  
TITLE  
PAGE  
1
2
3
DK8 STATION AND CO LINE TOTALS ................................................................... 3-11  
DK8 KEY SERVICE UNIT AND PCBs ..................................................................... 3-12  
DK8 PERIPHERALS AND UPGRADES .................................................................. 3-13  
1
2
3
4
DK16 STATION AND CO LINE TOTALS ................................................................. 3-15  
DK16 KEY SERVICE UNIT AND PCBs ................................................................... 3-16  
DK16 PERIPHERALS AND UPGRADES ................................................................ 3-17  
DK16 SYSTEM POWER CHECK ............................................................................ 3-19  
3-i  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION  
SECTION 100-816-203  
MARCH 1993  
peripherals: Music-on-hold source, night bell, or  
page amplifier mute control.  
1 INTRODUCTION  
1.00 This chapter offers guidelines and consider-  
ations on how to configure a STRATA DK8/DK16  
system, which can support a wide variety of sta-  
tions and peripherals.  
2.20 The DK16 Base Key Service Unit  
2.21 Station and CO Lines. The DK16 Base Key  
Service Unit comes standard with eight digital  
telephone circuits (ports) and four CO line circuits  
(Table3-D).Anoptionalprintedcircuitboardcalled  
the KSTU can be added to the unit to provide four  
standard telephone circuits (ports).  
2 SYSTEM CAPACITY  
2.00 Total System Capacity  
2.01 The STRATA DK8/DK16 systems have a  
modular design which allows them to support a  
number of station and CO line configurations. The  
main component of each system is the Key Ser-  
vice Unit. The DK8 KSU can have up to 10 stations  
and four CO lines. The DK16 Base Key Service  
Unit can have up to 12 stations and four CO lines.  
An Expansion Key Service Unit can be added to  
theDK16toincreasethestationcapacityto20and  
the CO line capacity to eight. Station and CO line  
configurations are shown in Table 3-A (for DK8)  
and Table 3-B (for DK16).  
2.22 Peripherals. The DK16 Base Key Service  
Unit can support a number of peripherals, which  
are not considered as stations and do not affect  
the maximum station and CO line capacities. A  
customer-supplied Music-on-hold source, cus-  
tomer-supplied separate background music  
source, customer-supplied reserve power bat-  
teries, a customer-supplied emergency stan-  
dard telephone for system power failure occur-  
rences and an amplifier with speaker for paging  
and night ringing can all be connected to the  
Base Key Service Unit (Table 3-D). A relay  
contact is also provided to control one of the  
following peripherals: Music-on-hold source, night  
bell, or Page Amplifier mute control.  
2.10 The DK8 Key Service Unit  
2.11StationandCOLines. TheDK8KeyService  
Unit comes standard with four digital telephone  
circuits (ports) and two CO line circuits (Table  
3-C). An optional printed circuit board called the  
QCDUcanbeaddedtotheKSUtoprovideoneCO  
line circuit and two digital telephone circuits. A  
maximum of two QCDUs may be added to provide  
a total of four additional digital telephone circuits  
and two additional CO line circuits. Another op-  
tional printed circuit board called the QSTU can be  
added to the DK8 KSU to provide two standard  
telephone circuits.  
2.30 The DK16 Expansion Key Service Unit  
2.31 Station and CO Lines. The optional DK16  
Expansion Key Service Unit has four universal  
slots which can support a maximum of four CO  
lines and eight stations. Printed circuit boards  
(PCBs) that support CO lines and can be installed  
in the Expansion Unit are the PCOU and KCDU  
(Table3-E).PCBsthatcansupportstationsandbe  
installed in the Expansion Unit are the PDKU,  
PEKU, PSTU, PESU, and KCDU.  
2.12 Peripherals. The DK8 Key Service Unit can  
support a number of peripherals, which are not  
considered as stations and do not affect the maxi-  
mum station and CO line capacities. A customer-  
supplied Music-on-hold source, optional reserve  
power battery and charger, a customer-supplied  
emergency standard telephone for system power  
failure occurrences and an amplifier with speaker  
for paging and night ringing can all be connected  
totheKeyServiceUnit(Table3-C). Arelaycontact  
is also provided to control one of the following  
2.32 Peripherals. The Expansion Unit can sup-  
port either a PIOU or PIOUS PCB, which both  
provide, among other features, Station Message  
Detail Recording (SMDR), an interface for a local  
programming terminal, and connectors for an in-  
ternal modem (IMDU) for remote maintenance  
and administration (Table 3-F). Any device that  
connects to the PIOU or PIOUS should not be  
considered a station and does not affect the  
system's station capacity.  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION  
SECTION 100-816-203  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE 3-A  
DK8 CO LINE/STATION CONFIGURATION GUIDE  
EQUIPMENT  
KSU = Key Service Unit ·2 CO Lines/4 digital circuits)  
CO  
= Central Office  
QCDU = Optional PCB (1 CO line/2 digital circuits)  
DKT = Digital Telephone  
QSTU = Optional PCB (2 standard circuits)  
SLT  
= Standard Telephone  
CONFIGURATION CO  
LINES BY STATION  
COs DKTs SLTs  
EQUIPMENT  
2 by 4  
2 by 6  
3 by 6  
3 by 8  
4 by 8  
4 by 10  
2
2
3
3
4
4
4
4
6
6
8
8
KSU  
KSU + QSTU  
KSU + QCDU  
KSU + QCDU + QSTU  
KSU + QCDU + QCDU  
KSU + QCDU + QCDU + QSTU  
2
2
2
TABLE 3-B  
DK16 CO LINE/STATION CONFIGURATION GUIDE (BASE AND EXPANSION UNIT)  
EQUIPMENT  
BU  
KSTU = Base Unit Option (4 standard circuits)  
EU = Expansion Unit  
= Base Unit (4 CO lines/8 digital circuits)  
PSTU = EU option (8 standard circuits)  
PCOU = EU option (4 CO lines)  
CO  
= Central Office line  
PDKU = EU option (8 digital circuits)  
DKT = Digital telephone  
EKT = Electronic telephone  
SLT = Standard telephone  
KCDU = EU option (2 CO lines/4 digital circuits)  
PEKU = EU option (8 electronic circuits)  
PESU = EU option (2 standard/4 electronic circuits)  
CONFIGURATION CO  
LINES BY STATION  
COs  
DKTs  
EKTs  
SLTs  
EQUIPMENT  
4 by 8  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
16  
8
8
16  
8
12  
12  
8
8
8
8
16  
16  
8
16  
8
16  
8
BU  
BU + KSTU  
BU + EU + PESU  
BU + EU + PSTU  
BU + EU + PEKU  
BU + EU + PDKU  
BU + KSTU + PESU  
BU + KSTU + EU + PEKU  
BU + KSTU + EU + PDKU  
BU + KSTU + EU + PSTU  
BU + EU + KCDU  
BU + KSTU + EU + KCDU  
BU + EU + PCOU  
BU + KSTU + EU + PCOU  
BU + EU + PCOU + PESU  
BU + EU + PCOU + PEKU  
BU + EU + PDKU + PCOU  
BU + EU + KCDU + KCDU  
BU + KSTU + EU + PCOU + PESU  
BU + KSTU + EU + KCDU + KCDU  
BU + KSTU + EU + PCOU + PEKU  
BU + KSTU + EU + PCOU + PDKU  
BU + KSTU + EU + PCOU + PSTU  
4 by 12  
4 by 14  
4 by 16  
4 by 16  
4 by 16  
4 by 18  
4 by 20  
4 by 20  
4 by 20  
6 by 12  
6 by 16  
8 by 8  
8 by 12  
8 by 14  
8 by 16  
8 by 16  
8 by 16  
8 by 18  
8 by 20  
8 by 20  
8 by 20  
8 by 20  
4
2
8
4
8
4
8
6
4
4
12  
4
4
2
4
8
4
8
6
4
4
4
12  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION  
SECTION 100-816-203  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE 3-C  
DK8 KEY SERVICE UNIT COMPONENTS  
Item  
Supports  
Connector Type  
25-pair Amphenol  
Standard Optional  
Digital Telephone Circuits (4)  
Digital Telephones (with  
or without PDIU–DI2 or  
ADM)  
✓
Stand-alone Data  
Interface Units (PDIU-DS)  
Door Phone Lock/Control  
Unit (DDCB)  
CO Line Circuits (2)  
Loop Start CO Lines  
RJ11 Modular  
RJ11 Modular  
✓
✓
Power Failure Transfer Interface  
Standard Telephone  
(one)*  
Battery Backup Interface  
Music-On-Hold/BGM Interface  
600 Ohm page Interface  
Optional HPFB Battery  
(one or two per system)  
Proprietary  
Cable/Connector  
Interface  
HPFB  
with cable  
Music-on-hold/BGM  
Source*  
RCA Jack  
✓
Amplifier/Speaker  
RCA Jack  
✓
CO line CKT (1)/  
Digital Telephone CKT (2) (QCDU)  
(max. 2 QCDU per system)  
Digital Telephones (with  
or without PDIU–DI2 or  
ADM)  
Stand-alone Data  
Interface Units (PDIU-DS)  
25-pair Amphenol  
✓
Loop Start CO Line  
RJ11 Modular  
Standard Telephone  
Interface Unit (QSTU)  
Standard Telephones*  
Other Single-line Devices* 25-pair Amphenol  
Fax Machine*  
2 standard telephone circuits  
(1 max.) QSTU per system  
✓
✓
Voice Mail Devices  
Alternate BGM source*  
DTMF/ABR Tone Receiver  
(3-Receiver CKT per QRCU )  
Automatic Busy Redial  
Standard telephone ports  
DISA  
Internal  
Control Relay  
25-pair Amphenol  
One of the following:  
Night Relay  
✓
✓
External Page Mute  
MOH Control Relay  
Conference Circuit Interface Unit  
(QCNU)  
2 Simultaneous  
Conferences  
Internal  
SMDR/TTY Interface Unit (QSMU)  
(Requires PPTC)  
SMDR Printer*, or  
Maintenance Terminal* or (PPTC adaptor)  
Modem*  
6-pin Modular  
✓
Customer supplied equipment not offered by Toshiba Telecommunication Systems Division.  
*
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION  
SECTION 100-816-203  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE 3-D  
DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT COMPONENTS  
Item  
Supports  
Connector Type  
Standard Optional  
Digital Telephones (with  
or without PDIU–DI2 or  
ADM)  
Digital Telephone Circuits (8)  
25-pair Amphenol  
✓
Stand-alone Data  
Interface Units (PDIU-DS)  
Door Phone Lock/Control  
Unit (DDCB)  
Digital Direct Station  
Selection Console (DDSS)  
CO Line Circuits (4)  
Loop Start CO Lines  
RJ11 Modular  
RJ11 Modular  
✓
✓
Power Failure Transfer Interface  
Standard Telephone (one)  
*
Battery Backup Interface with  
built-in charger  
Two 12-volt Batteries  
Proprietary  
Connector/Cable  
✓
Cable and  
Batteries  
*
Music-On-Hold/BGM Interface  
600 Ohm page Interface  
Music-on-Hold/BGM source  
Amplifier/Speaker  
RCA Jack  
✓
✓
*
RCA Jack  
Standard Telephones  
Standard Telephone  
Interface Unit (4-Circuit)  
(KSTU)  
25-pair Amphenol  
✓
*
*
Other Single-line Devices  
*
Alternate BGM Source  
*
Fax machine  
*
Voice mail devices  
Automatic Busy Redial  
Internal  
DTMF/ABR  
Receiver (K4RCU)  
✓
✓
Standard Telephone Ports  
Interprets DTMF Tones  
DISA  
Feature Cartridge  
Control Relay  
Future Feature Upgrades  
Choice of one:  
Internal  
25-pair Amphenol  
✓
MOH Source Control  
Night Bell Control  
BGM Mute Control  
Customer supplied equipment not offered by Toshiba Telecommunication Systems Division.  
*
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION  
SECTION 100-816-203  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE 3-E  
DK16 EXPANSION KEY SERVICE UNIT PCBs  
Circuits per PCB  
PCB  
Interfaces  
Connector  
• Digital telephones with or  
without PDIU-DI2 or ADM  
• DDSS console  
• PDIU-DSs  
25-pair amphenol  
8 digital telephone  
circuits  
PDKU  
• DDCB  
PEKU  
PSTU  
8 electronic telephone  
circuits  
• Electronic telephones  
• HDSS console  
• BGM source  
25-pair amphenol  
25-pair amphenol  
• EOCU PCB for OCA  
8 standard telephone  
circuits  
• Standard telephones  
• Voice mail ports  
• Background music source  
• Off-premises stations  
• Other similar devices  
2 standard telephone/  
4 electronic telephone circuits  
(standard/electronic  
Standard: same as PSTU  
Electronic: same as PEKU  
except PESU does not  
support HDSS console  
25-pair amphenol  
RJ14C modular  
PESU  
PCOU  
telephone ports)  
• Central Office loop start  
lines  
4 CO line circuits  
(lines)  
KCDU  
2 CO line circuits/  
4 digital telephone circuits  
• Central Office loop  
start lines  
RJ14C Modular  
(CO Line circuits)  
• DKT circuits same as  
PDKU, except no DDSS  
25-pair amphenol  
(digital telephone circuits)  
See Table 3-D  
See Table 3-D  
PIOU,  
PIOUS  
25-pair amphenol (PIOU)  
Spring clip terminal (PIOUS)  
3.10 Telephone Circuit (Port) Types  
3 STATION CONSIDERATIONS  
3.11 There are three types of telephone circuits to  
whichstationscanbeconnected:digitaltelephone  
circuits, electronic telephone circuits, and stan-  
dard telephone circuits. All three types of circuits  
areavailablewiththeSTRATADK16.TheSTRATA  
DK8 does not support electronic telephone cir-  
cuits.  
3.00 For configuration purposes, a station can be  
considered as any device which is connected to a  
dedicated telephone circuit. Although the words  
"telephone" and "station" are often used synony-  
mously and interchangeably in STRATA DK8/  
DK16 documentation, devices other than tele-  
phones—suchasStand-aloneDataInterfaceunits  
(PDIU-DSs)—should also be considered as sta-  
tions when configuring a system, because they  
require a dedicated telephone circuit. A station  
apparatus overview is shown in Table 3-G (for  
STRATADK8)andTable3-H(forSTRATADK16).  
3.20 Digital Telephone Circuit Connections  
3.21 The STRATA DK8 Key Service Unit provides  
four digital telephone circuits. The QCDU PCB  
provides two.  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION  
SECTION 100-816-203  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE 3-F  
PIOU/PIOUS INTERFACE OPTION (DK16 ONLY)  
Expansion Unit Interface Options  
PIOU  
PIOUS  
Zone Page Interface (unamplified, 4 zones)  
Night Transfer or Music-on-Hold Control Relay  
Door Lock or External Amplifier Control Relay  
Alarm Sensor  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SMDR output (RS-232/6-wire modular connector)  
Maintenance Port for a Local ASCII Terminal or  
External Modem (RS-232/6-wire modular connector)  
Remote Maintenance Modem (IMDU subassembly, no  
external connector)  
X
X
NOTE: X = the option is provided  
TABLE 3-G  
STRATA DK8 STATION APPARATUS OVERVIEW  
Type and Number of  
KSU  
KSU and Optional PCB  
Station  
Circuits Required  
PCB or Interface  
Capacity Combined Capacity  
Digital Telephone  
DKT with or without  
ADM or PDIUDI  
Digital, one for each  
DKT  
KSU  
(Circuits 1 ~ 4)  
4
8
8
2
2
QCDU (Circuits 1 ~ 2)  
Stand-alone Data  
Interface Unit (PDIU- PDIU-DS  
DS)  
Digital, one for each  
KSU  
(Circiuts 1 ~ 4)  
4
QCDU (Circuits 1 ~ 2)  
Digital Door  
Phone/Lock Control DDCB  
Unit (DDCB)  
Digital, one for each  
KSU  
Port 02  
Port 03  
2
Single-wire pair  
devices:  
Standard  
Standard, one for  
each device (voice  
mail devices may  
QSTU (Circuits 1 ~ 2)  
—
Telephone  
require more than one  
Voice Mail Device circuit)  
Facsimile Machine  
Modem  
Dictation  
Equipment  
Alternate  
Background Music  
Standard port for the QSTU (Circuit 2)  
source Port 19  
1
1
Source  
*
*May require interface transformer, see Section 100-816-207.  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION  
SECTION 100-816-203  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE 3-H  
STRATA DK16 STATION APPARATUS OVERVIEW  
Type and Number of  
Base Unit  
Base and Expansion  
Station  
Circuits Required  
PCB or Interface  
Capacity Unit Combined Capacity  
Digital Telephone  
(DKT with or without DKT  
ADM or PDIU-DI)  
Digital, one for each  
Base Unit (Circuits 1~8)  
PDKU2 (Circuits 1~8)  
KCDU (Circuits 1~4)  
8
8
1
1
16  
16  
2
Stand-alone Data  
Interface Unit  
(PDIU-DS)  
Digital, one for each  
PDIU-DS  
Base Unit (Circuits 1~8)  
PDKU2 (Circuits 1~8)  
KCDU (Circuits 1~4)  
Digital Direct Station Digital, one for each  
Selection Console  
(DDSS)  
Base Unit (Circuit 8)  
PDKU (Circuit 8)  
DDSS  
Digital Door  
Phone/Lock Control DDCB  
Unit (DDCB)  
Digital, one for each  
Base Unit (Circuit 5)  
PDKU (Circuit 1)  
or first  
2
KCDU (Circuit 1)  
Electronic Telephone Electronic, one for  
PEKU (Circuits 1~8)  
PESU (Circuit 5~8)  
0
0
8
1
(EKT)  
each EKT  
Electronic Direct  
Station Selection  
Console (HDSS)  
Electronic, two for the PEKU (Circuits 7 and 8)  
HDSS  
Conference Amplifier Electronic, two for the PEKU (Circuits 6 and 7)  
0
4
1
amplifier  
PESU (Circuits 6 and 7)  
Single-wire-pair  
Devices:  
• Standard Telephone mail devices may  
• Voice Mail Device require more than one  
Standard, one for  
each device (voice  
KSTU (Circuits 1~4)  
PSTU (Circuits 1~8)  
PESU (Circuits 1~2)  
12  
• Facsimile Machine circuit)  
• Modem  
• Dictation Equipment  
Alternate  
Standard or  
KSTU (Circuit 4)  
1
1
Background Music  
Source  
Electronic, one for the PEKU (Circuit 3)  
source  
PESU (Circuit 8)  
PSTU (Circuit 4)  
*May require interface transformer, see Section 100-816-207.  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION  
SECTION 100-816-203  
MARCH 1993  
NOTE:  
The KCDU cannot support a DDSS console.  
• Digital Door Phone/Lock Control Box  
(DDCB): Each DDCB requires one circuit.  
DDCBs can only connect to Circuits 3 and 4  
(Ports 02 and 03) in the STRATA DK8 Key  
ServiceUnitorCircuit5(Port04)intheSTRATA  
DK16BaseKeyServiceUnit,andCircuit1(Port  
12) on either the PDKU or KCDU (STRATA  
DK16).  
A maximum of two QCDU PCBs may be  
installed in the STRATA DK8.  
3.22 The STRATA DK16 Base Key Service Unit  
and the PDKU PCB each provide eight digital  
telephone circuits. The KCDU PCB provides four.  
NOTE:  
A maximum of two KCDU PCBs may be  
installed in the STRATA DK16. If a KCDU is  
installed, no other type of station PCB can be  
installed in the STRATA DK16.  
3.30 Electronic Telephone Circuit Connec-  
tions (STRATA DK16 Only)  
3.31 There are no electronic telephone circuits in  
the Base Key Service Unit, and none can be  
addedtoit. However, eitherthePEKUPCB, which  
has eight electronic telephone circuits, or the  
PESU, which has four electronic telephone cir-  
cuits, can be installed in the Expansion Key Ser-  
vice Unit. The following devices can be connected  
to electronic telephone circuits.  
3.23 The following devices can be connected to  
digital telephone circuits:  
Digital Telephones (2000- and 1000-series):  
Each digital telephone requires one circuit, and  
each digital telephone circuit can support a  
digital telephone.  
Stand-alone Data Interface Units (PDIU-DS):  
Each PDIU-DS requires one circuit. Any digital  
telephonecircuit,exceptforCircuit8onaPDKU1  
(STRATA DK16), can support a PDIU-DS (see  
Note 1).  
Electronic Telephones (6500-, 6000-, 3000-,  
2000-series): An electronic telephone can be  
connected to any electronic telephone circuit.  
One electronic telephone circuit is required per  
electronic telephone.  
• Electronic Direct Station Selection Console  
(HDSS):ThesystemwillsupportonlyoneHDSS  
console. The console must be connected to  
both Circuits 7 and 8 on the PEKU. The PESU  
will not support an HDSS Console.  
• Alternate Background Music Source: The  
system will support an alternate Background  
Music source which can be heard over digital  
andelectronictelephonespeakersandexternal  
page speakers. This source can be connected  
to either Circuit 3 on a PEKU, Circuit 8 on a  
PESU, or Circuit 4 on a KSTU or PSTU PCB.  
• ConferenceAmplifier:AnamplifierfortwoCO  
line conferencing can be connected to Circuits  
6 and 7 (Ports 17 and 18) on a PEKU or PESU.  
NOTES:  
1. There are two versions of the PDKU:  
PDKU1 and PDKU2. The versions are  
identical, except that Circuits 1 ~ 8 on the  
PDKU2 can each support PDIU-DSs/  
PDIU-DI, while only Circuits 1 ~ 7 on a  
PDKU1 can support PDIU-DSs or PDIU-  
DIs. Also, PDIU1 does not support 2000-  
seriesdigitaltelephonecontinuousDTMF  
tones.  
2. TheIntegratedDataInterfaceUnit(PDIU-  
DI/PDIU-DI2) and the Add-on Module  
(ADM) do not require a dedicated circuit.  
They share a circuit with the telephone.  
3. Only one option (PDIU-DI2 or ADM) can  
be installed on a 2000-series digital tele-  
phone.  
3.40 Standard Telephone Circuit Options  
3.41Inadditiontosupportingstandardtelephones,  
each of the standard telephone circuits can sup-  
port any one of a number of single-wire-pair de-  
vices,includingvoicemail/AutoAttendantdevices  
and modems. The QSTU, which can be installed  
in the STRATA DK8 Key Service Unit, has two  
• Digital Direct Station Selection Console  
(DDSS): (available with STRATA DK16 only)  
EachDDSSConsolerequiresonecircuit. DDSS  
Consoles can connect only to Circuit 8 in the  
Base Key Service Unit and Circuit 8 on a PDKU.  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION  
SECTION 100-816-203  
MARCH 1993  
standard telephone circuits. The KSTU, which can  
be installed in the STRATA DK16 Base Key Ser-  
vice Unit, has four standard telephone circuits; the  
PSTU, which can be installed in the DK16 Expan-  
sion Key Service Unit, has eight; and the PESU,  
which can also be installed in the DK16 Expansion  
Unit, has two (Circuits 1 and 2).  
• Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (HVSU2 or  
HVSU/HVSI): An electronic telephone must be  
upgraded with the HVSU2 subassembly or the  
combined HVSU/HVSI subassemblies to re-  
ceive Off-hook Call Announce.  
NOTE:  
A PEKU or PESU PCB that supports elec-  
tronic telephones that must receive Off-hook  
Call Announce must be equipped with an  
EOCU.  
4 TELEPHONE UPGRADES  
4.00 Digital and Electronic telephones can be  
upgraded for a number of features; there are no  
upgrades for standard telephones. Each of these  
upgrades shares a circuit with the telephone that it  
is connected to and is not considered a station.  
• LoudRingingBell/HeadsetUpgrade(HHEU):  
An electronic telephone can be upgraded with  
anHHEUtoprovideadualinterfacefortheLoud  
Ringing Bell feature and a headset simulta-  
neously.  
4.10 Digital Telephone Upgrades  
4.11 Digital telephones can be upgraded with the  
following subassemblies:  
5 CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES  
• IntegratedDataInterfaceUnit(PDIU-DI/PDIU-  
DI2): A Digital telephone can be upgraded with  
a PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2 to provide the telephone  
with data switching capabilities. 2000-series  
DigitalTelephonesusethePDIU-DI2,and1000-  
series Digital Telephones use the PDIU-DI.  
PDIU-DI2 cannot be installed on a telephone if  
ADM is installed.  
5.00Thefollowingprovidesanexamplesofhowto  
configure a STRATA DK8.  
5.10 Strata DK8 - Example 1 (Smalll Retail  
Store)  
5.11 Customer Requirements. A store needs  
two CO lines and four digital telephones.  
• Add-on Module (ADM): A 2000-series Digital  
Telephone can be upgraded with an ADM to  
provide 20 Direct Station Selection buttons on  
STRATADK16,or10DSSbuttons,8 speeddial  
buttons, one night transfer button and one all  
call page button on STRATA DK8. The 1000-  
seriesDigitalTelephonemodelscannotsupport  
ADMs. ADM cannot be installed on a telephone  
if PDIU-DI2 is installed.  
• Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (DVSU): A  
Digital telephone that must receive Off-hook  
Call Announce must be upgraded with a DVSU.  
• LoudRingingBell/HeadsetUpgrade(HHEU):  
A digital telephone can be upgraded with an  
HHEU to provide a dual interface for the Loud  
Ringing Bell feature and/or a headset. (Simulta-  
neously with PDIU-DI2 or ADM).  
5.12 Analysis. The store's system hardware re-  
quirements are as follows:  
• Two CO line circuits for the CO lines.  
• Four digital telephone circuits for the digital  
telephones.  
5.13 Conclusion. A standard Key Service Unit  
would be adequate in this case. The unit's stan-  
dard four digital telephone circuits and two CO line  
circuitscouldeasilyaccommodatethestore'sneeds  
and allow for future expansion.  
5.20 Strata DK8 - Example 2 (Home/Office)  
5.21CustomerRequirements.Inadditiontothree  
CO lines, a home/office needs five digital tele-  
phones (three of which will have PDIU-DIs), a  
modem, a door phone, one facsimilie machine,  
Music-on-hold and Telephone Set Background  
Music.  
4.20 Electronic Telephone Upgrades  
4.21 On STRATA DK16, electronic telephones  
can be upgraded with the following subassem-  
blies:  
5.22Analysis.Thecustomer'srequirementscould  
be broken down as follows:  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION  
SECTION 100-816-203  
MARCH 1993  
3 CO line circuits for the three CO lines  
7 digital telephone circuits  
5.50 Strata DK16 - Example 2 (Office/Ware-  
house)  
one for each of the five digital telephones;  
the PDIU-DIs do not require dedicated cir-  
cuits.  
one for a digital door phone/lock control unit  
to support a door phone  
5.51 Customer Requirements. In addition to five  
CO lines, a small office-warehouse facility needs  
11 digital telephones (three of which will have  
PDIU-DIs), two PDIU-DSs, a modem, a facsimile  
machine, conference capability, a door phone,  
one standard telephone, Music-on-hold, and an  
amplifier/speaker for paging.  
one for the PDIU-DS connected to the mo-  
dem  
2 standard telephone circuits  
one for the modem  
one for the facsimilie machine  
A music source for Music-on-hold and Back-  
ground music can be connected to the Key  
Service Unit MOH RCA jacks.  
5.52Analysis.Thecustomer'srequirementscould  
be broken down as follows:  
14 digital telephone circuits  
oneforeachofthe11digitaltelephones;the  
PDIU-DIs do not require dedicated circuits.  
one for each of the two PDIU-DSs  
one for a digital door phone/lock control unit  
to support a door phone  
5.23 Conclusion. Several optional PCBs in addi-  
tiontotheKeyServiceunitwouldbeneededforthe  
application. Two CO line circuits and four digital  
telephone circuits would be provided by the KSU.  
The third CO line circuit, as well as two digital  
telephone circuits would be provided by an op-  
tional QCDU. A second QCDU would be neces-  
sary to provide the seventh digital telephone cir-  
cuit. An optional QSTU would provide the two  
standard telephone circuits. An optional QRCU  
wouldbeneededfortheDual-toneMulti-frequency  
(DTMF) tones generated by the devices (modem  
andfacsimiliemachine)connectedtothestandard  
telephone lines.  
3 standard telephone circuits  
one for the modem  
one for the facsimile machine  
one for the standard telephone  
A music source for Music-on-hold and an ampli-  
fier/speaker for paging could both be connected  
to the Key Service Unit RCA jacks.  
A K4RCU would be needed for the Dual-tone  
Multi-frequency(DTMF)tonesgeneratedbythe  
devices connected to the standard telephone  
circuits.  
A PCOU would be needed for the fifth CO line.  
5.30Thefollowingprovidesanexamplesofhowto  
configure a STRATA DK16.  
5.53 Conclusion. An Expansion Key Service Unit  
in addition to the Base Key Service Unit would be  
needed for this application. The three standard  
telephone circuits could be contained on the op-  
tional KSTU PCB in the Base Unit. However, a  
PDKU installed in the Expansion Unit would be  
required for six of the 14 digital telephone circuits.  
The Expansion Unit would also be needed for the  
PCOU. The optional K4RCU, along with the music  
source and the page/amplifier, as noted earlier,  
could be connected to the Base Unit.  
5.40 Strata DK16 - Example 1 (Bank)  
5.41CustomerRequirements.Abankneedstwo  
CO lines and six digital telephones (three of which  
must be equipped with a PDIU-DI). It also wants to  
connect a printer to a PDIU-DS.  
5.42 Analysis. The bank's system hardware re-  
quirements are as follows:  
• Two CO line circuits for the two CO lines.  
• Seven digital telephone circuits. Six for tele-  
phones and one for the PDIU-DS. (The  
PDIU-DIs do not require a dedicated circuit.)  
6 CONFIGURATION WORKSHEETS  
5.43 Conclusion. A standard Base Key Service  
Unit would be adequate in this case. The unit's  
standard eight digital telephone circuits and four  
CO line circuits could easily accommodate the  
bank's needs.  
6.00 Worksheets are provided in this chapter to  
help configure the system.  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION  
SECTION 100-816-203  
MARCH 1993  
DK8 WORKSHEET 1, STATION AND CO LINE TOTALS  
1. DIGITAL PORTS (CIRCUITS)  
Device  
Quantity  
_____  
x
Ports/Per  
=
=
=
=
Ports Used  
___________  
__________  
__________  
DDCBs (2 max.)  
PDIU-DSs (8 max.)  
X
X
X
1
1
1
_____  
Digital Telephones (with or  
without PDIU-DIs or ADMs)  
(8 max.)  
_____  
Total Digital Ports  
(8 max.)  
=
__________  
2. STANDARD PORTS (CIRCUITS)  
Device  
Quantity  
x
Ports/Per  
=
Ports Used  
Maximum of 2 items  
total, including Standard  
Telephones:  
Standard Telephones  
or  
Other Devices:  
_____  
_____  
X
1
=
__________  
–Voice Mail  
–Auto Attendant  
–BGM Source  
–Fax  
–Modem  
X
1
=
=
__________  
__________  
Total Standard Ports  
(2 maximum)  
3. CO LINES  
Number of CO lines required? _______  
(Maximum of 4)  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION  
SECTION 100-816-203  
MARCH 1993  
DK8 WORKSHEET 2, KEY SERVICE UNIT AND PCBs  
1. From Worksheet 1 enter the number of required ports (circuits) and lines.  
Digital Ports:  
Standard Ports:  
CO Lines:  
_____ (8 max)  
_____ (2 max)  
_____ (4 max)  
NOTE: The maximum number of digital ports is 8, and standard ports is 2. The  
maximum number of CO lines is four.  
2. Cross off the printed circuit boards (PCBs)—in addition to the standard Base Key Service Unit lines and  
ports— needed to support the ports and lines entered in Step 1 of this worksheet.  
KSU Interfaces (built-in)  
2 CO lines, 4 digital ports  
KSU Optional Unit Station and Line PCBs  
QCDU (1 CO line and  
2 digital ports):  
_____  
two max.  
one max.  
QSTU (2 standard ports):  
_____  
3. Refer to Worksheet 3 to determine option and peripheral requirements.  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION  
SECTION 100-816-203  
MARCH 1993  
DK8 WORKSHEET 3, PERIPHERALS AND UPGRADES  
1. BASE UNIT PERIPHERALS  
Battery Backup Interface: Yes or No _____  
One or two HPFB batteries can be connected to a backup battery interface (Standard on DK8) to provide  
backup battery backup if there is a power failure. (Connecting cable is included. 1-HPFB for .5 ~ 1 hour  
backup; 2-HPFBs for 1.5 ~ 2 hours backup.)  
QRCU: Yes or No _____  
The QRCU is required to interpret Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) tones from standard telephones, Voice  
Mail, Auto Attendant, and DISA CO circuits, or if the Auto Busy Redial (ABR) feature is required.  
Music-on-hold/Background Music Source Interface: Yes or No _____  
A music source can be connected to this interface (Standard on DK8) to provide Music-on-hold to CO lines  
and stations on hold, and to provide Background Music to station speakers and external page speakers.  
Power Failure Transfer Interface: Yes or No _____  
A standard telephone can be connected to this interface to provide connection to a CO line if there is a power  
failure. PFT interface is standard on DK8; one customer-supplied standard telephone is required.  
600 ohm page Interface (Standard on DK8): Yes or No _____  
This interface connects with customer-supplied speakers and amplifiers for paging (or Toshiba HESB) and  
Background Music applications.  
QSMU: Yes or No _____  
A customer-supplied Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) printer, or Remote Maintenance Terminal  
(TTY) or modem.  
PPTC: Yes or No _____  
Modular adaptor required for interface to SMDR device or Maintenance Terminal or Modem.  
2. TELEPHONE UPGRADES (All upgrades share the telephone port and do not require separate ports.)  
Add-on Module (ADM): Total _____  
2000-series digital telephones can be equipped with an Add-on Module to provide 10 Direct Station Selection  
buttons, autodial buttons, all call page, and night transfer (if PDIU-DI2 is installed, ADM cannot be installed).  
DVSU: Total _____  
One DVSU is required for each digital telephone that must receive Off-hook Call Announce.  
HESC-65A: Total _____  
One HESC-65A modular connecting cable is required to connect the HESB to the HHEU in each telephone  
requiring the Loud Ringing Bell feature. See HHEU and HESB.  
HHEU: Total _____  
One HHEU must be installed in each digital telephone that supports a headset or connects to an HESB for  
the Loud Ringing Bell feature. See HESC-65A.  
PDIU-DI2: Total_____ for 2000-series Digital Telephones;  
(If ADM is installed, PDIU-DI2 cannot be installed).  
PDIU-D1: Total_____ for 1000-series Digital Telephones  
Digital telephones must be equipped with a PDIU-DI2 or a PDIU-DI to transmit and receive voice and data  
calls.  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION  
SECTION 100-816-203  
MARCH 1993  
DK8 WORKSHEET 3, PERIPHERALS AND UPGRADES (continued)  
Miscellaneous Peripherals  
HESB (Amplifier/Speaker): Total _____  
1. One HESB and HHEU is required for each digital telephone with the Loud Ringing Bell feature.  
2. One HESB is optional to provide single-zone external page connected to the KSU's 600 ohm external  
page output. (Customer-supplied amplifiers/speakers may be used in place of the HESB.)  
3. One HESB is optional to provide a talkback amplifier/page speaker connected to the KSU's 600 ohm  
external page output. (Customer-supplied amplifiers/speakers may be used in place of the HESB.) Talkback  
requires MDFB also.  
DDCB/MDFB (Door Phone): Total DDCBs _____ Total MDFBs _____  
The MDFB plugs into the DDCB to provide a door phone. Each DDCB can support up to three MDFBs; a  
maximum of two DDCBs and 6 MDFBs can be connected to the system. Each DDCB requires a digital  
telephone circuit. The MDFB may also be connected to the HESB amplifier/speaker to provide page  
talkback.  
NOTE:  
Worksheet 4, System Power Check, is not required for DK8. The DK8 power supply will support any DK8  
maximum configuration.  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION  
SECTION 100-816-203  
MARCH 1993  
DK16 WORKSHEET 1, STATION AND CO LINE TOTALS  
1. DIGITAL PORTS (CIRCUITS)  
Device  
Quantity  
x
Ports/Per  
=
Ports Used  
DDSS Consoles (2 max.)  
DDCBs (2 max.)  
_____  
_____  
_____  
_____  
X
X
X
X
1
1
1
1
=
=
=
=
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
PDIU-DSs (16 max.)  
Digital Telephones (with or  
without PDIU-DIs or ADMs)  
(16 max.  
Total Digital Ports  
(16 max.)  
=
__________  
2. ELECTRONIC PORTS (CIRCUITS)  
Device  
Quantity  
_____  
x
Ports/Per  
=
Ports Used  
HDSS Console (1 max.)  
Alternate BGM Source (1 max.) _____  
Conference Amplifier (1 max.) _____  
Electronic Telephones  
(8 max.)  
X
X
X
X
2
1
2
1
=
=
=
=
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
_____  
Total Electronic Ports  
(8 max.)  
=
__________  
3. STANDARD PORTS (CIRCUITS)  
Device  
Quantity  
x
Ports/Per  
=
Ports Used  
Maximum of 12 items  
total, including Standard  
Telephones:  
Standard Telephones  
or  
_____  
X
1
=
__________  
Other Devices:  
–Voice Mail  
_____  
_____  
_____  
_____  
X
X
X
X
1
1
1
1
=
=
=
=
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
–Auto Attendant  
–Fax  
–Modem  
–Alternate Background  
Music (BGM) Source  
_____  
X
1
=
=
__________  
__________  
Total Standard Ports  
(12 maximum)  
4. CO LINES  
Number of CO lines required? _______  
(8 maximum)  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION  
SECTION 100-816-203  
MARCH 1993  
DK16 WORKSHEET 2, KEY SERVICE UNIT AND PCBs  
1. From Worksheet 1 enter the number of required ports (circuits) and lines.  
Digital Ports:  
Electronic Ports:  
Standard Ports:  
CO Lines:  
_____  
_____  
_____  
_____  
NOTE: The maximum number of combined digital, electronic, and standard ports  
is 20. The maximum number of CO lines is eight.  
2. Cross off the printed circuit boards (PCBs)—in addition to the standard Base Key Service Unit lines and  
ports— needed to support the ports and lines entered in Step 1 of this worksheet.  
Base Unit Interfaces/PCBs  
Base Unit (4 CO lines, 8 digital ports):  
KSTU (4 standard ports):  
X
built-in  
_____  
one max.  
Expansion Unit Station and line PCBs  
KCDU (2 CO lines and  
4 digital ports):  
_____  
two max.  
(KCDU cannot be installed  
with any other type of  
- or -  
station PCB or PCOU PCB)  
PDKU (8 digital ports):  
- or -  
PEKU (8 electronic ports):  
- or -  
PSTU (8 standard ports):  
- or -  
_____  
_____  
_____  
one max.  
one max.  
one max.  
PESU (2 standard ports and  
(4 electronic ports):  
_____  
_____  
one max.  
one max.  
PCOU (4 CO lines):  
(PCOU can be installed with  
PDKU, PEKU, PESU, or  
PSTU, but not with KCDU)  
NOTES:  
1. The Base Unit by can only support up to 12 stations (8 digital and 4 standard)  
and four CO lines.  
2. The Expansion Unit can support up to eight stations and four CO lines.  
3. If installing two DDCBs, a PDKU or a KCDU is required to support the second  
DDCB—no matter what the total number of digital ports.  
4. If installing two DDSS Consoles, a PDKU is required to support the second  
DDSS Console—no matter the total number of digital ports. (KCDU does not  
support DDSS.)  
3. Refer to Worksheet 3 to determine option and peripheral requirements.  
4. Refer to Worksheet 4 to determine the amount of power used by the system.  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION  
SECTION 100-816-203  
MARCH 1993  
DK16 WORKSHEET 3, PERIPHERALS AND UPGRADES  
1. BASE UNIT PERIPHERALS  
Battery Backup Interface: Yes or No _____  
Two 12-volt customer-supplied batteries can be connected to this interface to provide backup battery backup  
if there is a power failure. See PBTC-3M.  
K4RCU: Yes or No _____  
The K4RCU is required to interpret Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) tones from standard telephones, Voice  
Mail, Auto Attendant, and DISA CO circuits.  
Music-on-hold/Background Music Source Interface: Yes or No _____  
A music source can be connected to this interface (Standard on DK16) to provide Music-on-hold to CO lines  
and stations on hold, and to provide Background Music to station speakers and external page speakers.  
Alternate Background Music Source: Yes or No _____ (see Worksheet 1)  
Power Failure Transfer Interface: Yes or No _____  
A standard telephone can be connected to this interface to provide connection to a CO line if there is a power  
failure. PFT interface is standard on DK16; one customer-supplied standard telephone is required.  
PBTC-3M: Yes or No _____  
One PBTC-3M cable is required for each system that requires battery backup. See Battery Backup Interface.  
600 ohm page interface (Standard on DK16): Yes or No _____  
This interface connects with customer-supplied speakers and amplifiers (or Toshiba HESB) for paging and  
Background Music applications.  
Night Bell: Yes or No _____  
A customer supplied night ringing bell can be installed and controlled by the Base Unit relay control (Standard  
on DK16).  
2. EXPANSION UNIT PERIPHERAL PCB  
PIOU or PIOUS: If yes, which one _____  
See Table 3-D.  
PPTC: One or Two _____  
Modular adaptor, required for PIOU/PIOUS interface to SMDR device or local maintenance terminal.  
3. TELEPHONE UPGRADES (All upgrades share the telephone port and do not require separate ports.)  
Add-on Module: Total _____  
2000-series digital telephones can be equipped with an Add-on Module to provide 20 Direct Station Selection  
buttons. (If PDIU-DI2 is installed, Add-on Module cannot be installed.)  
DVSU: Total _____  
One DVSU is required for each digital telephone that must receive Off-hook Call Announce.  
HESC-65A: Total _____  
One HESC-65A modular connecting cable is required to connect the HESB to the HHEU in each telephone  
requiring the Loud Ringing Bell feature. See HHEU and HESB.  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION  
SECTION 100-816-203  
MARCH 1993  
DK16 WORKSHEET 3, PERIPHERALS AND UPGRADES (continued)  
HHEU: Total _____  
One HHEU must be installed in each digital and electronic telephone that supports a headset or connects to  
an HESB for the Loud Ringing Bell feature. See HESC-65A.  
HVSU2 or Combined HVSU/HVSI: Total _____  
Electronic telephones must be equipped with either the HVSU2 assembly or the combined HVSU and HVSIs  
assemblies to receive Off-hook Call Announce. See EOCU under Miscellaneous Peripherals.  
PDIU-DI2: Total_____ for 2000-series Digital Telephones;  
PDIU-D1: Total_____ for 1000-series Digital Telephones  
Digital telephones must be equipped with a PDIU-DI2 or a PDIU-DI to transmit and receive voice and data  
calls. (If Add-on module is installed, then PDIU-DI2 cannot be installed.)  
Miscellaneous Peripherals  
DPFT: Yes or No_____  
The DPFT provides a means to connect eight selected CO lines to standard telephones if there is a power  
failure. (PSTU must be installed in Expansion Unit)  
EOCU: Yes or No _____  
An EOCU must be installed on a PEKU or PESU that is connected to electronic telephones which are  
equipped to receive Off-hook Call Announce. See HVSU2 and HVSU/HVSI in Telephone Upgrades.  
HESB (Amplifier/Speaker): Total _____  
1. One HESB and HHEU is required for each digital and electronic telephone with the Loud Ringing Bell  
feature.  
2. One HESB is optional to provide single-zone external page connected to the Base Unit's 600 ohm exter-  
nal page output. (Customer-supplied amplifiers/speakers may be used in place of the HESB.)  
3. One HESB is optional to provide a talkback amplifier/page speaker connected to the Base Unit's 600 ohm  
external page output. (Customer-supplied amplifiers/speakers may be used in place of the HESB.) Talkback  
for HESB requires an MDFB.  
MDFB (Door Phone): Total _____  
The MDFB plugs into the DDCB to provide a door phone. Each DDCB can support up to three MDFBs; a  
maximum of two DDCBs can be connected to the system. Each DDCB requires a Digital Telephone circuit.  
The MDFB may also be connected to the HESB amplifier/speaker to provide page talkback.  
3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION  
SECTION 100-816-203  
MARCH 1993  
DK16 WORKSHEET 4, SYSTEM POWER CHECK  
Total Power Used:  
Equipment  
Quantity  
Power Used  
Equipment Type:  
X
=
Ports Used  
(Factor)  
2000- and 1000-series digital telephone  
2000-series electronic telephone  
3000-series electronic telephone  
6000-series electronic telephone  
6005-series electronic telephone  
6500-series electronic telephone  
DDSS/HDSS console*  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
(1.0)  
(2.0)  
(2.5)  
(2.0)  
(2.0)  
(1.0)  
(0.8)  
(0.5)  
(0.8)  
(1.0)  
(0.4)  
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
PDIU-DI2 and PDIU-DI  
PDIU-DS  
Standard telephone  
Add-on Module  
Total Power Used  
* All series.  
Power Criteria:  
Total Power Used: Must be greater than zero.  
Power Supplied  
—
—
=
Configuration Power Check:  
24.8  
Power Supplied  
Total Power Used  
Must be Greater than Zero  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES  
DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS  
INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-204  
MARCH 1993  
INSTALLATION  
CHAPTER FOUR  
DK8 KSU AND PCB INSTALLATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-204  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
SUBJECT  
PARAGRAPH  
PAGE  
PART I  
DK8 KSU INSTALLATION ................................................................................... 4-1  
GENERAL .............................................................................................................. 4-1  
KEY SERVICE UNIT MOUNTING ......................................................................... 4-1  
Mounting Surface Considerations ...................................................................... 4-1  
Mounting Preparation ......................................................................................... 4-1  
Mounting the Key Service Unit ........................................................................... 4-4  
Installing the Reserve Power Battery and Charger (HPFB) ................................ 4-4  
POWER SUPPLY TEST REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT .................................. 4-5  
Power Supply Removal ...................................................................................... 4-5  
Power Supply Replacement ............................................................................... 4-5  
DK8 POWER FAILURE EMERGENCY TRANSFER OPTION ............................... 4-5  
DK8 Power Failure Emergency Transfer Installation .......................................... 4-5  
DK8 Power Failure Emergency Transfer Test..................................................... 4-5  
1
2
2.00  
2.10  
2.20  
2.30  
3
3.10  
3.20  
4
4.10  
4.20  
PART II  
DK8 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD INSTALLATION ............................................... 4-9  
GENERAL .............................................................................................................. 4-9  
PCB INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS ............................................................ 4-9  
KSU Option PCBs .............................................................................................. 4-9  
PCB Option Considerations................................................................................ 4-9  
PCB Installation/Power Supply Considerations................................................... 4-9  
CO LINE/DIGITAL TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT (QCDU) ............................... 4-9  
General ............................................................................................................... 4-9  
QCDU Configuration........................................................................................... 4-11  
QCDU Installation Procedure ............................................................................. 4-11  
QCDU Wiring ...................................................................................................... 4-12  
QCDU Programming Overview .......................................................................... 4-13  
STANDARD TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT (QSTU).......................................... 4-13  
General ............................................................................................................... 4-13  
QSTU Configuration ........................................................................................... 4-13  
QSTU Installation Procedure.............................................................................. 4-13  
QSTU Wiring ...................................................................................................... 4-13  
QSTU Programming Overview ........................................................................... 4-13  
DTMF RECEIVER/ABR TONE DETECTOR UNIT (QRCU) ................................... 4-13  
General ............................................................................................................... 4-13  
QRCU Configuration........................................................................................... 4-14  
QRCU Installation Procedure ............................................................................. 4-14  
QRCU Wiring ...................................................................................................... 4-15  
QRCU Programming Overview .......................................................................... 4-15  
CONFERENCE CIRCUITS (QCNU) ...................................................................... 4-15  
General ............................................................................................................... 4-15  
QCNU Configuration........................................................................................... 4-15  
QCNU Installation Procedure ............................................................................. 4-15  
QCNU Wiring ...................................................................................................... 4-15  
5
6
6.10  
6.20  
6.30  
7
7.00  
7.10  
7.20  
7.30  
7.40  
8
8.00  
8.10  
8.20  
8.30  
8.40  
9
9.00  
9.10  
9.20  
9.30  
9.40  
10  
10.00  
10.10  
10.20  
10.30  
4-i  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-204  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)  
SUBJECT  
PARAGRAPH  
PAGE  
10.40  
11  
QCNU Programming Overview .......................................................................... 4-15  
OPTION INTERFACE UNIT (QSMU)..................................................................... 4-16  
General ............................................................................................................... 4-16  
QSMU Hardware Options................................................................................... 4-16  
QSMU Configuration .......................................................................................... 4-16  
QSMU Installation Procedure ............................................................................. 4-16  
QSMU Wiring...................................................................................................... 4-17  
QSMU Programming Overview .......................................................................... 4-17  
Device Communication Parameters ................................................................... 4-17  
BUILT-IN CO LINE, DIGITAL TELEPHONE AND OTHER CIRCUITS ................... 4-17  
General ............................................................................................................... 4-17  
Built-in CO Line Circuits ..................................................................................... 4-17  
Built-In Digital Telephone Circuits ...................................................................... 4-17  
KSU Motherboard CO Line/Digital Station Circuit Wiring ................................... 4-17  
Power Failure Telephone Installation ................................................................. 4-17  
Music-On-Hold (MOH)/Background Music (BGM) Source Connection ............... 4-17  
External Page Output Connection ...................................................................... 4-17  
11.00  
11.10  
11.20  
11.30  
11.40  
11.50  
11.60  
12  
12.00  
12.10  
12.20  
12.30  
12.40  
12.50  
12.60  
FIGURE LIST  
FIGURE  
4-1  
4-2  
4-3  
4-4  
TITLE  
PAGE  
DK8 KEY SERVICE UNIT WALL MOUNT METHOD ............................................. 4-1  
DK8 DIMENSIONS AND SCREW LOCATIONS ..................................................... 4-2  
DK8 SIDE VIEW DIMENSION AND PLUG/JACK LOCATIONS ............................. 4-3  
DK8 CABLING DIAGRAM ...................................................................................... 4-6  
DK8 BASE UNIT JACKS AND CONNECTORS...................................................... 4-7  
DK8 KEY SERVICE UNIT POWER FAILURE TRANSFER (PFT)  
4-5  
4-6  
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ............................................................................................... 4-8  
DK8 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD INSTALLATION................................................. 4-10  
QCDU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS ........................................ 4-11  
MODULAR JACK COVER REMOVAL AND STORAGE......................................... 4-12  
QSTU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS ......................................... 4-14  
QRCU INTERFACE CONNECTORS ..................................................................... 4-15  
QCNU INTERFACE CONNECTORS ..................................................................... 4-16  
QSMU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS ........................................ 4-16  
4-7  
4-8  
4-9  
4-10  
4-11  
4-12  
4-13  
4-ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-204  
MARCH 1993  
secure the hard board to the wall, making  
certain that screws are aligned with studs.  
PART I. KSU INSTALLATION  
1 GENERAL  
2.10 Mounting Preparation  
1.00 This chapter provides the instructions nec-  
essary to mount the STRATA DK8 Key Service  
Unit. Instructions are also provided on how to  
remove and replace the power supply.  
1) Loosen the screws on the front cover of the  
KeyServiceUnit,andremovethecover(Figure  
4-2).  
2 KEY SERVICE UNIT MOUNTING  
2.00 Mounting Surface Considerations  
2) Move the SW1 RAM Storage Battery jumper  
plug strap on the motherboard to the ON  
position (Figure 4-5).  
2.01 The Key Service Unit (KSU) is designed to be  
mounted on a wall or other vertical surface. It is  
recommended to use the method shown in Figure  
4-1 (see Note). See Figure 4-2 for DK8 KSU  
physical dimensions.  
3) IftheDK8islessthanonemilefromthecentral  
office (or PBX), set the CO line PAD switches,  
SW101 and SW201, to the PAD position to  
provide a 3db level loss to avoid excessive  
loudness.  
NOTE:  
Install screws first to the hard board, and then  
4) Install all optional PCBs per Paragraph 5.  
STUD  
PLASTER  
BOARD  
HARD BOARD  
(1/4 INCH PLYWOOD)  
DK8 KSU  
FIGURE 4-1  
DK8 KEY SERVICE UNIT WALL MOUNT METHOD  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-204  
MARCH 1993  
10"  
WALL  
MOUNT  
SCREW  
WALL  
MOUNT  
SCREW  
6.875"  
FRONT  
COVER  
SCREW  
FRONT  
COVER  
SCREW  
AC  
DC  
16.375"  
FRONT  
COVER  
SCREW  
FRONT  
COVER  
SCREW  
WALL MOUNT  
SCREW  
WALL MOUNT  
SCREW  
6.75"  
FIGURE 4-2  
DK8 DIMENSIONS AND SCREW LOCATIONS  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-204  
MARCH 1993  
3"  
TIE-WRAP  
HOLDER  
TIE-WRAP  
HOLDER  
RESERVE BATTERY  
(HPFB) CONNECTOR  
TO HPFB  
FG  
SCREW  
BATT  
AC POWER  
CORD AND  
PLUG 4' 7"  
DC ON/OFF  
POWER SWITCH  
—
O
6-WIRE SMDR/TTY  
MODULAR JACK  
SMDR/  
TTY  
STATION TIP/RING  
AMPHENOL 25-PAIR  
JACK (FEMALE)  
RJ11 CO LINE JACKS  
CO4  
CO2  
CO1  
CO3  
PFT  
TIE WRAP  
SUPPLIED WITH  
DK8 TO HOLD  
AMPHENOL  
RJ11 POWER FAILURE  
TRANSFER JACK  
CONNECTOR  
TIE-WRAP HOLDER  
LEFT SIDE VIEW  
RIGHT SIDE VIEW  
FIGURE 4-3  
DK8 SIDE VIEW DIMENSION AND PLUG/JACK LOCATIONS  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-204  
MARCH 1993  
2.20 Mounting the Key Service Unit  
2.30 Installing the Reserve Power Battery  
and Charger (HPFB) (Figure 4-4)  
1) Make sure the power supply switch is turned  
OFF.  
1) Place the HPFU directly above the DK8 KSU.  
2) Mark the location of the two screw holes, then  
drill holes.  
2) Place the Key Service Unit on the desired  
locationonthemountingsurfaceandmarkthe  
location of the four screw holes (there is one  
on each corner). See Figures 4-1 and 4-2.  
3) Screwthetwoscrewstwo-thirdsintothemount-  
ing surface.  
4) HangtheHFPUonthescrewsthentightenthe  
screws into the mounting surface.  
NOTE:  
Make sure the location of the Key Service  
Unit meets the minimum clearance require-  
ments specified in Figure 2-1 in Chapter 2.  
5) Plug the first HPFU connector into BATT con-  
nector on the right side of the KSU.  
6) Connect a ground wire from the HPFB "FG"  
screw to the DK8 QPSU8 screw labeled  
"HPFB6." The ground wire can be fed through  
the opening by the AC power cord (see Figure  
4-3).  
3) Drill holes on these marks.  
4) Securescrewsapproximatelytwothirdsofthe  
way into the top two holes on the mounting  
surface.  
NOTE:  
5) Hang the unit from the top two screws and  
then secure the screws completely into the  
mounting surface.  
The DK8 should be plugged into AC power  
and the DC power switch should be turned  
on. The HFPU will not start to operate if AC  
power is not available during the initial instal-  
lation.  
6) Finish securing the unit to the mounting sur-  
face by completely screwing the bottom two  
screws into the wall.  
7) The 24V LED on the HPFU should light. If it  
does not light, press the battery OFF switch  
withapencilpointorothersmall-tippedobject.  
7) Ground system according to Chapter 2, Para-  
graph 4.  
8) Dress and tie-wrap the HPFU cables per Fig-  
ure 4-4.  
8) Connect applicable wiring (modular CO line  
cords,25-pairamphenolconnectorcable,etc.)  
to the Key Service Unit. Route the wiring as  
shown in Figure 4-4, and then fasten wiring to  
the unit with the tie wraps that come with the  
Key Service Unit. (See Section 100-816-208,  
for additional wiring information.)  
9) To mount a second HPFU, repeat steps 1~4,  
then plug the second HPFU connector in the  
first HPFU and connect an FG wire between  
each HPFB FG screw.  
10) To test the HPFU, remove the DK8 AC plug  
from the AC outlet. The DK8 AC LED will go  
out but the DK8 DC LED remains on, also the  
system remains in normal working order and  
the HPFU 24V LED remains on.  
NOTE:  
Figure 4-4 shows cables routed to the right;  
theymayalsoberoutedtotheleft, depending  
on the location of the MDF.  
11) If it is desired to turn off the HPFU (after loss  
of AC power), use a pencil or other sharp  
object to press the Battery Off switch.  
9) If the Reserve Power Battery and Charger  
(HPFB) is going to be installed, refer now to  
Paragraph 2.30. If not, proceed to Step 10.  
CAUTION!  
10) Plug the AC power cable into an outlet and  
then turn ON the DC power supply switch.  
Once the HPFU is turned off or unplugged  
(During AC power loss) it will not operate  
again until AC power is restored to the  
DK8 KSU.  
11) Reinstall the front cover onto the Key Service  
Unit.  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-204  
MARCH 1993  
5) Plug the DC cable into the CN3 connector on  
the power supply (Figure 4-5).  
3 POWER SUPPLY REMOVAL AND  
REPLACEMENT  
6) Plug the AC power cable into an outlet and  
turn ON the power supply switch.  
3.00 The power supply comes factory-installed in  
the Key Service Unit (Figure 4-5); if necessary, it  
can be removed and replaced.  
7) Test QPSU8 power supply according to the  
DK8HardwareFaultIsolationprocedure,Sec-  
tion 100-816-500, Paragraph 6.  
3.10 Power Supply Removal (Figure 4-5)  
8) Plug HPFB cable into BATT connector of  
powersupplyandreconnecttheHPFBground  
wire (Figure 4-5).  
1) MakesurethatthepowersupplyswitchisOFF  
and that the AC power cable is not plugged  
into an outlet. Confirm that green AC LED is  
not lit.  
9) Reinstall the cover on the key service unit.  
2) Loosen the screws on the front cover of the  
Key Service Unit, and remove the cover.  
4 DK8 POWER FAILURE EMERGENCY  
TRANSFER OPTION  
3) Unplug HPFB cable from BATT connector of  
powersupplyanddisconnecttheHPFBground  
wire (Figure 4-5).  
4.00 A dedicated standard telephone can be con-  
nected to the Power Failure Transfer Interface  
(PF1) on the Key Service Unit to provide power  
failure backup. During normal operation, this tele-  
phone cannot be used—it does not count as a  
station; so it does not reduce the system's 10  
maximum station capacity. But if there is a power  
failure, the telephone will automatically be con-  
nected to CO line 1. When power is restored, the  
system will automatically resume with its normal  
station and CO line assignments, and the dedi-  
cated telephone will become inoperative again.  
4) Unplug the AC cable from the CN1 connector  
on the power supply (Figure 4-5).  
5) Remove the FG screw, and disconnect the  
green third wire ground ring terminal (Figure  
4-5).  
6) Unplug the DC cable from the CN3 connector  
on the power supply (Figure 4-5).  
7) Remove the top two, and bottom left corner  
screwsthatattachthepowersupplytotheKey  
Service Unit. Remove power supply.  
4.10 DK8 Power Failure Emergency Transfer  
Installation.Installthededicatedemergencystan-  
dard telephone as follows (see Figure 4-6):  
3.20 Power Supply Replacement (Figure 4-5)  
1) Set the power supply in its proper place in the  
Key Service Unit (Figure 4-5).  
1) Connect a standard telephone to the PF1  
connector in the Base Unit.  
2) Secure the power supply to the Key Service  
Unit with the top two, and bottom left corner  
screws.  
4.20 DK8 Power Failure Emergency Transfer  
Test.  
3) Installthegreenthirdwiregroundringterminal  
with the FG screw.  
1) Turn the system power switch off.  
4) Plug the AC cable into the CN1 connector on  
the power supply (Figure 4-5).  
2) Lift the emergency standard telephone hand-  
set, and verify that there is CO dial tone.  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-204  
MARCH 1993  
3"  
TIE-WRAP  
HOLDER  
TIE-WRAP  
HOLDER  
RESERVE BATTERY  
(HPFB) CONNECTOR  
TO HPFB  
FG  
SCREW  
BATT  
AC POWER  
CORD AND  
PLUG 4' 7"  
DC ON/OFF  
POWER SWITCH  
—
O
6-WIRE SMDR/TTY  
MODULAR JACK  
SMDR/  
TTY  
STATION TIP/RING  
AMPHENOL 25-PAIR  
JACK (FEMALE)  
RJ11 CO LINE JACKS  
CO4  
CO2  
CO1  
CO3  
PFT  
TIE WRAP  
SUPPLIED WITH  
DK8 TO HOLD  
AMPHENOL  
RJ11 POWER FAILURE  
TRANSFER JACK  
CONNECTOR  
TIE-WRAP HOLDER  
LEFT SIDE VIEW  
RIGHT SIDE VIEW  
FIGURE 4-4  
DK8 CABLING DIAGRAM  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-204  
MARCH 1993  
RAM STORAGE BATTERY JUMPER PLUG  
RAM STORAGE  
BATTERY  
J20-CONNECTOR FOR QSMU  
PCB INSTALLATION  
POWER SUPPLY  
MOUNTING SCREW  
QPSU8 POWER SUPPLY  
CN4, BATTERY  
CONNECTOR PLUG  
POWER SUPPLY  
MOUNTING SCREW  
F.G. SCREW FOR  
THIRD WIRE  
BATTERY  
CONNECTOR  
FOR HPFB  
HPFB6  
GROUND  
CONNECTION TO  
POWER SUPPLY  
TO HPFB6  
CN4  
AC  
DC POWER  
ON/OFF SWITCH  
FG SCREW  
HPFB  
GROUND  
WIRE  
AC AND DC  
POWER  
INDICATOR LEDs  
ACN1  
POWER CORD  
CONNECTOR  
CN3  
DC  
CN1  
F201, 3 AMP FUSE  
NON-REPLACABLE  
ON OFF  
SW1  
POWER SUPPLY  
MOUNTING SCREW  
FG  
J19  
42  
YELLOW  
WIRES (+24V)  
J17, J18  
CONNECTOR FOR  
QCNU INSTALLATION  
QMA  
ROM  
IC5  
PIN 1  
CN3, J19  
POWER SUPPLY  
CONNECTORS  
AND CABLE  
SYSTEM FRAME  
GROUND BAR  
J15, J16  
CONNECTOR FOR  
QSTU INSTALLATION  
J11  
STU  
J14  
STU  
RCU  
DK8 MAIN PRINTED  
CIRCUIT BOARD  
J3, CO LINE 2  
MODULAR JACK  
(RJ11)  
J11, J14  
CONNECTOR FOR  
QSTU INSTALLATION  
J2, CO LINE 1  
MODULAR JACK  
(RJ11)  
C02  
J3  
SW101 (CO1)  
SW201 (CO2):  
3-db PAD  
SWITCHES FOR  
CO LINE 1 AND 2  
C01  
J2  
25-PAIR FEMALE  
AMPHENOL  
CONNECTOR (TO  
STATION TIP/RING  
AND RELAY  
FG1A  
J1, POWER FAILURE  
TELEPHONE  
MODULAR JACK  
(RJ11)  
CONTACT)  
J1  
PF1  
J13  
STU  
J12  
STU  
J9, J10  
VR701  
CONNECTORS  
FOR QCDU(S)  
INSTALLATION  
(1-PER QCDU)  
FG1A  
J12, J13  
J8  
J7  
CONNECTORS  
FOR QSTU  
INSTALLATION  
MODULAR JACK  
COVER HOLDERS  
(FOR STORAGE OF  
MODULAR JACK  
COVERS)  
J8, EXTERNAL  
PAGE RCA JACK  
VR701 MOH VOLUME  
CONTROL SCREW  
ADJUSTER  
J7, MUSIC-ON-HOLD RCA JACK  
FIGURE 4-5  
DK8 BASE UNIT JACKS AND CONNECTORS  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-204  
MARCH 1993  
DK8 OR DK16  
KSU MAIN PCB  
MDF  
POWER AVAILABLE  
CONNECTION  
2
T
3
KCOU  
CO LINE 1  
CO  
LINE  
R
4
5
MOD JACK CO1  
(KSU)  
POWER FAIL  
CONNECTION  
MDF  
R
T
PFT  
STANDARD  
TELEPHONE  
MOD JACK PF1  
(BASE UNIT)  
FIGURE 4-6  
DK8 KEY SERVICE UNIT POWER FAILURE TRANSFER (PFT) CIRCUIT DIAGRAM  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-204  
MARCH 1993  
call and three parties on the second simulta-  
neous conference.  
PART II. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD  
INSTALLATION  
6.20 PCB Option Considerations  
5 GENERAL  
6.21 PCBs may be configured for a variety of  
hardware and software options. Hardware options  
are defined as either internal (generally related to  
optional PCB subassemblies) or external (related  
to connection of peripheral equipment such as  
background music, voice mail, etc). Hardware and  
software options for each PCB are identified in the  
individual PCB installation procedures in this chap-  
ter.  
5.01 Thischapterprovidesproceduresforinstalla-  
tionofSTRATADK8systemoptionalprintedcircuit  
boards (PCBs) into the Key Service Unit. This  
includes installation instructions, optional configu-  
ration information, and wiring and programming  
considerations for each PCB.  
5.02 Be sure the ground has been checked. (See  
Chapter 2 for grounding.)  
6.22 PCB Hardware Options. Each PCB must be  
configured for the applicable hardware options  
prior to installation of the PCB. Configuration in-  
structions for internal hardware options are pro-  
vided in the individual PCB installation procedures  
in this chapter. Configuration instructions for exter-  
nal hardware options are provided in Peripheral  
Installation, Section 100-816-207.  
6 PCB INSTALLATION  
CONSIDERATIONS  
6.01 The STRATA DK8 KSU comes standard with  
four digital telephone circuits (ports) and two CO  
line circuits. These circuits, along with the common  
control unit, are built into the motherboard.  
6.23 PCB Software Options. PCBs are config-  
ured for software options through programming,  
after installation of the PCBs in the KSU. A pro-  
grammingoverviewforeachPCBisprovidedinthe  
individual PCB installation procedures in this chap-  
ter. RefertotheProgrammingProcedures, Section  
100-816-300, for detailed programming instruc-  
tions.  
6.10 KSU Option PCBs  
6.11 The KSU can support up to five optional  
printed circuit boards (PCBs) (Figure 4-7): it can  
support a maximum of two QCDUs, each of which  
provides one CO line circuit and two digital tele-  
phone circuits; a QSTU which provides two stan-  
dard telephone circuits (ports); a QRCU which  
provides three circuits to receive DTMF tones  
(required for DISA and devices connected to  
QSTUs), and three circuits to detect busy tone  
(required for the ABR feature); and a QSMU which  
provides a port for either a Station Message Detail  
Recording(SMDR)deviceoramaintenancetermi-  
nal or modem (System Program 10-3, LED 04)  
selects the function of the port — SMDR or TTY).  
6.30 PCB Installation/Power Supply Consid-  
erations  
6.31 Whenever removing or installing PCBs it is  
recommended that the power supply be OFF.  
7 CO LINE/DIGITAL TELEPHONE  
INTERFACE UNIT (QCDU)  
6.12 The KSU does not come from the factory with  
any option PCBs installed. Each of the option  
PCBs listed above must be installed in specific  
locations as described later in this chapter.  
7.00 General  
7.01 The QCDU provides one loop start CO line  
circuitandtwodigitaltelephonecircuits.TheQCDU  
digital telephone circuits can support digital tele-  
phones,PDIU-DIs/PDIU-DI2sor ADMsconnected  
to the telephones and PDIU-DSs. The QCDU does  
notsupportaDDSSconsoleorDDCB. Amaximum  
of two QCDU PCBs may be installed in the KSU.  
NOTE:  
QCNU is a standard factory installed piggy-  
back PCB which provides conference circuits  
allowing two simultaneous conferences with  
four of these parties on the first conference  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-204  
MARCH 1993  
HPFB6  
AC  
DC  
ON OFF  
BATT  
SW1  
RIGHT  
QMA  
ROM  
PIN 1 IC5  
SMDR/TTY  
3-PAIR  
MODULAR  
JACK  
QSMU1
QCNU1A  
COMPONENT SIDE  
F.G.  
J6-25-PAIR  
AMPHENOL  
JACK FOR  
TELEPHONE  
TIP/RING AND  
RELAY  
J1  
J11  
STU  
J4  
J14  
STU  
RCU  
CO4  
QCDU1A  
CO2  
CO1  
CONTACT  
(FEMALE)  
QSTS1A  
F.G.  
CO3  
190 130  
SW1  
QSTU1A  
QCDU1A  
PFT, RJ11  
MODLULAR  
JACK  
J13  
J3  
J12  
J2  
STU  
STU  
SYSTEM  
FRAME  
GROUND  
BAR  
(MOH VOLUME  
CONTROL)  
VR701  
MOH 600Ω  
JACK PAGE  
FIGURE 4-7  
DK8 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD INSTALLATION  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-204  
MARCH 1993  
J2  
CO 3/4  
FG  
TO SYSTEM FRAME  
GROUND BAR  
PAD  
NOR  
J1  
FIGURE 4-8  
QCDU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS  
7.02 The QCDU is shown in Figure 4-8.  
7.20 QCDU Installation Procedure  
7.10 QCDU Configuration  
7.21 Install the QCDU in accordance with the  
following steps (Figure 4-7):  
7.11 The QCDU may have to be configured to  
control excessive loudness if the system is close to  
a CO or installed behind a PBX telephone system.  
It does not have to be configured for anything else.  
The decibel (db) PAD switch, SW101 controls the  
loudness by providing a 3 db signal level drop to, or  
from, the PBX or CO when set to the PAD position.  
The switch comes from the factory set at NOR (for  
normal) meaning no PAD loss.  
1) Remove the PCB from its protective packag-  
ing.  
2) If the system is located within one mile of the  
CO or PBX telephone system, set db PAD  
switch SW101 to the PAD position.  
3) Make sure that the power supply switch is  
OFF.  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-204  
MARCH 1993  
MODULAR  
JACK  
BASE  
C02  
C01  
PFT  
3
2
4
1
COVER  
1
2
3
KNOCK OUT JACK COVER WHEN OCDU, SMDR/TTY IS INSTALLED  
TAKE OUTJACK COVER WHEN PFT IS CONNECTED  
STORE THE JACK COVER THAT HAS BEEN TAKEN OUT IN THE JACKCOVER  
HOLDER  
4
REINSTALL THE JACK COVER WHEN THE PFT TELEPHONE IS UNPLUGGED  
FIGURE 4-9  
MODULAR JACK COVER REMOVAL AND STORAGE  
4) Slide front edge and FG wire of QCDU under  
the "System Frame Ground Bar", align and  
insertQCDUconnectorJ1intothemotherboard  
connector (J9 for CO3 first, J10 for CO4  
second), and apply firm, even pressure to  
ensurepropermatingoftheconnectors. Make  
suretheedgeoftheQCDUnexttotheconnec-  
tor J1 snaps firmly into the standoffs on the  
KSU motherboard.  
6) Remove the "knock-out" from the KSU cover  
CO3orCO4accessslot,andstorethe"knock-  
out" in the slots provided in the KSU base  
(Figure 4-9).  
7.30 QCDU Wiring  
7.31 Refer to the DK8 MDF to CO Line Wiring  
Diagram in Section 100-816-208 for wiring/inter-  
connecting details.  
5) ConnecttheFrameGround(FG)leadfromthe  
QCDUtothescrewnearesttheQCDUlocated  
on the system Frame Ground bar.  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-204  
MARCH 1993  
7.40 QCDU Programming Overview  
8.20 QSTU Installation Procedure  
7.41 The following parameters may be specified,  
8.21 Install the QSTU in accordance with the fol-  
through programming, for the QCDU.  
lowing steps (Figure 4-7):  
1) Remove the PCB from its protective packag-  
ing.  
Program 10-1  
Allows/denies two-CO Line Conference and Di-  
rect Inward System Access (DISA).  
2) SettheringvoltagejumperplugSW1toselect  
the appropriate ring generator voltage level,  
either 130V P-P or 190V P-P.  
Program 15  
Auto Release detection; DISA, and other at-  
tributes to the CO line.  
3) Make sure that the power supply switch is  
OFF.  
Program 16  
Assigns CO line to groups 81 ~ 84, and dial 9  
group.  
4) Align and insert QSTU connectors J1, J2, J3,  
and J4 motherboard connectors J11, J12,  
J13, and J14 respectively, and apply firm,  
even pressure to ensure proper mating of the  
connectors.  
Program 40  
Assigns stations access to CO line (incoming  
and outgoing access).  
8.30 QSTU Wiring  
8 STANDARD TELEPHONE  
INTERFACE UNIT (QSTU)  
8.31RefertoDK8MDFtoKSUAmphenolWiringin  
Section 100-816-208 for QSTU wiring.  
8.00 General  
8.32 The QSTU must be connected to a OL13A (or  
equivalent) type lines for off-premises stations.  
(300 ohms loop resistance max., including the  
telephoneorotherdevicesDCoffhookresistance.)  
8.01 The QSTU provides two standard telephone  
circuits.TheQSTUsupportstwo-wiredevicessuch  
as standard telephones, Auto Attendant devices,  
separate BGM source connection, voice mail ma-  
chines, and facsimile machines.  
8.40 QSTU Programming Overview  
8.41Thefollowingparametersmaybespecifiedfor  
the QSTU:  
NOTE:  
For the system to recognize the Dual-Tone  
Multi-Frequency (DTMF) tones generated by  
standardtelephones(oranyotherdevicecon-  
nected to a QSTU port), a QRCU must be  
installed.  
Program 31  
Used to configure all QSTU ports connected to  
voice mail (see Chapter 7 for voice mail installa-  
tion).  
Program 10-2  
8.02 The QSTU is shown in Figure 4-10. Note that  
the QSTS PCB is factory installed on the QSTU.  
Used to set standard telephone ringing option  
and separate BGM assignment.  
NOTE:  
8.10 QSTU Configuration  
QSTU Ports are fixed. They are assigned  
even if a QSTU is not installed.  
8.11 The QSTU only has to be configured for the  
ring generator voltage level, nothing else. Before  
installing the QSTU in the KSU, set the SW1 ring  
generator to 130V P-P or 190V P-P (Figure 4-10).  
Most standard telephones and two-wire devices  
require 190; however, some devices may experi-  
ence ring-trip at 190, and should be set at 130.  
9 DTMF RECEIVER/ABR TONE  
DETECTOR UNIT (QRCU)  
9.00 General  
9.01 The QRCU must be installed to recognize  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-204  
MARCH 1993  
J1  
J4  
QSTS  
FACTORY  
INSTALLED  
QSTS  
QSTU  
J5  
J6  
190  
130  
SW1  
J3  
J2  
FIGURE 4-10  
QSTU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS  
Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) tones gener-  
ated by a standard telephone (or any other device  
connectedtoastandardtelephonecircuit(QSTU)),  
and it is required for Direct Inward System Access  
(DISA) calls. The QRCU circuits are also used to  
detect busy tone for the Automatic Busy Redial  
(ABR) feature and must be installed to allow ABR  
to operate.  
9.02 The QRCU is shown in Figure 4-11.  
9.10 QRCU Configuration  
9.11 The QRCU does not have to be configured for  
operation.  
9.20 QRCU Installation Procedure  
9.21 Install the QRCU in accordance with the  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-204  
MARCH 1993  
DK8RCU1A  
V.1  
J1  
J2  
FIGURE 4-11  
QRCU INTERFACE CONNECTORS  
four-partyandonethree-party). TheQCNUisstan-  
dard and is installed at the factory. If it is necessary  
to remove and replace the QCNU, turn the system  
off, remove the QCNU, and install another QCNU  
per paragraph 10.20.  
following steps (Figure 4-7).  
1) Remove the PCB from its protective packag-  
ing.  
2) Make sure that the power supply switch is  
OFF.  
10.02 The QCNU is shown in Figure 4-7.  
3) Align and insert QRCU connectors J1 and J2  
into motherboard connectors J15 and J16  
respectively (note the component side place-  
ment in Figure 4-7), and apply firm, even  
pressure to ensure proper mating of connec-  
tors.Pushdownuntilconnectorslocktogether.  
10.10 QCNU Configuration  
10.11 The QCNU does not have to be configured  
for operation.  
10.20 QCNU Installation Procedure  
9.30 QRCU Wiring  
10.21 Install the QCNU in accordance with the  
following steps (Figure 4-7):  
9.31 The QRCU does not require any wiring.  
9.40 QRCU Programming Overview  
9.41 The following parameters may be specified:  
1) Remove the PCB from its protective packag-  
ing.  
2) Make sure that the power supply switch is  
OFF.  
Program 12  
3) Align and insert QCNU connectors J1 and  
J2 into motherboard connectors J17 and  
J18 respectively, and apply firm, even pres-  
sure to ensure proper mating of connectors.  
(Notethesidewith“➝RIGHT”silkscreened  
on it should be positioned as shown in Fig-  
ure 4-7.)  
Set QRCU release time.  
Program 15  
Sets QRCU operation after CO line flash.  
10 CONFERENCE CIRCUITS (QCNU)  
10.00 General  
10.30 QCNU Wiring  
10.31 The QCNU does not require any wiring.  
10.01 The QCNU provides two conference circuits  
which allow two simultaneous conferences (one  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-204  
MARCH 1993  
Maintenance Terminal (TTY) or modem; and in  
System Prograrm 10-3:  
RIGHT  
J1  
LED 04 ON — TTY  
LED 04 OFF — SMDR  
J2  
11.30 QSMU Installation Procedure  
11.31 Install the QSMU in accordance with the  
following steps (See Figure 4-7):  
1) Remove the PCB from its protective packag-  
ing.  
2) EnsuretheQSMUhasbeenconfiguredforthe  
appropriate program options (refer to Para-  
graphs 11.10 and 11.20).  
FIGURE 4-12  
QCNU INTERFACE CONNECTORS  
3) Slide the QSMU under the "System Frame  
Ground Bar", align and insert QSMU connec-  
torJ2intomotherboardconnectorJ20,ensur-  
ing the side of the QSMU with the modular  
connector goes on the right side. (The QSMU  
10.40 QCNU Programming Overview  
is not silkscreened “➝ RIGHT”.) Apply firm,  
even pressure to ensure proper mating of  
connectors. Make sure the edge of the QSMU  
opposite connector J2 snaps firmly into the  
standoffs on the KSU motherboard.  
10.41 The QCNU does not require any program-  
ming.  
11 OPTION INTERFACE UNIT (QSMU)  
11.00 General  
11.01 The QSMU provides a circuit interface with  
peripheral options.  
J 1  
11.02 The QSMU is shown in Figure 4-13.  
11.10 QSMU Hardware Options  
11.11 The QSMU supports the following STRATA  
DK8 external hardware options:  
SMDR output or TTY (maintenance) port two-  
way interface.  
NOTE:  
Refer to Peripheral Equipment Installation,  
Section100-816-207,forinstallationofSMDR  
and the Remote Maintenance Section 100-  
816-600 for TTY.  
8B  
8A  
1B  
1A  
11.20 QSMU Configuration  
11.21 The QSMU must be configured for operation  
with the appropriate external hardware: either an  
SMDR printer or call accounting device; Remote  
FIGURE 4-13  
QSMU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS  
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-204  
MARCH 1993  
4) Remove the "knock-out" from the KSU cover  
SMDR/TTY access slot, and store the "knock-  
out" in the slots provided in the KSU base  
(Figure 4-9).  
are integrated into the KSU motherboard and are  
identical to the QCDU CO line circuits. For wiring  
and programming considerations, see the QCDU  
instructions in Paragraph 7.  
11.40 QSMU Wiring  
12.20 Built-in Digital Telephone Circuits  
11.41 Refer to Peripheral Equipment Installation  
(Section 100-816-207, SMDR) and Remote Main-  
tenance (Section 100-816-600, TTY) for QSMU  
wiring/interconnecting details.  
12.21 The four digital telephone circuits that come  
standard with the system are integrated into the  
motherboard in the KSU. These circuits are identi-  
cal to the digital circuits found on the QCDU. The  
motherboarddoesnothavetobeconfiguredforthe  
digital circuits to operate. For wiring and program-  
ming considerations, see the QCDU instructions in  
Paragraph 7.  
11.50 QSMU Programming Overview  
11.51 The following parameters may be specified,  
through programming, for the QSMU:  
Program 60  
12.30 KSU Motherboard CO Line/Digital  
Station Circuit Wiring  
Assigns SMDR options.  
Program 10-3  
12.31 Refer to Section 100-816-208 for details.  
LED04-SMDR/TTY Select option.  
Station circuits: DK8 MDF to KSU Amphenol  
Wiring Diagram  
11.60 Device Communication Parameters  
CO lines: DK8 MDF TO CO Line (KSU and  
QCDU) Wiring Diagram  
11.61 Set the communication parameters for the  
deviceconnectedtotheQSMUSMDR/TTYjackas  
follows:  
12.40 Power Failure Telephone Installation  
TTY: 7 Bits, 1-Stop Bit, Even Parity  
SMDR: 8 Bits, 1-Stop Bit, Odd Parity  
TTY/SMDR: 1200 bps  
1) Remove the RJ11 cover (Figure 4-9) from the  
PFT jack and store the jack cover.  
2) Connect the power failure telephone (500/  
2500-typestandardtelephonetothePFTjack.  
(Refer to the DK8 MDF to CO Line Wiring  
Diagram in Section 100-816-208.  
12 BUILT-IN CO LINE, DIGITAL TELE-  
PHONE, AND OTHER CIRCUITS  
12.50 Music-On-Hold (MOH)/Background  
Music (BGM) Source Connection  
12.00 General  
12.01 As mentioned in Paragraph 6, the KSU  
comes standard with two CO lines and four digital  
telephone circuits already installed.  
12.51 Connect the MOH/BGM source to the MOH  
RCA jack (Figure 4-7) in accordance with Music  
Source Configuration A in Section 100-816-207.  
12.10 Built-in CO Line Circuits  
12.60 External Page Output Connection  
12.11 The two standard loop start CO line circuits  
12.61 Connect the external page system to the  
600Ω PAGE RCA output jack (Figure 4-7) to an  
external amplifier in accordance with the External  
Page Installation guidelines in Section 100-816-  
207.  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES  
DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS  
INSTALLATION-INTRODUCTION  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
INSTALLATION  
CHAPTER FIVE  
DK16 KSU AND PCB INSTALLATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
SUBJECT  
PARAGRAPH  
PAGE  
PART I  
DK16 KSU INSTALLATION .................................................................................... 5-1  
GENERAL ................................................................................................................ 5-1  
DK KEY SERVICE UNIT MOUNTING ..................................................................... 5-1  
Mounting Surface Considerations ........................................................................ 5-1  
Mounting Preparation ........................................................................................... 5-1  
Mounting the Base Key Service Unit .................................................................... 5-1  
Mounting the Expansion Key Service Unit ........................................................... 5-4  
Reserve Power Failure Options............................................................................ 5-10  
POWER SUPPLY REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT ............................................. 5-11  
Power Supply Removal ........................................................................................ 5-11  
Power Supply Replacement ................................................................................. 5-12  
1
2
2.00  
2.10  
2.20  
2.30  
2.40  
3
3.10  
3.20  
PART II  
DK16 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD INSTALLATION .............................................. 5-13  
GENERAL ................................................................................................................ 5-13  
PCB INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS .............................................................. 5-13  
Base Unit PCBs.................................................................................................... 5-13  
Expansion Unit PCBs ........................................................................................... 5-13  
PCB Option Considerations.................................................................................. 5-13  
PCB Installation/Power Supply Considerations.................................................... 5-14  
BASE UNIT STANDARD TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT (KSTU) ........................ 5-14  
General ................................................................................................................. 5-14  
KSTU Configuration.............................................................................................. 5-14  
KSTU Installation Procedure ................................................................................ 5-14  
KSTU Wiring ......................................................................................................... 5-15  
KSTU Programming Overview ............................................................................. 5-15  
DIGITAL TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT (PDKU) ................................................ 5-15  
General ................................................................................................................. 5-15  
PDKU Hardware Options...................................................................................... 5-16  
PDKU Installation Procedure................................................................................ 5-17  
PDKU Wiring ........................................................................................................ 5-17  
PDKU Programming Overview ............................................................................. 5-17  
ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT (PEKU) ........................................ 5-17  
General ................................................................................................................. 5-17  
PEKU Hardware Options...................................................................................... 5-17  
PEKU Installation Procedure ................................................................................ 5-19  
PEKU Wiring......................................................................................................... 5-20  
PEKU Programming Overview ............................................................................. 5-20  
STANDARD TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT (PSTU) ........................................... 5-20  
General ................................................................................................................. 5-20  
PSTU (1 and 2) Hardware Options...................................................................... 5-20  
PSTU Installation Procedure ................................................................................ 5-21  
PSTU Wiring ......................................................................................................... 5-22  
PSTU Programming Overview ............................................................................. 5-22  
4
5
5.10  
5.20  
5.30  
5.40  
6
6.00  
6.10  
6.20  
6.30  
6.40  
7
7.00  
7.10  
7.20  
7.30  
7.40  
8
8.00  
8.10  
8.20  
8.30  
8.40  
9
9.00  
9.10  
9.20  
9.30  
9.40  
5-i  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)  
SUBJECT  
PARAGRAPH  
PAGE  
10  
STANDARD/ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT (PESU).................... 5-22  
General ................................................................................................................. 5-22  
PESU Hardware Options...................................................................................... 5-22  
PESU Installation Procedure ................................................................................ 5-25  
PESU Wiring......................................................................................................... 5-25  
PESU Programming Overview ............................................................................. 5-25  
CO LINE UNIT (PCOU) ............................................................................................ 5-25  
10.00  
10.10  
10.20  
10.30  
10.40  
11  
11.00  
11.10  
11.20  
11.30  
11.40  
12  
12.00  
12.10  
12.20  
12.30  
12.40  
13  
13.00  
13.10  
13.20  
13.30  
13.40  
14  
14.00  
14.10  
14.20  
14.30  
14.40  
15  
General  
PCOU Hardware Options  
5-25  
5-25  
PCOU Installation Procedure ............................................................................... 5-25  
PCOU Wiring ........................................................................................................ 5-26  
PCOU Programming Overview............................................................................. 5-26  
OPTION INTERFACE UNIT (PIOU AND PIOUS) .................................................... 5-28  
General ................................................................................................................. 5-28  
PIOU and PIOUS Hardware Options.................................................................... 5-28  
PIOU and PIOUS Installation Procedure.............................................................. 5-30  
PIOU and PIOUS Wiring ...................................................................................... 5-30  
PIOU and PIOUS Programming Overview ........................................................... 5-30  
CO LINE/DIGITAL TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT (KCDU).................................. 5-31  
General ................................................................................................................. 5-31  
KCDU Configuration ............................................................................................. 5-31  
KCDU Installation Procedure................................................................................ 5-32  
KCDU Wiring ........................................................................................................ 5-33  
KCDU Programming Overview............................................................................. 5-33  
DTMF RECEIVER/ABR TONE DETECTOR UNIT (K4RCU) .................................... 5-33  
General ................................................................................................................. 5-33  
K4RCU Configuration ........................................................................................... 5-33  
K4RCU Installation Procedure.............................................................................. 5-33  
K4RCU Wiring ...................................................................................................... 5-34  
K4RCU Programming Overview........................................................................... 5-34  
BUILT-IN CO LINE AND DIGITAL TELEPHONE CIRCUITS.................................... 5-34  
General ................................................................................................................. 5-34  
Built-in CO Line Circuits ....................................................................................... 5-34  
Digital Telephone Circuits..................................................................................... 5-34  
Base Unit CO Line/Digital Station Circuit Wiring .................................................. 5-34  
KCOU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT ................................................................ 5-35  
General ................................................................................................................. 5-35  
KCOU Removal .................................................................................................... 5-35  
KCOU Replacement ............................................................................................. 5-35  
DK16 POWER FAILURE EMERGENCY TRANSFER OPTION ............................... 5-36  
DK16 Power Failure Emergency Transfer Installation ......................................... 5-36  
15.00  
15.10  
15.20  
15.30  
16  
16.00  
16.10  
16.20  
17  
17.10  
5-ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
FIGURE LIST  
TITLE  
FIGURE  
5-1  
PAGE  
DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT EXTERIOR ........................................................ 5-2  
DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT WALL MOUNTING METHODS .......................... 5-3  
DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT INTERIOR ......................................................... 5-3  
DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT WIRING CONNECTIONS .................................. 5-5  
CONNECTING THE DK16 EXPANSION UNIT TO THE DK16 BASE UNIT ............ 5-6  
MOUNTING THE DK16 EXPANSION UNIT ............................................................ 5-7  
DK16 EXPANSION UNIT INTERIOR ....................................................................... 5-8  
DK16 EXPANSION UNIT WIRING CONNECTIONS ............................................... 5-9  
POWER SUPPLY (KPSU) ....................................................................................... 5-11  
BASE UNIT POWER FAILURE TRANSFER (PFT) CIRCUIT DIAGRAM................. 5-12  
KSTU OPTIONS AND CONNECTORS ................................................................... 5-14  
PDKU INTERFACE CONNECTION ......................................................................... 5-16  
PEKU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS .......................................... 5-18  
OFF-HOOK CALL ANNOUNCE UNIT (EOCU) INTERFACE CONNECTORS......... 5-20  
PSTU AND SUBUNIT (SSTU) ................................................................................. 5-21  
PESU PCB OPTION LOCATION AND IDENTIFICATION ........................................ 5-23  
PCOU CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS ................. 5-26  
PIOU CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS................... 5-28  
PIOUS PCB SWITCH/JUMPER, OPTION LOCATION............................................ 5-30  
REMOTE MAINTENANCE MODEM UNIT (IMDU) INTERFACE CONNECTORS ... 5-32  
KCDU INDICATORS, OPTIONS AND CONNECTORS........................................... 5-32  
K4RCU PCB ............................................................................................................. 5-34  
KCOU PCB............................................................................................................... 5-35  
EMERGENCY STANDARD TELEPHONE INSTALLATION ..................................... 5-36  
5-2  
5-3  
5-4  
5-5  
5-6  
5-7  
5-8  
5-9  
5-10  
5-11  
5-12  
5-13  
5-14  
5-15  
5-16  
5-17  
5-18  
5-19  
5-20  
5-21  
5-22  
5-23  
5-24  
TABLE LIST  
TABLE  
5-A  
5-B  
5-C  
5-D  
5-E  
5-F  
5-G  
5-H  
SUBJECT  
PAGE  
KSTU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS .......................................... 5-15  
PEKU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS .......................................... 5-19  
PSTU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS .......................................... 5-21  
PESU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS .......................................... 5-24  
PCOU CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS ................. 5-27  
PIOU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS ........................................... 5-29  
PIOUS CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS......................................... 5-31  
KCDU CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND CONNECTORS ....................................... 5-33  
5-iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
IMPORTANT INITIAL INSTALLATION NOTES!  
These minimum installation steps must be carried out for proper system operation.  
1. Set the SW1 switch in the Base Unit ON for BATTERY OPERATION; otherwise, all programmed  
customer data will be lost on power down.  
2. If required, install KSTU and K4RCU in the Base Unit.  
3. If the system is configured with an Expansion Unit, follow the order prescribed below:  
a) Install PDKU, PEKU, PSTU, PESU, or KCDU in Slot 04.  
b) If installing two KCDUs, install a KCDU in Slot 05. (The other KCDU should be installed in  
Slot 04.)  
c) If the system is configured with a PCOU, install it in Slot 05. (The system cannot be  
configured with both a PCOU and KCDU in the Expansion Unit.)  
d) If the system is configured with a PIOU or PIOUS, install it in Slot 06. (Slot 07 should be  
reserved for future use.)  
4. Initialize Programs 00 ~ 97 by running Program 90.  
5. Run Program 92.  
6. Enter the hardware configuration with Program 03, exit the programming mode, turn power  
OFF for five seconds, then turn power back ON.  
WHEN LATER ADDING KSU PCBs  
1. Install new PCBs and set the new configuration with Program 03. (Turn power OFF for five  
seconds after running Program 03.)  
2. Program new features, options, etc. created by new additions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
6) Turn the switch on the power supply to the ON  
position (Figure 5-3).  
PART I. KSU INSTALLATION  
1 GENERAL  
The "DC" LED on the power supply will light  
green. (If not, refer to the Fault Finding  
section later in this manual).  
1.00 This chapter provides the instructions nec-  
essarytomountboththeSTRATADK16BaseKey  
Service Unit and the Expansion Key Service Unit.  
Instructions are also provided on how to test,  
remove, and replace the power supply and base  
unit CO line interface subassembly.  
7) Usingavoltmeterorotherdevicewhichchecks  
voltage, measure the voltages referenced to  
frame ground (FG) at the DC OUT connector  
pins (test points) located on the motherboard  
(Figure 5-3). The voltages should fall within  
the ranges below. If the voltages do not fall  
within the ranges, unplug the DC power pins  
from the DC OUT connector and measure  
again at the same location; if the ranges  
remain unacceptable, replace the power sup-  
ply (see Paragraph 3).  
2 KEY SERVICE UNIT MOUNTING  
2.00 Mounting Surface Considerations  
2.01 The Base Key Service Unit and the optional  
Expansion Key Service Unit are both designed to  
be mounted on a wall or other vertical surface. It is  
recommended to use Method 1 or 2 in Figure 5-2  
(see Note).  
Yellow-Green, Black, and Green Wires: 0V  
Yellow Wire: -24V  
Range: -26.3V ~ -27.8V  
Red Wire: 5V  
NOTE:  
If mounting the KSU directly to a wall, be sure  
to align screws with studs behind the wall; if  
using a hard board between the KSU and the  
wall, install screws first to the hard board, and  
then secure the hard board to the wall, mak-  
ingcertainthatscrewsarealignedwithstuds.  
Range: 4.5V ~ 5.5V  
Blue Wire: -5V  
Range: -4.5V ~ -5.5V  
2.20 Mounting the Base Key Service Unit  
1) Make sure the power supply switch is turned  
OFF.  
2.10 Mounting Preparation  
2) Place the Base Key Service Unit on the de-  
sired location on the mounting surface and  
mark the location of the four screw holes  
(there is one on each corner). See Figure 5-2.  
1) Loosen the screws on the front cover and the  
side cover of the Base Key Service Unit, and  
remove the covers (Figure 5-1).  
2) Move the SW1 Memory Battery Backup strap  
onthemotherboardtotheONposition(Figure  
5-3).  
NOTE:  
Make sure the location of the Base Key  
Service Unit meets the minimum clearance  
requirementsspecifiedinFigure2-2in Chap-  
ter 2.  
3) If applicable, install the K4RCU into the Base  
Key Service Unit (see Paragraph 14).  
3) Drill holes on these marks.  
4) If applicable, install the KSTU into the Base  
NOTE:  
Key Service Unit (see Paragraph 6).  
If mounting the KSU directly to a wall, be sure  
to align screws with studs behind the wall; if  
using a hard board between the KSU and the  
wall, install screws first to the hard board, and  
then secure the hard board to the wall, mak-  
ingcertainthatscrewsarealignedwithstuds.  
5) Plug the AC power cable into an outlet (Figure  
5-3).  
The "AC" LED on the power supply will light  
green (If not, refer to the Fault Finding sec-  
tion later in this manual).  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
COVER  
SCREWS (6)  
AC  
DC  
POWER  
BASE COVER  
SIDE COVER  
= Six cover screws to be removed  
before mounting KSU  
KFCU DOOR SCREW  
(Do not remove to mount KSU)  
FIGURE 5-1  
DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT EXTERIOR  
METHOD 1  
METHOD 2  
PLASTER  
BOARD  
STUD  
HARD BOARD  
(1/2 INCH PLYWOOD)  
STUD  
PLASTERBOARD  
EXPANSION  
UNIT  
EXPANSION  
UNIT  
BASE UNIT  
BASE UNIT  
FIGURE 5-2  
DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT WALL MOUNTING METHODS  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
POWER SUPPLY  
KPSU16  
MOUNTING HOLE  
AND SCREW  
RESERVE POWER  
BATTERY  
CONNECTOR  
BATT  
±
AC POWER CABLE  
PULL  
LOCK  
MOUNTING HOLE  
AND SCREW  
FG SCREW  
(LEFT SIDE)  
PUSH  
UNLOCK  
AC  
DC  
DC POWER  
FG WIRE  
(GREEN/YELLOW)  
DC POWER SWITCH  
–24V CIRCUIT  
BREAKER  
DC OUT  
CONNECTOR  
P9 (KPSU16  
VOLTAGE  
(RIGHT SIDE)  
MODULAR  
CONNECTORS  
TEST POINTS)  
KRCU  
TB1, FG2  
J4 (CO4)  
J3 (CO3)  
J2 (CO2)  
J1 (CO1)  
P2A  
P2B  
CONNECTOR  
FOR EXPANSION  
GROUND WIRE  
KCOU  
RIBBON  
CONNECTOR (P3)  
SW1  
MEMORY BATTERY  
BACKUP STRAP  
MOH VOLUME  
CONTROL  
PFI  
(STANDARD  
TELEPHONE)  
P5 (AMPHENOL JACK)  
BATTERY  
P8  
J6, MOH  
(TO MOH/BGM  
SOURCE)  
J7, 600Ω PAGE  
(TO PAGE AMP)  
OPTIONAL KSTU  
SHOWN FOR  
P1  
REFERENCE ONLY  
MOUNTING HOLE  
AND SCREW  
MOUNTING HOLE  
AND SCREW  
KFCU  
CONNECTOR  
TIE WRAP  
HOLDER  
PAD SWITCH ASSIGNMENTS:  
SW400 – CO1  
SW425 – CO2  
SW450 – CO3  
SW475 – CO4  
FIGURE 5-3  
DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT INTERIOR  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
4) Securescrewsapproximatelytwothirdsofthe  
way into the top two holes on the mounting  
surface.  
2) Set the Expansion Key Service Unit on the  
Base Key Service Unit's hinge mounts, mak-  
ing sure that the Expansion Unit sets properly  
in place (Figure 5-5).  
5) Hang the unit from the top two screws and  
then secure the screws completely into the  
mounting surface.  
3) Remove safety lock from plastic bag which  
comes with the Expansion Unit. Install safety  
lock to the Base Unit as shown in Figure 5-5.  
6) Finish securing the unit to the mounting sur-  
face by completley screwing the bottom two  
screws into the wall.  
4) Pull out on the safety lock until it can no longer  
be moved, securing the Expansion Key Ser-  
vice Unit to the Base Key Service Unit (Figure  
5-5).DonotdetachthelockfromtheBaseKey  
Service Unit.  
7) Ground system according to Chapter 2, para-  
graph 4.  
8) Connect applicable wiring (modular CO line  
cords,25-pairamphenolconnectorcable,etc.)  
to the Base Key Service Unit and then fasten  
wiring to the unit with the tie wrap that comes  
with the base unit (Figure 5-4). Remove  
amphenol connector clamp from plastic bag  
that comes with the Base Unit. Fasten the  
clamp to hold the amphenol connector.  
5) Connect the Expansion Key Service Unit Rib-  
bon Cable to the connector on the Base Key  
Service Unit (Figure 5-5). Close ribbon cable  
connector lock on Base Unit.  
6) Connect Expansion Unit green/yellow ground  
wireplug(FG2)toTB1oftheBaseUnit.(Make  
sure the plug locks on TB1.) See Figure 5-3  
and 5-4.  
9) Connect Reserve batteries (per Paragraph  
2.40) and plug battery cable into BATT con-  
nectoroftheKPSU16powersupply(Figure5-  
3 and 5-4).  
7) Making sure that the Expansion Key Service  
Unit is flush against the mounting surface,  
markthelocationoftheExpansionUnitmount-  
ing screw hole (Figure 5-6).  
10) SettheKCOUPADswitches(SW400-SW475)  
to the appropriate position (Figure 5-3). The  
factory setting is NORMAL. If CO lines are  
connected to a PBX or are in close proximity  
to the central office the PAD position may be  
required.  
8) Swing the Expansion Key Service Unit away  
from the mounting surface, and drill a hole at  
the mark made in Step 7.  
11) If the Expansion Key Service Unit is going to  
be installed, refer now to Paragraph 2.30. If  
not, proceed to Step 12.  
9) Installapplicableprintedcircuit boards(PCBs)  
(see Chapter 5, Section II)—after PCBs are  
installed, slide the slot lock to the lock position  
(Figure 5-7).  
12) Plug the AC power cable into an outlet and  
then turn ON the power supply switch.  
10) SwingtheExpansionKeyServiceUnitbackto  
the mounting surface and secure it to the  
surface with a screw.  
13) Reinstall the front and side covers onto the  
Base Key Service Unit.  
11) Connect applicable wiring (modular CO line  
cords, 25-pair amphenol connector, etc.) to  
the PCBs (Figure 5-8).  
2.30 Mounting the Expansion Key Service  
Unit  
1) Make sure the side cover is removed from the  
Base Key Service Unit. Turn Base Key Ser-  
vice Unit DC power switch off.  
12) Fasten the wiring with tie wraps (supplied) to  
the bottom of the Expansion and Base Key  
Service Units (Figure 5-8).  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
AC  
POWER  
DC  
–24V  
KRCU  
NOTES  
1. SUPPLIED IN PLASTIC BAG WITH  
BASE UNIT.  
2. DO NOT ROUTE POWER CORD WITH  
OTHER CORDS.  
AC POWER CORD2  
MODULAR  
CONNECTOR  
SELF-ADHESIVE  
RUBBER PAD1  
AMPHENOL  
CLAMP1  
RCA JACK  
TIE WRAP1  
AMPHENOL  
CONNECTOR  
TIE WRAP  
HOLDER  
MODULAR  
CORD (X5)  
DK 16  
BASE UNIT  
AMPHENOL  
CORD (X1)  
PIN JACK  
CORD (X2)  
FIGURE 5-4  
DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT WIRING CONNECTIONS  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
DK16 BASE  
UNIT  
HINGE  
MOUNT  
TB1 (FG2)  
BACK OF DK16  
EXPANSION UNIT  
GREEN/YELLOW  
FG2 WIRE AND PLUG  
(FROM EXPANSION  
UNIT – PLUGS INTO  
TB1 OF BASE UNIT)  
P3  
RIBBON  
CONNECTOR  
LOCK  
PULL  
LOCK  
PUSH  
UNLOCK  
SAFETY LOCK  
(SUPPLIED WITH  
EXPANSION UNIT)  
RIBBON CABLE (FROM EXPANSION UNIT – PLUGS  
INTO EXPANSION CONNECTOR (P3) OF BASE UNIT)  
FIGURE 5-5  
CONNECTING THE DK16 EXPANSION UNIT TO THE DK16 BASE UNIT  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
EXPANSION  
UNIT  
EXPANSION  
SAFETY LOCK  
FG SCREW  
BASE UNIT  
PULL  
LOCK  
AC  
DC  
PUSH  
UNLOCK  
DC POWER  
FG WIRE  
FG2 WIRE  
RIBBON CABLE  
TO EXPANSION UNIT  
EXPANSION  
UNIT LATCH  
MOUNTING  
HOLE AND SCREW  
AC CORD  
TIE WRAP HOLDER  
FIGURE 5-6  
MOUNTING THE DK16 EXPANSION UNIT  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
EXPANSION UNIT  
SLOT LOCK  
SO6  
SO4  
SO7  
PCB  
LOCK  
SO5  
SIDE COVER  
FIGURE 5-7  
DK16 EXPANSION UNIT INTERIOR  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
BATT  
±
PULL  
LOCK  
AC  
DC  
PUSH  
UNLOCK  
DC POWER  
KRCU  
AMPHENOL  
CONNECTOR  
TO MDF  
TIE WRAP  
TIE WRAP  
OPTIONAL AC GROUND WIRE  
9 FT  
AC POWER CORD  
FROM FG TERMINAL TO EARTH  
GROUND (COLD WATER PIPE)  
TO AC OUTLET (DO NOT ROUTE  
AC POWER CORD SIDE-BY-SIDE  
WITH OTHER CABLES)  
FIGURE 5-8  
DK16 EXPANSION UNIT WIRING CONNECTIONS  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
13) Knock out the tab on the bottom of the side  
cover.  
4. Exercise care in handling batteries in  
order not to short the battery with con-  
ductionmaterialssuchasrings,brace-  
lets, and keys. The battery or conduc-  
tor may overheat and cause burns.  
5. Charge the batteries provided with or  
identified for use with this product  
only in accordance with the instruc-  
tions and limitations specified in this  
manual.  
14) Plug the AC power cable into an outlet and  
then turn ON the power supply switch.  
15) Install the side cover to the Expansion Key  
Service Unit (Figure 5-7).  
2.40 Reserve Power/Power Failure Options  
6. Observe proper polarity orientation  
between the batteries and battery  
charger.  
2.41 The STRATA DK systems offer two options  
to protect system operation in the event of a power  
failure;theReservePoweroption(Paragraph2.42-  
2.44), and the Power Failure Emergency Transfer  
option (Paragraph 17).  
2.44 Reserve Power Installation. Install the Re-  
serve Power option in accordance with the follow-  
ing steps (refer to Figure 5-9):  
2.42 ReservePowerOption STRATADK16sys-  
tem power supply provides the capability of con-  
necting a reserve power source (two customer  
supplied 12-volt batteries) to ensure uninterrupted  
system operation in the event of a power failure. A  
pre-assembled interface cable for installation of  
theReservePoweroptionisavailablefromToshiba  
(PBTC-3M), refer to Figure 5-9.  
1) Connect the PBTC-3M black jumper wire  
from the positive terminal of one 12VDC  
battery to the negative terminal of the second  
12VDC battery.  
2) Ensure that a serviceable 10-ampere fuse is  
installedinthein-linefuseholderofthePBTC-  
3M battery cable.  
IMPORTANT NOTE!  
Localordinancesmaydictatebatterytype  
and installation details.  
3) Connect the white lead of the PBTC-3M bat-  
tery cable to the open positive terminal of the  
12VDC battery. Connect the black lead to the  
open negative terminal of the second 12VDC  
battery.  
2.43 The batteries require a well-ventilated loca-  
tion close (within 9 feet) to the system —the  
interface cable is 9 feet long.  
IMPORTANT NOTE!  
The KSU must be connected to the live  
operating (HOT) AC power source, and  
the power supply ON/OFF switch set to  
ONpriortothefinalstepofconnectingthe  
reserve power batteries to the power sup-  
ply via the BATT +/- receptacle. If the  
batteries are connected after AC power is  
lost, reserve power will not function.  
WARNING!  
To reduce the risk of fire or injury to  
persons, read and follow these instruc-  
tions:  
1. Use only the following type and size  
batteries: 12-volt, gelcell.  
2. Donotdisposeofthebatteriesinafire.  
The cells may explode. Check with  
local codes for possible special dis-  
posal instructions.  
4) Connect the PBTC-3M battery cable two-  
prong male plug to the power supply BATT +/  
- receptacle.  
3. Do not open or mutilate the batteries.  
Released electrolyte is corrosive and  
may cause damage to the eyes or skin.  
It may be toxic if swallowed.  
5) To test reserve power operation, disconnect  
the system AC power plug with the power  
supply power ON/OFF switch in the ON posi-  
tion. The system should continue to operate  
without any interruption.  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
TWO-PRONG  
MALE CONNECTOR  
(PRE-ASSEMBLED)  
KPSU16  
PBTC-3M  
BATTERY CABLE  
WITH RING TERMINALS  
AND PPSU CONNECTOR  
(LENGTH 9 FEET)  
WHITE  
+
–
BATT  
BLACK  
IN-LINE  
FUSE HOLDER  
10 A  
(FUSE PROVIDED)  
BLACK  
WHITE  
POWER SUPPLY  
16AWG  
–
+
–
+
ACTUAL  
SIZE  
12 VDC  
12 VDC  
BATTERY  
BATTERY  
BLACK JUMPER  
WITH RING TERMINALS  
(PROVIDED)  
RING TERMINALS 3/8 IN.  
FIGURE 5-9  
RESERVE POWER/BATTERY WIRING  
3 POWER SUPPLY REMOVAL AND  
REPLACEMENT  
supply to free FG wire/terminal and building  
ground wire.  
6) Remove the six screws that attach the power  
supply to the Base Key Service Unit. Remove  
power supply.  
3.00 The power supply (KSPU 16) comes factory-  
installed in the Base Key Service Unit (Figure 5-  
10); if necessary, it can be removed and replaced.  
3.20 Power Supply Replacement  
3.10 Power Supply Removal  
1) Route FG1 wire (soldered on both sides of  
Base Unit motherboard) so it will be under the  
power supply inside of standoffs (see Figure  
5-10).  
1) Make sure that the power supply switch is  
OFF and that the AC power cable is not  
plugged into an outlet. Confirm that green AC  
LED is not lit.  
2) Set the power supply in its proper place in the  
Base Key Service Unit (see Figure 5-9).  
2) Unplug reserve battery cable from BATT con-  
nector of power supply (Figure 5-10).  
3) Remove K4RCU PCB and Expansion Unit  
4) Unplug the DC cable from the DC OUT con-  
nector (see Figure 5-10).  
3) Secure the power supply to the Base Key  
Service Unit with the six screws.  
5) Remove FG screw from left side of power  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
MOUNTING  
SCREWS (6)  
RESERVE BATTERY  
CONNECTOR  
KPSU16A  
POWER SUPPLY  
BATT  
±
MOUNTING HOLE  
AND SCREW  
PULL  
LOCK  
PUSH  
UNLOCK  
DC POWER  
SWITCH  
AC  
DC  
DC POWER  
AC POWER CABLE  
FG SCREW  
(LEFT SIDE)  
–24V CIRCUIT  
BREAKER  
(RIGHT SIDE)  
DC CABLE  
KRCU  
(FG) GREEN/YELLOW  
WIRE WITH RING  
TERMINAL THAT IS  
FASTENED TO  
POWER SUPPLY  
FG SCREW  
FG1 GREEN/YELLOW WIRE RUN  
UNDERNEATH POWER SUPPLY  
BEHIND STAND-OFFS  
DC OUT (P9) CONNECTOR  
(KPSU16 VOLTAGE TEST POINTS)  
GREEN/YELLOW WIRE  
(RIGHT-HAND SIDE)  
FIGURE 5-10  
POWER SUPPLY (KPSU16)  
7) Plug the AC power cable into an outlet and  
turn ON the power supply switch.  
4) Plug the DC cable into the DC OUT connector.  
Green/yellowwireisonright-handside(Figure  
5-10).  
8) Refer to Paragraph 2.10 to confirm that the  
power supply is working properly.  
5) Fasten FG green/yellow wire ring terminal and  
building ground wire to the left side of the  
power supply with the FG screw.  
9) Plug reserve battery cable into BATT connec-  
tor of power supply (Figure 5-10).  
6) Re-install K4RCU PCB (if required).  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
CO line circuits; one or two KCDUs which provide  
two CO line circuits and four digital telephone  
circuits(ports);aPDKUwhichprovideseightdigital  
telephone circuits (ports); a PEKU which provides  
eight electronic telephone circuits (ports); a PESU  
which provides two standard and four electronic  
telephone circuits (ports); a PSTU which provides  
eight standard telephone circuits (ports); and a  
PIOU or PIOUS which both provide a port for a  
StationMessageDetailRecording(SMDR)device,  
an interface for remote maintenance, and relay  
control options.  
PART II. DK16 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD  
INSTALLATION  
4 GENERAL  
4.01 Thischapterprovidesproceduresforinstalla-  
tionofSTRATADK16systemprintedcircuitboards  
(PCBs) into the Base and Expansion units. This  
includes installation instructions, optional configu-  
ration information, and wiring and programming  
considerations for each PCB.  
4.02 Be sure the power supply has been tested,  
andthegroundhasbeenchecked. (SeeChapter5,  
Section I for the power supply and Chapter 3 for  
grounding.)  
5.22TheDK16ExpansionUnitdoesnotcomefrom  
the factory with any PCBs installed. Any of the  
PCBs listed above can fit into any of the unit's four  
universal slots; however, it is recommended that  
PCBs that support electronic or digital telephones  
be installed into Slots 04 and 05, because Slots 06  
and 07 cannot support Off-hook Call Announce or  
Data Interface Units (DIUs).  
4.03 It is recommended to install the Base Unit  
option PCBs K4RCU and/or KSTU before mount-  
ing the Base KSU on the wall.  
4.04 Begin Expansion PCB installation only after  
completionofExpansionUnitinstallation(seeChap-  
ter 5, Section I).  
Recommended PCB slot assignments:  
KCDU — Slot 04 and 05 (2 maximum)  
PDKU, PEKU, PESU, PSTU — Slot 04 (1 maxi-  
mum, cannot be installed with KCDU.)  
5 DK16 PCB INSTALLATION  
CONSIDERATIONS  
PCOU — Slot 05 (1 maximum, cannot be in-  
stalled with KCDU.)  
5.01 The STRATA DK16 Base Unit comes stan-  
dard with eight digital telephone circuits (ports) and  
four CO line circuits. The digital circuits are inte-  
grated into the motherboard, and the CO line cir-  
cuits are on the KCOU which is attached to the P6  
and P7 connectors on the motherboard. The com-  
mon control unit, like the digital telephone circuits,  
is built into the motherboard.  
PIOU/PIOUS — Slot 06 (1 maximum)  
5.30 PCB Option Considerations  
5.31 PCBs may be configured for a variety of  
hardware and software options. Hardware options  
are defined as either internal (generally related to  
optional PCB subassemblies) or external (related  
to connection of peripheral equipment such as  
background music, voice mail, etc). Hardware and  
software options for each PCB are identified in the  
individual PCB installation procedures in this chap-  
ter.  
5.10 DK16 Base Unit PCBs  
5.11 The Base Unit can support an optional KSTU  
printed circuit board (PCB) which provides four  
standard telephone circuits (ports). In addition, a  
K4RCU PCB can be installed to receive DTMF  
tones, and detect busy tone for Automatic Busy  
Redial (ABR) operation.  
5.32 PCB Hardware Options. Each PCB must be  
configured for the applicable hardware options  
prior to installation of the PCB. Configuration in-  
structions for internal hardware options are pro-  
vided in the individual PCB installation procedures  
in this chapter. Configuration instructions for exter-  
nal hardware options are provided in Peripheral  
Installation, Section 100-816-207.  
5.20 DK16 Expansion Unit PCBs  
5.21 The Expansion Unit can support a number of  
PCBs: it can support a PCOU which provides four  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
5.33 PCB Software Options. PCBs are config-  
ured for software options through programming,  
after installation of the PCBs in the KSU. A pro-  
grammingoverviewforeachPCBisprovidedinthe  
individual PCB installation procedures in this chap-  
ter. RefertotheProgrammingProcedures, Section  
100-816-300, for detailed programming instruc-  
tions.  
NOTE:  
For the system to recognize the Dual-Tone  
Multi-Frequency (DTMF) tones generated by  
standardtelephones(oranyotherdevicecon-  
nected to a KSTU port), a K4RCU must be  
installed in the Base Unit.  
6.02 The KSTU is shown in Figure 5-11 and its  
connectors and controls are described in Table 5-  
A.  
5.40 PCB Installation/Power Supply Consider-  
ations  
6.10 KSTU Configuration  
5.41 Whenever removing or installing PCBs it is  
6.11 The KSTU only has to be configured for the  
ring generator voltage level, nothing else. Before  
installingtheKSTUintheBaseUnit,settheSW540  
ring generator to 130V P-P or 190V P-P. Most  
standard telephones and two-wire devices require  
190; however, some devices may experience ring-  
trip at 190, and should be set at 130.  
recommended that the power supply be OFF.  
6 BASE UNIT STANDARD TELEPHONE  
INTERFACE UNIT (KSTU)  
6.00 General  
6.01 The optional KSTU provides four standard  
telephone circuits and it can only be installed in the  
Base Unit. The KSTU supports the two-wire de-  
vicessuchasstandardtelephones, AutoAttendant  
devices, voice mail machines, and facsimile ma-  
chines. The KSTU can also support an alternate  
Background Music (BGM) source on circuit 4.  
6.20 KSTU Installation Procedure  
6.21InstalltheKSTUinaccordancewiththefollow-  
ing steps:  
1) Make sure that the power supply switch is  
MOUNTING  
SCREW  
PLASTIC  
STAND-OFF  
RED  
(WIRE)  
RED  
3 2 1  
MOUNTING  
SCREW  
SW540  
130 190  
FIGURE 5-11  
KSTU OPTIONS AND CONNECTORS  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE 5-A  
KSTU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS  
CONTROL/INDICATOR/  
CONNECTOR  
TYPE OF COMPONENT  
DESCRIPTION  
(Figure 5-11)  
Sets ring generator voltage level for all  
circuits:  
Ring Voltage Jumper  
Plug SW540  
Three-terminal jumper  
H = 190V P-P  
L = 130V P-P  
Mates to male connector P8 on the  
motherboard.  
Connector P508  
Female Connector  
Connects to P4 connector on the  
motherboard.  
Connector Cable P504 Cable  
OFF.  
Program 10-2  
Used to set standard telephone ringing option.  
Not required for Background Music (BGM) con-  
nection.  
2) Plug the KSTU cable into the P4 connector on  
the motherboard in the Base Unit. The red  
wire on the cable should match up with pin 1  
on the lower side of the connector.  
Program 19  
Used for BGM connection to KSTU Port 11.  
3) Plug the KSTU P508 female connector into  
the P8 male connector on the motherboard.  
NOTE:  
KSTU Ports (08~11) are fixed. They are as-  
signed even if a KSTU is not installed.  
4) SecuretheKSTU tothestandoffswiththetwo  
provided screws.  
6.30 KSTU Wiring  
7 DIGITAL TELEPHONE INTERFACE  
UNIT (PDKU)  
7.00 General  
6.31 Refer to Base Unit Wiring in Section 100-816-  
208 for KSTU wiring.  
6.32 The KSTU must be connected to a OL13A (or  
equivalent) type lines for off-premises stations.  
(300 ohms loop resistance max., including the  
telephone or other devices DC off hook resistance.  
7.01 The Digital Telephone Interface Unit (PDKU)  
provides eight ports/circuits for digital telephones  
and it can only be installed in the Expansion Unit.  
The PDKU can also support Integrated Data Inter-  
faceUnits(PDIU-DIs/PDIU-DI2s),Stand-aloneData  
Interface Units (PDIU-DSs), a Digital Door Phone/  
Lock Control Unit (DDCB), a Digital Direct Station  
Selection Console (DDSS), and Add-on Modules  
(ADMs). The DDSS console, DDCB, and PDIU-  
DSs are wired directly to the PDKU and require no  
additional hardware, but do require their own dedi-  
cated ports/circuits. The PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2 or the  
ADM shares with its accompanying digital tele-  
6.40 KSTU Programming Overview  
6.41Thefollowingparametersmaybespecifiedfor  
the KSTU:  
Program 03  
Specify code 31 for KSTU slot.  
Program 31  
Used to configure all KSTU ports connected to  
voice mail (see Chapter 7 for voice mail installa-  
tion).  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
phone the same wire pair and circuit on the PDKU.  
The PDKU (Figure 5-12) has no controls.  
NOTE:  
There are two versions of the PDKU: PDKU1,  
and PDKU2. These versions are identical  
except for the number of Data Interface Units  
(DIUs)theycansupport(seeParagraphs7.14  
and 7.15). Also, PDKU2 supports continuous  
DTMF tones with 2000-series digital tele-  
phones,butPDKU1doesnotsupportcontinu-  
ous DTMF tones.  
NOTE:  
The PDIU-DI attaches to 1000-series Digital  
Telephones, and the PDIU-DI2 attaches to  
2000-series Digital Telephones.  
7.10 PDKU Hardware Options  
7.11 The PDKU supports the hardware options  
noted below. Unlike the other PCBs, there are no  
7.12 Hardware Configuration  
controls on the PDKU that need to be set for  
options.  
7.13 DDSSConsoleConfiguration.RefertoSta-  
tion Apparatus Installation, Section 100-816-206,  
for installation procedures for the DDSS console.  
The DDSS console requires dedicated use of Cir-  
cuit 8 of the PDKU.  
Internal option:  
none  
External option:  
DDSS console  
PDIU-DS  
7.14 PDIU-DS Configuration. Refer to Peripher-  
als Installation, Section 100-816-207, for installa-  
tion procedures for the PDIU-DS. A PDIU-DS can  
be connected to Circuits 1 ~ 7 on a PDKU1 or  
PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2  
DDCB  
50-PIN AMPHENOL CONNECTOR (FEMALE)  
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR  
FIGURE 5-12  
PDKU INTERFACE CONNECTION  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
Circuits 1 ~ 8 on a PDKU2; the circuit must be  
dedicated to the PDIU-DS.  
for a DDSS console and OCA.  
Programs 20, 21, and 22  
UsetoconfigurePDIU-DIs/PDIU-DI2sandPDIU-  
DSs.  
Programs 28 and 29  
Use for DDSS assignments.  
Program 30  
Adjusts initial off-hook volume level for digital  
telephone handsets.  
Program 92-5  
7.15 PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2 Configuration. Refer to  
Station Apparatus Installation, Section 100-816-  
206, and Peripherals Installation, Chapter 7, for  
installation procedures for the PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2.  
PDIU-DIs/PDIU-DI2s can be equipped with any  
digital telephone connected to PDKU Circuits 1 ~ 7  
with PDKU1 or Circuits 1 ~ 8 with PDKU2.  
Initializes initial ringing, speaker, and muted ring  
volume levels of digital telephones.  
Programs 77-1, 77-2, and 79  
Used for DDCB and door phone assignments  
7.16 DDCB Configuration. Refer to Peripherals  
Installation, Section 100-816-207, for installation  
procedures for the DDCB. The DDCB must be  
connected to the Circuit 8 on the PDKU.  
7.17 ADM Configuration. Refer to Section 100-  
816-206, Paragraph 7.00.  
8 ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE  
INTERFACE UNIT (PEKU)  
7.20 PDKU Installation Procedure  
8.00 General  
7.21 Install the PDKU in accordance with the fol-  
lowing steps:  
8.01 The Electronic Telephone Interface Unit  
(PEKU) provides eight ports for electronic tele-  
phones and it must be installed in the Expansion  
Unit. It is recommended that the current 6500-  
series be used, because this series consumes the  
least amount of power.  
1) Remove the PCB from its protective packag-  
ing.  
2) Insert the PDKU into the appropriate slot (see  
Paragraph 5.22, and apply firm, even pres-  
sure to ensure proper mating of connectors.  
8.02 The PEKU can be configured to receive Off-  
hook Call Announce (OCA) by installing an Off-  
hook Call Announce Unit (EOCU). It can also be  
configured to support an HDSS console and an  
externalBackgroundMusic(BGM)sourceconnec-  
tor. An external amplifier for two-CO line confer-  
ence calls can also be connected to Circuits 6 and  
7 of the PEKU. The HDSS console, the external  
amplifier, andtheBGMsource, arewireddirectlyto  
the PEKU and require no additional hardware, but  
do require specific ports/circuits. Electronic tele-  
phonesalsowiredirectlytothePEKU,andtheycan  
be connected to any PEKU circuit.  
NOTE:  
Ensure the PDKU's component side is facing  
right when installing it in the KSU.  
4) After installing the PDKU, gently pull the PCB  
outward.Iftheconnectorsareproperlymated,  
a slight resistance will be felt.  
7.30 PDKU Wiring  
7.31 Refer to PDKU Wiring Diagrams, Chapter 8,  
for wiring/interconnecting details.  
7.40 PDKU Programming Overview  
7.41 The following parameters may be specified,  
through programming, for the PDKU:  
Program 03  
8.03 PEKU controls and interface connectors are  
shown in Figure 5-13 and described in Table 5-B.  
Specify code 61 if no options are installed on a  
PDKU.  
8.10 PEKU Hardware Options  
Specify code 62 to indicate a PDKU that will  
support stations that must receive Off-hook Call  
Announce (OCA).  
8.11 The PEKU supports the following hardware  
options:  
Internal Options  
Off-hook Call Announce Unit (EOCU)  
External Options  
• Specify code 64 to indicate a PDKU configured  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
50-PIN AMPHENOL CONNECTOR (FEMALE)  
SW1  
W5, cut for  
BGM option  
W5  
P40  
P10  
P20  
P50 P60  
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR  
FIGURE 5-13  
PEKU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS  
HDSS console  
BGM source connection  
External Amplifier  
4) Use a 3-pair cable for making connections  
between the PEKU and the Off-hook Call  
Announce (OCA) electronic telephone. Refer  
to Wiring Diagrams, Section 100-816-208, for  
wiring/interconnecting details.  
8.12 Off-hook Call Announce (EOCU) Instal-  
lation. Install the Off-hook Call Announce Unit  
(EOCU) in accordance with the following steps:  
5) Refer to Station Apparatus Installation, Sec-  
tion 100-816-206, for procedures to upgrade  
electronic telephones for OCA.  
1) Remove the PCB from its protective packag-  
ing.  
8.13 HDSS Console Configuration. Configure  
the PEKU to support an HDSS console in accor-  
dance with the following steps:  
NOTE:  
PEKU connectors P10, P20, P40, P50, and  
P60 are positioned to allow installation of the  
EOCU only in the proper position (Figure 5-  
13).  
1) Remove the PCB from its protective packag-  
ing.  
2) Set the SW1 DSS/EKT switch to DSS.  
2) Mate EOCU connectors J10, J20, J40, J50,  
and J60 with PEKU connectors P10, P20,  
P40, P50, and P60 (Figure 5-14).  
3) Refer to Station Apparatus Installation, Sec-  
tion 100-816-206, for installation procedures  
for the HDSS console. The HDSS console  
requires dedicated use of Circuits 7 and 8 of  
the PEKU PCB.  
3) Apply firm, even pressure to EOCU to ensure  
proper mating of connectors.  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE 5-B  
PEKU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS  
CONTROL/INDICATOR/  
CONNECTOR (Figure 5-13)  
TYPE OF COMPONENT  
DESCRIPTION  
Off-hook Call  
Announce P10  
10-pin connector  
Interface connector for optional Off-hook  
Call Announce subassembly  
connector (used in conjunction with P20,  
P40, P50, and P60).  
Off-hook Call  
Announce P20  
10-pin connector  
10-pin connector  
10-pin connector  
10-pin connector  
Interface connector for optional Off-hook  
Call Announce subassembly  
connector (used in conjunction with P10,  
P40, P50, and P60).  
Off-hook Call  
Announce P40  
Interface connector for optional Off-hook  
Call Announce subassembly  
connector (used in conjunction with P10,  
P20, P50, and P60).  
Off-hook Call  
Announce P50  
Interface connector for optional Off-hook  
Call Announce subassembly  
connector (used in conjunction with P10,  
P20, P40, and P60).  
Off-hook Call  
Announce P60  
Interface connector for optional Off-hook  
Call Announce subassembly  
connector (used in conjunction with P10,  
P20, P40, and P50).  
DSS/EKT DSS Console/  
Electronic Telephone  
SW1 Switch  
Two-position slide switch  
White jumper wire  
Configures PEKU for operation with either  
an HDSS console or electronic  
telephones.  
BGM source connection  
W5 Jumper Wire  
When cut, configures PEKU for BGM  
source connection.  
8.14 Background Music (BGM) Configuration.  
Configure the PEKU to support a BGM source in  
accordance with the following steps:  
8.15  
External Amplifier Configuration. The  
PEKUdoesnothavetobeconfiguredtosupportan  
external amplifier. However, the system must be  
programmed for one; see Paragraph 8.40. See  
Peripherals Installation, Section 100-816-207, for  
external amplifier installation instructions.  
1) Remove the PCB from its protective pack-  
aging.  
2) Cut the W5 (BGM) jumper wire on the PEKU  
8.20 PEKU Installation Procedure  
PCB.  
8.21 Install the PEKU in accordance with the fol-  
lowing steps:  
3) Refer to Peripherals Installation, Section 100-  
816-207, for installation procedures for BGM  
connection.  
1) Remove the PCB from its protective pack-  
aging.  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
Specify code 24 to indicate a PEKU configured  
for OCA and an HDSS console.  
J60  
Program 10-2  
J40  
Used for BGM connection.  
Program 10-3  
J50  
Used for external amplifier connection.  
Program 19  
Also used for BGM connection.  
Programs 28 and 29  
Used for HDSS assignments.  
9 STANDARD TELEPHONE  
INTERFACE UNIT (PSTU)  
J20  
J10  
9.00 General  
9.01 The Standard Telephone Interface Unit  
(PSTU) provides an interface between standard  
telephones or two-wire devices and the system,  
and it must be installed in the Expansion Unit. The  
PSTU PCB adds eight standard telephone lines to  
the system. The PSTU can also support a Back-  
ground Music (BGM) source.  
FIGURE 5-14  
OFF-HOOK CALL ANNOUNCE UNIT (EOCU)  
INTERFACE CONNECTORS  
2) Ensure the PEKU has been configured for the  
appropriate hardware options (refer to Para-  
graph 8.10).  
NOTE:  
3) InsertthePEKUintotheappropriateslot(refer  
toParagraph5.22), andapplyfirm, evenpres-  
sure to ensure proper mating of connectors.  
For the system to recognize the Dual-Tone  
Multi-Frequency (DTMF) tones generated by  
a standard telephone (or any other device  
connected to a PSTU port), a DTMF Receiver  
Unit (K4RCU) must be installed in the Base  
Unit.  
4) After installing the PEKU, gently pull the PCB  
outward.Iftheconnectorsareproperlymated,  
a slight resistance will be felt.  
9.02 PSTU controls are shown in Figure 5-15 and  
described in Table 5-C.  
8.30 PEKU Wiring  
8.31 Refer to PEKU Wiring Diagrams, Section  
100-816-208, for wiring/interconnecting details.  
9.10 PSTU (1 and 2) Hardware Options  
8.40 PEKU Programming Overview  
9.11 There are two PSTU versions (1 and 2): They  
are identical except for the ring generator. The ring  
generator on the original version (V.3) of PSTU1 is  
fixed at a 190V P-P level, while the ring generator  
on PSTU1 (V.4) and PSTU2 can be set for 130V P-  
P or 190V P-P. The W1 jumper plug is used to set  
the voltage level. Most standard telephones and  
two-wire devices require the 190V P-P level; how-  
ever, some devices may experience ring-trip with  
190V P-P and they require the 130V P-P level.  
8.41 The following parameters may be specified,  
through programming, for the PEKU:  
Program 03  
Specify code 21 to indicate a station line PEKU.  
Specify code 22 to indicate a PEKU configured  
for OCA.  
Specify code 23 to indicate a PEKU configured  
for an HDSS console.  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
50-PIN AMPHENOL CONNECTOR (FEMALE)  
W1  
W1 Ring Voltage  
H
L
H = 190V P-P  
SSTU  
SUBUNIT  
L = 130V P-P  
(For PSTU1 (V.4)  
and PSTU2 only)  
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR  
FIGURE 5-15  
PSTU AND SUBUNIT (SSTU)  
TABLE 5-C  
PSTU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS  
CONTROL/INDICATOR/  
CONNECTOR  
TYPE OF COMPONENT  
DESCRIPTION  
(Figure 5-15)  
Sets ring generator voltage level for all  
circuits.  
H = 190V P-P  
Ring Voltage W1 Jumper Three-terminal jumper  
Plug (PSTU1 (  
PSTU2 only)  
) and  
V.4  
L = 130V P-P  
NOTE:  
9.13UnlikethePEKUorPESU, thePSTUdoesnot  
have to be configured for BGM: There is no jumper  
wire to cut, etc.  
PSTU1 (V.4) became available in November  
1989. PSTU1(V.3) was discontinued.  
9.20 PSTU Installation Procedure  
9.12 SetthePSTU1(V.4)orPSTU2ringgenerator  
level as required:  
9.21 Install the PSTU in accordance with the fol-  
lowing steps:  
W1 set to H (190V P-P).  
1) Remove the PCB from its protective packag-  
ing. The protective shield on the back of the  
PSTU is designed to protect the installer from  
W1 set to L (130V P-P).  
Two ringers maximum per port (H or L).  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
potentially hazardous ring voltage. Do not  
remove this shield.  
four electronic telephone interface circuits (5 ~ 8)  
identical to PEKU circuits for connecting electronic  
telephones, BGM or an external amplifier. The  
PESU provides a ring generator for circuits 1 and 2  
(with a ring voltage of either 190V P-P or 130V P-  
P), and it must be installed in the Expansion Unit.  
2) Ensure that the PSTU subunit (SSTU) is se-  
curelyattachedtothePSTU(refertoFigure5-  
15).  
NOTE:  
The PESU does not support an HDSS console  
connection.  
W1, the ring generator level option, should be  
set in the H position (factory) for initial instal-  
lation.  
The PESU provides connectors to mount the  
EOCU for OCA to electronic telephones.  
3) InsertthePSTUintotheappropriateslot(refer  
toParagraph5.22), andapplyfirm, evenpres-  
sure to ensure proper mating of connectors.  
NOTE:  
A KSU must be installed in the Base Unit for  
the system to recognize Dual-Tone Multi-  
Frequency (DTMF) tones sent from standard  
telephones or other two-wire devices that are  
connected to the PESU.  
9.30 PSTU Wiring  
9.31 Refer to PSTU Wiring Diagram, Section 100-  
816-208, for wiring/interconnecting details.  
10.02 The PESU controls and interface connec-  
tors are shown in Figure 5-16 and described in  
Table 5-D.  
9.32 The PSTU is registered for use with OL13A  
type lines for off-premises stations.  
10.10 PESU Hardware Options  
9.40 PSTU Programming Overview  
10.11 The PESU supports the following hardware  
options:  
9.41 The following parameters may be specified,  
through programming, for the PSTU:  
Program 03  
Specify code 31 for all slots that have PSTUs  
installed.  
Program 31  
Internal option: Off-hook Call Announce  
(EOCU).  
NOTE:  
Refer to Section 100-816-206 and Section  
100-816-207 for installation of external op-  
tions.  
Used to configure all PSTU ports connected to  
voice mail (Section 100-816-207 for more de-  
tails).  
Program 10-2  
10.12 Off-hookCallAnnounce(EOCU)Installa-  
tion. Install the Off-hook Call Announce in accor-  
dance with the following steps:  
Used to set standard telephone ringing option.  
Also used for BGM connection.  
Program 19  
Used for BGM connection also.  
1) Remove the PCB from its protective packag-  
ing.  
10 STANDARD/ELECTRONIC TELE-  
PHONE INTERFACE UNIT (PESU)  
NOTE:  
PESU connectors P10, P20, P40, P50, and  
P60 are positioned to allow installation of the  
EOCU only in the proper position (refer to  
Figure 5-16).  
10.00 General  
10.01 The Standard/Electronic Telephone Inter-  
face Unit (PESU) provides two standard telephone  
interfacecircuits(1and2)identicaltoPSTUcircuits  
for connection between standard telephones, or  
two-wire devices, and the system. It also provides  
2) Mate the EOCU connectors J10, J20, J40,  
J50, and J60 with the PESU connectors P10,  
P20, P40, P50, andP60 (refer to Figure 5-16).  
5-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
CUT W7 ONLY IF BGM IS CONNECTED TO  
CIRCUIT 8.  
P60  
P50  
W7  
P40  
OPTIONAL  
EOCU, EQUIP  
FOR OCA  
FEATURE  
50-PIN  
AMPHENOL  
CONNECTOR  
(FEMALE)  
P10  
P20  
ESTS  
BACKPLANE  
CONNECTOR  
P80  
P70  
UP  
L
H
P90  
PESU  
RING VOLTAGE OPTION (CIRCUITS 1 & 2):  
L = LOW LEVEL (130V P-P)  
H = HIGH LEVEL (190V P-P)  
ESTS: STANDARD TELEPHONE  
INTERFACE, ALWAYS EQUIPPED  
FROM FACTORY  
NOTE: Connect two ringers maximum per port (H or L).  
FIGURE 5-16  
PESU PCB OPTION LOCATION AND IDENTIFICATION  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE 5-D  
PESU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS  
CONTROL/INDICATOR/  
CONNECTOR (Figure 5-16)  
TYPE OF COMPONENT  
DESCRIPTION  
Interface connector for optional Off-hook  
Call Announce subassembly  
connector (used in conjunction with P20,  
P40, P50, and P60).  
Off-hook Call  
Announce P10  
10-pin connector  
Interface connector for optional Off-hook  
Call Announce subassembly  
connector (used in conjunction with P10,  
P40, P50, and P60).  
Off-hook Call  
Announce P20  
10-pin connector  
10-pin connector  
10-pin connector  
10-pin connector  
Three-terminal jumper  
White jumper wire  
Interface connector for optional Off-hook  
Call Announce subassembly  
connector (used in conjunction with P10,  
P20, P50, and P60).  
Off-hook Call  
Announce P40  
Interface connector for optional Off-hook  
Call Announce subassembly  
connector (used in conjunction with P10,  
P20, P40, and P60).  
Off-hook Call  
Announce P50  
Interface connector for optional Off-hook  
Call Announce subassembly  
connector (used in conjunction with P10,  
P20, P40, and P50).  
Off-hook Call  
Announce P60  
Sets ring generator voltage level for  
circuits 1 and 2.  
H = 190V P-P (factory setting)  
L = 130V P-P  
Ring Voltage Jumper  
Plug P90  
BGM W7 Jumper Pack  
When cut, configures PESU, circuit 8,  
for BGM source connection.  
10.13 Background Music (BGM) Configura-  
tion. ConfigurethePESUtosupportaBGMsource  
in accordance with the following steps:  
3) Apply firm, even pressure to the EOCU to  
ensure proper mating of connectors.  
1) Remove the PCB from its protective packag-  
ing.  
4) Use3-paircableforconnectingthePESUand  
the OCA electronic telephone (refer to Wiring  
Diagrams, Section 100-816-208, for wiring/  
interconnecting details).  
2) Cut the W7 (BGM) jumper wire on the PESU  
PCB.  
3) Refer to Peripherals Installation, Section 100-  
816-207, for BGM installation procedures.  
5) Refer to Station Apparatus Installation, Sec-  
tion 100-816-206, for procedures to add OCA  
to electronic telephones.  
10.14 External Amplifier Configuration. The  
PESUdoesnothavetobeconfiguredtosupportan  
5-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
external amplifier. However, the system must be  
programmed for one; see Paragraph 10.40. The  
external amplifier requires Circuits 6 and 7 on the  
PESU. See Peripherals Installation, Section 100-  
816-207, for external amplifier installation instruc-  
tions.  
Program 03  
Specify code 25 for all slots that have PESUs  
without EOCU.  
Specify code 26 for all slots that have PESUs  
equipped with EOCU.  
NOTE:  
AspecialcodeisnotrequiredtoconnectBGM  
to a PESU.  
10.20 PESU Installation Procedure  
10.21 Install the PESU in accordance with the  
following steps:  
Program 31  
Configures the PESU Circuits 1 and 2 for con-  
nection to voice mail devices.  
Program 10-2  
1) Remove the PCB from its protective packag-  
ing. The protective shield on the back of the  
PESU is designed to protect the installer from  
potentially hazardous ring voltage. Do not  
remove this shield.  
Sets the standard telephone ring cadence for  
normal or distinctive ringing and BGM source  
connection.  
Program 10-3  
2) Ensure that the PESU subunit (ESTS) is  
securely attached to the PESU (refer to Figure  
5-15).  
Used for external amplifier connection.  
Program 19  
Also used for BGM connection.  
3) If the electronic telephones connected to the  
PESU must receive OCA calls, install the  
EOCU subassembly PCB on the PESU per  
Paragraph 10.12.  
11 CO LINE UNIT (PCOU)  
11.00 General  
11.01 The PCOU PCB adds four CO lines to the  
systemanditcanonlybeinstalledintheExpansion  
Unit. The PCOU provides Ring Detection, Dial  
Outpulsing and Hold; as well as Automatic Busy  
Redial (ABR) circuitry. Each CO line can be pro-  
grammed for Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)  
or dial pulse.  
4) If a BGM source is connected to the PESU,  
Circuit 8, cut W7.  
5) Ensure that the ring voltage option, P90, is set  
tothe“H”positionforinitialinstallation.The“L”  
position is used if devices connected to the  
PESU trip ring voltage before answer.  
NOTE:  
There are two PCOU versions (1 and 2). They  
are identical in fit/form/function and are inter-  
changeable in all DK system models.  
6) Insert the PESU into the appropriate slot, and  
apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper  
mating of connectors.  
11.02 PCOU controls, indicators, and interface  
connectorsareshowninFigure5-17anddescribed  
in Table 5-E.  
7) After installing the PESU, gently pull the PCB  
outward.Iftheconnectorsareproperlymated,  
a slight resistance will be felt.  
11.10 PCOU Hardware Options  
10.30 PESU Wiring  
11.11 There are no hardware options supported  
by the PCOU.  
10.31 Refer to PESU Wiring Diagram, Section  
100-816-208, for wiring/interconnecting details.  
11.20 PCOU Installation Procedure  
10.40 PESU Programming Overview  
11.21 Install the PCOU in accordance with the  
10.41 The following parameters may be specified,  
following steps:  
through programming, for the PESU:  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
1) Remove the PCB from its protective packag-  
ing.  
11.30 PCOU Wiring  
11.31 Refer to PCOU Wiring Diagram, Section  
NOTE:  
100-816-208, for wiring/interconnecting details.  
The dB PAD switches SW101 through SW401  
control excessive loudness resulting from close  
proximity to the CO or PBX telephone office by  
providinga3decibel(dB)signalleveldropto, or  
from, the PBX or CO when set to the 3 position.  
Switches are factory-set to the 0 (0 dB signal  
level drop) position.  
11.40 PCOU Programming Overview  
11.41 The following parameters may be specified,  
through programming, for the PCOU:  
Program 03  
Specify code 11 for the slot in which the PCOU  
is installed.  
Program 10-1  
2) IftheExpansionUnitislocatedwithinonemile  
ofthePBXorCOtelephoneoffice,setdBPAD  
switches SW101 through SW401 to the 3 (-3  
dB signal level drop) position.  
Allows/denies two-CO Line Conference and Di-  
rect Inward System Access (DISA).  
Program 15  
Assigns DTMF/Dial Pulse (DP) Dialing, Tenant  
Service, DISA, and other attributes to each CO  
line.  
3) Insert the PCOU into the appropriate slot  
(refer to Paragraph 2.22), and apply firm,  
even pressure to ensure proper mating of  
connectors.  
Program 16  
Assigns CO lines to groups 81 ~ 88, and dial 9  
group.  
Program 40  
Assigns stations access to CO lines (incoming  
and outgoing access).  
4) After installing the PCOU, gently pull the PCB  
outward.Iftheconnectorsareproperlymated,  
a slight resistance will be felt.  
CO LINE MODULAR  
JACK CIRCUITS 1 AND 2  
CO LINE MODULAR  
JACK CIRCUITS 3 AND 4  
CO LINE  
LED'S  
1
2
3
4
SW401  
SW301  
SW201  
SW101  
0
3
0
3
0
3
PAD  
PAD  
PAD  
0
3
PAD  
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR  
FIGURE 5-17  
PCOU CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS  
5-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE 5-E  
PCOU CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS  
CONTROL/INDICATOR/  
CONNECTOR  
(Figure 5-17)  
TYPE OF COMPONENT  
Red LED  
DESCRIPTION  
CO Line Circuit 1  
Indicator CD112  
Lights to indicate CO line circuit 1 is in  
operation (NOTE: CO line indicator will  
not light unless PCOU is connected to  
a CO).  
CO Line Circuit 2  
Indicator CD212  
Lights to indicate CO line circuit 2 is in  
operation (NOTE: CO line indicator will  
not light unless PCOU is connected to  
a CO).  
Red LED  
Red LED  
Red LED  
CO Line Circuit 3  
Indicator CD312  
Lights to indicate CO line circuit 3 is in  
operation (NOTE: CO line indicator will  
not light unless PCOU is connected to  
a CO).  
CO Line Circuit 4  
Indicator CD412  
Lights to indicate CO line circuit 4 is in  
operation (NOTE: CO line indicator will  
not light unless PCOU is connected to  
a CO).  
Modular connector  
Modular connector  
Two-position slide  
Two-position slide  
Two-position slide  
Two-position slide  
Interface connector for CO line circuits  
1 and 2.  
J1 Connector  
Interface connector for CO line circuits  
3 and 4.  
J2 Connector  
Enables 3dB signal level drop for CO line  
circuit 1.  
PAD Switch SW101  
PAD Switch SW201  
PAD Switch SW301  
PAD Switch SW401  
Enables 3dB signal level drop for CO line  
circuit 2.  
Enables 3dB signal level drop for CO line  
circuit 3.  
Enables 3dB signal level drop for CO line  
circuit 4.  
Program 41  
Program 78  
Assigns stations access to CO lines (outgoing  
only).  
Assigns special ringing of CO lines: Night Ring  
Over Page, DISA, IMDU.  
Program 42-0, 1-8  
Programs 81 ~ 89  
Assigns behind PBX/CENTREX operation to  
each CO line.  
Programs 45 ~ 48  
Assigns CO lines to ring selected stations.  
Assigns Delayed Ringing to any CO line.  
Program 93  
Defines Toll Restrictions for any CO line.  
Programs 50 ~ 56  
Assigns names to CO lines.  
Defines Least Cost Routing using CO lines.  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
Internal Options  
Remote Maintenance Modem Unit (IMDU)  
External Options  
12 OPTION INTERFACE UNIT  
(PIOU AND PIOUS)  
12.00 General  
Alarm Sensor  
Local Maintenance Terminal or Modem  
SMDR Printer or Call Accounting Port  
Remote Maintenance Port  
Relay control options  
12.01 The Option Interface Unit (PIOU or PIOUS)  
provides a circuit interface with peripheral options.  
A maximum of one PIOU or PIOUS PCB can be  
installed in the system. The PIOU and PIOUS  
support the same options, except the PIOUS  
does not support Zone Paging (see Paragraph  
12.11).  
Zone Page via relays (PIOU only)  
NOTE:  
Refer to Peripheral Equipment Installation,  
Section 100-816-207, for installation of exter-  
nal options.  
12.02 PIOU controls, indicators, and interface  
connectors are shown in Figure 5-18 and de-  
scribed in Table 5-F. PIOUS information is pro-  
vided in Figure 5-19 and Table 5-G.  
12.12 RemoteMaintenanceModemUnit(IMDU)  
Installation. Install the Remote Maintenance Mo-  
dem Unit (IMDU) in accordance with the following  
steps:  
12.03 The internal 600 ohm or 3 watt page am-  
plifier of the PIOU is not supported by Strata  
DK16.  
12.10 PIOU and PIOUS Hardware Options  
1) Remove the PCB from its protective packag-  
ing.  
12.11 The PIOU and PIOUS support the following  
STRATA DK16 hardware options:  
50-PIN AMPHENOL CONNECTOR (FEMALE)  
SW2  
SMDR TTY  
J3  
P11  
1200  
SPO  
B
SW1  
P10  
B
300  
TTY  
P12  
SPI  
P13  
SW3  
MODEM  
P1  
P2  
P3  
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR  
FIGURE 5-18  
PIOU CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS  
5-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE 5-F  
PIOU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS  
CONTROL/INDICATOR/  
CONNECTOR  
TYPE OF COMPONENT  
DESCRIPTION  
(Figure 5-18)  
Dual modular connector  
Interface connector for SMDR printer/  
call accounting device and  
maintenance terminal/modem.  
SMDR/TTY Interface  
Connector J3  
IMDU Connector P1  
IMDU Connector P2  
IMDU Connector P3  
10-pin connector  
9-pin connector  
3-pin connector  
Interface connector for Remote  
Maintenance Modem piggy-back module.  
Interface connector for Remote  
Maintenance Modem piggy-back module.  
Interface connector for Remote  
Maintenance Modem piggy-back module.  
M/B Make/Break  
Jumper Plug P10  
Three-terminal jumper plug  
Three-terminal jumper plug  
Three-terminal jumper plug  
Three-terminal jumper plug  
External Page/Door Lock Control Relay  
MAKE or BREAK jumper plug.  
M/B Make/Break  
Jumper Plug P11  
Night/Hold Relay MAKE or BREAK  
jumper plug.  
Alarm Sensor N.O./N.C.  
Jumper Plug P12  
Alarm sensor normally open or normally  
closed jumper plug.  
CCITT/BELL Jumper  
Plug P13  
IMDU or external modem operating  
specification jumper plug.  
Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for  
SMDR printer or call accounting device.  
SMDR Baud Rate  
Switch SW1  
Two-position slide switch  
Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for  
Remote Maintenance Modem piggy-back  
module (IMDU) or external TTY jack.  
Two-position locking push-  
button switch  
TTY Baud Rate Switch  
SW2  
Modem/TTY Switch  
SW3  
Enables PIOU for operation with IMDU  
modem or TTY jack.  
Two-position slide switch  
2) Set the SW2 baud rate switch on the front  
panel to 300 or 1200, as appropriate, after the  
PIOU/PIOUShasbeeninstalledintheExpan-  
sion Unit (in-300 bps—out-1200 bps).  
(refer to Figure 5-20).  
NOTE:  
PIOU or PIOUS connectors P1, P2, and P3  
arepositionedtoallowinstallationoftheIMDU  
only in the proper position.  
3) Set SW3 to MODEM position for IMDU opera-  
6) Apply firm, even pressure to IMDU to ensure  
proper mating of connectors.  
tion.  
NOTE:  
4) Set the P13 jumper plug on the PIOU to the  
BELL position; or, cut the W4 jumper on the  
PIOUS for BELL operation.  
The IMDU default station intercom number is  
619;andIMDUcommunication parametersare  
7-bits, even parity, 1-stop bit.  
5) Mate IMDU connectors J1, J2, and J3 with  
7) Refer to Programming Procedures, Section  
100-816-300, Program 77-1, and set LED 14  
to ON to enable IMDU operation.  
PIOU or PIOUS connectors P1, P2, and P3  
5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
W4 NOT FACTORY  
INSTALLED FOR BELL  
MODEM SPECIFICATION  
J3  
SW1  
SW3  
TTY  
CCITT  
BELL  
W4 NORMAL OPEN  
W3  
SMDR  
NORMAL CLOSED  
IMDU  
P2  
P3  
SW2  
CD4  
P1  
OPTIONAL IMDU PCB  
REMOTE MAINTENANCE  
MODEM  
MAKE  
W1  
W2  
BREAK  
MAKE  
BREAK  
K2  
TBI  
BACKPLANE  
CONNECTOR  
TERMINAL  
STRIP  
K1  
PIOUS  
FIGURE 5-19  
PIOUS PCB SWITCH/JUMPER, OPTION LOCATION  
4) After installing the PIOU or PIOUS, gently pull  
the PCB outward. If the connectors are prop-  
erly mated, a slight resistance will be felt.  
NOTE:  
Refer to Remote Maintenance Procedures,  
Section 100-816-600, for information regard-  
ing the IMDU.  
12.30 PIOU and PIOUS Wiring  
12.31 Refer to Peripheral Equipment Installation  
(Section 100-816-207) and Wiring Diagrams (Sec-  
tion 100-816-208) for PIOU/PIOUS wiring/inter-  
connecting details.  
12.20 PIOU and PIOUS Installation Procedure  
12.21 Install the PIOU or PIOUS in accordance  
with the following steps:  
12.40 PIOUandPIOUSProgrammingOverview  
1) Remove the PCB from its protective packag-  
ing.  
12.41 The following parameters may be specified,  
through programming, for the PIOU and PIOUS:  
Program 77-1  
Assigns relay control and IMDU options.  
Program 60  
2) Ensure the PIOU or PIOUS has been config-  
ured for the appropriate hardware options  
(refer to Paragraph 12.10 and Section 100-  
816-207).  
Assigns SMDR options.  
Program 78  
3) Insert the PIOU or PIOUS into slot 06 in the  
ExpansionUnit,andapplyfirm,evenpressure  
to ensure proper mating of connectors.  
Enables Night Ringing over External Page.  
5-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE 5-G  
PIOUS CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS  
CONTROL/INDICATOR/  
CONNECTOR  
TYPE OF COMPONENT  
DESCRIPTION  
(Figure 5-19)  
Interface connector for SMDR printer/  
call accounting device and  
maintenance terminal/modem.  
SMDR/TTY Interface  
Connector J3  
Dual modular connector  
Interface connector for Remote  
Maintenance Modem piggy-back module.  
IMDU Connector P1  
IMDU Connector P2  
IMDU Connector P3  
10-pin connector  
9-pin connector  
Interface connector for Remote  
Maintenance Modem piggy-back module.  
Interface connector for Remote  
Maintenance Modem piggy-back module.  
3-pin connector  
Wire jumper  
Wire jumper  
Wire jumper  
Wire jumper  
M/B Make/Break Jumper  
W1  
External Page/Door Lock Control Relay  
MAKE or BREAK jumper.  
M/B Make/Break Jumper  
W2  
Night/Hold Relay MAKE or BREAK  
jumper.  
Alarm Sensor N.O./N.C.  
W3  
Alarm sensor normally open or normally  
closed jumper.  
CCITT/BELL Jumper  
W4*  
IMDU or external modem operating spec-  
ification jumper plug. (BELL = NO W4)  
Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for  
SMDR printer or call accounting device.  
SMDR Baud Rate  
Switch SW1  
Two-position slide switch  
Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for  
Remote Maintenance Modem piggy-back  
module (IMDU) or external TTY jack.  
TTY Baud Rate Switch  
SW2  
Two-position locking push-  
button switch  
Modem/TTY Switch  
SW3  
Enables PIOUS for operation with IMDU  
modem or TTY jack.  
Two-position slide switch  
*Most modems in USA require BELL specification: W4 not factory-installed.  
and a DDCB. The KCDU does not support a DDSS  
13 CO LINE/DIGITAL TELEPHONE  
INTERFACE UNIT (KCDU)  
console. One or two KCDU PCBs may be installed  
in the Expansion Unit. No other station or CO line  
PCB can be installed if the KCDU is installed.  
13.00 General  
13.01 The KCDU, which can only be installed in the  
ExpansionUnitofDK16(itwillnotfunctioninDK24/  
56/96), has two loop start CO line circuits and four  
digital telephone circuits. The KCDU digital tele-  
phone circuits can support all but one of the de-  
vices supported by either the PDKU or Base Unit  
integrated digital telephone circuits: digital tele-  
phones, PDIU-DIs/PDIU-D12s, PDIU-DSs, ADMs,  
13.02 The KCDU is shown is Figure 5-21, and its  
controls, connectors, and indicators are described  
in Table 5-H.  
13.10 KCDU Configuration  
13.11 The KCDU may have to be configured to  
control excessive loudness if the system is close to  
5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
a CO or installed behind a PBX telephone system.  
It does not have to be configured for anything else.  
The decibel (db) PAD switches, SW501 (CO1) and  
SW601 (CO2), control the loudness by providing a  
3 db signal level drop to, or from, the PBX or CO  
when set to the PAD position. The switch comes  
from the factory set at NOR (for normal) meaning  
no PAD loss.  
J3  
J1  
13.20 KCDU Installation Procedure  
J2  
13.21 Install the KCDU in accordance with the  
following steps:  
1) Remove the PCB from its protective packag-  
ing.  
2) If the system is located within one mile of the  
CO or PBX telephone system, set db PAD  
switches SW501 and SW601 to the PAD  
position.  
FIGURE 5-20  
REMOTE MAINTENANCE MODEM UNIT (IMDU)  
IINTERFACE CONNECTORS  
3) Insert the KCDU into the appropriate slot (04  
first, 05 second) in the Expansion Unit, and  
apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper  
mating of the connectors.  
25-PAIR AMPHENOL CONNECTOR (FEMALE)  
J7  
CO2  
CO1  
SW601 SW501  
(CO2) (CO1)  
PAD NOR  
PAD NOR  
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR  
FIGURE 5-21  
KCDU INDICATORS, OPTIONS, AND CONNECTORS  
5-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE 5-H  
KCDU CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND CONNECTORS  
CONTROL/INDICATOR/  
CONNECTOR  
TYPE OF COMPONENT  
Red LED  
DESCRIPTION  
(Figure 5-21)  
CO line circuit 1  
Indicator CD517  
Lights to indicate CO line circuit 1 is in  
operation.  
CO line circuit 2  
Indicator CD617  
Red LED  
Lights to indicate CO line circuit 2 is in  
operation.  
J7 Connectors  
Modular connector  
Two-position slide  
Two-position slide  
Interface connector for CO line circuits,  
1 and 2.  
PAD Switch SW501  
PAD Switch SW601  
Enables 3dB signal level drop for CO line  
circuit 1 (when set in PAD position).  
Enables 3dB signal level drop for CO line  
circuit 2 (when set in PAD position).  
connected to a standard telephone circuit) and it is  
required for Direct Inward System Access (DISA)  
calls. The K4RCU can only be installed in the Base  
Unit. The K4RCU circuits are also used to detect  
busy tone for the Automatic Busy Redial (ABR)  
feature and must be installed to allow ABR to  
operate.  
4) After installing the KCDU, gently pull the PCB  
outward.Iftheconnectorsareproperlymated,  
a slight resistance will be felt.  
13.30 KCDU Wiring  
13.31 Refer to KCDU Wiring Diagram in Section  
100-816-208 for wiring/interconnecting details.  
14.10 K4RCU Configuration  
13.40 KCDU Programming Overview  
14.11 The K4RCU does not have to be configured  
for operation.  
13.41 See the PCOU programming overview and  
the PDKU overview in this chapter for KCDU pro-  
gramming information. When running Program 03  
for the KCDU slot(s), specify code 65 if the KCDU  
does not support OCA or PDIU-DI telephones or  
code 66 if the KCDU supports OCA or PDIU-DI  
telephones. Do not specify code 11, 61, 62, or 64.  
14.20 K4RCU Installation Procedure  
14.21 Install the K4RCU in accordance with the  
following steps (Figure 5-22).  
1) Remove the PCB from its protective packag-  
ing.  
14 DTMF RECEIVER/ABR TONE  
DETECTOR UNIT (K4RCU)  
2) Make sure that the power supply switch is  
OFF.  
14.00 General  
3) Making sure that the component side of the  
K4RCU is facing up toward the power supply,  
plug the K4RCU P602A and P602B female  
connectors into the P2A and P2B (K4RCU)  
connectors on the motherboard.  
14.01 The K4RCU must be installed to recognize  
Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) tones gener-  
ated by a standard telephone (or any other device  
5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
tical to the PCOU and KCDU CO line circuits. The  
KCOUalsohasfourPAD(3dB)switches—SW400,  
SW425, SW450, and SW475—to reduce exces-  
sive loudness caused by a nearby CO or PBX  
telephone system. For wiring and programming  
considerations, seethePCOUinstructionsinPara-  
graph 8. The Base Unit circuits are fixed and are  
assigned to Base Unit virtual equipment slots as  
follows: 8-digital station circuit to slot 01, 4-CO line  
circuits (KCOU) to slot 02, and 4 standard tele-  
phone circuits (KSTU) to slot 3.  
14.30 K4RCU Wiring  
14.31 The K4RCU does not require any wiring.  
14.40 K4RCU Programming Overview  
14.41 The following parameters may be specified:  
Program 03  
Enter code 92 for Slot 00 if K4RCU is installed.  
Program 12  
Set K4RCU release time.  
Program 15  
Sets K4RCU operation after CO line flash.  
15.20 Digital Telephone Circuits  
15 BUILT-IN CO LINE AND  
DIGITAL TELEPHONE CIRCUITS  
15.21 The eight digital telephone circuits that come  
standard with the system are integrated into the  
motherboard in the Base Unit. These circuits are  
indentical to the digital circuits found on the PDKU  
and KCDU. The motherboard does not have to be  
configured for the digital circuits to operate. For  
wiring and programming considerations, see the  
PDKU instructions in Paragraph 7.  
15.00 General  
15.01 As mentioned in Paragraph 2, the Base Unit  
comes standard with four CO lines and eight digital  
telephone circuits already installed.  
15.10 Built-in CO Line Circuits  
15.11 The four standard loop start CO line circuits  
are on a printed circuit board (PCB) called the  
KCOU,whichisinstalledonthemotherboardat the  
factory (Figure 5-23). The KCOU circuits are iden-  
15.30 Base Unit CO Line/Digital Station  
Circuit Wiring  
15.31 Refer to Section 100-816-208 for details.  
P2A (BASE UNIT)  
P2B (BASE UNIT)  
P602B  
P602A  
VERSION  
CONNECTORS  
FIGURE 5-22  
K4RCU PCB  
5-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
16 KCOU REMOVAL AND  
REPLACEMENT  
16.20 KCOU Replacement  
1) Make sure the Power Supply (KPSU16) DC  
power switch is off.  
16.00 General  
2) Mate and connect KCOU P6 cable connector  
to P6 on Base Unit motherboard so that the  
red wire is aligned as shown in Figure 5-23.  
16.01 The KCOU comes factory-installed in the  
Base Key Service Unit (Figure 5-3); if necessary,  
it can be removed and replaced.  
3) Position KCOU as shown in Figure 5-23.  
16.10 KCOU Removal  
4) MateandconnectKCOUP7toP7ontheBase  
1) Make sure the Power Supply (KPSU16) DC  
power switch is turned off.  
Unit motherboard.  
5) Secure plastic stand-off tab and install screws  
1 and 2.  
2) Loosen and remove screws 1 and 2 (Figure  
5-23).  
6) Set SW400 ~ 475 to appropriate position. In  
most cases set to the normal position (NOR);  
if CO lines are connected to a PBX or are in  
close proximity to the Central Office, set to the  
PAD position to provide a 3 db loss in signal  
level.  
3) Pull back plastic stand-off tab and pull up on  
KCOU until P7 is unplugged.  
4) Pull wires on P6 and remove P6 connector  
from Base Unit.  
SCREW (2)  
KRCU  
P2A  
P2B  
J4 (CO4)  
KCOU  
KCOU  
P7  
J3 (CO4)  
J2 (CO4)  
RED RED  
J1 (CO4)  
SCREW (1)  
PLASTIC STAND-OFF  
(TAB)  
BASE UNIT  
MOTHERBOARD  
SW400 FOR CO1  
SW425 FOR CO2  
SW450 FOR CO3  
SW475 FOR CO4  
FIGURE 5-23  
KCOU PCB  
5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB  
SECTION 100-816-205  
MARCH 1993  
17.10 DK16PowerFailureEmergencyTransfer  
Installation. Installthededicatedemergencystan-  
dard telephone as follows (see Figure 5-24):  
17 DK16 POWER FAILURE EMERGENCY  
TRANSFER OPTION  
17.00 Adedicatedstandardtelephonecanbecon-  
nected to the Power Failure Transfer Interface  
(PF1) on the DK16 Base Unit to provide power  
failure backup. During normal operation, this tele-  
phone cannot be used—it does not count as a  
station; so it does not reduce the system's 20  
maximum station capacity. But if there is a power  
failure, the telephone will automatically be con-  
nected to CO line 1. When power is restored, the  
system will automatically resume with its normal  
station and CO line assignments, and the dedi-  
cated telephone will become inoperative again.  
1) Connect a standard telephone to the PF1  
connector in the Base Unit.  
17.11 DK16 Power Failure Emergency Trans-  
fer Test.  
1) Turn the system power switch off.  
2) Lift the emergency standard telephone hand-  
set, and verify that there is CO dial tone.  
DK8 OR DK16  
KSU MAIN PCB  
POWER AVAILABLE  
CONNECTION  
MDF  
2
T
3
KCOU  
CO  
LINE  
CO LINE 1  
R
4
5
MOD JACK CO1  
(BASE UNIT)  
POWER FAIL  
CONNECTION  
MDF  
R
T
PFT  
STANDARD  
TELEPHONE  
MOD JACK PF1  
(BASE UNIT)  
FIGURE 5-24  
DK16 BASE UNIT POWER FAILURE TRANSFER (PFT) CIRCUIT DIAGRAM  
5-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES  
DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS  
INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS  
SECTION 100-816-206  
MARCH 1993  
INSTALLATION  
CHAPTER SIX  
STATION APPARATUS INSTALLATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS  
SECTION 100-816-206  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
SUBJECT  
PARAGRAPH  
1
PAGE  
OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................. 6-1  
Purpose ................................................................................................................ 6-1  
Types of Telephones ............................................................................................ 6-1  
TELEPHONE INSTALLATION ................................................................................. 6-1  
General ................................................................................................................. 6-1  
Connecting Digital Telephones to the System ..................................................... 6-1  
Connecting Electronic Telephones to the System (DK16 only)............................. 6-2  
Connecting Standard Telephones to the System ................................................. 6-2  
Telephone Wall Mounting..................................................................................... 6-2  
DIGITAL TELEPHONE UPGRADES ....................................................................... 6-4  
Simultaneous Voice and Data Upgrade (PDIU-DI2 and PDIU-DI) ........................ 6-4  
Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (DVSU) ........................................................... 6-6  
Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade (HHEU)....................................................... 6-6  
Carbon Headset/Handset Straps.......................................................................... 6-9  
Beep Strap............................................................................................................ 6-9  
Microphone/Speaker Sensitivity Adjustment (Speakerphones Only) .................... 6-10  
Busy Override and Camp-on Ring Tone Over Handset/Headset Option .............. 6-10  
External Power Straps.......................................................................................... 6-10  
DKT2000 Add-On-Module Installation.................................................................. 6-11  
ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE UPGRADE OPTIONS (DK16 Only)............................ 6-11  
Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (HVSU2 or HVSU/HVSI) ................................. 6-11  
Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade (HHEU)....................................................... 6-12  
Carbon Headset/Handset Straps.......................................................................... 6-13  
Beep Strap............................................................................................................ 6-14  
Microphone/Speaker Threshold (Speakerphones Only) ....................................... 6-14  
Handset Receiver Volume-Up Strap (Version 2 6500-Series Telephones Only) .. 6-14  
DIRECT STATION SELECTION CONSOLE/SYSTEM CONNECTION  
1.00  
1.10  
2
2.00  
2.10  
2.20  
2.30  
2.40  
3
3.10  
3.20  
3.30  
3.40  
3.50  
3.60  
3.70  
3.80  
3.90  
4
4.10  
4.20  
4.30  
4.40  
4.50  
4.60  
5
(DK16 Only).............................................................................................................. 6-14  
DDSS Console Connections ................................................................................ 6-14  
HDSS Console Connections ................................................................................ 6-15  
DOOR PHONE/LOCK CONTROL UNIT AND DOOR PHONE  
5.10  
5.20  
6
INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................ 6-15  
DDCB and MDFB Cabling .................................................................................... 6-16  
DDCB Wall Mounting............................................................................................ 6-16  
Door Phone (MDFB) Wall Mounting ..................................................................... 6-16  
Door Phone/Lock Programming Considerations .................................................. 6-17  
ADD-ON MODULE INSTALLATION ........................................................................ 6-17  
6.10  
6.20  
6.30  
6.40  
7
6-i  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS  
SECTION 100-816-206  
MARCH 1993  
FIGURE LIST  
TITLE  
FIGURE  
PAGE  
6-1  
6-2  
6-3  
6-4  
6-5  
6-6  
6-7  
6-8  
REMOVING THE TELEPHONE BASE .................................................................... 6-3  
HANDSET HANGER ................................................................................................ 6-3  
WALL MOUNTING BASE ROTATION ..................................................................... 6-3  
PDIU-DI2 INSTALLATION INTO 2000-SERIES DIGITAL TELEPHONE.................. 6-5  
PDIU-DI INSTALLATION INTO 1000-SERIES DIGITAL TELEPHONE.................... 6-5  
DVSU INSTALLATION FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONES ............................................ 6-6  
DKT2010-H STRAP AND CONNECTOR LOCATIONS ........................................... 6-7  
DKT2010-SD, DKT2020-S, AND DKT2020-SD STRAP AND CONNECTOR  
LOCATIONS............................................................................................................. 6-7  
1000-SERIES DIGITAL TELEPHONE STRAP AND CONNECTION  
6-9  
LOCATIONS............................................................................................................. 6-7  
HHEU INSTALLATION FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONE .............................................. 6-8  
HESC-65A CABLING ............................................................................................... 6-8  
HVSU2 INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES.................................. 6-11  
ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE PCB CONNECTIONS ............................................... 6-12  
HVSI/HVSU INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES .......................... 6-12  
HHEU INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES.................................... 6-13  
DOOR PHONE (DDCB) INSTALLATION................................................................. 6-16  
DOOR PHONE (MDFB) INSTALLATION................................................................. 6-17  
ADD-ON-MODULE INSTALLATION ........................................................................ 6-18  
DK16 ADD-ON-MODULE DSS BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS ...................................... 6-18  
DK8 ADD-ON-MODULE DSS BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS ........................................ 6-18  
6-10  
6-11  
6-12  
6-13  
6-14  
6-15  
6-16  
6-17  
6-18  
6-19  
6-20  
6-ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS  
SECTION 100-816-206  
MARCH 1993  
WARNING!  
1 OVERVIEW  
1. Never install the telephone wiring dur-  
ing a lightning storm.  
1.00 Purpose  
2. Never install the telephone jacks in  
wet locations, unless the jack is spe-  
cifically designed for wet locations.  
3. Never touch uninsulated telephone  
wiresorterminalsunlessthetelephone  
line has been disconnected at the net-  
work interface.  
1.01 This chapter provides instructions on how to  
connecttelephonestotheSTRATADK8andDK16  
systems and how to configure and upgrade them  
for optional features. Procedures for installing di-  
rect station selection consoles and door phones  
also appear in this chapter.  
4. Usecautionwheninstallingormodify-  
ing telephone lines.  
5. Iftelephone,DSSconsole,Doorphone  
control box, or Door phone wiring ex-  
its the building, external secondary  
protectionisrequired.SeeSection100-  
816-208.  
1.10 Types of Telephones  
1.11 The STRATA DK8 and DK16 systems can  
support the following telephones.  
DigitalTelephones:Installationinstructionsfor  
digital telephones in this chapter and elsewhere  
in this manual apply only to the Toshiba 2000-  
and 1000-series Digital Telephones. The 2000-  
series Digital Telephones consist of four mod-  
els: the DKT2010-H, the DKT2010-SD, the  
DKT2020-S, and the DKT2020-SD. There are  
two 1000-series Digital Telephone models, the  
DKT1020-H and the DKT1020-SD.  
Electronic Telephones:(DK16 only) The elec-  
tronic telephone instructions here apply to the  
Toshiba 6500-series Electronic Telephones,  
although there are other electronic telephones  
(the 2000-, 3000-, 6000-, and 6500-series) that  
are compatible with the STRATA DK16. The  
6500-series electronic telephones consist of  
four models: the EKT6510-H, the EKT6510-S,  
the EKT6520-H, and the EKT6520-SD.  
CAUTION!  
When installing the station cable, do not  
run parallel to and within three feet of an  
AC power line. AC power lines should be  
crossed at right (90°) angles only. In par-  
ticular, avoid running station wire pairs  
neardevicesthatgenerateelectricalnoise,  
such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures.  
2.10 Connecting Digital Telephones to the  
System  
2.11 The following provides information on how to  
connect digital telephones to the DK8 or DK16  
system.  
NOTE:  
Before proceeding, see warning and caution  
notes in Paragraph 2.01.  
2.12 Digital telephones connect to the digital tele-  
phone ports via the main distribution frame (MDF)  
withstandardtwisted-pairjacketedtelephonecable.  
Single-pair wiring is sufficient in most cases for  
digital telephones to operate effectively at up to  
1000 feet from the key service unit, if using 24  
AWG cable. But digital telephones that are  
equipped with Integrated Data Interface Units or  
ADMs should have two-pair (or external power) to  
function effectively at this distance. This also ap-  
plies to digital telephones that are supported by  
systems that must operate with battery reserve  
power—see Wiring Diagrams, Section 100-816-  
208, for loop limits (see Table 8-D).  
Standard Telephones: 500- and 2500-type  
standard telephones apply whenever standard  
telephones are mentioned in this manual.  
2 TELEPHONE INSTALLATION  
2.00 General  
2.01 This section describes the wiring required to  
connect telephones to the system. Before install-  
ing any telephone wiring, read the following warn-  
ing and caution notes:  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS  
SECTION 100-816-206  
MARCH 1993  
To accommodate the digital telephone line cord,  
the cable should be terminated in a modular sta-  
tionconnectorblock(RJ-11)atthestationlocation.  
Thestandardsingle-pair,modulardigitaltelephone  
cord that is sent with the telephone is 7 feet (the  
maximum allowed is 25 feet).  
The overall length of the station cable run from the  
DK16keyserviceunit(KSU)tothetelephonemust  
not exceed 1,000 feet (305 meters), if using 24  
AWG cable.  
2.30 Connecting Standard Telephones to the  
System  
NOTES:  
1. Digital telephone cable runs must not  
have the following:  
2.31 The following provides information on how to  
connect standard telephones to the DK8 or DK16  
system.  
Cable splits (single or double)  
Cable bridges (of any length)  
High resistance or faulty cable splices  
2. See Section 100-816-208 for secondary  
protector information.  
NOTE:  
Before proceeding, see warning and caution  
notes in Paragraph 2.01.  
2.20 Connecting Electronic Telephones to  
the System (DK16 only)  
2.32 Standard telephones connect to standard  
telephone circuits in the DK8 Standard Telephone  
Interface Unit (QSTU), telephone circuits on the  
DK16 Base Unit Standard Telephone Interface  
Unit (KSTU), the DK16 Standard Telephone Inter-  
face Unit (PSTU), and the DK16 Standard/Elec-  
tronic Telephone Interface Unit (PESU) via the  
main distribution frame (MDF) with standard  
twisted-pair jacketed telephone cable. Single-pair  
wiring is required. (Refer to Wiring Diagrams,  
Section 100-816-208, for more details.)  
2.21 The following provides information on how to  
connect electronic telephones to the DK16 sys-  
tem.  
NOTE:  
Before proceeding, see warning and caution  
notes in Paragraph 2.01.  
2.22 Electronic telephones are connected to elec-  
tronic telephone circuits in the DK16 Expansion  
Unit on the Electronic Telephone Interface Unit  
(PEKU) and the Standard/Electronic Telephone  
Interface Unit (PESU) via the main distribution  
frame (MDF) with standard twisted-pair jacketed  
telephonecable.Two-pairwiring,asaminimum,is  
requiredfortelephoneconnection.However,three-  
pair wiring is recommended to permit future up-  
grades, such as Off-hook Call Announce.  
NOTE:  
See Section 100-816-208 for secondary pro-  
tector information.  
The standard telephone cable's overall loop resis-  
tance, connected on- or off-premises, is 300 ohms  
maximum,includingthetelephoneresistance.This  
also applies to all devices connected to standard  
telephonecircuits.Astandardtelephoneconnected  
off-premises via the telephone network should  
interface with OL13A lines (or equivalent) and  
connect to an RJ21X FIC jack (or equivalent).  
To accommodate the electronic telephone line  
cord, the cable should be terminated in a modular  
station connector block (RJ-11) at the station loca-  
tion. The standard two-pair modular electronic  
telephone cord length is seven feet (the maximum  
allowed length is 25 feet). See Wiring diagrams,  
Section 100-816-208 for more details.  
2.40 Telephone Wall Mounting  
2.41 This section provides instructions on how to  
mountdigitaltelephonesandelectronictelephones  
(DK16 only) to a wall or other vertical surface.  
Instructions on mounting standard telephones are  
not provided here; refer to the manufacturer's  
documentation for those instructions.  
NOTE:  
See Section 100-816-208 for secondary pro-  
tector information.  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS  
SECTION 100-816-206  
MARCH 1993  
2.42 Mount digital and electronic telephones in  
accordance with the following steps:  
PLASTIC  
TAB  
HANDSET  
HANGER  
NOTES:  
1. Digital telephones equipped with Inte-  
grated Data Interface Units (PDIU-DIs or  
PDIU-DI2s) cannot be wall mounted.  
2. Electronic and older digital telephones  
equipped with an HHEU1 can be wall  
mounted.2000-seriesDigitalTelephones  
with headsets can only be wall mounted  
with an HHEU2.  
1) Loosen the captive screws, and remove the  
telephone base (Figure 6-1).  
2) Using a suitable cutter, remove the handset  
hanger from the base (Figure 6-1). Insert the  
handset hanger in the slot provided on the  
frontofthetelephone(Figure6-2).Thehanger  
fits in the notch on the handset cradle.  
FIGURE 6-1  
REMOVING THE TELEPHONE BASE  
3) Rotate the telephone base 180 degrees and  
secure it to the telephone with its four captive  
screws (Figure 6-3).  
HANDSET  
HANGER  
FIGURE 6-2  
HANDSET HANGER  
FIGURE 6-3  
WALL MOUNTING BASE ROTATION  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS  
SECTION 100-816-206  
MARCH 1993  
4) Connect the telephone to the wall modular  
connector with a cord approximately four  
incheslong(availableatmosttelephonesup-  
ply companies). Route the cord into the hol-  
low portion of the base.  
with a PDIU-DI2 can support an HHEU at  
the same time, but cannot support a  
DVSU. A 1000-series Digital Telephone  
equipped with a PDIU-DI cannot support  
an HHEU, ADM, or a DVSU for OCA.  
2. PDKU1 circuits 1 ~ 7 only can support  
PDIU-DI(2)s,butallPDKU2andbaseunit  
digital circuits, can support PDIU-DI(2)s.  
5) Mount the telephone on the wall mounting  
modular connector plate.  
3 DIGITAL TELEPHONE UPGRADES  
3.13 PDIU-DI(2)Installation.Installtheintegrated  
data interface unit (PDIU-DI for 1000-series and  
PDIU-DI2 for 2000-series) in accordance with the  
following steps:  
3.00 This section describes how to upgrade and  
configure 2000- and 1000-series Digital Tele-  
phones for features and options.  
1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the  
digital telephone base and remove it (Figure  
6-1).  
3.10 Simultaneous Voice and Data Upgrade  
(PDIU-DI2 and PDIU-DI)  
3.11 Both the 2000- and 1000-series Digital Tele-  
phones can be upgraded with an integrated data  
interfaceunittotransmitandreceivesimultaneous  
voice and data calls. There are two versions of the  
integrated unit: the PDIU-DI and the PDIU-DI2.  
The 2000-series telephones can only be equipped  
with a PDIU-DI2, and the 1000-series telephones  
can only be equipped with a PDIU-DI. Asynchro-  
nous devices, such as personal computers (PC)  
and terminals, can be connected to the standard  
RS-232 connector of the PDIU-DI(2). Station us-  
ers are able to transmit and receive RS-232 data  
overthesinglewirepairofthePDIU-DI(2)-equipped  
telephone.  
2) RefertoFigure6-4for2000-seriestelephones  
orFigure6-5 for1000-seriestelephones,and  
insert the two integrated unit wire plugs into  
the connectors on the printed circuit board  
(PCB) in the telephone (observing the red  
wire for correct positioning).  
3) Attach the integrated unit to the bottom of the  
telephone and secure with the four captive  
screws.  
4) Remove the telephone number directory tray  
from the original telephone base and install it  
on the integrated unit telephone base. Bend  
the tray by squeezing its sides so it bows  
slightly to remove and re-install (Figure 6-4 or  
6-5).  
3.12 Data calls can be manually dialed with a  
Data Call button and disconnected with a Data  
Release button on the telephone; or, data and  
voice calls can be dialed from the keyboard of the  
terminal or PC using standard "AT" commands.  
Digital telephones may also be assigned a Mo-  
dem button to reserve a modem or monitor mo-  
demavailabilityandstatus. Assignfeaturebuttons  
to telephones with Program 39.  
5) Check Table 8-D in Section 100-816-208;  
install 2-pair house cable (or external power)  
and 2-pair modular cord (supplied with PDIU-  
DI) if required to achieve maximum distance.  
3.14 Integrated Data Interface Unit Program-  
ming Overview  
NOTES:  
1. 1000-and2000-seriesDigitalTelephones  
equipped with a PDIU-DI(2) cannot be  
wall-mounted or equipped with an Add-  
On-Module (ADM), or DVSU for OCA. A  
2000-series digital telephone equipped  
Program 39  
Assigns the Data Call, Data Release, and  
Modem buttons.  
Programs 20 and 22  
Used for data interface unit assignments.  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS  
SECTION 100-816-206  
MARCH 1993  
RS-232 (FEMALE)  
DB-25 CONNECTOR  
DIU & VSU  
DIU & ADM  
TO P1 OF  
BOTTOM PCB  
RED  
WIRE  
DIGITAL  
TELEPHONE  
TOP ASSEMBLY  
TO P2 OF  
BOTTOM PCB  
PDIU-DI2 2000  
DIGITAL  
TELEPHONE BASE  
FIGURE 6-4  
PDIU-DI2 INSTALLATION INTO 2000-SERIES DIGITAL TELEPHONE  
DKT10-SUB(SPF)  
TOSHIBA  
DKTO-20KD  
RS-232 (FEMALE)  
DVSU  
DB-25 CONNECTOR  
HHEU  
PDIU  
RED  
PERCEPTION  
PDIU/  
DVSU  
RED  
STRAP (ONLY CUT  
IF INSTALLED ON  
PERCEPTION)  
TO P1 OF  
BOTTOM PCB  
RED  
WIRE  
DIGITAL  
TELEPHONE  
TOP ASSEMBLY  
RED  
WIRE  
TO P2 OF  
BOTTOM PCB  
PDIU-DI PCB  
IMPORTANT: DO NOT CONNECT  
DIU CABLES TO HHEU CONNECTOR  
DIRECTORY TRAY  
NOTE:  
A 1000-SERIES DIGITAL TELEPHONE  
CANNOT SUPPORT AN HHEU AND A  
PDIU-DI AT THE SAME TIME.  
PDIU-DI 1000 DIGITAL  
TELEPHONE BASE  
FIGURE 6-5  
PDIU-DI INSTALLATION INTO 1000-SERIES DIGITAL TELEPHONE  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS  
SECTION 100-816-206  
MARCH 1993  
3.20 Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade  
(DVSU)  
RED  
WIRE  
3.21 To receive Off-hook Call Announce (OCA)  
calls, a digital telephone must be upgraded with a  
DVSU; the telephone making the call does not  
require a DVSU. An additional wire pair is not  
required for digital telephones that receive OCA  
calls. The DVSU is compatible with both 2000-  
series and 1000-series Digital Telephones.  
RED WIRE  
NOTE:  
Digital telephones cannot be equipped with a  
DVSU and integrated data interface unit  
(PDIU-DI or PDIU-DI2) at the same time.  
3.22 DVSU Upgrade Installation. Install the  
DVSU upgrade in accordance with the following  
steps.  
FIGURE 6-6  
DVSU INSTALLATION FOR DIGITAL  
TELEPHONES  
1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the  
telephone base (Figure 6-1) and remove the  
base.  
3.30 Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade  
(HHEU)  
2) Loosen the four captive screws securing the  
metal plate to the standoffs inside the base  
wheretheDVSUwillbeinstalled(Figure6-6).  
Remove the plate, which can be discarded.  
3.31Theloudringingbell/headsetupgrade(HHEU)  
enables an external speaker (HESB) for the Loud  
Ringing Bell feature and/or a headset to be con-  
nected to both series of digital telephones.  
3) Position the DVSU PCB on the standoffs  
(Figure 6-6), and secure with the four pro-  
vided screws.  
NOTES:  
1. TherearetwotypesofHHEU:theHHEU1  
(which has four versions, V.1 ~ V.4) and  
the HHEU2.  
4A) IfinstallingtheDVSUintoa2000-seriesdigital  
telephone, refer to Figure 6-7 (DKT2010-H)  
or Figure 6-8 (DKT2010-SD, DKT2020-S,  
DKT2020-SD), and then connect the DVSU  
wire plugs to the DVSU connectors on the  
printed circuit board (PCB) inside the  
telephone.  
2. Both 2000- and 1000-series Digital Tele-  
phones require either an HHEU2 or a V.3  
or V.4 HHEU1 for HESB operation; ear-  
lier HHEU1 versions are only sufficient  
for headset operation only.  
3. Only digital telephones equipped with an  
HHEU2canbewallmounted.TheHHEU2  
is identical to the V.4 HHEU1, except that  
the HHEU2 has longer wires to accom-  
modate wall mounting.  
4B) If installing the DVSU into a 1000-series digi-  
taltelephone, refertoFigure6-9, andconnect  
theDVSUwireplugstotheDVSU connectors  
on the PCBs inside the telephone.  
4. AToshibaHESC-65Acableisrequiredto  
connect the HHEU in a digital telephone  
to the HESB.  
5) Reinstall the telephone base and secure it  
with its four captive screws.  
5. 1000-series digital telephones cannot be  
equipped with the HHEU (any type or  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS  
SECTION 100-816-206  
MARCH 1993  
W101  
W102  
EX.POW  
BEEP  
CARBON  
CARBON  
W201  
W202  
W201  
W202  
BEEP  
W204  
EX.SP  
W204  
W204  
EX.SP  
FIGURE 6-8  
DKT2010-SD, DKT2020-S, AND DKT2020-SD  
STRAP AND CONNECTOR LOCATIONS  
FIGURE 6-7  
DKT2010-H STRAP AND CONNECTOR  
LOCATIONS  
EX: POWER  
W101/W102-1020H  
DKT1020SD  
DKT1020H  
HHEU  
W303  
BEEP  
W302  
CARBON  
W202  
HHEU  
W301-1020H  
W304-1020SD  
W201  
W203  
W301  
CARBON  
CARBON  
EX: POWER  
DKT10-SUB(SPF)  
TOSHIBA  
DKT1O-20KD  
W101/W102-1020SD  
1020SD ROOM  
NOISE SWITCH  
N
H
RED  
WIRE  
RED  
WIRE  
DVSU  
EX.SP STRAP  
W204-1020H  
W305-1020SD  
HHEU  
RED  
WIRE  
DVSU  
FIGURE 6-9  
1000-SERIES DIGITAL TELEPHONE STRAP AND CONNECTION LOCATIONS  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS  
SECTION 100-816-206  
MARCH 1993  
version) and the integrated data interface  
unit(PDIU-DI)atthesametime,but2000-  
series digital telephones can support an  
HHEU and a PDIU-DI2 at the same time.  
4) Connect the HESC-65A cable to P601 of the  
HHEU (both HHEU1A versions and the  
HHEU2 have P601) if the Loud Ringing Bell  
option is required (Figure 6-11). Refer to  
Section 100-816-207 for HESB installation  
procedures.  
3.32 HHEU Upgrade Installation (HHEU) Install  
the Loud Ringing Bell/headset upgrade (HHEU) in  
accordance with the following steps.  
5A) For the V.3 HHEU1: If only the headset is  
connected to the HHEU, cut both sides of the  
R607 resistor (Figure 6-10), then remove the  
resistor to eliminate electrical contact.  
1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the  
telephone base (Figure 6-1), and remove the  
base.  
NOTE:  
2) Using a screwdriver or other suitable tool,  
remove the plastic tab located on the back of  
the base (Figure 6-1); the HHEU modular  
connector for the headset will be accessed  
through this opening.  
Do not cut the R607 resistor if connecting an  
HESB to the HHEU for the Loud Ringing  
Bell—evenifaheadsetisalsoinstalledonthe  
HHEU.  
5B) For the V.4 HHEU1 and the HHEU2: If only  
the headset is connected to the HHEU, cut  
the OCA strap (Figure 6-10).  
3) If installing a V.3 HHEU1, set the SW601  
switch on the HHEU to HEADSET for the  
headsetorloudbellapplication(Figure6-10).  
V.4 HHEU1 and HHEU2 do not have this  
switch, because both of these upgrades are  
automatically set for the headset/loud bell  
application.  
NOTE:  
Do not cut the OCA strap if connecting an  
HESB to the HHEU for the Loud Ringing  
FEED THROUGH  
FOR HESC-65(A) CABLE  
TO HESB  
BLOCK  
COMPONENT SIDE OF HHEU  
R607 (HHEU1 V.1 ~ V.3)  
SW601  
(HHEU1 V.1 ~ V.3)  
OCA (HHEU1  
V.4 or HHEU2)  
P601  
SW601  
HHEU  
HESC-65 CABLE  
OR  
HESC-65A CABLE  
P601  
HHEU  
FIGURE 6-10  
HHEU INSTALLATION FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONE  
FIGURE 6-11  
HESC-65A CABLING  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS  
SECTION 100-816-206  
MARCH 1993  
Bell—evenifaheadsetisalsoinstalledonthe  
HHEU.  
11) To adjust the volume of the HESB Loud  
Ringing Bell: Call the telephone connected to  
the HESB, and adjust the volume control on  
the back of the HESB and the ring volume  
control on the telephone.  
6) Position the HHEU PCB on the standoffs  
insidethebase(Figure6-10),andsecurewith  
the two provided screws.  
3.40 Carbon Headset/Handset Straps  
7A) For 2000-series digital telephones, refer to  
Figure 6-7 (DKT2010-H) or Figure 6-8  
(DKT2010-SD, DKT2020-S, DKT2020-SD),  
and connect the wire plug of the HHEU PCB  
to the HHEU connector on the printed circuit  
board (PCB) on the telephone.  
3.41 If a carbon-type handset or headset is con-  
nected to the handset jack on the side of the  
telephone, two jumper straps inside the telephone  
must be cut. Cut the straps in accordance with the  
following steps:  
NOTE:  
7B) For 1000-series digital telephones, refer to  
Figure 6-9, and connect the wire plug of the  
HHEU to the HHEU connector on the PCB of  
the telephone.  
It is not necessary to cut these straps if the  
headset is connected to the HHEU.  
1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the  
telephone base (Figure 6-1), and remove the  
base.  
8A) For 2000-series digital telephones, refer to  
Figure 6-7 (DKT2010-H) or Figure 6-8  
(DKT2010-SD, DKT2020-S, DKT2020-SD),  
and locate the EX.SP strap on the PCB in the  
telephone. Cut the strap if an HESB will be  
connected to the HHEU.  
2A) For 2000-series digital telephones refer to  
Figure 6-7 or 6-8, and cut the CARBON  
straps, W201 and W202.  
2B) For 1000-series digital telephones, refer to  
Figure 6-9, and cut the CARBON straps,  
(W301andW302ontheDKT1020-SD;W201  
and W203 on the DKT1020-H).  
8B) For 1000-series digital telephones, refer to  
Figure 6-9, and locate the EX.SP strap on the  
upper PCB in the telephone, and cut it if an  
HHEU will be connected to an HESB for the  
Loud Ringing Bell option.  
3) Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it  
with its four captive screws.  
9A) For 2000-series digital telephones, refer to  
Figure 6-7 (DKT2010-H) or Figure 6-8  
(DKT2010-SD, DKT2020-S, DKT2020-SD),  
and locate the HHEU strap on the PCB in the  
telephone. Cut the strap if a headset will be  
connected to the HHEU.  
3.50 Beep Strap  
3.51 A "beep" sounds whenever a dialpad button  
or feature button is pressed on a digital telephone.  
To eliminate this beep follow the procedure below:  
1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the  
telephone base (Figure 6-1), and remove the  
base.  
9B) For 1000-series digital telephones, refer to  
Figure 6-9, and locate the HHEU strap on the  
upper PCB in the telephone. Cut the strap if  
an HHEU will be connected to a headset.  
2A) For 2000-series digital telephones, refer to  
Figures 6-7 or 6-8, and cut the BEEP strap.  
NOTE:  
If the HHEU PCB is removed from the tele-  
phone, the HHEU strap must be replaced for  
proper telephone operation.  
2B) For 1000-series digital telephones, refer to  
Figure 6-9, and cut the BEEP strap.  
10) Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it  
with its four captive screws.  
3) Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it  
with its four captive screws.  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS  
SECTION 100-816-206  
MARCH 1993  
set, in addition to the speaker, with 2000-series  
digital telephones. The tones only sound over the  
speakerwith1000-seriesDigitalTelephones. Per-  
form the following procedure to have these tones  
sent over the handset of the DKT2010-H model:  
(For the DKT2010-SD, the DKT2020-S, and the  
DKT2020-SD models, see the Note following the  
procedure.)  
3.60 Microphone/Speaker Sensitivity Adjust-  
ment (Speakerphones Only)  
3.61 High ambient noise levels may cause the  
speaker on some digital telephone speakerphone  
models to cut off frequently. To prevent this for the  
1000-series digital telephone models, perform the  
following procedure to make the telephones less  
sensitive to the noise: (The 2000-series Tele-  
phones are adjusted per the instructions in the  
Note after the procedure.)  
1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the  
telephone base (Figure 6-1), and remove the  
base.  
1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the  
1000-seriesDigitalTelephonespeakerphone  
base (Figure 6-1), and remove the base.  
2) Refer to Figure 6-7, and install a strap in the  
HS-BOV W409 location.  
3) Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it  
with its four captive screws.  
2) For the 1000-series speakerphone model  
(DKT1020-SD), refer to Figure 6-9, and lo-  
cate the ROOM NOISE switch. Push the  
switch carefully to the H (high) position (for  
lowsensitivity)whenthereishighbackground  
noise in the area surrounding the telephone.  
NOTES:  
1. ToenableBusyOverridetoneandCamp-  
on Ring tones over the handset or head-  
set of a DKT2010-SD, DKT2020-SD,  
DKT2020-S model, hold down the Re-  
dial button and press the up Vol button.  
To block the tone, hold down the Redial  
button and press the down Vol button.  
2. For this to function properly with head-  
sets, make sure the OCA strap or R607 is  
cut on the HHEU PCB and the HHEU  
strap is cut on the telephone (see Para-  
graph 3.32).  
3) Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it  
with its four captive screws.  
NOTES:  
1. To make the 2000-series Digital Tele-  
phone speakerphone models less sensi-  
tive to loud surrounding noise, hold down  
Mic button, then press the up Vol but-  
ton. The less-sensitive level will be set  
after the third flash of the Mic LED. To  
reset the sensitivity back to the normal  
level, hold down the Mic button, then  
press the down Vol button. The normal  
level will be set after the third flash of the  
Mic LED.  
2. On 2000-series Digital Telephone speak-  
erphone models that are set for low sen-  
sitivity, the Mic LED will flash at the in-use  
ratewhenusingthespeakerphone.When  
set to normal sensitivity, the Mic LED will  
be on steady when using the speaker-  
phone.  
3.80 External Power Straps  
3.81 Digital telephones equipped with options  
such as Integrated Data Interface Units and ADMs  
require two-pair wiring or external power to oper-  
ate efficiently at the maximum-allowed distance  
from the key service unit (KSU). Two-pair wiring or  
external power is also necessary for maximum  
cable run lengths for digital telephones that are  
connected to systems that must operate with re-  
serve power. (See Table 8-D in Section 100-816-  
208 for reference.)  
3.70 Busy Override and Camp-on Ring Tone  
Over Handset/Headset Option  
Each Digital telephone has two external power  
straps which must be cut for external power when  
the cabling of the telephone is connected to an  
external AC/DC power supply. Cut these straps in  
accordance with the following procedure:  
3.71 The Busy Override and Camp-on Ring tones  
can be sent over the telephone handset or head-  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS  
SECTION 100-816-206  
MARCH 1993  
1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the  
telephone base (Figure 6-1), and remove the  
base.  
TO HVSU  
CONNECTOR (P2)  
ON MAIN PCB  
INSIDE  
HVSU2  
2) Depending on the telephone, refer to Figure  
6-7, 6-8, or 6-9 and locate the EX.POW  
straps, W101 and W102. Cut these straps.  
TELEPHONE  
3) Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it  
with its four captive screws.  
NOTE:  
Refer to Section 100-816-208 for external  
AC/DC power supply ordering information  
and installation instructions.  
3.90 DKT2000 Add-On-Module Installation  
3.91 See Paragraph 7 in this chapter.  
4 ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE  
UPGRADE OPTIONS (DK16 Only)  
FIGURE 6-12  
HVSU2 INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC  
TELEPHONES  
4.00 This section describes how to upgrade and  
configure electronic telephones for features and  
options.  
3) Connect the HVSU2 wire plug to the P2  
connector on the printed circuit board (PCB)  
in the telephone (Figure 6-13).  
4.10 Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade  
(HVSU2 or HVSU/HVSI)  
4.13 HVSU/HVSI Upgrade Installation. In-  
stall the HVSU/HVSI subassemblies in accor-  
dance with the following steps:  
4.11 Electronic telephones must be equipped with  
either the HVSU2 subassembly or the combined  
HVSU and HVSI subassemblies to receive Off-  
hook Call Announce (OCA) calls. These tele-  
phones also require three-pair wiring to receive  
OCA,insteadofthestandardtwo-pair.Telephones  
making OCA calls do not require an upgrade or  
extra wire pair.  
1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the  
telephone base (Figure 6-1), and remove the  
base.  
2) Align the P5 connector on the HVSI subas-  
sembly with the receptacle on the HVSU  
subassembly (Figure 6-14). Apply firm, even  
pressure to the PCBs to ensure that the  
connectors mate properly (they should click).  
4.12 HVSU2 Upgrade Installation. Install the  
HVSU2 in accordance with the following steps:  
1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the  
telephone base (Figure 6-1), and remove the  
base.  
NOTE:  
Exercise care when assembling the HVSU to  
the HVSI to prevent damage to the connector  
pins;also,verifythattheHVSUisalignedwith  
the silk-screened image on the HVSI.  
2) Position the HVSU2 on the standoffs inside  
the base, and secure with the two provided  
screws (Figure 6-12).  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS  
SECTION 100-816-206  
MARCH 1993  
R-UP (6510-H,  
6510-S, 6520-S)  
TO P2 HVSU  
CONNECTOR  
ON MAIN PCB  
INSIDE  
ROOM NOISE  
TO HHEU  
CONNECTOR  
P1  
P5  
HVSU  
TELEPHONE  
HSVI  
P1  
RED  
HI  
P2  
RED  
BEEP  
STRAP  
RED  
WIRE  
R-UP  
(6520-SD)  
TO HVSU  
CARBON  
CONNECTOR, P2  
CARBON STRAPS  
W201  
W202  
HHEU STRAP  
W203  
FIGURE 6-13  
ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE PCB CONNECTIONS  
FIGURE 6-14  
HVSI/HVSU INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC  
TELEPHONES  
3) PositiontheHVSU/HVSIsubassemblyonthe  
standoffsinsidethebase,andsecurewiththe  
two screws provided (Figure 6-14).  
2. Onlyelectronictelephonesequippedwith  
an HHEU2 can be wall mounted. The  
HHEU2 is identical to the V.4 HHEU1,  
except that the HHEU2 has longer wires  
to accommodate wall mounting.  
3. A Toshiba HESC-65 or HESC-65A cable  
is required to connect the HHEU in an  
electronic telephone to the HESB. Refer  
to Section 100-816-207 for HESB instal-  
lation procedures.  
4) Connect the HVSU/HVSI subassembly wire  
plug to the P2 connector on the electronic  
telephone PCB (Figure 6-13).  
5) Reinstall the electronic telephone base, and  
secure it with its four captive screws.  
4. All HHEU versions and types, except for  
V.1 HHEU1, are compatible with the Off-  
hook Call Announce upgrades (HVSU2  
and HVSU/HVSI).  
4.20 Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade  
(HHEU)  
4.21 The Loud Ringing Bell/Headset upgrade  
(HHEU)enablesanexternalspeaker(HESB)and/  
or a headset to be connected to the electronic  
telephone. The HESB serves as a Loud Ringing  
Bell when connected to a telephone.  
4.22HHEUUpgradeInstallation.InstalltheHHEU  
upgrade in accordance with the following steps:  
1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the  
telephone base (Figure 6-1), and remove the  
base.  
NOTES:  
1. TherearetwotypesofHHEU:theHHEU1  
(which has four versions, V.1 ~ V.4) and  
the HHEU2.  
2) Using a screwdriver or other suitable tool,  
remove the plastic tab located on the back of  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS  
SECTION 100-816-206  
MARCH 1993  
the base (Figure 6-1). The HHEU modular  
connector for the headset will be accessed  
through this opening.  
NOTE:  
Do not cut the R607 resistor if connecting an  
HESB to the HHEU for the Loud Ringing  
Bell—evenifaheadsetisalsoinstalledonthe  
HHEU.  
3) If using a V.3 or earlier HHEU1, set the  
SW601 switch to the HEADSET position for  
HESB and/or headset connection (Figure 6-  
15). This switch is not on either the V.4  
HHEU1 or the HHEU2, because the opera-  
tion is automatic with these subassemblies.  
5B) For the V.4 HHEU1 or the HHEU2: If only the  
headset is connected to the HHEU, cut the  
OCA strap (Figure 6-15).  
NOTE:  
Do not cut the OCA strap if connecting an  
HESB to the HHEU for the Loud Ringing  
Bell—evenifaheadsetisalsoinstalledonthe  
HHEU.  
4) Connect the HESC-65 or HESC-65A cable  
(either one) to P601 of the HHEU if the Loud  
Ringing Bell option is required (Figure 6-11).  
Refer to Section 100-816-207 for HESB in-  
stallation procedures.  
6) PositiontheHHEUsubassemblyonthestand-  
offsinsidethebase(Figure6-15), andsecure  
with the two provided screws.  
5A) For the V.3 or earlier HHEU1: If only the  
headset is connected to the HHEU, cut both  
sides of the R607 resistor on the HHEU  
(Figure 6-15) and then remove the resistor to  
eliminate electrical contact.  
7) Connect the HHEU subassembly wire plug to  
the P1 connector on the electronic telephone  
PCB (Figure 6-13).  
8) Cut the HHEU strap on the telephone PCB  
(Figure 6-13).  
COMPONENT SIDE OF HHEU  
R607 (HHEU1 V.1 ~ V.3)  
NOTE:  
The HHEU strap must be replaced if the  
HHEU PCB is removed from the telephone.  
SW601  
(HHEU1A V.1 ~V.3)  
TO P1, HHEU  
CONNECTOR  
OF  
9) Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it  
with its four captive screws.  
TELEPHONE  
PCB  
OCA (HHEU1  
V.4 or HHEU2)  
P601  
10) To adjust the volume of the HESB Loud  
Ringing Bell: Call the telephone connected to  
the HESB, and adjust the volume control on  
the back of the HESB and the ring volume  
control on the telephone.  
HHEU  
4.30 Carbon Headset/Handset Straps  
4.31 If a carbon-type handset or headset is con-  
nected to the handset jack on the side of the 6500-  
series electronic telephone, two straps inside the  
telephone must be cut. Cut the straps in accor-  
dance with the following steps:  
FIGURE 6-15  
NOTE:  
HHEU INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC  
TELEPHONES  
It is not necessary to cut these straps if the  
headset is connected to the HHEU.  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS  
SECTION 100-816-206  
MARCH 1993  
1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the  
telephone base (Figure 6-1), and remove the  
base.  
4.60 Handset Receiver Volume-up Strap  
(Version 2 6500-series Telephones Only)  
4.61 For Version 2 (V.2) 6500-series electronic  
telephones only, the handset receiver volume can  
be increased six decibels (db) by cutting a strap  
inside of the telephone. Cut the strap in accor-  
dance with the following steps:  
2) Refer to Figure 6-13, and locate the CAR-  
BON straps, W201 and W202. Cut both  
straps.  
3) Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it  
with its four captive screws.  
1) Remove the four captive screws securing the  
telephonebasetothetelephone,andremove  
the base (Figure 6-1).  
4.40 Beep Strap  
4.41 A "beep" sounds whenever a dialpad button  
or feature button is pressed on an electronic  
telephone. This beep can be eliminated with the  
following procedure:  
2) Locate the R-UP strap on the printed circuit  
board (PCB) inside the telephone, and cut it  
(Figure 6-13).  
3) Reinstall the telephone base, and secure in  
place using the four captive screws.  
1) Removethefourcaptivescrewssecuringthe  
telephonebasetothetelephone(Figure6-1),  
and remove the base.  
5 DIRECT STATION SELECTION  
CONSOLE/SYSTEM CONNECTION  
(DK16 Only)  
2) Locate and cut the BEEP strap on the tele-  
phone printed circuit board (PCB) (Figure 6-  
13).  
5.01 STRATA DK16 systems configured with just  
a Base Unit can support one Direct Station Selec-  
tion Console, and systems with the optional Ex-  
pansion Unit can support two consoles. There are  
two types of consoles: the DDSS console and the  
HDSS console. The DDSS console can be con-  
nected to designated digital telephone circuits,  
and the HDSS console can only be connected to  
designated PEKU circuits. This section provides  
instructions on how to install both types of con-  
soles.  
3) Reinstall the electronic telephone base, and  
secureinplaceusingthefourcaptivescrews.  
4.50 Microphone/Speaker Threshold (Speak-  
erphones only)  
4.51 High ambient noise levels may cause the  
speakerontheelectronictelephonespeakerphone  
models (the EKT6510-S, the EKT6520-S, and the  
EKT6520-SD) to cut off frequently. To make these  
telephones less sensitive to noise and to prevent  
the cut-off, follow the steps below:  
5.10 DDSS Console Connections  
5.11 The DDSS console, which can operate with a  
digital or electronic telephone (preferably an LCD  
model), can connect only to Circuit 8 of the Base  
Unit digital telephone circuit set or Circuit 8 of the  
PDKU. Standard twisted single-pair or two-pair  
jacketed telephone cable (maximum 1000 feet,  
303 meters) is used for the connection. To accom-  
modate the DDSS console connection, the instru-  
ment end of the cable should be terminated in a  
modular station connector block (RJ-11). Refer to  
WiringDiagrams, Section100-816-208, forwiring/  
interconnectingdetails,includingcablelengthlimi-  
tations (see Table 8-D).  
1) Removethefourcaptivescrewssecuringthe  
base to the telephone, and remove the base  
(Figure 6-1).  
2) Locate the ROOM NOISE switch on the  
printed circuit board (PCB) inside the tele-  
phone, and push it carefully to the HI (high)  
position (Figure 6-13).  
3) Reinstall the telephone base and secure in  
place using the four captive screws.  
6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS  
SECTION 100-816-206  
MARCH 1993  
HDSS console cable should be terminated in a  
modular station connector block (RJ-11). Refer to  
WiringDiagrams, Section100-816-208, forwiring/  
interconnecting details. The overall length of the  
cable run from the Expansion Unit (KSU) to the  
HDSS console must not exceed 500 feet (152  
meters), if using 24 AWG cable. The HDSS con-  
sole can operate with either an electronic or digital  
telephone (preferably an LCD model).  
NOTE:  
1. DDSS console cable runs must not have  
the following:  
Cable splits (single or double)  
Cable bridges (of any length)  
High resistance or faulty cable splices  
2. See Section 100-816-208 for secondary  
protection information.  
CAUTION!  
CAUTION!  
When installing the HDSS console cable,  
donotrunparalleltoandwithin3feetofan  
AC power line. AC power lines should be  
crossed at right (90°) angles only. Avoid  
running HDSS console wire pairs near  
devicesthatgenerateelectricalnoise,such  
as neon or fluorescent light fixtures.  
When installing the DDSS cable, do not  
run parallel to and within 3 feet of an AC  
power line. AC power lines should be  
crossed at right (90°) angles only. In par-  
ticular, avoid running station wire pairs  
neardevicesthatgenerateelectricalnoise,  
such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures.  
5.22 HDSSConsoleConfiguration. Thefollow-  
ingconsiderationsshouldbemadewheninstalling  
an HDSS console:  
5.12 DDSS Console Configuration. The follow-  
ingconsiderationsshouldbemadewheninstalling  
DDSS consoles:  
A PEKU PCB is required in the expansion unit  
for an HDSS console. (The DSS switch on the  
PEKU must be set to DSS.)  
Two PEKU ports are required for the HDSS  
console (always Circuits 7 and 8).  
The PESU does not support the HDSS console.  
A system must be configured with the Expan-  
sion Unit to support an HDSS console. Only one  
HDSS console can be installed in a system.  
DDSS consoles can connect only to Circuit 8 of  
the Base Unit digital telephone circuit set or  
Circuit 8 of the PDKU.  
A maximum of two DDSS consoles can be  
installed per system equipped with an Expan-  
sion Unit.  
DDSS consoles can operate with an attendant  
electronic telephone, as well as with a digital  
one.  
A KCDU will not support a DDSS.  
5.23 HDSS Programming Overview  
Program 03  
Codes 23 and 24 identify the slot that supports  
a PEKU that interfaces with the HDSS console.  
Program 28  
5.13 DDSS Programming Overview  
Program 03  
Code 64 identifies the slots that support DDSS  
consoles.  
Program 28  
Assigns HDSS console to a telephone.  
Program 29  
Assigns DDSS console(s) to telephones.  
Program 29  
Assigns individual button functions for the  
HDSS console.  
Assigns button functions for DDSS consoles.  
6 DOOR PHONE/LOCK CONTROL UNIT  
AND DOOR PHONE INSTALLATION  
5.20 HDSS Console Connections  
5.21 TheHDSSconsolemustbeconnectedtothe  
data pairs of circuits 7 and 8 on a PEKU in the  
Expansion Unit (via the MDF) with standard two-  
pair twisted, jacketed telephone cable. To accom-  
modate the connection, the instrument end of the  
6.01 This section provides installation instructions  
forthedigitaldoorphone/lockcontrolunits(DDCB).  
Italsoincludesinstallationinstructionsforthedoor  
phone (MDFB). Each DDCB can support as many  
asthreedoorphones(MDFBs),ortwoMDFBsand  
one door lock.  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS  
SECTION 100-816-206  
MARCH 1993  
EXTERNAL POWER STRAPS  
(DDCB ONLY)  
NOTE:  
DK8 and DK16 do not support the HDCB.  
6.02DK8andDK16systemscanbeequippedwith  
up to six MDFBs.  
6.03 For DK8, DDCBs can only connect to Circuit  
3 (Port 02) and Circuit 4 (Port 03).  
6.04 For DK16, DDCBs can only connect to Ports  
04 and 12. DDCBs can only connect to Circuit 5  
(Port 04) of the Base Unit and/or Circuit 1 (Port 12)  
of a PDKU or KCDU in the Expansion Unit.  
KSU  
NOTE:  
MOUNTING  
SCREWS (4)  
A
B
C
DOOR  
PHONE  
DDCBs cannot connect to the QSTU, KSTU,  
PSTU, PESU or PEKU.  
NOTE  
6.10 DDCB and MDFB Cabling  
See Table 8-D regarding external power requirements.  
6.11 Refer to Section 100-816-208 for DDCB and  
MDFBwiring/interconnectingdetails.Fordoorlock  
control installation procedures, refer to Section  
100-816-208. The length of the cable run from the  
keyserviceunit(KSU)totheMDFB(viatheDDCB)  
must not exceed 1,000 feet (305 meters), if using  
24 AWG cable (see Table 8-D).  
FIGURE 6-16  
DOOR PHONE (DDCB) INSTALLATION  
4) Secure the DDCB to the mounting surface  
with four one-inch panhead wood screws.  
6.30 Door Phone (MDFB) Wall Mounting  
NOTES:  
1. DDCB cable runs must not have the fol-  
lowing:  
6.31 Mount door phones (MDFBs) to a wall or  
vertical surface in accordance with the following  
steps:  
Cable splits (single or double)  
Cable bridges (of any length)  
High resistance or faulty cable splices  
2. See Section 100-816-208 for secondary  
protector information.  
1) Remove the screw from the bottom of the  
cover. Detach the cover from the base and  
metal frame (Figure 6-17).  
2) Position the metal frame and base to the  
mounting surface and secure with two one-  
inch panhead wood screws (Figure 6-17).  
6.20 DDCB Wall Mounting  
6.21 The DDCB is designed to be mounted on a  
wall or other vertical surface. Mount the units in  
accordance with the following steps:  
3) Attach cover to the metal frame and base and  
secure with the screw which was removed in  
Step 1.  
1) Locate the two mounting holes on the right-  
hand side on the DDCB (Figure 6-16).  
6.32 Door Phone Volume Control. Adjustthe  
ring and voice volume to the MDFB in accordance  
with the following procedure:  
1) Remove the screw from the bottom of the  
MDFB cover. Detach the cover from the base  
and metal frame (Figure 6-17).  
2) Remove the side cover from the DDCB to  
exposethetwoleft-handmountingholes(Fig-  
ure 6-16).  
3) Position the DDCB adjacent to the key ser-  
vice unit (KSU) with regard to wiring needs.  
6-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS  
SECTION 100-816-206  
MARCH 1993  
Program 79  
BASE  
Assigns door phone-to-station ringing assign-  
ments.  
METAL  
FRAME  
7 ADD-ON MODULE INSTALLATION  
7.01 Install the Add-on Module (DADM 2020) to a  
2000-series Digital Telephone (only) according to  
the steps that follow:  
3.25  
INCHES  
1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the  
2000-series Digital Telephone base (Figure  
6-1) and remove the base.  
TWO WALL  
MOUNTING  
HOLES  
2) Remove the base handset hanger (Figure  
6-1).  
3) Loosen two captive screws securing ADM  
base and remove base.  
DOOR PHONE  
4) PutonADMcable(suppliedwithADM)through  
telephone base and ADM base as shown in  
Figure 6-18.  
FIGURE 6-17  
DOOR PHONE (MDFB) INSTALLATION  
2) The volume level is changed by a screw  
adjustment on the back of the MDFB. Turn  
the screw with a flat-tipped screwdriver while  
ringingtheMDFBorwhileonacallwithit. The  
volume level will change as the screw is  
turned.  
5) ConnectADMcableconnectorstoP1ofADM  
and P1 of DKT2000 telephone as shown in  
Figure 6-18.  
6) Install base of ADM and telephone – tuck  
ADM cable into ADM and telephone base as  
necessary for proper length.  
6.40 Door Phone/Lock Programming Consid-  
erations  
7) Secure ADM to telephone base with ADM  
connecting Plate (using four screws).  
6.41 The following programs should be consid-  
ered when programming the system for door  
phones:  
8) Check Table 8-D in Section 100-816-208;  
install 2-pair house cable (or external power)  
and 2-pair modular cord (supplied with ADM)  
if required to achieve maximum distance.  
Program 39  
Assigns door phone and door lock buttons to  
digital telephones.  
Program 77-1  
Assigns DDCBs to ports, door phone ringing  
over External Page during the NIGHT mode,  
and door lock activation time.  
Program 77-2  
7.11 ADM Programming. ADMs do not require  
programming. The ADM provides 20 DSS buttons  
only (Figure 6-19) for the STRATA DK16, and 10  
DSS buttons, 8 speed dial buttons, one night  
transfer button, and one all call page button (Fig-  
ure 6-20) for the STRATA DK8. One ADM can be  
installed on any (or all) 2000-series telephone (16  
max on DK16 or 8 max on DK8).  
UsedtobusyoutunusedMDFBpositionsandto  
identify which DDCBs support the door lock  
option, and to set the door phone to ring one or  
five times.  
6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS  
SECTION 100-816-206  
MARCH 1993  
4-SCREWS  
ADM CONNECTION  
PLATE (PROVIDED  
WITH ADM)  
ADM BASE  
REMOVE HANDSET  
HANGER (SEE  
PARAGRAPH 2.42,  
STEP 2)  
ADM CABLE  
(SUPPLIED WITH ADM)  
TELEPHONE  
BASE  
BLACK WIRE TO PIN 1 (SMALLER CONNECTOR)  
P 1  
NOT USED  
ON DK16  
DADM2020 2000-SERIES DKT  
1
BLACK WIRE TO PIN 1  
P 2  
12  
1
(LARGER CONNECTOR)  
DIU & ADM  
P1 OF BOTTOM PCB  
VIEW OF BOTTOM  
2000-SERIES  
DIGITAL TELEPHONE  
FIGURE 6-18  
ADD-ON MODULE INSTALLATION  
Night  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
Transfer  
All Call  
Page  
SD 17  
SD 16  
SD 15  
SD 14  
SD 13  
SD 12  
SD 11  
SD 10  
Note: The button assignments for DSS (10-19),  
Speed Dial (SD10 ~ 17), All Call Page, and  
Night Transfer button assignments are fixed  
and cannot be changed.  
Note: This DSS button  
assignment is fixed and  
cannot be changed.  
FIGURE 6-20  
DK8 ADD-ON MODULE DSS BUTTON  
ASSIGNMENTS  
FIGURE 6-19  
DK16 ADD-ON MODULE DSS BUTTON  
ASSIGNMENTS  
6-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES  
DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
INSTALLATION  
CHAPTER SEVEN  
PERIPHERAL INSTALLATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
SUBJECT  
PARAGRAPH  
PAGE  
1
GENERAL .............................................................................................................. 7-1  
MUSIC-ON-HOLD/BACKGROUND MUSIC OPTIONS .......................................... 7-1  
DK8 and DK16 Music-on-Hold (MOH) Option ..................................................... 7-1  
Background Music (BGM) Options ..................................................................... 7-3  
RELAY CONTROL OPTIONS ................................................................................ 7-4  
General ............................................................................................................... 7-4  
DK8 KSU and DK16 Base Unit Relay ................................................................ 7-7  
DK16 Expansion Unit PIOU and PIOUS Relays ................................................. 7-7  
DK16 Expansion Unit Night Transfer/Music-on-Hold Relay Options with  
2
2.10  
2.20  
3
3.00  
3.10  
3.20  
3.30  
PIOU or PIOUS .................................................................................................. 7-9  
EXTERNAL SPEAKER UNIT (HESB) OPTIONS.................................................... 7-12  
System Hardware Requirements........................................................................ 7-12  
HESB Option Installation .................................................................................... 7-12  
EXTERNAL PAGE OPTIONS ................................................................................ 7-19  
System Hardware Requirements........................................................................ 7-19  
External Page Option Installation ....................................................................... 7-19  
DK8 AND DK16 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR)  
4
4.10  
4.20  
5
5.00  
5.10  
6
PRINTER/CALL ACCOUNTING DEVICE OPTIONS .............................................. 7-23  
SMDR Hardware Requirements ......................................................................... 7-27  
SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Installation .............................................. 7-27  
VOICE MAIL OPTIONS.......................................................................................... 7-28  
System Hardware Requirements........................................................................ 7-28  
Toshiba VP Voice Messaging System................................................................ 7-28  
Customer-supplied Voice Mail Messaging Systems ........................................... 7-30  
DK16 ALARM SENSOR INSTALLATION .............................................................. 7-32  
DK16 NIGHT RINGING OVER EXTERNAL ZONE PAGE...................................... 7-33  
DATA INTERFACE UNIT INSTALLATION ............................................................ 7-34  
General ............................................................................................................... 7-34  
Common DIU Connections................................................................................. 7-34  
EIA Interface Leads (Signals)............................................................................. 7-35  
DIP Switch Options............................................................................................. 7-36  
PDIU-DI to Personal Computer (PC) Installation ................................................ 7-36  
PDIU-DS to Printer Installation ........................................................................... 7-37  
PDIU-DS to Modem Installation.......................................................................... 7-38  
PDIU-DS Disassembly and Assembly................................................................ 7-40  
PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS Installation Tests .................................................................. 7-51  
DK16 TWO-CO LINE EXTERNAL AMPLIFIED CONFERENCE ............................ 7-56  
General ............................................................................................................... 7-56  
6.10  
6.20  
7
7.00  
7.10  
7.20  
8
9
10  
10.00  
10.10  
10.20  
10.30  
10.40  
10.50  
10.60  
10.70  
10.80  
11  
11.00  
FIGURE LIST  
FIGURE  
7-1  
TITLE  
PAGE  
DK8 AND DK16 MUSIC-ON-HOLD AND BACKGROUND MUSIC  
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM..................................................................................... 7-2  
DK16 BGM SOURCE/STANDARD TELEPHONE CIRCUIT PRECAUTION  
7-2  
DIAGRAM............................................................................................................. 7-4  
DK8 AND DK16 MUSIC SOURCE CONFIGURATION A ..................................... 7-5  
DK8 AND DK16 MUSIC SOURCE CONFIGURATION B ..................................... 7-5  
DK16 MUSIC SOURCE CONFIGURATION C...................................................... 7-6  
7-3  
7-4  
7-5  
7-i  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
FIGURE LIST  
TITLE  
FIGURE  
PAGE  
7-6  
7-7  
7-8  
7-9  
7-10  
DK16 PIOU RELAY CONTROL FUNCTIONAL WIRING DIAGRAM .................... 7-8  
DK16 PIOUS RELAY CONTROL FUNCTIONAL WIRING DIAGRAM.................. 7-9  
DK16 DOOR LOCK CONTROL OPTION (PIOU/PIOUS) ..................................... 7-10  
DK8 AND DK16 DOOR LOCK CONTROL OPTION (DDCB) ............................... 7-11  
DK8 AND DK16 HESB/DIGITAL TELEPHONE WITH LOUD RINGING  
BELL WIRING ...................................................................................................... 7-14  
DK16 HESB/ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE WITH LOUD RINGING  
7-11  
BELL WIRING ...................................................................................................... 7-15  
DK8 AND DK16 HESB/AMPLIFIED SPEAKER WIRING...................................... 7-17  
DK8 AND DK16 HESB/TALKBACK AMPLIFIED SPEAKER WIRING.................. 7-18  
HESB WALL MOUNTING .................................................................................... 7-19  
DK8 AND DK16 PAGE AND SEPARATE BGM USING SAME AMPLIFIER ........ 7-20  
DK16 PIOU ZONE, PAGE/BGM/NIGHT RING (SEPARATE AMPLIFIERS) ........ 7-21  
DK16 PAGING WITH MULTIPLE AMPLIFIERS ................................................... 7-22  
DK16 NIGHT RINGING OVER ALL EXTERNAL PAGE ZONES.......................... 7-24  
DK8 AND DK16 SMDR PRINTOUT EXAMPLES ................................................ 7-26  
DK8 AND DK16 PIOU/PIOUS SMDR CABLE CONNECTIONS ........................... 7-28  
PIOU/PIOUS SMDR PORT (PROGRAM 97) DATA DUMP EXAMPLE................ 7-29  
DK8 AND DK16 VOICE MAIL/AUTO ATTENDANT BLOCK DIAGRAM............... 7-30  
DK16 ALARM SENSOR BLOCK DIAGRAM ......................................................... 7-33  
DK8 OR DK16 DATA INSTALLATION EXAMPLE BLOCK DIAGRAM................. 7-41  
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DI TO IBM AT-TYPE COMPUTER  
7-12  
7-13  
7-14  
7-15  
7-16  
7-17  
7-18  
7-19  
7-20  
7-21  
7-22  
7-23  
7-24  
7-25  
RS-232 CONNECTOR/CABLE CONNECTIONS.................................................. 7-42  
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DI TO IBM XT-TYPE COMPUTER,  
RS-232 CONNECTOR/CABLE CONNECTIONS.................................................. 7-43  
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DS TO TOSHIBA PRINTER,  
RS-232 CONNECTOR/CABLE CONNECTIONS.................................................. 7-44  
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DS TO HAYES-TYPE SMART MODEM,  
RS-232 CONNECTOR/CABLE CONNECTIONS.................................................. 7-45  
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS MODULAR CABLE/RJ-45 ADAPTER  
CONNECTIONS ................................................................................................... 7-46  
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS MODULAR CORDS  
AND RJ-45/RS-232 ADAPTER PIN CONNECTIONS .......................................... 7-47  
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DS JUMPER PLUG OPTIONS/RS-232  
7-26  
7-27  
7-28  
7-29  
7-30  
7-31  
CONNECTOR INFORMATION ............................................................................ 7-48  
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS SW1 DIP SWITCH INFORMATION ............. 7-49  
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DS DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM .................... 7-50  
DK8 AND DK16 PC TO PC TEST CALL USING AT COMMANDS ...................... 7-51  
DK8 AND DK16 PC TO PRINTER TEST CALL USING MANUAL DIALING ........ 7-52  
DK8 AND DK16 INTERNAL PC TO EXTERNAL PC TEST CALL  
7-32  
7-33  
7-34  
7-35  
7-36  
USING AT COMMANDS ...................................................................................... 7-53  
DK8 AND DK16 EXTERNAL PC TO INTERNAL PC TEST CALL  
7-37  
USING AT COMMANDS ...................................................................................... 7-54  
DK8 AND DK16 PC AUTO DIAL VOICE CALL TEST .......................................... 7-56  
DK16 AMPLIFIED TWO-CO LINE CONFERENCE AND/OR AMPLIFIED DISA  
FUNCTIONAL WIRING DIAGRAM ....................................................................... 7-57  
7-38  
7-39  
7-ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
Relay Contact Specifications  
1 GENERAL  
Voltage: 24VDC maximum  
Current: 1 ampere maximum  
1.00 This chapter provides procedures necessary  
to connect optional peripheral equipment to the  
STRATA DK8 or DK16. The installation instruc-  
tions for each peripheral option include hardware  
requirements, printed circuit board (PCB) configu-  
ration, interconnection/wiring requirements, and  
programming considerations, as applicable.  
IMPORTANT NOTICE!  
MUSIC-ON-HOLD  
In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a  
license may be required from the Ameri-  
can Society of Composers, Authors, and  
Publishers (ASCAP), or other similar or-  
ganization, if copyrighted music is trans-  
mitted through the Music-on-Hold feature  
of this telecommunications system.  
Toshiba America Information Systems,  
Inc., hereby disclaims any liability arising  
out of the failure to obtain such a license.  
1.01 Peripheral equipment is connected to the  
Base Unit itself and PCBs located in the Base Unit  
and Expansion Unit on the DK16. On the DK8,  
peripheral equipment connects to the KSU. Refer  
to Section 100-816-204 for Key Service Unit instal-  
lation instructions, PCB installation instructions,  
and PCB configuration information for the DK8.  
Refer to Section 100-816-205 for Base Unit and  
Expansion Unit installation instructions, PCB in-  
stallationinstructions, andPCBconfigurationinfor-  
mation for the DK16.  
2.12 Music-on-Hold Installation. Install the Mu-  
sic-on-Hold option in accordance with the following  
steps (refer to Figure 7-1):  
1) Connect the external music source to the  
MOH RCA jack on the DK8 KSU or DK16  
Base Unit.  
1.02 Wiring diagrams for each peripheral are lo-  
cated in this chapter.  
2) Rotate the MOH volume control (VR1) on the  
Base Unit to adjust Music-on-Hold volume:  
clockwise increases volume; counterclock-  
wise decreases volume. Listen to the CO line  
on-hold when setting MOH to the proper vol-  
ume.  
2 MUSIC-ON-HOLD/BACKGROUND  
MUSIC OPTIONS  
2.00 STRATA DK8 and DK16 systems provides a  
Music-on-Hold option for CO lines and digital, elec-  
tronic (DK16 only) and standard telephones con-  
nected to the system. A variety of Background  
Music options are also provided (refer to Figure  
7-1).  
3A) If MOH relay control is required in DK8, the  
MOH relay is selected in Program 77-1. Fol-  
low program instructions to make selection.  
This will short pins 42 and 17 of the DK8 KSU  
or DK16 Base Unit amphenol connector when  
MOH is activated by a CO line on hold.  
2.10 DK8 and DK16 Music-on-Hold (MOH)  
Option  
2.11 An external music source—such as a tape  
player or tuner—can be connected to the RCA jack  
(labeled MOH) on the STRATA DK8 or DK16. The  
MOH source can be controlled (on/off) by a relay  
option set in Program 77-1. The DK8 KSU and  
DK16 Base Unit relay can control the MOH source,  
or the DK16 night bell. The MOH source and MOH  
relay contact specifications are:  
3B) If MOH relay control is required in DK16, the  
Base Unit or the PIOU/PIOUS relay may be  
selected in Program 77-1. Follow Program  
instruction to make the selection.  
4A) SetPIOUjumperplugP11toMAKEorBREAK  
position as required:  
MAKE (M)—Shorts the normally open  
contacts (pins 9 and 34) when MOH is  
activated.  
MOH Source Specifications  
Input Impedance: 600 ohms  
BREAK(B)—Opensthenormallyclosed  
contacts (pins 9 and 34) when MOH is  
activated.  
Input Voltage (recommended levels)  
Minimum: 0.14 VRMS (-15 dBm)  
Maximum: 0.77 VRMS (0 dBm)  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
DK8 KSU OR DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT  
VR1  
TWISTED PAIR  
24 AWG.  
MOH/BGM  
VOLUME CONTROL  
BACKPLANE  
MOH TO:  
CO LINES  
AND  
STATIONS  
ON-HOLD  
MUSIC-  
ON-HOLD  
MAX.  
MUSIC  
MUSIC-  
ON-HOLD  
SOURCE  
*
MOH  
RCA  
PAGE OR  
BACKGROUND  
MUSIC  
JACK  
ON/OFF  
CONTROL  
(24 VOLT  
MAX)  
BGM TO:  
DIGITAL  
AND  
ELECTRONIC  
TELEPHONE  
SPEAKERS  
PAGE/BGM  
CONTROL  
AMPHENOL  
PIN NO. (4)  
(17)  
DK8 OR  
DK16  
RELAY  
PROG:  
77-1  
MOH CONTROL-CHOOSE BASE UNIT  
OR PIOU/PIOUS RELAY:  
OPTIONAL  
EXTERNAL PAGE/  
BGM OUTPUTS  
*MOH SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS:  
•
•
INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600Ω  
INPUT VOLTAGE:  
(NOTE)  
HESB OR  
AMPLIFIER  
AND  
RECOMMENDED LEVELS,  
MIN. = 0.14 VRMS (-15 dBm)  
MAX. = 0.77 VRMS (0 dBm)  
SPEAKER  
600 OHM  
PAGE  
RCA JACK  
TYPICAL MOH SOURCES:  
• TAPE PLAYER  
• TUNER  
DK16 EXPANSION UNIT  
PIOU/PIOUS (NOTE)  
(9)  
( ) PIN NO.s OF PIOU  
AMPHENOL CONNECTOR  
MOH OR  
B
NIGHT TRANSFER  
(34)  
CONTROL  
RELAY  
MOH/NT  
RELAY CONTACT  
M
JUMPER PLUG (MAKE OR BREAK)  
SELECT  
MOH  
P11  
PROG. 77-1  
W2, IF USING PIOUS  
(SEE FIGURE 7-7)  
RELAY CONTACT SPECIFICATION:  
24 VDC MAX.  
1 AMPERE, MAX.  
NOTE:  
DK8 KSU relay or DK16 Base Unit relay can be  
programmed (77-1) as the MOH control relay: or in DK16  
the PIOU MOH/NT relay can be used to control MOH.  
FIGURE 7-1  
DK8 AND DK16 MUSIC-ON-HOLD AND BACKGROUND MUSIC FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM  
(SEE MDF WIRING DIAGRAM FOR DETAILS)  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
4B) SolderPIOUSjumperW2toMAKEorBREAK  
position if required:  
3) Configuration C (DK16 only)—three music  
sources: This configuration allows the MOH  
source to be connected to the MOH jack on  
the Base Unit (as in Configuration A). The  
digital or electronic telephone BGM source is  
connectedtoadesignatedcircuitonthePEKU,  
PESU, PSTU, or KSTU (as in Configuration  
B), and a separate BGM source is sent to the  
external page speakers via the PIOU Zone  
relay contacts (see Figure 7-5). When a sepa-  
rate BGM source is connected to the PIOU,  
twocustomer-suppliedamplifiersarerequired  
to drive the external speakers. One amplifier  
(1) drives the speakers for BGM when page is  
idle and the other amplifier (2) drives the  
speakers during page.  
MAKE (M)—Shorts the normally open  
contacts (NHT and NHR) when any CO  
line is in the hold condition.  
BREAK(B)—Opensthenormallyclosed  
contacts (NHT and NHR) when any CO  
line is in the hold condition.  
5) ForDK8andDK16, MOHissenttoanystation  
or CO line that is on hold.  
6) MOH is also applied through the Page/Back-  
ground Music (BGM) control to provide BGM  
to electronic/digital telephone speakers and  
external page (refer to Paragraph 2.20).  
2.20 Background Music (BGM) Options  
2.22 MOH Source as Background Music Instal-  
lation (DK8 and DK16). Install the MOH/Back-  
ground Music option in accordance with the follow-  
ing steps (refer to Figure 7-1):  
2.21 The Background Music options allow music  
to play over optional external speakers (external  
page system) and/or electronic and/or telephone  
speakers. The system allows BGM to be config-  
ured any of the three ways described below:  
1) Ensure that the Music-on-Hold option is in-  
stalled in accordance with Paragraph 2.12.  
1) Configuration A (DK8 and DK16)—one music  
source: This configuration allows BGM and  
MOH to share the same music source (see  
Figure 7-3). With this configuration, the MOH/  
BGM music source is connected to the MOH  
RCA jack on the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit.  
The music source is sent to CO lines/stations  
on hold, to electronic/digital telephone speak-  
ers with BGM turned on (via Intercom 481  
or Tel Set Music button), and to the exter-  
nal page system via the 600 ohm RCA jack on  
the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit.  
2) The output of the MOH RCA jack is applied to  
the 600 ohm PAGE RCA jack output.  
3) When using an HESB or external amplifier  
for paging/BGM, adjust volume using the  
HESB or amplifier volume control.  
2.23 Alternate BGM Source Installation  
A
BGM source can be connected to either a QSTU,  
PSTU, KSTU, PEKU, or PESU. This music will be  
sent to all electronic/digital telephone speakers  
and to the external page system via the 600 ohm  
PAGE RCA jack on the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base  
Unit. This BGM source is separated from the  
MOH source connected to the MOH RCA jack on  
the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit. Connect the  
BGM source to the QSTU, PSTU, KSTU, PEKU  
or PESU in accordance with the following steps  
(Figure 7-4):  
2) Configuration B—two music sources: This  
configuration allows the MOH source to be  
connected to the MOH jack on the DK8 KSU  
or DK16 Base Unit (as in Configuration A) and  
a separate BGM source to be connected to a  
designated circuit on either a QSTU (circuit 2,  
Port 19), PEKU (circuit 3), PESU (circuit 8),  
PSTU, or KSTU (circuit 4)—see Figure 7-4.  
With this configuration, the MOH source is  
sent only to CO lines/stations on hold, while  
the BGM source is sent directly to electronic/  
digital telephone speakers and to the external  
page system via the 600 ohm RCA jack on the  
DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit.  
NOTE:  
If connecting the BGM source to the KSTU,  
PSTU, or QSTU PCB, a telephone adaptor  
matching/isolation transformer should be in-  
stalled between the source and the PCB to  
protect the source from potentially ruinous  
voltages generated by the PCB (see Figure  
7-2).  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
1UNIVERSITY SOUND  
MODEL TM-2  
RCA JACK  
TELEPHONE ADAPTOR  
(OR EQUIVALENT)  
KSTU OR PSTU  
*
RING  
TIP  
BGM MUSIC  
SOURCE  
600Ω OUTPUT  
OR 8Ω OUTPUT  
CIRCUIT 4  
OR  
QSTU,  
CIRCUIT 2  
(PORT 19)  
HIGH LEVEL  
INPUT  
OUTPUT  
PHONE LINE  
SEE PROGRAM 19 FOR SLOT KSTU OR PSTU ASSIGNMENT  
SEE PROGRAM 10-2, LED 10 FOR QSTU, PORT 19 ASSIGNMENT  
BGM SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS:  
NOTE:  
*
1. UNIVERSITY SOUND  
1327 Ralston Avenue  
Sylmar, Ca. 91342-7607  
Phone: (818) 362-9516  
• INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600Ω  
• INPUT VOLTAGE:  
RECOMMENDED LEVELS,  
MIN. = 0.14 VRMS (–15 dBm)  
MAX. = 0.77 VRMS (0 dBm)  
FIGURE 7-2  
DK16 BGM SOURCE/STANDARD TELEPHONE CIRCUIT PRECAUTION DIAGRAM  
4) Using the BGM source’s volume control,  
1) For DK16, enter the programming mode and  
identifytheBGMslotnumberinProgram19of  
theprintedcircuitboard(KSTU,PSTU,PEKU,  
and PESU) which the BGM source will be  
connected to.  
adjust the BGM volume to the desired level  
while listening to BGM via an digital or  
electronic telephone speaker and/or the ex-  
ternal page speakers. When BGM is sent to  
external speakers via the 600 ohm RCA jack  
PCB, use the external amplifier volume con-  
trol to balance the BGM and page volume  
levels.  
2) Connect the BGM source to the tip and ring of  
theappropriatecircuitoftheBGMPCB:KSTU  
or PSTU (circuit 4), PEKU (circuit 3), and  
PESU(circuit8).InProgram10-2,useLED09  
or 10 to specify the circuit number PEKU or  
PESU. KSTU or PSTU does not require Pro-  
gram 10-2 assignment.  
2.24 External Background Music Installation.  
The external background music options are  
closely associated with the external paging op-  
tions. Refer to Paragraph 5 for external paging  
amplifier installation.  
2A) For DK8, enter the programming mode and  
set LED 10 to on in Program 10-2. This  
assigns QSTU circuit 2, Port 19 as the BGM  
source for the system. You must cycle system  
power for Program 10-2 to take effect.  
3 RELAY CONTROL OPTIONS  
3.00 General  
3) If BGM is connected to PEKU or PESU, cut  
W5 on the PEKU or W7 on the PESU PCB  
that BGM is connected to.  
3.01 The DK8 KSU and DK16 Base Unit provides  
one relay, and the PIOU and PIOUS each provides  
two relays that control peripheral options.  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
DK8 KSU or DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT  
VR1  
MOH VOLUME  
CONTROL  
MOH  
CO LINES AND  
STATIONS ON-HOLD  
MOH/BGM SOURCE  
(SHARED)  
BGM PAGE  
ELECTRONIC/DIGITAL  
TELEPHONE SPEAKER  
DK8/DK16  
MOH  
RCA  
(BGM: 481 ON/480 OFF)  
JACK  
TO EXTERNAL  
PAGE SYSTEM  
MOH SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS:  
*
• INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600Ω  
DK8/DK16  
600 OHM  
PAGE RCA  
JACK  
(BGM WHEN PAGE IS IDLE)  
• INPUT VOLTAGE:  
RECOMMENDED LEVELS,  
MIN. = 0.14 VRMS (–15 dBm)  
MAX. = 0.77 VRMS (0 dBm)  
FIGURE 7-3  
DK8 AND DK16 MUSIC SOURCE CONFIGURATION A  
DK8 OR DK16 VR1 MOH  
VOLUME CONTROL  
MOH  
CO LINES AND  
STATIONS ON-HOLD  
*
MOH SOURCE  
DK8 OR DK16 MOH  
RCA JACK  
(BGM WHEN  
PAGE IS IDLE)  
BGM/PAGE  
QSTU – CIRCUIT 2  
KSTU/PSTU – CIRCUIT 4  
PEKU – CIRCUIT 3  
PESU – CIRCUIT 8  
TO EXTERNAL  
PAGE SYSTEM  
BGM  
DK8 OR DK16  
(BGM: 491 ON/490 OFF)  
600 OHM  
PAGE  
JACK  
(600Ω OUTPUT)  
*
*
BGM SOURCE:  
QSTU  
KSTU, PSTU  
PESU  
VT  
VR  
DIGITAL/ELECTRONIC  
TELEPHONES AND  
EXTERNAL SPEAKERS  
ELECTRONIC/DIGITAL  
TELEPHONE SPEAKER  
OR PEKU  
BGM/MOH SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS:  
(BGM: 481 ON/480 OFF)  
• INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600Ω  
• INPUT VOLTAGE:  
RECOMMENDED LEVELS,  
MIN. = 0.14 VRMS (–15 dBm)  
MAX. = 0.77 VRMS (0 dBm)  
BACKPLANE WIRING  
INSTALLATION WIRING  
SEE: PROGRAM 19 (SLOT ASSIGNMENT)  
SEE: PROGRAM 10-2 (CIRCUIT ASSIGNMENT)  
FIGURE 7-4  
DK8 AND DK16 MUSIC SOURCE CONFIGURATION B  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
MOH  
CO LINES AND  
STATIONS ON-HOLD  
MOH SOURCE  
J6 MOH  
RCA JACK  
(BASE UNIT)  
SEE: PROGRAM 10-2 (CIRCUIT ASSIGNMENT)  
BGM/PAGE  
PROGRAM 19 (SLOT ASSIGNMENT)  
VT  
ELECTRONIC/  
DIGITAL TELEPHONE  
KSTU,PSTU,  
ELECTRONIC/DIGITAL  
TELEPHONE SPEAKER  
BGM SOURCE  
PESU  
OR PEKU  
IN SLOT  
VR  
(BGM: 481 ON/480 OFF)  
KSTU/PSTU – CIRCUIT 4  
PEKU – CIRCUIT 3  
PESU – CIRCUIT 8  
J7, 600 OHM  
PAGE OUTPUT  
(BASE UNIT)  
PAGE  
AMPLIFIER (2)  
EXTERNAL SPEAKER  
BGM SOURCE  
PAGE  
PAGE  
OR BGM  
P23  
BGM  
BGM  
PIOU ONLY  
TO EXTERNAL  
PAGE SPEAKER  
DK16 EXPANSION  
UNIT  
ZONE RELAYS  
ACTIVATE  
WITH PAGE  
AMPLIFIER (1)  
(BGM WHEN PAGE IS IDLE)  
BACKPLANE WIRING  
INSTALLATION WIRING  
FIGURE 7-5  
DK16 MUSIC SOURCE CONFIGURATION C  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
figure the PIOU or PIOUS for the door lock control  
function in accordance with the following steps  
(refer to Figure 7-6 and 7-7):  
3.10 DK8 KSU and DK16 Base Unit Relay  
3.11TheDK8KSUorDK16BaseUnitRelaycanbe  
programmed for one of three options:  
BGM mute  
NOTE:  
Only one door lock control is available using an  
optional interface PCB (PIOU or PIOUS), be-  
cause only one interface PCB is allowed .  
Night transfer  
MOH source control  
These options are set in Program 77-1 (LED 01  
and 02). Only one option is allowed per installation.  
However,intheDK16,theseoptionscanbesupple-  
mented with PIOU/PIOUS relay options. Refer to  
Chapter 8 for wiring/interconnecting details. Elec-  
trical specifications for the relay contacts are as  
follows:  
1) Access Program 77-1. Set LED 07 for the  
door lock control function.  
2) Access Program 77-1. Set LED 20 to OFF for  
a3-seconddoorlockactivationtime, orsetLED  
20 to ON for a 6-second door lock activation  
time.  
Voltage  
24VDC maximum  
Current  
3A) Set the P10 jumper plug on the PIOU to the  
MAKE or BREAK position, as required:  
MAKE—Shorts the normally open con-  
tacts (pins 7 and 32) when a station’s  
door lock button is pressed.  
1 ampere maximum  
Normally open—closed when activated  
3.20 DK16 Expansion Unit PIOU and PIOUS  
Relays  
BREAK—Opens the normally closed  
contacts (pins 7 and 32) when a station’s  
door lock button is pressed.  
3.21 The Expansion Unit via the PIOU or PIOUS  
provides two additional relays that control periph-  
eral options (see Figures 7-6, 7-7, 8-23, and 8-25).  
Door Lock Relay/BGM mute  
3B) Solder the W1 jumper plug on the PIOUS to  
the MAKE or BREAK position as required:  
MAKE—Shorts the normally open con-  
tacts (DET and DER) when a station’s  
door lock button is pressed.  
Night Transfer/Music-on-Hold Relay  
NOTE:  
BREAK—Opens the normally closed  
contacts(DETandDER)whenastation’s  
door lock button is pressed.  
The above relay options are available in con-  
junction with the Base Unit relay option.  
3.22 Each relay may be configured as normally  
open (make) or normally closed (BREAK). Electri-  
cal specifications for the relay contacts are as  
follows:  
4) Refer to Figure 7-8 for wiring/interconnecting  
details. Connect the PIOU or PIOUS to the  
MDF as required for the door lock control  
function.  
Voltage  
24VDC maximum  
Current  
3.24 DK8 and DK16 DDCB Door Lock Control.  
In addition to the door lock control provided by the  
PIOUorPIOUS(DK16only), eachdoorphone/lock  
control box (DDCB) installed provides one door  
lock control. Only two DDCBs can be installed in a  
system: On DK8 a DDCB can be connected to  
Circuit 3 (Port 02) and/or Circuit 4 (Port 03); on  
DK16 a DDCB can be connected to the circuit 5  
1 ampere maximum  
CAUTION!  
Do not connect relays directly to 120VAC  
power source.  
3.23 Door Lock Control (PIOU or PIOUS). Con-  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
PIOU PCB  
MDF 66M  
BLOCK  
PIOU 25 PR.  
CONNECTIONS  
PAGE  
AMPLIFIER  
SELECT RELAY FUNCTION  
WITH PROGRAM 77-1  
DOOR LOCK OR EXTERNAL  
PAGE CONTROL  
PIN NO.  
COLOR PIN NO.s  
BREAK  
BGM MUTE  
DOOR  
LOCK  
CONTROL  
.
.
DE.T  
P10  
32  
7
R-O  
O-R  
13  
14  
DE. R  
MAKE  
.
TAPE  
PLAYER  
P11  
CONTROL  
BREAK  
.
.
NH.T  
NH.R  
34  
9
R-Br  
Br-R  
17  
18  
.
MAKE  
.
.
MDF  
CONNECTIONS  
SELECT RELAY FUNCTION  
WITH PROGRAM 77-1:  
NIGHT  
BELL  
ALL WIRES SHOULD  
BE JACKETED 24 AWG  
TWISTED PAIRS  
NIGHT RELAY OR  
MOH CONTROL  
TO MUSIC-ON-  
HOLD INPUT  
NOTE:  
Dotted lines and solid lines differentiate optional connections  
where applicable; do not connect both options simultaneously.  
FIGURE 7-6  
DK16 PIOU RELAY CONTROL FUNCTIONAL WIRING DIAGRAM  
3) On the DDCB, set SW1 to the DOOR position,  
and SW2 to the LOCK position.  
(Logical Port 04) of the Base Unit Digital telephone  
circuit set and to circuit 1 of the KCDU or PDKU  
(Logical Port 12) in the Expansion Unit. Each  
DDCB door lock control installed reduces the sys-  
tem door phone capacity of six by one. Any elec-  
tronic or digital telephone can be equipped with a  
buttonforeachofthedoorlocks.InstalleachDDCB  
door lock control as follows:  
4) In Program 77-1, set the door unlock activa-  
tion for three or six seconds, and enable the  
applicable port for DDCB connection, and  
specify if door phones should ring over exter-  
nal page at night.  
5) In Program 77-2, enable the DDCB B-jack for  
door lock operation, and specify 1 or 5 rings  
when door button is pressed.  
DDCB Installation  
1) On DK8, connect applicable digital telephone  
circuit (Logical Port 02 or 03) to the DDCB  
KSU modular jack (see Figure 7-9 and Figure  
8-4).  
6) In Program 79, specify door phone ringing  
assignments.  
7) InProgram39, assignUnlockDoorbuttonsto  
the desired stations.  
2) On DK16, connect the applicable digital tele-  
phone circuit (Logical Port 04 or 12) to the  
DDCB HKSU modular jack (see Figure 7-9  
and Figure 8-4).  
8) Check each Unlock Door button from each  
station: DDCB modular B-jack (pins 3 and 4)  
will momentarily close (three or six seconds)  
when the appropriate Unlock Door button is  
pressed.  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
TBI  
DE  
MDF  
BREAK  
W1  
DET  
DER  
DOOR  
LOCK  
CONTROL  
MAKE  
K1  
BREAK  
W2  
NHT  
NHR  
MOH  
SOURCE  
UNIT  
MAKE  
NH  
K2  
NIGHT BELL  
NORMAL OPEN  
ALMT  
ALMR  
FACILITY  
ALARM  
UNIT  
W3  
ALARM  
SENSOR  
ALM  
NORMAL  
CLOSE  
PIOUS  
All wiring connections must be 24 AWG twisted pairs.  
•
RELAY OPTIONS:  
• K1 (DE): DOOR LOCK OR AMP MUTE CONTROL; PROGRAM 77-1, LED 07  
• K2 (NH): NIGHT RELAY OR MUSIC-ON-HOLD CONTROL; PROGRAM 77-1, LED 05  
• K1 & K2: 24VDC, 1 AMP MAXIMUM  
FIGURE 7-7  
DK16 PIOUS RELAY CONTROL FUNCTIONAL WIRING DIAGRAM  
3.30 DK16 Expansion Unit Night Transfer/  
Music-on-Hold Relay Options with PIOU or  
PIOUS  
3.25 Door Lock Assignments Guide  
Port Door  
Prog. 39  
Host  
No. Lock No. Assignments  
3.31 The NHT/NHR relay may be programmed for  
either the night relay or the MOH relay function  
(refer to Figures 7-6 and 7-7). These functions can  
beprovidedinadditiontotherelayserviceprovided  
by the Base Unit.  
DK16 PIOU/PIOUS  
N/A  
0
Code 71  
Code 72  
Code 73  
Unlock  
Door 0  
Ckt 5 DK16  
Base Unit DDCB  
Ckt 3 DK8 KSU DDCB  
04  
1
Unlock  
Door 1  
02  
12  
Ckt 1 Expansion Unit  
(PDKU or KCDU)  
Ckt 4 DK8 KSU DDCB  
2
Unlock  
Door 2  
3.32 When configured for the night transfer func-  
tion with Program 77-1, the relay activates if the  
system is in the NIGHT mode. The relay may be  
03  
Note: CKT1 must be used in installing DDCB on KCDU  
or PDKU. (Must be in Port 12)  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
25-PAIR  
AMPHENOL  
SEE FIGURE 8-23  
FOR WIRING  
PIOU  
MDF  
DET  
P10  
PIN 34, R-BR  
PIN 9, BR-R  
B
17  
18  
TO DOOR LOCK  
M
DER  
SEE PROGRAM 77-1,  
LED 07, 20  
DOOR LOCK 0 BUTTON  
FOR RELAY OPTIONS  
NOTE:  
Unlock Door 0  
PIOUS  
BREAK  
MDF  
assigned to digital and electronic  
telephones in Program 39 with  
Code 71.  
K1  
DET  
DE  
W1  
TO DOOR LOCK  
MAKE  
K1/P10 (24VDC, 1.0 AMP MAX.)  
DER  
TERMINAL ON FRONT EDGE OF PCB  
FIGURE 7-8  
DK16 DOOR LOCK CONTROL OPTION (PIOU/PIOUS)  
programmed to activate continuously when the  
Night Transfer 1 button (only) is set to NIGHT  
mode (for indirect answering machine control); or  
to pulsate at 1-second ON/3-seconds OFF (for a  
night bell) when incoming CO lines night ring over  
external page (Program 78-13) (NT1 = tenant 1  
CO lines; NT2 = tenant 2 CO lines) per Program  
15.  
2) Access Program 77-1. Set LED 06 to provide  
continuous or pulsating relay activation as  
follows:  
OFF—Programstherelayforcontinuous  
activation when NT1button (only) is set.  
ON—Programs the relay for pulsating  
activation when the NT1 or NT2 button  
is set to NIGHT mode and a tenant 1 or  
tenant 2 CO line rings.  
3.33 When configured for the Music-on-Hold func-  
tion with Program 77-1, the relay activates any  
time a CO line is on hold. In this configuration, the  
relay is normally used to control the Music-on-Hold  
source.  
NOTE:  
CO lines must be enabled in Program 78-13  
for the NT pulsating relay function.  
3.34 DK16 Night Transfer Relay Control. Con-  
figure the PIOU or PIOUS for the Night Transfer  
Relay function in accordance with the following  
steps (refer to Figures 7-6 and 7-7):  
3) Access Programs 87, 88, and 89 to set the  
CO lines that will activate the relay (when the  
system is in the NIGHT mode).  
4) Access Program 39 to program a Night  
Transfer button (NT1 or NT2) on all tele-  
phones that are to transfer the system into the  
NIGHT mode.  
1) Access Program 77-1. Set LED 05 to OFF to  
configure the Night/Hold Relay for the Night  
Relay function.  
7-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
DDCB  
NOTE 1  
RELAY  
CONTROL  
CONTACT  
RJ11  
RJ11  
RJ11  
MDFB  
A
2
3
3
4
1
2
DOOR PHONE  
4
5
2
5
A
TO CUSTOMER  
SUPPLIED  
DEVICE  
DK16 KDCU,  
CKT1  
- OR-  
DK16 PDKU,  
CKT1  
- OR -  
DK16 DIGITAL  
CKT5 OF  
BASE UNIT  
- OR -  
DK8 KSU,  
CKT 3 AND 4  
B
C
MDFB  
(See Fig. 8-4  
wiring diagrams)  
3
1
3
4
DOOR PHONE  
- or -  
DOOR LOCK CONTROL  
B
(DK16 Port 04, 12)  
(DK8 Port 02, 03)  
2
1
4
3
MDFB  
DOOR LOCK  
CONTROL  
CONTACT  
NOTE 2  
3
4
DOOR PHONE  
C
4
2
DDCB TO DK8 KSU WIRING CHART  
DDCB  
DDCB TO DK16 BASE UNIT WIRING CHART  
BASE UNIT  
PORT NO.  
DK8 AMPHENOL TO  
TO DDCB KSU JACK  
AMPHENOL  
KSU JACK  
DT (34) / DR (9)  
TO  
PIN 3 / 4  
PIN 5 / 6  
02  
DT (30) / DR (5)  
PT (31) / PR (6)  
TO  
TO  
PIN 3 / 4  
PIN 5 / 6  
PT (35) / PR (10) TO  
DDCB TO DK16 EXPANSION UNIT  
WIRING CHART  
03  
DT (32) / DR (7)  
PT (33) / PR (8)  
TO  
TO  
PIN 3 / 4  
PIN 5 / 6  
KCDU OR PDKU  
TO DDCB KSU JACK  
NOTES  
DT (26) / DR (1)  
PT (27) / PR (2)  
TO  
TO  
PIN 3 / 4  
PIN 5 / 6  
1. Relay control contact will close when the door phone is in the  
ringing, talk, or monitor state.  
2. See Paragraph 4.25 for Door Lock assignments.  
3. Relay contact specifications are -24VDC at 1.0 amp. max. Do  
not connect relay contacts to 120 AC commercial power.  
See Figure 8-4 for DK16 Base Unit, PDKU, and  
KCDU pin-out information  
FIGURE 7-9  
DK8 AND DK16 DOOR LOCK CONTROL OPTION (DDCB)  
5) Access Programs 29-1 ~ 29-2 to program a  
NightTransferbutton(NT1orNT2)onall  
DSS consoles that are to transfer the system  
into the NIGHT mode.  
7B) Solder the jumper W2 on the PIOUS to the  
MAKE or BREAK position, as required:  
MAKE—Shorts the normally open con-  
tacts (NHT and NHR) when the night  
relay is activated.  
6) If tenant operation is required, access Pro-  
gram 15to set the CO lines for tenant 1 (NT1)  
or tenant 2 (NT2) operation.  
BREAK—Opens the normally closed  
contacts (NHT and NHR) when night  
relay is activated.  
8) Refer to Figures 7-6 and 7-7 for wiring/inter-  
connecting details. Connect the PIOU or PI-  
OUStotheMDFasrequiredforthenightrelay  
function.  
7A) Set the P11 jumper plug on the PIOU to the  
MAKE or BREAK position, as required:  
MAKE—Shorts the normally open con-  
tacts (pins 9 and 34) when the night relay  
is activated.  
NOTE:  
Door phones programmed to ring over exter-  
nal page in night mode (Program 77-1) do not  
activate the NT relay.  
BREAK—Opens the normally closed  
contacts (pins 9 and 34) when the night  
relay is activated.  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
3.35 DK16 Expansion Unit MOH Relay Control.  
Configure the PIOU or PIOUS for the MOH relay  
function in accordance with the following steps  
(refer to Figures 7-6 and 7-7):  
4.02 Amplified Speaker Option. The Amplified  
Speaker option allows the HESB to be configured  
asapagingspeaker.TheHESBisconnectedtothe  
600 ohm Page RCA jack on the DK8 KSU or DK16  
BaseUnittoprovideanamplifiedexternalspeaker.  
1) Access Program 77-1. Set LED 05 to ON to  
configure the Night/MOH relay for the MOH  
relay function.  
4.03 Talkback Amplified Speaker Option. The  
Talkback Amplified Speaker option allows a  
talkback speaker to be provided in areas where a  
telephone is not needed. In this configuration, the  
HESB is connected to the 600 ohm Page RCA jack  
on the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit and is used as  
the amplifier and speaker. The door phone unit  
(MDFB) is connected to the HESB, and serves as  
a microphone to provide talkback operation. (The  
MDFB microphone is always on in this application  
so the pushbutton is inoperative, and the unit  
serves only as a microphone for talkback.)  
2A) Set the P11 jumper plug on the PIOU to the  
MAKE or BREAK position, as required:  
MAKE—Shorts the normally open con-  
tacts (pins 9 and 34) when any CO line is  
on hold.  
BREAK—Opens the normally closed  
contacts (pins 9 and 34) when any CO  
line is on hold.  
2B) Solder the W2 jumper on the PIOUS to the  
MAKE or BREAK position, as required:  
MAKE—Shorts the normally open con-  
tacts (NHT and NHR) when any CO line  
is on hold.  
NOTE:  
The 600 ohm Page RCA jack is two-way  
(duplex)andiscompatiblewithmostcommer-  
cially available talkback amplifiers.  
BREAK—Opens the normally closed  
contacts (NHT and NHR) when any CO  
line is in on hold.  
4.10 System Hardware Requirements  
4.11 Systemhardwarerequirementsvarydepend-  
ing on the HESB option selected. Refer to the  
following installation procedures for the system  
hardware requirements for each option.  
3) Refer to Figures 7-6 and 7-7 for wiring/inter-  
connecting details. Connect the PIOU or  
PIOUS to the MDF as required for the MOH  
relay function.  
4.20 HESB Option Installation  
4 EXTERNAL SPEAKER UNIT (HESB)  
OPTIONS  
4.21 Loud Ringing Bell Installation. Install the  
HESB Loud Ringing Bell option in accordance with  
the following procedures:  
4.00 STRATA DK8 and DK16 systems provide  
three options utilizing an HESB:  
DK8 and DK16 HESB Installation for Digital  
Telephone Loud Ring Bell (Figure 7-10):  
4.01 DK8 and DK16 Loud Ringing Bell Option.  
The Loud Ringing Bell option allows the voice first  
orringingsignaltonetobeamplifiedwithouttheuse  
of other manufacturers’ equipment. The voice first  
and ringing signal tones can be amplified on all  
6500-series electronic telephones and 2000- and  
1000-seriesdigitaltelephonesequippedwithHHEU  
PCBs (refer to Section 100-816-206). The HESB  
automatically turns off once the ringing call or voice  
first has been manually answered from the elec-  
tronic or digital telephone. This turn-off feature  
prevents audio feedback problems.  
1) Connect a jumper between Terminals 2 and  
10 on the HESB TB1 terminal block.  
2) Connect a jumper between Terminals 4 and 5  
on the HESB TB2 terminal block.  
NOTES:  
1. HESB connections made in steps 3~5  
may be accomplished using the HESB  
VOICE modular jack instead of the TB1  
terminal block.  
7-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
4) ConnectTerminal2oftheHESBTB1terminal  
block to the green (–) wire of the HESC-65  
cable using a modular block.  
2. InstallanHHEUPCBandHESC-65Acable  
in the telephone per Section 100-816-206  
before proceeding with Step 3.  
5) ConnectTerminal3oftheHESBTB1terminal  
block to pin 3 of the electronic telephone’s  
modular block (VOICE TIP).  
3) ConnectTerminal1oftheHESBTB1terminal  
block to the red (+) wire of the HESC-65A  
using a modular block.  
6) ConnectTerminal4oftheHESBTB1terminal  
block to Pin 4 of the electronic telephone’s  
modular block (VOICE RING).  
4) ConnectTerminal2oftheHESBTB1terminal  
block to the green (–) wire of the HESC-65A  
using a modular block.  
7) Connect the HACU-120 power supply’s +12V  
lead to Terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal  
block,andconnectthepowersupply’s0Vlead  
to Terminal 2.  
5) ConnectTerminal8oftheHESBTB1terminal  
block to the yellow (L2) wire of the HESC-65A  
cable using a modular block.  
8) Plug the provided power cord into the power  
supply and to a 117VAC, 60Hz power source.  
6) Connect the HACU-120 power supply’s +12V  
lead to Terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal  
block,andconnectthepowersupply’s0Vlead  
to Terminal 2.  
4.22 LoudRingingBellTest.TesttheLoudRing-  
ing Bell installation in accordance with the follow-  
ing steps:  
7) Plug the provided power cord into the power  
supply and to a 117VAC, 60Hz power source.  
1) Make a CO or station call to the station config-  
ured for the loud ringing bell.  
Ringing will be heard over the HESB.  
DK16 HESB Installation for Electronic Tele-  
phone Loud Ring Bell (Figure 7-11):  
2) AdjusttheHESBvolumecontroltothedesired  
level. (Screwdriver adjustment on back of  
HESB and ring level control of associated  
telephone.)  
1) On the HESB TB1 terminal block: connect a  
jumper between Terminals 6 and 7, and con-  
nectanotherjumperbetweenTerminals5and  
8.  
3) If ringing is heard at the station, but not over  
the HESB, perform the following check while  
the station is ringing:  
2) On the HESB TB2 terminal block, connect a  
a) Usingasuitablevoltmeter,measurevolt-  
age across terminals 1 (+) and 2 (-) of the  
HESB TB1 terminal block.  
jumper between Terminals 4 and 5.  
Voltage indication should be 4.5 ~  
5.0 VDC.  
NOTES:  
1. HESB connections made in steps 3~6  
may be accomplished using the HESB  
VOICE modular jack instead of the TB1  
terminal block.  
2. Install an HHEU PCB and HESC-65 (or  
HESC-65A) cable in the telephone per  
Section 100-816-206 before proceeding  
with Step 3.  
NOTE:  
Ringing stops once the call is manually an-  
swered. ThereshouldbeNOvoltagepotential  
across terminals 1 and 2.  
b) If voltage is not as specified during ring-  
ing, check that the telephone wiring con-  
nections to the HESB have been made  
properly(wirestoterminals1and2ofthe  
HESBTB1terminalblockmayhavebeen  
reversed).  
3) ConnectTerminal1oftheHESBTB1terminal  
block to the red (+) wire of the HESC-65 cable  
using a modular block.  
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
HESB (REAR VIEW)  
VOLUME CONTROL  
(+)  
(-)  
INTERNAL  
WIRING:  
(L2)  
TB1  
TBI VOICE  
JUMPER WIRES:  
1
2
3
4
6
1
3
4
TB1 TB2  
2-10 4-5  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10  
6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1  
JUMPERS  
24 AWG  
JACKETED  
TWISTED  
PAIR  
NOT USED NOT USED  
VOICE DOOR PHONE  
12V 0V  
MODULAR  
CONNECTORS  
MAY BE USED  
HACU-120  
117/VAC TO  
12 VDC  
117  
VAC  
FROM  
TB2  
DIGITAL  
TELEPHONE  
TO HESB  
1 2 3 4 5  
POWER  
SUPPLY  
12V  
0V  
MDF  
66 BLOCK  
STATION CABLING  
TIP  
RING  
PT  
PR  
R
GN  
R
GN  
(-)  
(+)  
JACKETED  
TWISTED PAIR  
24 AWG  
25-PAIR  
CABLE  
(L2)  
BK  
W
Y
BK  
Y
BL  
W
BL  
BASE UNIT,  
PDKU, OR  
KCDU  
6 5 4 3 2 1  
1 2 3 4 5 6  
6 5 4 3 2 1  
1 2 3 4 5 6  
HESC-65A  
CABLE  
MODULAR  
CORD  
STATION  
OCA  
STRAP  
(-) GREEN  
(L2)YELLOW  
(+) RED  
DO NOT  
CUT  
NOTE:  
+
See Section 100-816-206  
for instructions to cut EXSP  
and HHEU jumpers on the  
digital telephone main PCB.  
R607  
P601  
HHEU  
(V.3 or .4)  
INSTALL HHEU CIRCUIT (V.3 or .4) or  
HHEU2 CARD INTO BASE OF DKT PER  
HHEU INSTALLATION INFORMATION  
IN SECTION 100-816-206.  
FIGURE 7-10  
DK8 AND DK16 HESB/DIGITAL TELEPHONE WITH LOUD RINGING BELL WIRING  
7-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
HESB (REAR VIEW)  
VOLUME CONTROL  
(+) (RED)  
(-) (GREEN)  
VOICE TIP  
VOICE RING  
INTERNAL  
WIRING:  
TBI  
1
2
3
4
VOICE  
JUMPER WIRES:  
TB1 TB2  
TB1  
6
1
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10  
5-8  
6-7  
4-5  
JUMPERS  
6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1  
NOT USED  
24 AWG  
JACKETED  
TWISTED  
PAIR  
VOICE DOOR PHONE  
12V 0V  
MODULAR  
CONNECTORS  
MAY BE USED  
HACU-120  
117/VAC TO  
12 VDC  
117  
VAC  
FROM  
TB2  
ELECTRONIC  
TELEPHONE  
TO HESB  
1 2 3 4 5  
POWER  
SUPPLY  
12V  
0V  
MDF  
66 BLOCK  
STATION CABLING  
VOICE TIP  
VOICE RING  
VOICE TIP  
VOICE RING  
DATA T1  
DATA R1  
JACKETED  
R
GN  
R
(+)  
GN  
(-)  
JACKETED  
TWISTED PAIR  
24 AWG  
25-PAIR  
CABLE  
BK  
W
Y
BK  
W
Y
BL  
BL  
OCA  
OCA  
PEKU  
TIP  
RING  
(CKT 1~8)  
OR  
PESU  
6 5 4 3 2 1  
6 5 4 3 2 1  
1 2 3 4 5 6  
(CKT 5~8)  
1 2 3 4 5 6  
HESC-65 or HESC-65A  
CABLE  
MODULAR  
CORD  
STATION  
GREEN  
RED  
3
2
1
OCA  
DO NOT  
(-)  
(+)  
STRAP CUT OCA  
STRAP OR  
NOTE:  
See Section 100-816-206  
for instructions on how to  
cut the HHEU strap inside  
the telephone.  
R607  
R607  
P601  
HHEU  
INSTALL HHEU CIRCUIT  
CARD INTO BASE OF  
ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE  
PER INSTRUCTIONS IN  
SECTION 100-816-206.  
ELECTRONIC  
TELEPHONE  
6500-SERIES  
FIGURE 7-11  
DK16 HESB/ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE WITH LOUD RINGING BELL WIRING  
7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
4.23 Amplified Speaker Installation. Install the  
HESB Amplified Speaker option in accordance  
with the following steps (refer to Figure 7-12):  
3) Connect a jumper between terminals 5 and 6  
of the HESB TB2 terminal block.  
NOTE:  
HESB connections made in steps 4 ~ 7 may  
be accomplished using the HESB VOICE and  
DOOR PHONE modular jack instead of the  
TB1 terminal block.  
1) Connect a jumper between terminals 1 and 2  
of the HESB TB1 terminal block.  
2) Connect a jumper between terminals 6 and 7  
of the HESB TB1 terminal block.  
4) Connect terminal 7 of the HESB TB1 terminal  
block to pin L1 of the MDFB.  
3) Connect a jumper between terminals 5 and 8  
of the HESB TB1 terminal block.  
5) Connect terminal 8 of the HESB TB1 terminal  
block to pin L2 of the MDFB.  
4) Connect a jumper between terminals 3 and 4  
of the HESB TB2 terminal block.  
6) Connect terminal 9 of the HESB TB1 terminal  
block to pin 1 of the MDFB.  
5) Connect a jumper between terminals 5 and 6  
7) Connect terminal 10 of the HESB TB1 termi-  
of the HESB TB2 terminal block.  
nal block to pin 2 of the MDFB.  
6) Connect the 600 ohm PAGE RCA jack output  
on the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit to termi-  
nals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB1 terminal block.  
8) Connect the 600 ohm PAGE RCA jack output  
from DK8 KSU or DK16 base unit to terminals  
3 and 4 of the HESB TB1 terminal block.  
7) Connect the power supply’s +12V lead to  
terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal block,  
and connect the 0V lead to terminal 2.  
9) ConnecttheHACU-120PowerSupply’s+12V  
lead to terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal  
block, and connect the 0V lead to terminal 2.  
8) Plug the provided power cord into the power  
supply and to a 117VAC, 60Hz power source.  
10) Plug the provided power cord into the power  
supply and to a 117 VAC, 60Hz power source.  
4.24 Amplified Speaker Test. Test the amplified  
speaker installation in accordance with the follow-  
ing steps:  
4.26 Talkback Amplified Speaker Test. Test the  
Talkback Amplified Speaker installation in accor-  
dance with the following steps:  
1) Make an external page.  
1) Make an external page.  
Page should be heard over the HESB.  
Page will be heard over the HESB.  
2) AdjusttheHESBvolumecontroltothedesired  
level (screwdriver adjustment on back of  
HESB).  
2) Verify that someone speaking into the door  
phonecanbeheardatthepagingstation(with  
this application, pressing the door phone but-  
tonisnotrequiredtotalkbackthroughthedoor  
phone).  
4.25 HESB/MDFB Talkback Amplified Speaker  
Installation.InstalltheHESB/MDFBTalkbackAm-  
plified Speaker option in accordance with the fol-  
lowing steps (refer to Figure 7-13):  
4.27 HESB Wall Mounting Instructions. The  
HESB can be mounted to a wall or other vertical  
surface. Use the following instruction to mount the  
HESB (see Figure 7-14).  
1) Connect a jumper between terminals 1 and 2  
of the HESB TB1 terminal block.  
1) Find a suitable location on the mounting sur-  
face for the HESB.  
2) Connect a jumper between terminals 3 and 4  
of the HESB TB2 terminal block.  
7-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
DK8 OR DK16 KSU  
600 OHM PAGE  
RCA JACK  
R
GN  
BK  
Y
W
BL  
NOTE:  
PIOU/PIOUS page outputs  
do not operate.  
6 5 4 3 2 1  
JACKETED TWISTED PAIR  
24AWG  
VOLUME CONTROL  
TB1  
MODULAR  
CONNECTOR  
MAY BE USED  
JUMPER WIRES:  
TB1 TB2  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10  
1-2  
5-8  
6-7  
3-4  
5-6  
6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1  
NOT USED  
VOICE DOOR PHONE  
12V 0V  
INTERNAL WIRING:  
TBI  
VOICE  
3
4
3
4
TB2  
1 2 3 4 5 6  
0V  
12V  
VDC  
JUMPERS  
HESB (REAR VIEW)  
POWER  
SUPPLY  
117 VAC  
TO  
12 VDC  
FIGURE 7-12  
DK8 AND DK16 HESB/AMPLIFIED SPEAKER WIRING  
7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
MDFB (REAR VIEW)  
1
2 L1 L2  
DOOR PHONE  
TALKBACK  
MICROPHONE  
JACKETED  
TWISTED  
PAIR  
DK8 OR DK16 KSU  
600 OHM PAGE  
RCA JACK  
R
GN  
24 AWG  
BK  
Y
NOTE:  
PIOU/PIOUS page outputs  
do not operate.  
W
BL  
6 5 4 3 2 1  
JACKETED TWISTED PAIR  
24AWG  
VOLUME CONTROL  
L1 L2 1 2  
TB1  
MODULAR  
CONNECTOR  
MAY BE USED  
JUMPER WIRES:  
TB1 TB2  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10  
6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1  
1-2  
3-4  
5-6  
INTERNAL WIRING:  
VOICE DOOR PHONE  
12V 0V  
TBI  
4
VOICE  
4
3
TBI  
7
8
9
3
TB2  
DOOR PHONE  
1 2 3 4 5 6  
4
3
2
5
12V 0V  
JUMPERS  
HESB (REAR VIEW)  
10  
HACU-120  
POWER  
CONVERTER  
NOTE:  
The 600 ohm duplex page output is  
compatible with most commercially  
available talkback amplifiers.  
117 VAC TO 12 VDC  
FIGURE 7-13  
DK8 AND DK16 HESB/TALKBACK AMPLIFIED SPEAKER WIRING  
7-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
2) Screw a 1.25-inch panhead wood screw into  
the mounting surface, use wall anchors if  
mounting to drywall surface.  
3) Hang the HESB from the screw.  
ONE WALL  
MOUNTING  
HOLE  
5 EXTERNAL PAGE OPTIONS  
5.00 System Hardware Requirements  
5.01 The STRATA DK systems offer a variety of  
external page options. Additionally, a BGM option  
is available with each external page option. DK  
systems support:  
FIGURE 7-14  
HESB WALL MOUNTING  
DK8 and DK16 Paging with BGM (same ampli-  
fier)  
DK16 Zone paging with BGM (separate amplifi-  
ers)  
DK16 Zone paging with BGM (multiple amplifi-  
ers)  
See Paragraph 2 of this section for more Page/  
BGM options  
2) Connect the paging amplifier mute terminal  
via a MDF to pins 42 and 17 of the 25-pair  
amphenol connector from the DK8 KSU or  
DK16 Base Unit.  
3) Connect the music source to the input no. 2 of  
the paging amplifier.  
4) Connect the speaker to the paging amplifier  
output.  
5.10 External Page Option Installation  
5.13 DK16 Zone Page with BGM (separate am-  
plifiers).Thisconfigurationprovidesmultiple-zone  
paging capability. The output of the paging ampli-  
fier is routed back to the PIOU, where it is switched  
to one of four sets of speakers by PIOU relays K1  
through K4. The relay selected is determined by  
the access code dialed by the station user. Default  
access codes are:  
5.11 Allvoicepagingconnectionsaremadeviathe  
600 ohm Page RCA jack on the DK8 KSU or DK16  
Base Unit. The PIOU and PIOUS voice and BGM  
(600 ohm and 3 watt) outputs are inoperable on the  
DK16 Expansion Unit.  
5.12 DK8 and DK16 Page with Separate Ex-  
ternal BGM (same amplifier). In this configura-  
tion the MOH source or alternate BGM source  
provides BGM to digital/electronic telephones  
and a separate BGM source provides music to  
external speakers. Also, in this configuration Pag-  
ing and external BGM are amplified by a common  
customer-supplied paging amplifier. When the ex-  
ternal page access code is dialed, the external  
page control relay is activated, which applies a  
short to the amplifier mute control to mute the  
external BGM music. Install this option in accor-  
dance with the following steps (refer to Figure  
7-15):  
K1/zone A = 35  
K2/zone B = 36  
K3/zone C = 37  
K4/zone D = 38  
All zones = 39  
NOTE:  
Multi-zone page output rating is 30W/maxi-  
mum at 300 ohms.  
5.14 Anallzonepagecode(39)isalsoavailableas  
an option (see Program 10-2). When the all page  
code is dialed, all four relays are activated to permit  
simultaneous paging to all speaker zones and all  
digital and electronic telephone speakers. Install  
this option in accordance with the following steps  
(refer to Figure 7-16):  
1) Connecttheinputno. 1fromthepagingampli-  
fier via an RJ11 jack to the 600 ohm RCA jack  
on the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit.  
7-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
NOTE:  
DK8 KSU OR DK16  
BASE KEY  
SERVICE UNIT  
BGM over external page option  
must be turned off: Dial  
Intercom + 490 from Station 10.  
PAGE  
600 OHM  
RCA JACK  
R
GN  
BK  
Y
W
BL  
EXTERNAL  
6 5  
4
3
2
1
PAGING AMP  
JACKETED  
TWISTED PAIR  
24AWG  
SPEAKER  
66 BLOCK  
PIN NUMBERS  
DK8 KSU OR DK16  
BASE UNIT  
25-PAIR  
AMPHENOL  
CONNECTOR  
(42)  
(17)  
33  
34  
MUTE 2  
INPUT 2  
EXTERNAL  
BGM MUSIC  
SOURCE  
FIGURE 7-15  
DK8 AND DK16 PAGE AND SEPARATE BGM USING SAME AMPLIFIER  
1) Connect the input from the paging amplifier  
via an RJ11 jack to the J7 600 ohm RCA Jack  
on the Base Unit. Or, direct connect J7 to Amp  
using a standard audio cable with RCA plugs.  
5) Connect the PIOU PGOUT pins to the zone A  
~ zone D speakers (A).  
5.15 DK16 Zone Page with BGM (multiple am-  
plifiers). This configuration also provides multiple-  
zonepagingcapability, asinParagraph5.13. How-  
ever, separate amplifiers are used for each zone.  
Install this option in accordance with the following  
steps (refer to Figure 7-17):  
2) Connect the BGM music source to the music  
amplifier input.  
3) Connect the paging amplifier's (+) output to  
each PGIN of the PIOU K1 ~ K4 relays and  
the amplifier's (-) output to each of the zone A  
~ zone D speakers (C).  
1) Connect the inputs from the paging amplifiers  
via an RJ11 jack to the J7 600 ohm Page RCA  
Jack on the Base unit. Or, direct connect J7 to  
Amp using a standard audio cable with RCA  
plugs.  
4) ConnecttheBGMmusicamplifier(+)outputto  
terminal 23 (PG COMMON) of the PIOU, and  
the (–) to the (–) output of the page amplifier.  
7-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
66 BLOCK  
PIN NUMBERS  
PIOU  
JACKETED  
TWISTED PAIR  
24 AWG  
B
PGOUT 1 (15)  
PGIN 1 (40)  
30  
29  
A
C
K1  
K2  
ZONE A  
M
B
A
C
PGOUT 2 (17)  
PGIN 2 (42)  
34  
33  
ZONE B  
ZONE C  
M
B
PGOUT 3 (19)  
PGIN 3 (44)  
A
C
38  
37  
K3  
M
B
PGOUT 4 (21)  
PGIN 4 (46)  
A
C
42  
41  
K4  
BGM OR  
NIGHT  
RINGING  
AND/OR  
PAGE  
FROM  
BASE  
UNIT J7  
600 OHM  
RCA JACK  
ZONE D  
M
PAGING AMP  
BASE KEY  
SERVICE UNIT  
SPEAKER  
COMMON  
LINE  
RJ11  
JACK  
(+)  
(–)  
600Ω  
J7  
PG  
COMMON (23)  
46  
MUSIC AMP  
BGM  
MUSIC  
SOURCE  
(TO EXTERNAL  
SPEAKER ONLY)  
OPTIONAL  
CONNECTION  
(+)  
(–)  
PIOU PIN NUMBERS ( )  
25-PAIR CABLE  
NIGHT RINGING PROGRAM ASSIGNMENTS  
(SEE PARAGRAPH 9 OF SECTION 100-816-207)  
Program 77-1  
Button/LED  
Zone/  
Relay  
LED ON  
Assignment  
LED OFF  
Assignment  
13  
12  
11  
10  
K4  
K3  
K2  
K1  
Tenant 2 COs  
Tenant 2 COs  
Tenant 2 COs  
Tenant 2 COs  
Tenant 1 COs  
Tenant 1 COs  
Tenant 1 COs  
Tenant 1 COs  
FIGURE 7-16  
DK16 PIOU ZONE, PAGE/BGM/NIGHT RING (SEPARATE AMPLIFIERS)  
7-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
66 BLOCK  
PIN NUMBERS  
MDF  
PIOU  
K1  
JACKETED  
TWISTED PAIR  
24 AWG  
PAGE ACCESS  
CODES ( ):  
PGOUT 1 (15)  
PGIN 1 (40)  
30  
29  
A
C
ZONE A  
(35)  
+
AMP  
1
–
A
C
PGOUT 2 (17)  
PGIN 2 (42)  
34  
K2  
ZONE B  
(36)  
33  
+
AMP  
2
–
PGOUT 3 (19)  
PGIN 3 (44)  
38  
37  
A
C
K3  
ZONE C  
(37)  
+
AMP  
3
–
42  
41  
A
C
PGOUT 4 (21)  
PGIN 4 (46)  
ZONE D  
(38)  
K4  
+
AMP  
ALL ZONES  
(39)  
4
–
BGM OR  
NIGHT  
RING OR  
PAGE  
BASE UNIT  
RJ77  
JACK  
Ω
600  
FROM  
J7  
BASE  
(+)  
UNIT J7  
600 OHM  
RCA JACK  
PG  
BGM MUSIC  
SOURCE &  
AMPLIFIER  
COMMON (23)  
46  
OUTPUT  
(–)  
PIOU PIN NUMBERS ( )  
25-PAIR CABLES  
FIGURE 7-17  
DK16 PAGING WITH MULTIPLE AMPLIFIERS  
7-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
2) Connect the music source to the music ampli-  
fier input.  
8) InProgram78,enabletheCOlinesthatareto  
ring via external page when the system is set  
in the NIGHT mode.  
3) Connect the paging amplifier outputs to PIOU  
(PGIN) relays K1 ~ K4 and zone A ~ zone D  
speakers (C).  
9) In Program 39, assign the Night Transfer  
1 or Night Transfer 2 buttons to digital or  
electronic telephones per the System Record  
Sheets (see Note 2).  
4) Connect the music amplifier (+) output to  
terminal 23 (PG COMMON) of the PIOU, and  
the (–) output to the “C” terminal of zone A ~  
zone D speakers.  
10) Press the Night Transfer 1 or Night  
Transfer 2 button on an electronic or digital  
telephone to set the system into the NIGHT  
mode. Test by calling into the system on a CO  
line assigned (Program 78) to night ring over  
external page.  
5) Connect zone A ~ zone D speakers “A” termi-  
naltothe“PGOUT”contactofthePIOUrelays  
K1~ K4 respectively.  
When ringing sounds (see Note 2) over  
the page, press Intercom 5 3 5 to  
answer.  
5.16 DK16 Night Ringing over All External Page  
Zones (PIOU only). To allow the night ringing  
signal to be sent over zone paging, install the  
paging amplifier in accordance with the following  
steps (refer to Figure 7-18). (Steps 2 ~ 6 are  
performed at the MDF.)  
NOTES:  
1. All zones will ring with this option; night  
ringing to selected zones is not possible;  
see paragraph 9 for night ring over se-  
lected page zones.  
2. TheNightTransfer1orNightTrans-  
fer 2 buttons put CO lines in NIGHT ring  
mode per Program 15; NT1-TENANT 1/  
NT2-TENANT 2 CO line assignment.  
IMPORTANT NOTE: To night ring over  
selected PAGE zone, see Paragraph 9 of this  
section.  
1) ConnecttheamplifierinputviaanRJ11jackto  
the J7 600 ohm Page RCA jack on the Base  
unit. Or, direct connect J7 to Amp using a  
standard audio cable with RCA plugs.  
6 DK8 AND DK16 STATION MESSAGE  
DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR) PRINTER/  
CALL ACCOUNTING DEVICE OPTIONS  
2) Cross-connect the amplifier output A to the  
PGIN1 ~ PGIN4 connector from the PIOU.  
6.00 An SMDR printer or call accounting device  
may be connected to the system to provide a hard-  
copy record of station activity (incoming, outgoing,  
and transferred calls account code entries) on CO  
lines or a printout of the customer data base. Call  
record data is printed out at the completion of each  
call. Program SMDR with Program 60, and use  
Program 97 to have the SMDR printer display the  
customer data base.  
3) Cross-connect the amplifier output B to the  
zone A ~ zone D speaker common line.  
4) Cross-connectthePIOUPGOUT1~PGOUT4  
to zone A ~ zone D speakers (A).  
5) Cross-connect the amplifier output A to pin 9  
(NHR) of the PIOU.  
6.01 SMDR will send out special names for the  
following types of calls:  
6) Cross-connect a jumper from pin 34 (NHT) to  
pin 23 (PG COMMON) from the PIOU PCB.  
MSS:PrintsonDISAcallstostations(seeNote).  
7) In Program 77-1, set LED 05 to OFF and 06  
to ON. Set LED 08 to ON if door phones are to  
ring over external page when the system is in  
NIGHT mode.  
MODM: Prints on calls to the IMDU remote  
maintenance modem (station 619).  
DISA: Prints on DISA calls to CO lines when  
7-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
66 BLOCK  
PIN NUMBERS  
PIOU  
B
JACKETED  
TWISTED PAIR  
24 AWG  
MDF  
PAGE ACCESS  
CODES ( ):  
PGOUT 1 (15)  
PGIN 1 (40)  
30  
A
C
K1  
ZONE A  
(35)  
29  
M
B
A
C
PGOUT 2 (17)  
PGIN 2 (42)  
34  
33  
K2  
ZONE B  
(36)  
ALL  
ZONES  
(39)  
M
B
PGOUT 3 (19)  
PGIN 3 (44)  
A
C
38  
37  
K3  
ZONE C  
(37)  
M
B
PGOUT 4 (21)  
PGIN 4 (46)  
A
C
42  
41  
K4  
ZONE D  
(38)  
M
PAGING AMP  
PAGE AND  
NIGHT RING  
SIGNAL  
FROM  
BASE  
UNIT J7  
600 OHM  
PAGE RCA  
JACK  
BASE UNIT  
(A)  
SPEAKER  
COMMON  
LINE  
RJ11  
JACK  
600Ω  
J7  
(B)  
PG  
COMMON (23)  
46  
(JUMPER WIRE)  
P11  
BREAK  
MAKE  
NHT (34)  
NHR (9)  
17  
18  
NIGHT RELAY  
PROGRAMMING:  
77-1: LED 05, OFF.  
LED 06, ON.  
78: ENABLE CO LINES TO NIGHT RING  
OVER EXTERNAL PAGE.  
PIOU PIN NUMBERS ( )  
25-PAIR CABLE  
77-1: LED 08, ON. FOR DOOR PHONE  
NIGHT RING OVER PAGE.  
NOTES:  
1. Page signal path  
.
2. Night ring signal path  
.
3. Background music over zone page is not possible with this configuration.  
4. Available with PIOU only: not PIOUS.  
5. Night ringing will be sent to all zones; selected zones are not possible.  
FIGURE 7-18  
DK16 NIGHT RINGING OVER ALL EXTERNAL PAGE ZONES  
7-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
calling through the system CO-to-CO.  
Line 03 returns intercom dial tone to caller after  
two ring cycles (5 ~ 6 seconds).  
Caller dials 13.  
NOTE:  
MSS will print only on DISA calls that are  
answered 10 seconds or 1 second (see Pro-  
gram 60-2) after the DK dial tone is sent to the  
calling party. If set for 10 seconds and the call  
is answered before 10 seconds, the call will  
register as a normal incoming call and the  
MSS/transfer portion of the call will not print  
out.  
After 48 seconds from start of call, station 13  
answers.  
Printout B prints after station 13 answers the call  
at 4:32.  
NOTE:  
If Program 60-2 is set for 10 seconds, MSS  
will not print if the call is answered within 10  
seconds from when the caller receives dial  
tone.  
6.02 Figure 7-19 shows a sample SMDR printout  
and describes the contents of each column of the  
printout. The following examples show several call  
record samples and describe the sequence of  
eventswhichoccurredtogeneratethecallrecords.  
PRINTOUT B  
03 MSS 04:32 00:00:48 00:05 13  
EXAMPLE 3—DISA Outgoing CO Line Call  
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
DISA CO line calls print out as DISA.  
SMDR printout “time of day” and day/month/  
year (DD/MM/YY) is the same as the system  
clock time/date. SMDR DD/MM/YY will print  
out each time 50 call records are generated.  
Call Sequence C  
Outside caller rings CO line 01 (line 01 is pro-  
grammed as DISA).  
Line 01 returns intercom dial tone after two ring  
cycles (5 ~ 6 seconds).  
SMDR PRINTOUT EXAMPLES  
Caller dials 703 to access CO line 03 (outgoing).  
Caller dials the DISA security code and receives  
CO dial tone.  
Caller dials the telephone number and con-  
verses when the call is answered.  
Caller hangs up.  
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) CO Lines  
NOTE:  
DISA station calls print out as MSS.  
EXAMPLE 1—Ring, No Answer DISA Call  
The call releases, and Printout C prints after the  
call disconnects at 12:22.  
Call Sequence A  
Outside caller rings CO line 03 (CO line 03 is  
programmed as a DISA line).  
Line 03 returns intercom dial tone to caller after  
two ring cycles (5 ~ 6 seconds).  
Caller does nothing.  
NOTES:  
1. If the CO provides the auto release (AR)  
signal (see Program 15), the call discon-  
nectswheneitherpartyhangsup. A“*”will  
print out following the CO line number if  
the call is disconnected by the AR signal.  
2. If the auto release signal is not returned,  
the CO lines will remain seized until the  
DISA disconnect timer releases the call  
(approximately five minutes).  
After 32 seconds, call is disconnected.  
Printout A prints after disconnect at 4:59.  
PRINTOUT A  
03 MSS 04:59 00:00:32 00:06  
EXAMPLE 2—DISA Internal Station Call  
PRINTOUT C  
Auto Release Signal:  
Call Sequence B  
03*DISA 12:22 00:02;01 (outgoing)  
01 DISA 12:22 00:02;01 (incoming)  
Outside caller rings CO line 03 (CO line 03 is  
programmed as a DISA line).  
7-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
07/06/90 <DD/MM/YY, EVERY FIFTY CALL RECORDS AND AT MIDNIGHT>  
01 15 08:14 00:00;22  
123456987  
456789  
<DISA CALL TO IMDU>  
01 MODM 08:15 00:00;18 00;00  
03 10 08:16 00:00;28 00;08 12  
03 DISA 08:16 00:00;15 <OUTGOING DISA ACCESS BY INCOMING DISA 01>  
<INCOMING DISA AND ACCESS CO 03 OUTGOING>  
01 DISA 08:17 00:00;25  
03 MSS 08:18 00:00;12 00;06 15 <05 ANSWERS DISA CALL 12 SECONDS AFTER DK DIAL TONE>  
03 15 08:19 00:00;22  
12  
6
First Digit (varies)  
Last (always this column)  
First Digit (varies)  
03* 12 08:19 00:00;16  
04 10 08:20 00:00;34  
02 10 08:22 00:00;22  
01 15 08:23 00:00;40  
12345678912345678965412365  
7145833700  
Last  
7145833700 123456789456321  
Account Code  
(4~15 digits)  
Outgoing Telephone Number (1~26 digits)  
Station to which the CO Line was transferred (1~4 digits)  
CO Line Incoming Ring Duration Before Answer (MM:SS)  
Call Duration (HH:MM:SS, see Note 1)  
Time of Day (HH:MM; hour and minute the call was released)  
Station Number (1~4 digits; see Note 2)  
CO Line Number (01~36)  
NOTES:  
1. Call Duration (incoming, outgoing, or transfer) can be 1.0 or 10 seconds (minimum) to generate a call record  
printout (see Program 60-2).  
2. “MSS”: designates a Direct Inward System Access (DISA) CO call to a station that is not answered; or, answered  
after 1.0 or 10 seconds (depending on Program 60-2). DISA calls always register 05 ~ 06 seconds ring before  
answer duration time.  
“MODM”: designates a call to the IMDU, Remote Maintenance Modem.  
“DISA”: designates a DISA call thru the system via CO to CO connection.  
*
3. Field column information is provided for SMDR output formatting purposes.  
4. The call record data is ASCII-formatted, 8 bits; no parity, 1-stop bit.  
5. Special dial printout:  
Tone = "T"  
Long pause = "L"  
Flash = "F"  
Pause = "P"  
6. The " " indicates that the call was disconnected by the Central Office Calling Party Control (CPC) or Automatic  
*
Release (AR) signal. CO lines must have Programs 15-0 and 15-3 enabled to be dropped by the CPC signal.  
FIGURE 7-19  
DK8 AND DK16 SMDR PRINTOUT EXAMPLES  
7-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
Disconnect Timer:  
Item 3—Selects the records of outgoing calls or  
outgoing and incoming calls to be printed.  
Item4—Selectsdigitlengthofaccountcode(4to  
15 digits).  
01 DISA 12:24 00:04;57 (incoming)  
03 DISA 12:24 00:04;57 (outgoing)  
6.03 System Program Data Printout. If a printer  
is connected to the SMDR port on the QSMU,  
PIOU, or PIOUS, customer program information  
stored in the system RAM may be printed out for  
reference by using Program 97 (see Paragraph  
6.14).  
Item 5—Allows only long distance call records to  
be printed.  
Program 97  
Allows system program data to be printed via the  
SMDR port (refer to Figure 7-21 for an example  
printout).  
6.10 SMDR Hardware Requirements  
NOTES:  
6.11 The DK8 system must be equipped with a  
QSMU option PCB. QSMU Program 10-3, LED 04  
mustbeOFF. InstalltheQSMUPCBinaccordance  
with Section 100-816-204 and wire the SMDR  
devicetotheQSMU(PPTC/mocularcord)inaccor-  
dance with Section 100-816-208. The DK16 sys-  
tem must be equipped with a PIOU or PIOUS PCB  
in the Expansion Unit to support the SMDR printer/  
call accounting device option. Connection of the  
printer or call accounting device to the PIOU or  
PIOUS PCB is accomplished with a 3-pair modular  
cord (7 feet maximum) and a PPTC connector  
adaptor(refertoFigure7-20fordetails).Callrecord  
data is ASCII-formatted, 8 bits, no parity, 1-stop bit.  
1. An SMDR printer must be connected to  
the SMDR port to use the printout option  
selected by Program 97.  
2. Call record data is lost when program data  
is printed out using Program 97.  
6.20 SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device In-  
stallation  
6.21 Install the SMDR printer/call accounting de-  
vice option in accordance with the following steps  
(refer to Figures 7-20, 8-26, and 8-24):  
1) Connect the interface cable and the PPTC  
adaptorfromtheDK8QSMUorDK16PIOUor  
PIOUS SMDR port to the SMDR printer or call  
accounting device DB25 connector.  
6.12 The DK8 KSU and DK16 PIOU or PIOUS  
contains a call record buffer which stores call  
record data (for 20 calls on DK8 or 50 calls on  
DK16)whentheprintedorcallaccountingdeviceis  
turned off, or when no device is connected to the  
SMDR port. No further call records are stored after  
the buffer is filled. When the printer or call account-  
ing device is made operational, an “ERROR  
BUFFER OVERFLOW” message is printed to indi-  
cate that the buffer was full, and that some call  
information may have been lost.  
2) Set the DK16 PIOU or PIOUS SW1 switch to  
the appropriate baud rate (300 or 1200 bps),  
as determined by the baud rate of the printer  
or call accounting device. For DK8, QSMU is  
always 1200 bps.  
3) The DK8 QSMU Program 10-3, LED 04 must  
be OFF for SMDR operation.  
6.13 SMDR Programming Considerations  
4) Set the printer or call accounting device to 8-  
bits/no parity/one stop bit.  
6.14 SelectableprogrammingoptionsfortheSMDR  
printer or call accounting device are:  
Program 60  
5) Program (Program 60) the system for the  
required SMDR printer/call accounting device  
options (refer to Paragraph 6.13 and the Pro-  
grammingProcedures,Section100-816-300).  
Item 2—Determines the length of time a call  
must be active before it will be registered by  
SMDR.  
7-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
BASIC CONNECTION  
DB25  
Plug  
3-pair  
Modular  
Cord (7 ft. max)  
Modular  
Jack  
DATA FORMAT:  
• ASCII  
• 8-bits  
• No parity  
• 1-stop bit  
• QSMU: 1200 bps  
• PIOU/PIOUS 300 or  
• 1200 bps  
DK8, QSMU  
DK16, PIOU  
or  
Printer  
or Call  
Accounting  
Device  
*
DK16, PIOUS  
50 ft. max  
SMDR  
Modular  
Jack  
24 AWG Wire  
Twisted Pair  
Modularized  
Toshiba  
PPTC1A-5M,  
RS232, Modular  
to DB25 Adaptor  
QSMU,  
PROGRAM 10-3  
LED 04-OFF  
*
BASIC WIRING (see: QSMU PIOU or PIOUS TTY and SMDR Wiring in Chapter 8 for more detail)  
PPTC1A-5M Adaptor  
PIOU, SMDR Jack  
RS-232  
Modular Pin No. Modular Pin No. DB25 Pin No.  
Lead Name  
1 To  
2 To  
3 To  
4 To  
5 To  
6 To  
6 To  
5 To  
4 To  
3 To  
2 To  
1 To  
3
RD  
TD  
2
6
DSR  
20  
DTR  
8
CD  
7
SG  
4 Jumper to 5  
RTS to CTS  
FIGURE 7-20  
DK8 AND DK16 PIOU/PIOUS SMDR CABLE CONNECTIONS  
must be installed in the DK16 Base Unit, and a  
QRCUmustbeinstalledintheDK8KSU. Thevoice  
mail system can be connected to any standard  
telephone circuit at the MDF block.  
7 VOICE MAIL OPTIONS  
7.00 System Hardware Requirements  
7.01 The STRATA DK8 and DK16 may be config-  
ured to support Toshiba VP voice mail messaging  
system or a customer-supplier voice mail system.  
7.10 Toshiba VP Voice Messaging System  
7.11 The STRATA DK8 and DK16 is designed to  
support the full range of features offered by the  
Toshiba VP provides various call routing, message  
handling, and information management features,  
including:  
7.02 TheDK8mustbeequippedwithaQSTU, and  
theDK16mustbeequippedwithaKSTU, PSTU, or  
PESU to support a voice mail system. The DK8  
QSTU is equipped with two standard telephone  
circuits; the DK16 KSTU is equipped with four  
standard telephone circuits, the PSTU with eight,  
and the PESU with two. A K4RCU subassembly  
Automated Attendant  
Call Forward to Voice Mailbox  
Message Waiting Indication  
7-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
CO LINE  
NUMBERS  
(CO LINE)  
(LEDs ON)  
(LEDs OFF)  
8
1
81  
81  
81  
81  
81  
81  
81  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
11111111  
00000000  
00000000  
00000000  
00000000  
00000000  
00000000  
CO LINE 08  
CO LINE 01  
STATION PORT  
NUMBERS  
PROGRAM NUMBER  
NOTES:  
1. In this example all lines are programmed to immediately ring the station at port 00 only.  
2. 0 = LED off, 1 = LED on.  
FIGURE 7-21  
PIOU/PIOUS SMDR PORT (PROGRAM 97) DATA DUMP EXAMPLE  
release the Toshiba VP auto attendant port  
Voice Mail Control from digital and electronic  
telephone  
System Monitoring  
when an outside CO line caller hangs-up and the  
Central Office provides a disconnect signal, per  
Program 15-0 and 15-3.)  
Feature Integration  
NOTE:  
7.12 A block diagram of voice mail connections is  
showninFigure7-22. SeeSection100-816-204for  
QSTU and Section 100-816-205 for PSTU, KSTU,  
and PESU installation instructions.  
1. Not all Central Offices provide the discon-  
nect signal (calling party control) so this  
feature will not operate in all areas.  
2. Both answer and disconnect tones pro-  
vide more efficient Toshiba VP port use.  
Always enable these options. Both op-  
tions are enabled by accessing Program  
31andsettingLED15toON(LEDs16and  
17 must also be ON to allow A and D  
tones), and by accessing Program 15-0  
and15-3andenablingCOlineswithARVM  
and AROH calls.  
3. The AR signal of some Central Offices is  
not reliable and may occur at times during  
a CO line voice connection causing the  
call to disconnect during a conversation. If  
this occurs, disable AROH and ARVM  
calls on all CO lines (Program 15-0 and  
15-3).  
7.13 STRATADK8andDK16/VP Programming  
Considerations. Some features of STRATA DK8  
and DK16 system programming are intended for  
Toshiba VP, and are not necessarily available for  
customer-supplied voice mail messaging systems.  
These programming features are:  
Answer(A)Tone. TheSTRATADK8andDK16  
stations will send an answer tone to Toshiba VP  
when the station answers a Toshiba VP call.  
Disconnect (D) Tone. The STRATA DK8 and  
DK16 stations will send a disconnect tone to  
Toshiba VP when the station hangs up while  
connectedtoToshibaVP.(D-Toneisalsosentto  
7-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
NOTE:  
DK8 QRCU  
OR  
The K4RCU or QRCU allows VM DTMF dialing.  
DK16 K4RCU  
VOICE MAIL OR AUTO  
MDF  
ATTENDANT MACHINE  
DK8 QSTU (CKT 1 & 2)  
or  
PSTU (CKT 1~8)  
or  
DK16 PESU (CKT 1 & 2)  
or  
DK16 KSTU (CKT 1 ~ 4)  
QSTU, KSTU/PSTU/PESU CIRCUIT TIP & RING  
(1 PAIR PER PORT)  
25-PIN CABLE  
(8 CIRCUITS PER PSTU)  
(2 CIRCUITS PER PESU)  
(4 CIRCUITS PER KSTU)  
(2 CIRCUITS PER QSTU)  
FIGURE 7-22  
DK8 AND DK16 VOICE MAIL/AUTO ATTENDANT BLOCK DIAGRAM  
availablewithToshibaVP(refertoParagraph7.10)  
may be available with the customer-supplied sys-  
tem.  
B Tone Signals. Stations send a recall (B) tone  
to VP whenever Toshiba VP answers a transfer  
(camp-on) recall from a station that did not an-  
swer a Toshiba VP blind transfer. (The B tone  
notifiesToshibaVPthatthecallisarecallandnot  
a new call, allowing Toshiba VP to respond with  
the appropriate greeting.) For this feature to  
operate, the QSTU, PSTU, KSTU, or PESU  
voice mail ports must have LEDs 19 and 20  
turned ON in Program 31.  
7.22 DK8 and DK16 Voice Mail (QSTU, PSTU,  
KSTU, or PESU Port) Programming Consider-  
ations  
7.23 Voicemail(alltypes)QSTU, KSTU, PSTU, or  
PESU port programming is accomplished using  
Programs 31 and 10-2 (refer to Programming  
Procedures,Section100-816-300,fordetails).Voice  
mail (VM) programming features are:  
VM Groups—This feature groups VM QSTU,  
KSTU, PSTU or PESU ports together so that  
message waiting set/cancel signals appear to  
originatefromthelowestportintheVMgroup.All  
VM ports connected to a particular VM machine  
should be set in the same VM group (Program  
31, LEDs 05 ~ 08).  
7.14 ToshibaVPInstallation. Usethepreceding  
information in concert with Paragraphs 7.23 and  
7.24 to install Toshiba VP.  
7.20 Customer-suppliedVoiceMailMessaging  
Systems  
Message Waiting Set/Cancel—If the VM ma-  
chine has the ability to dial a code, plus the  
appropriate station numbers to set or cancel the  
messagewaitingLEDsonelectronictelephones,  
7.21 STRATA DK8 and DK16 systems are de-  
signed to support a wide range of customer-sup-  
plied voice mail messaging systems. Depending  
onthevoicemailsystemused,someofthefeatures  
7-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
program the VM machine to dial the following  
sequences (In Program 10-2, turn LED 04 ON):  
(seeToshibaVPInstallationandMaintenance  
Manual for other parameter settings).  
1) To set a MW LED, the VM machine must  
2) STRATA DK8 and DK16 programs:  
Program 92: Initialization clears voice mail  
auto dial codes.  
dial 6 3 + station number.  
2) To cancel a MW LED, the VM machine  
Program 03: Verify that the KRCU is pro-  
grammed in the Base Unit to allow the VM/  
AA to send DTMF tones (does not apply to  
DK8).  
Program 04: Assigns station numbers to  
VM/AA ports (initialized numbers recom-  
mended).  
must dial 6 4 + station number.  
NOTE:  
Only dial codes 63 and 64 are set in the VM  
device configuration; the VM device will dial  
thestationnumberautomaticallytoset/cancel  
the Message Waiting indication LED.  
Program 05: First digit of special codes 63  
and 64 (initialized numbers recommended).  
Program 10-1: Set the system for voice first,  
and program the VM/AA device to dial the  
suffix as “1” after station numbers.  
Program10-2:SetLED04ONforset/cancel  
operation and 06 ON for the VM to detect 80  
msec. tones.  
No Conference VM—Prevents undesiredCO  
linethree-partyconnectionsduringVMcalltrans-  
fers.AllVMportsshouldbesetfornoconference  
(Program 31, LED 09).  
PrivacyOverrideDeny—Preventsstationsfrom  
overriding (breaking in) in-progress VM calls  
(Program 31, LED 18).  
End-to-End Signaling—Allows VM port  
DTMF operation. All VM ports should be set for  
end-to-end signaling (Program 31, LED 17).  
Program 13: If the VM/AA device is the  
message center, set the lowest VM port as  
the message center.  
Program 31: Turn LEDs 05, 09, and 15 ~ 20  
ON for the QSTU, KSTU, PESU, or PSTU  
ports that are connected to the Toshiba VP  
VM/AA ports. Do not set these options for  
standardtelephone,digitaltelephone,orelec-  
tronictelephonestationports.LED04should  
be off if the auto attendant only “BLIND”  
transfers; if the AA does “Supervise” or  
“Screened”transfers,setLED04ONforauto  
attendant ports.  
NOTE:  
The DK8 QRCU or DK16 K4RCU must be  
installed to allow End-to-End Signaling.  
VM to VM Call Blocking—Prevents VM auto  
attendant calls from forwarding back to VM auto  
attendantduringsupervisedtransfers(Program  
31, LED 04 ON). This will prevent the problem of  
autoattendanttoautoattendantloopingconnec-  
tions.  
Receive Auto Call Forward ID Codes—Pro-  
vides auto digits from call forwarded stations to  
direct callers to stations’ mailboxes. All VM ports  
should be set to receive auto ID code (Program  
31, LED 16).  
NOTE:  
A, D, and B tones should be enabled only for  
VM/AA devices that respond to these tones.  
Program 33: Set the QSTU, KSTU, PESU  
and PSTU ports that are connected to the  
VM/AA ports to a hunting sequence, starting  
with the lowest port hunting to the next high-  
est port, etc. The last hunt should be to an  
attendant.  
“A” and “D” tones; see Paragraph 7.13.  
7.24 Voice Mail Program Checklist. The follow-  
ing items should be verified before programming  
voice mail:  
Program35:LEDs01and02mustbeONfor  
stations to receive the message indication  
(Msg LED flashing) from a VM device.  
1) Set Toshiba VP Maintenance Menu system  
parameters to “D” = STRATA DK8 and DK16  
7-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
Program35:LED20shouldbeONtoassign  
autoattendantportsthe“BusyStationTrans-  
fer”option.withthisoptiontheautoattendant  
will receive ring backtone when calling sta-  
tions designated with “Busy Station Ringing”  
(Program 35, LED 19 ON). This allows the  
auto attendant to transfer calls to busy sta-  
tions. Set LED 19 ON for answer position  
stations.  
standard telephone ports (refer to Wiring Dia-  
grams,Section100-816-208,forQSTU,PSTU,  
KSTU, and PESU wiring/interconnecting de-  
tails).  
3) Program the system for the required voice  
mail messaging features (refer to Paragraphs  
7.13 and 7.22).  
Program 36: Set fixed call forward to VM/AA  
port per customer requirements.  
Program 37: Set the timer for the VM/AA  
ports to 22 seconds minimum to allow call  
forwardnoanswertoworkonVMtransferred  
calls.  
Program 39: Set the Message Waiting Indi-  
cation,FixedCallForward,Redial,andSpeed  
Dial Select buttons on the digital and elec-  
tronictelephonesthatwillbeusedtocommu-  
nicate with the VM/AA device.  
4) Ensure that the DK8 QRCU or DK16 K4RCU  
is installed, and (for DK16) verify that the CTU  
code in Program 03 is for KRCU-4 operation  
asrequired(thisisnotrequiredforDK8QRCU).  
5) Perform additional voice mail messaging sys-  
tem programming as applicable (refer to cus-  
tomer-supplied installation/programming  
manuals).  
NOTE:  
Some voice mail devices may ring trip when  
called; in this case, set the ring voltage jumper  
toL(lowposition)ontheQSTU,KSTU,PESU,  
or PSTU2 PCB connected to the voice mail  
device.  
NOTE:  
Message Waiting (Msg) and Redial buttons  
arefixedbuttonsondigitaltelephonesanditis  
not necessary to assign them in Program 39.  
Speed Dial is initialized as Button 20 on  
Digital telephones.  
8 DK16 ALARM SENSOR INSTALLATION  
Programs 81 ~ 89: Verify that the ringing  
assignments to the VM/AA devices are set  
per customer requirements.  
Programs 16, 40, 41, 45 ~ 48 and 50 ~ 56:  
Verify that outgoing CO line access is al-  
lowedonVMportstoallowtheVM/AAbeeper  
notification feature to operate.  
8.00 The PIOU or PIOUS PCB provides a circuit  
that can be set to detect a relay open or closed  
condition from a facility alarm system. When the  
sensor is activated, all electronic and digital tele-  
phones will sound an alarm signal. The electronic/  
digital telephone alarm signal can be reset by any  
electronic or digital telephone with an alarm reset  
button (see Program 39).  
7.25 Voice Mail System Installation. Install the  
voice mail messaging system in accordance with  
the following steps (See Figure 7-22):  
8.01 Alarm Sensor Options. Jumper plug P12 on  
the PIOU is used to set the alarm sensor to detect  
an open or closed condition from the facility alarm  
system. Set P12 as follows (refer to Figure 7-23):  
To detect a closed condition, set P12 to the N.O.  
position.  
1) EnsurethattheQSTU,KSTU,PSTU,orPESU  
PCB is installed in the system per Section  
100-816-204 (DK8) or Section 100-816-205  
(DK16).  
2) Connect the voice mail messaging system to  
the selected QSTU, KSTU, PSTU, or PESU  
To detect an open condition, set P12 to the N.C.  
position.  
7-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
lines could be programmed to ring zones 3 and 4.  
In non-shared systems, night ringing CO lines can  
be assigned to ring all of the zones or just selected  
zones.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
9.02 The following programs must be used to  
assign CO lines to ring selected PIOU page zones:  
Program 78-1: Assigns CO lines, tenant 1 and  
tenant 2, that will night ring over PIOU external  
page zones.  
8.02 Jumper W3 on the PIOUS is used to set the  
alarm sensor to detect an open or closed condition  
fromthefacilityalarmsystem.SoldertheW3jumper  
wire as follows (refer to Figure 7-23):  
To detect a closed condition, solder W3 to the  
normal open position.  
Program 15-5: Assigns CO lines to tenant 1 or  
tenant 2. Lines are initialized as tenant 1.  
Program 77-1 (LEDs 10 ~ 13): Assigns tenant 1  
and tenant 2 CO lines to night ring specific PIOU  
external page zones. LED 06 must also be ON in  
Program 77-1.  
Program 39: Assigns appropriate Night  
Transfer, or Night Transfer 1(tenant 1),  
and NT2 (tenant 2) buttons to electronic and  
digital telephones.  
To detect an open condition, solder W3 to the  
normal closed position.  
8.03 Alarm Sensor Wiring. Refer to Figure 7-23,  
and connect the facility alarm system relay con-  
tacts to the PIOU/PIOUS PCB.  
9 DK16 NIGHT RINGING  
OVER EXTERNAL ZONE PAGE  
NOTES:  
9.00Insystemssharedbytwotenants,eachtenant’s  
CO lines can be assigned to night ring separate  
PIOU external page zones (Figure 7-16). This  
feature can also be used in one-tenant systems.  
1. See Paragraph 5 and Figure 7-16 and  
7-17 for PIOU zone paging installation  
instructions.  
2. Any station can pick up CO lines that night  
ring over external page zones by dialing  
Intercom 5 9.  
9.01 With shared systems, for example, tenant 1’s  
night ringing CO lines could be programmed to ring  
PIOU external page zones 1 and 2, while tenant 2’s  
PIOU PIN NUMBERS ( )  
25-PAIR CABLE  
66 BLOCK PIN NUMBERS  
MDF  
PIOU PCB  
N.C.  
ALMT (36)  
ALMR (11)  
21  
FACILITY  
ALARM  
SYSTEM  
ALARM  
SENSOR  
P12  
22  
N.O.  
25-PAIR CABLE  
PIOUS PCB  
NORMAL OPEN  
TWISTED  
PAIR  
TB1  
MDF  
ALMT  
ALMR  
FACILITY  
ALARM  
SYSTEM  
W3  
ALARM  
SENSOR  
ALM  
NORMAL CLOSE  
FIGURE 7-23  
DK16 ALARM SENSOR BLOCK DIAGRAM (PIOU/PIOUS)  
7-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
or terminal connected to a DIU) is limited to 9600  
bps. A speed of 19.2 kbps can be achieved when  
dialing from a PDIU-DI-equipped digital telephone  
dialpad, butmanyPCsoftwareprogramsdonotyet  
handle 19.2 kbps in an error-free manner. Also for  
a 19.2 Kbps operation the computer or terminal’s  
“COM” port must be specified to function at 19.2  
Kbps. Some computer “COM” ports, like those  
used in older IBM XT type computers, will not  
operate at 19.2 without errors. DIU data transmis-  
sion speed is set by the first AT command that the  
DIU receives once it is in the command state; if  
manual dialing or receiving calls in the auto answer  
(default)mode, thetransmissionspeedistranspar-  
ent.  
10 DATA INTERFACE UNIT  
INSTALLATION  
10.00 General  
10.01STRATADK8andDK16supporttwotypesof  
Data Interface Units (DIUs) that enable digital tele-  
phone users to simultaneously transmit and re-  
ceive data on the same digital station port and wire  
pair while communicating on a voice call. One unit,  
called the integrated DIU (PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2),  
becomespartofthedigitaltelephone, replacingthe  
telephone’s base; the other unit, is a small self-  
contained unit called the stand-alone DIU (PDIU-  
DS). Each DIU is powered by the digital port it is  
connected(seeTable8-Dforwiringrequirements).  
IMPORTANT NOTE!  
To use the PDIU-DI or PDIU-DS with AT  
commands, communications software or  
a PC program that performs terminal emu-  
lationmustbeused. ATcommandscannot  
be issued from the computer’s operating  
system prompt.  
NOTES:  
1. “DigitalPorts”includestheDK8KSU,DK16  
Base Unit, PDKU and KCDU digital sta-  
tion ports. This applies wherever the term  
“Digital Ports” is used in the text and  
figures in this chapter.  
2. 2000-series digital telephones require  
PDIU-DI2 and 1000-series telephones re-  
quire PDIU-DI.  
10.10 Common DIU Connections  
10.11 The block diagram in Figure 7-24 illustrates  
common DIU connections. In this example, PDIU-  
DIsareconnectedtopersonalcomputers(PC1and  
PC2), and PDIU-DSs are connected to a serial  
printer and modems. The personal computer users  
can transfer files internally, print files on the same  
printer, and access the modem pool to send/re-  
ceive data to/from an external personal computer  
or dial up data service.  
10.02 Both DIUs can be connected to standard  
Electronic Industries Association (EIA) RS-232  
asynchronous serial data devices. EIA devices are  
divided into two categories: data communication  
equipment (DCE) and data terminal equipment  
(DTE). Common DCE devices are modems and  
some printers; common DTE devices are personal  
computers, ASCII terminals, and some printers.  
The PDIU-DI operates like a DCE and connects  
directly to DTE devices using standard RS-232  
cables. Dependingonhowitsinternaljumperplugs  
are configured, the PDIU-DS can either operate  
like a DTE and connect to DCE devices; or operate  
like a DCE device and connect to a DTE device. In  
mostapplications,DTEandDCEdevicesexchange  
data between each other via the standard RS-232  
cable connection.  
10.12Toaccessthesedevices, adatacallconnec-  
tion must be established between the DIUs. This is  
accomplishedbydialingthedestinationDIUfroma  
digital telephone dialpad or from a PC keyboard  
usingstandardATdialcommands.PDIU-DIsshare  
the same intercom numbers/ports with the digital  
telephonetowhichtheyareconnected,whilePDIU-  
DSs have their own. The Intercom and Data Call  
LEDs on the digital telephone tell the system  
whether a voice or data call is being made: the  
Intercom LED, voice calls; and the Data Call LED  
initiates data calls. When dialing from a keyboard  
with AT commands, A T Dis typed for voice calls,  
and A T D D for data calls.  
10.03 DIUs can function with DCE and DTE de-  
vices at data speeds of up to 19.2 kbps. However,  
keyboard dialing using AT commands (from a PC  
7-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
Receive Data (RD, Pin 3): The DCE device  
transmits data to the DTE device on the RD lead  
(EIA circuit BB); the DTE receives data on the  
RD.  
10.13 Installation instructions for these devices are  
provided in Paragraphs 10.40 thru 10.70. Call  
paths and scenarios for five types of data test calls  
are provided in Paragraphs 10.82 ~ 10.86. Step-  
by-step data calling procedures are provided in the  
Data Interface User Guide in the Installation &  
Maintenance Manual, Operating Procedures.  
Request to Send (RTS, Pin 4): Some DTE  
devices send an RTS signal (EIA circuit CA) to  
the DCE device when they are ready to transmit  
data on the TD lead. If the DTE device does not  
generate the RTS signal, the DIU DIP switch  
SW1-4 should be set ON to inform the DIU.  
Sometimes, theDTE/DCEdevicemayuseRTS/  
CTS for Ready/Busy type flow control, in these  
cases DIP switch SW1-4 should be OFF (see  
Figure 7-32 for DIP switch information).  
Clear to Send (CTS, Pin 5): The DCE device  
sends the CTS signal (EIA circuit CB) which  
indicates that it is prepared to transmit data to  
the line side. The DCE device sends this signal  
only when it receives the RTS signal from the  
DTE device. Sometimes, the DTE/DCE device  
may use RTS/CTS for Ready/Busy type flow  
control;inthesecases, dipswitchSW1-4 should  
be OFF (see Figure 7-32 for DIP switch informa-  
tion).  
Data Set Ready (DSR, Pin 6): When connected  
to the communication channel and prepared to  
exchangecontrolcharacterstoinitiatedatatrans-  
mission, the DCE device sends the DSR signal  
(EIA circuit CC) to the DTE device. If the PDIU  
DIP switch SW1-2 is set ON, DSR will be ON  
continuously; if the switch is set OFF, DSR  
follows DTR (if DSR is ON, DTR is ON, etc.)  
SW1-2shouldbeOFFinmostcases(seeFigure  
7-32 for DIP switch information).  
10.20 EIA Interface Leads (Signals)  
10.21 Both DIUs operate with nine standard EIA  
RS-232 interface leads (signals) on which signal-  
ing data is transmitted and received. DIUs connect  
toserialdatadeviceswithstandardRS-232cables,  
available from telephone supply stores (see Fig-  
ures 7-25 ~ 7-30). The PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS requires  
ninesignalsforsomeapplications, butcanfunction  
witheightusingmodularcordsandconnectorswith  
RJ45/DB25 adapters for other applications. If un-  
certain which signals are necessary for an applica-  
tion, all nine should be connected.  
IMPORTANT NOTES!  
1. The PDIU-DI is always a DCE device;  
the PDIU-DS may be a DTE or DCE,  
depending on how its internal jumpers  
(1 ~ 9) are configured.  
2. In the descriptions below, when a sig-  
nal is ON, its potential is about seven  
volts positive relative to signal ground  
(pin 7); when a signal is OFF, it is about  
7 volts negative relative to the signal  
ground (pin 7).  
Data Carrier Detect (DCD, Pin 8): The DCE  
device sends the DCD signal (DCD, Pin 8) when  
receiving the carrier signal on the line side.  
Before transmitting or receiving data, most DTE  
devices require that the DCD be ON. If the  
carrier signal is removed by the remote end or  
lost due to a fault condition on the line, the DCE  
notifiestheDTEdevicebyanOFFconditionwith  
the DCD signal; PDIU DIP switch SW1-2 is set  
ON to set the DCD ON continuously; if set OFF,  
the DCD signal will only be ON when connection  
between two DIUs is established and OFF when  
a connection is not established. SW1-2 is set  
OFF when the DTE/DCE uses the DTR/DSR  
signals for Ready/Busy flow control (see Figure  
7-32 for DIP switch information).  
Frame Ground (FG, Pin 1): The FG signal (EIA  
circuit AA) is a protective or safety ground which  
is bonded to the PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS PCB. If  
required by local codes, the FG should be con-  
nected to external ground.  
Signal Ground (SG, Pin 7): The SG signal (EIA  
circuit AB) establishes the common ground ref-  
erence for all other PDIU and data device sig-  
nals and must be wired for all applications.  
Transmit Data (TD, Pin 2): DTE devices trans-  
mit and DCE devices receive data on the TD  
lead (EIA circuit BA). Before the DTE device can  
transmit the TD signal, the RTS, CTS, DSR, and  
DTR signals (all discussed below) must be ON.  
The TD signal is OFF in the idle state.  
7-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
Data Terminal Ready (DTR, Pin 20): The DTE  
device sends the DTR signal (EIA circuit CD) to  
the DCE device, prompting the DCE device to  
open the communication line. The line is closed  
and the call disconnected when the DTE device  
quits sending the DTR signal. DTR may be sent  
any time to indicate that the DTE is ready to  
transmit or receive data. DIP switch SW1-2  
should be set OFF in most cases (see Figure 7-  
32 for DIP switch information).  
Ring Indicator (RI, Pin 22): The RI signal (EIA  
circuit CE) is sent by the DCE device to the DTE  
device. Whenever the DCE device receives a  
ringing signal on the line side, it turns the RI  
signal ON. If DIU DIP switch SW1-3 is set ON,  
the RI signal will be on continuously if ringing; if  
the switch is set OFF, the RI signal will be one  
second ON/three seconds OFF when the DIU  
detects ringing signal.  
intervals.  
SW1-4: This switch is placed in the ON position  
if the computer does not output the RTS signal  
or when connected to a modem that tracks the  
DCD signal (modem set with AT&C1). Some-  
times, the DTE device may use RTS/CTS for  
Ready/Busy flow control, in these cases SW1-4  
should be OFF. In this case the DCD signal of  
the calling DTE is used as the RTS lead of the  
calledDTEandtheDCDsignalofthecalledDTE  
is used as the RTS signal of the other DTE. In  
this case a signal which stops the DTE from  
transmitting data (usually the CTS lead) should  
be cross-connected to the DIU’s DCD signal.  
Consult the DTE device or application software  
documentation to determine which type of flow  
control is required. If the DIU-DS is connected to  
a modem that tracks carrier detect (AT&C1)  
SW1-4 should be ON.  
10.30 DIP Switch Options  
10.40 PDIU-DI to Personal Computer (PC)  
Installation  
10.31 The PDIU-DI and the PDIU-DS each have a  
four-control DIP switch which can be configured for  
signaling options. The switch is located on the  
bottomofthePDIU-DI, andonthebackpanelofthe  
PDIU-DS (see Figure 7-32).  
10.41 The PDIU-DI always functions as a DCE  
device; it transmits data on the Receive Data lead  
(RD) and receives data on the Transmit Data lead  
(TD). Most personal computers function as a DTE  
device; PCs transmit data on the TD lead and  
receivedataontheRDlead.Followthestepsbelow  
to install the PDIU-DI to a DTE, PC:  
SW1-1: Normally this switch is set ON to discon-  
nect devices from DIUs automatically. The con-  
nection is maintained if data is exchanged be-  
tween the device and the DIU within eight to nine  
second intervals. If SW1-1 is OFF on the called  
and calling DIU, data calls will remain connected  
until released manually.  
SW1-2: This switch is placed in the ON position  
when the PDIU-DI (or PDIU-DS configured like  
a DCE) must hold DCD and DSR ON continu-  
ously. If SW1-2 is OFF, DSR follows DTR and  
DCD will be ON only when the DIU is connected  
on a data call to another DIU. SW1-2 should be  
OFF on a DIU when it is connected to a personal  
computer that uses a communications software  
program to establish data calls with AT com-  
mands; and whenever PDIU-DS is connected to  
a modem.  
NOTES:  
1. Use the steps below when installing an  
ASCIIterminal, personalcomputer, orany  
other DTE device to a PDIU-DI.  
2. The PDIU-DI can connect to a DCE com-  
puter or any other DCE-type device using  
a specially configured RS-232 cable or  
adapter; but this application is rarely re-  
quired.  
3. Change the PDIU-DI escape sequence  
per the guidelines in paragraph 10.63.  
1) Install the digital telephone that is to be  
equipped with PDIU-DI per the instructions in  
Section 100-816-206 and the drawing in Sec-  
tion 100-816-208.  
SW1-3: The PDIU-DI (or PDIU-DS configured  
as a DCE) sends the Ring Indicate (RI) signal to  
the computer to tell the computer (DTE) that the  
PDIUisreceivinganincomingcall.SW1-3should  
be ON for the DIU to send RI steady, and OFF to  
send at one second ON/three seconds OFF  
2) InstallthePDIU-DIunderthedigitaltelephone  
per the instructions in Section 100-816-206.  
7-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
to determine the full extent of these  
requirements; so it is recommended to  
turn LED 02 ON. See the Data Interface  
UserGuideforinformationregardingDIU  
AT commands and result codes.  
LEDs 03 and 04: Should be OFF for  
PDIU-DI ports.  
LED 05: Should be ON if the system is  
installed behind a PBX or Centrex that  
uses access codes to make external  
calls or to insert a pause following DIU  
access of an outside line.  
NOTE:  
The PDIU-DI always operates as a DCE de-  
vice; therefore, unlike the PDIU-DS, it has no  
internal jumpers.  
3) Connect the appropriate RS-232 cable be-  
tween the PDIU-DI’s DB-25 female connector  
andthePC’sappropriateasynchronousserial  
communications port connector (COM port).  
IMPORTANT NOTE!  
Check the PC manufacturer’s serial com-  
munication port interface documentation  
for correct RS-232 pin requirements; re-  
quirements vary with each manufacturer.  
ThenumberofEIARS-232signalsrequired  
(8, 9, or 10 wires) depends on the applica-  
tion.WhenEIAsignalrequirementsarenot  
known, connectthe10EIAsignalslistedin  
Paragraph 10.20. Figures 7-25 and 7-30  
provide diagrams for connecting RS-232  
cables between PDIU-DIs and Toshiba lap  
top, and IBM, XT and AT PCs.  
LEDs 17 ~ 20: Used to establish data  
security groups. PDIU stations are only  
allowed to make calls to PDIUs in the  
same data group to which they are as-  
signed.  
Program 39  
The following data call buttons can be  
assigneddigitaltelephonesequippedwith  
PDIU-DIs: Data Call, and Modem.  
Assign SD buttons to data devices as  
required. Do not assign DSS buttons to  
data devices; DSS buttons are used for  
voice calls only.  
4) Set the PDIU-DI DIP switch (SW1-1 ~ 4) for  
thedesiredapplication.Figure7-32showsthe  
DIP switch locations and Paragraph 10.30  
describes switch functions.  
10.50 PDIU-DS to Printer Installation  
10.51STRATADK8andDK16enablesserialprint-  
ers (laser, dot matrix, or other types) to be con-  
nected to stand-alone data interface units (PDIU-  
DSs). Digital telephones equipped with PDIU-DIs  
can share access to these printers. Serial printers  
operate as DCE or DTE devices, depending on the  
vendor; the PDIU-DS can be connected to either  
type, since it can be configured as a DTE or DCE  
device. (The PDIU-DS comes from the factory  
configured as a DCE device.) Follow the steps  
below to install the PDIU-DS to a serial printer.  
5) Access Program 20 to configure the PDIU-DI  
for DTE-type connection and Program 39 for  
data button assignments of the digital tele-  
phone connected to the PDIU-DI.  
Program 20  
TheportnumberenteredforthePDIU-DI  
in Program 20 is the port number of the  
digital telephone to which the PDIU-DI is  
connected.  
LED 01: Should always be ON for PDIU-  
DI ports.  
NOTES:  
LED02:ShouldbeONforPDIU-DIports,  
unless the PC user will never use DIU AT  
commands (other than ATDD, ATDT,  
and ATD) and never require the PDIU-DI  
to send result codes to display on the PC  
display screen. Frequently, it is difficult  
1. Only serial printers (not parallel) that con-  
form to EIA RS-232 signaling require-  
ments can be connected to PDIU-DSs.  
2. In rare applications, it may be desired to  
connect printers to PDIU-DIs. Refer to the  
printer’s installation instructions.  
7-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
1) Consulttheserialprinter’sdocumentationand  
determine if the printer operates as a DCE or  
DTE device:  
NOTE:  
If using Toshiba computers and printers with  
X-On/X-OFF flow control, set SW1-(4) “ON”  
on the DIU connected to the computer and  
DIU connected to the printer.  
If the printer is a DCE device: Disas-  
semble the PDIU-DS and configure it to  
operate like a DTE device by placing the  
jumper plugs (P1 ~ P9) in the “B-C”  
(MODEM) position. Reassemble the  
PDIU-DS, and mark “B-C” on the bottom  
identification label for future reference.  
(Paragraph10.70providesPDIU-DSdis-  
assembly/assemblyinstructions,andFig-  
ure 7-31 provides jumper plug informa-  
tion.)  
If the printer is a DTE device: It may not  
be necessary to disassemble the PDIU-  
DS, sinceitcomesdirectfromthefactory  
configured as a DCE device. However, if  
uncertain,disassemblethePDIU-DSand  
verify that jumper plugs (P1 ~ P9) are in  
the “A-B” (DTE) position. Reassemble  
the PDIU-DS and mark “A-B” on the  
bottom identification label for future ref-  
erence. (Paragraph 10.70 provides  
PDIU-DSdisassembly/assemblyinstruc-  
tions, and Figure 7-31 provides jumper  
plug information.)  
IMPORTANT NOTE!  
Check the printer’s serial documentation  
for correct RS-232 pin requirements. The  
requirementsvarywitheachmanufacturer.  
6) Use Program 20 to configure the PDIU-DS to  
connect to a serial printer (see Programming  
Section 100-816-302 for instructions and  
record sheets).  
LED 01: Should always be ON for PDIU-  
DS ports.  
LED 02: Should be OFF for PDIU-DS  
ports connected to printers.  
LED 03: Should be OFF for PDIU-DS  
ports that connect to DTE- or DCE-type  
printers.  
LED 04: Should always be ON for PDIU-  
DS ports.  
LED 05: Should be OFF for PDIU-DS  
ports connected to printers.  
LEDs 17 ~ 20: Data security groups can  
be used to allow or deny digital tele-  
phones equipped with PDIU-DIs access  
to PDIU-DS ports connected to a printer.  
DIU stations can only make data calls to  
DIUs in the same data security group.  
2) Connect the PDIU-DS to the appropriate digi-  
tal telephone circuit per wiring diagrams in  
Section100-816-208andinformationprovided  
in Section 100-816-206.  
3) Connect the appropriate RS-232 cable be-  
tween the printer and the PDIU-DS (see Fig-  
ure 7-27 and 7-29 for an example printer  
cable connection).  
7) Program 22 should be used to configure  
PDIU-DSs to hunt if more than one PDIU-DS  
connected to the same printer/server.  
10.60 PDIU-DS to Modem Installation  
4) If steps 2 and 3 are done properly, the Power  
and Ready LEDs on the PDIU-DS should light  
when the printer is turned on and ready.  
10.61 STRATA DK16 enables asynchronous-type  
(not synchronous) modems to be connected to  
PDIU-DSs. This allows PDIU-DI equipped digital  
telephonesthatareconnectedtopersonalcomput-  
ers,terminals,andotherdevicestoshareaccessto  
a modem or modem pool.  
5) Set the PDIU-DS DIP switch (SW1-1 ~ 4) for  
thedesiredapplication.Figure7-32showsthe  
DIP switch locations and Paragraph 10.30  
describes switch functions.  
7-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
IMPORTANT NOTE!  
Modems must be “smart modems” that  
respond to AT commands and return re-  
sult codes. Modems are customer-sup-  
plied.  
IMPORTANT NOTE!  
All ten PDIU-DS EIA leads (signals) should  
be connected to the modem. Consult the  
modem’s documentation for correct RS-  
232 pin requirements; the requirements  
may vary with each manufacturer.  
10.62 A modem(s) can be accessed internally for  
outgoing data calls or externally for incoming data  
calls. Modems operate as DCE devices; so PDIU-  
DSsthatareconnectedtothemmustbeconfigured  
to operate like a DTE device. In the example  
installation in Figure 7-24, the line side of the two  
modemsareconnectedtoKSTU/PSTU/PESUports  
to establish a modem pool; however, the line side  
of modems could be connected directly to a dedi-  
cated CO line. If modems are connected directly to  
telephone network CO lines, automatic transfer of  
CO line voice calls to system modems (data call)  
will not function as described in the Data Interface  
User Guide. For best operation and utilization of  
CO lines and modems, it is recommended to con-  
nect modems to QSTU, PSTU or KSTU standard  
station ports in a modem pool configuration. The  
RS-232 side of the modem connects to the PDIU-  
DSwithstandardRS-232cables;thePDIU-DSline  
side (RJ-11 connector) always connects to its own  
individualdigitalport. Usethefollowinginstructions  
to install modems to PDIU-DSs.  
4) Connect the line side of the modem to a  
QSTU, PSTU, KSTU or PESU standard tele-  
phone circuit or a dedicated CO line (consult  
the modem’s documentation to install the it to  
a CO line). Section 100-816-208 provides  
QSTU, KSTU/PESU/PSTU station port wiring  
information.  
5) Set the PDIU-DS DIP switch (SW1-1 ~ 4) for  
thedesiredapplication.Figure7-32showsthe  
DIP switch location and Paragraph 10.30 de-  
scribes switch functions.  
NOTE:  
If the modem tracks carrier detect (DCD,  
AT&C1),SW1(4)shouldbe“ON,”andSW1(2)  
should be OFF when PDIU-DS is connected  
to a modem.  
6) Use the programs below to configure the  
PDIU-DS to connect to an asynchronous  
modem (see Programming Section 100-816-  
302 for explanations and record sheets).  
Program 20  
1) Configure the PDIU-DS as a DTE device:  
Disassemble the PDIU-DS and place jumper  
plugs P1 ~ P9 in the “B-C” position (MODEM).  
Reassemble the PDIU-DS and mark “B-C” on  
the bottom identification label for future refer-  
ence. (Paragraph 10.70 provides PDIU-DS  
disassembly/assembly instructions and Fig-  
ure 7-31 provides jumper plug information.)  
LED 01: Should always be ON for PDIU-  
DS ports  
LED 02: Should be ON for PDIU-DS  
ports connected to modems, enabling  
the use of AT commands and result  
codes when incoming calls are made  
fromoutsidethesystemtomodemscon-  
nected to PDIU-DSs.  
2) Connect the PDIU-DS to the appropriate Digi-  
tal port circuit per the wiring diagrams in Sec-  
tion 100-816-208.  
LED 03: Should be set ON for PDIU-DS  
ports connected to modems.  
LED 04: Should always be ON for PDIU-  
DS ports.  
LED 05: Should be ON if the system is  
installedbehindaPBX/Centrexthatuses  
3) Connect the appropriate RS-232 cable be-  
tweenthemodemandthePDIU-DS. Figure7-  
28 shows an example PDIU-DS to “smart  
modem” RS-232 connection.  
7-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
sequence is restored if the telephone or  
PDIU-DI is unplugged.  
access codes to place outgoing trunk  
calls.  
LED 06: Should be ON for DIUs con-  
nected to modems. With this feature  
turned on, the DIU will send a one-sec-  
ondreleasesignalontheDTRtodropthe  
modem when the data user presses the  
DataReleasebuttononthetelephone.  
LEDs 17 ~ 20: Data security groups can  
be used to allow or deny digital tele-  
phones equipped with PDIU-DIs access  
to the PDIU-DS ports connected to a  
modem. DIU stations can only make  
data calls to DIUs in the same data  
security group.  
2) Set the modem to recognize the DTR signal to  
disconnect (AT&D2 command to modem).  
3) When the modem tracks the DCD signal,  
issue AT&C1 command to modem.  
10.70 PDIU-DS Disassembly and Assembly  
10.71Tosetthejumperplugs(P1~P9)onthePCB  
inside the PDIU-DS for DCE or DTE operation, the  
PDIU-DS must be disassembled. Disassemble  
the PDIU-DS in accordance with the following  
steps:  
Program 21  
10.72 Disassembling the PDIU-DS  
For each PDIU-DS/modem pair, assign  
the digital, QSTU, KSTU, and PSTU (or  
PESU)portsthatwillbeconnectedtothe  
PDIU-DS and modem, respectively.  
1) Remove the four screws securing the bottom  
panel to the rest of the unit (see Figure 7-33).  
These screws are not captive; so place to-  
gether where they can be easily accessed.  
Program 22/33  
Ifmorethanonemodem/PDIU-DSpairis  
configured as a system modem pool, the  
PDIU-DSs should be set to hunt each  
otherinProgram22.ThemodemQSTU,  
PSTU, KSTU, or PESU ports should be  
set to hunt each other in Program 33.  
2) Remove the bottom panel.  
3) Remove the PCB inside the PDIU-DS by  
lifting the back panel from its side grooves.  
Program 31  
4) Turn the PCB over and set the jumper plugs  
(P1 ~ P9) as follows:  
LED18shouldbeturnedonforallQSTU,  
KSTU, PESU or PSTU station ports that  
areconnectedtomodems. Thisprovides  
data security by preventing executive or  
privacy override of modem calls.  
If the PDIU-DS is connected to a DTE,  
set the plugs to the “A-B” position.  
If the PDIU-DS is connected to a DCE de-  
vice, set the plugs to the “B-C” position.  
10.63 Modem Setup Recommendations  
NOTE:  
Do not cut PDIU-DS PERCEPTION jumper  
wire for STRATA DK8 or DK16 installations.  
1) Always change the escape sequence of the  
telephonePDIU-DIfromdefault(+++)tosome  
other ASCII character (ATS2=XX command  
to PDIU-DI). This allows placing the PDIU-DI  
or modem into the command mode selec-  
tively. The ATS2=XX command should be in  
themodeminitializationcommandofthecom-  
munication software of the PC connected to  
thePDIU-DI(XX=newASCIIEscapecharac-  
ter). This will ensure that the new Escape  
10.73 Assembling the PDIU-DS  
1) Position the back panel to the PCB (see Fig-  
ure 7-33).  
2) Slidethebackpaneldownintoitssidegrooves.  
3) Attach the bottom panel, and secure with the  
four non-captive screws.  
7-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
NOTES:  
1. RS-232 cable and connector  
information is provided in  
Figures 7-25 to 7-32.  
LAPTOP, PC 1  
STRATA DK16 KSU  
2. PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS MDF  
station wiring to Digital Ports,  
is in Section 100-816-208.  
MDF2  
RS-2321  
DKT/PDIU-DI  
(10)  
3. Modem MDF station wiring to  
QSTU, KSTU, PSTU or PESU  
is in Section 100-816-205.  
DIGITAL  
(PORT 00)  
LAPTOP, PC 2  
DIAL-UP  
COMPUTER  
SERVICE  
MDF2  
RS-2321  
DKT/PDIU-DI  
(11 )  
DIGITAL  
(PORT 01)  
SERIAL  
PRINTER  
MDF2  
MDF3  
RS-2321  
TOSHIBA  
TELEPHONE  
LINE X  
DIGITAL  
(PORT 03)  
RS-2321  
PDIU-DS  
(13)  
TOSHIBA  
DIU  
LINE Z  
POWER  
READY CONNECT  
MODEM  
MDF  
QSTU  
OR  
KSTU  
PUBLIC  
TELEPHONE  
NETWORK  
CO  
LINE 1  
(PORT 08)  
MODEM  
(18)  
DIGITAL  
(PORT 04)  
RS-2321  
PDIU-DS  
(14)  
TOSHIBA  
DIU  
POWER  
READY CONNECT  
STANDARD  
TELEPHONE  
TELEPHONE  
MODEM  
POOL  
LINE Y  
MDF3  
RS-2321  
QSTU  
OR  
KSTU  
(PORT 09)  
MODEM  
MODEM 1  
(19)  
DIGITAL  
(PORT 05)  
RS-2321  
TOSHIBA  
DIU  
PDIU-DS  
(15)  
POWER  
READY CONNECT  
LAPTOP,  
PC 3  
FIGURE 7-24  
DK8 OR DK16 DATA INSTALLATION EXAMPLE BLOCK DIAGRAM  
7-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
PDIU-DI  
TOSHIBA LAPTOP OR IBM AT-TYPE  
(FUNCTIONS LIKE A DCE)  
PERSONAL COMPUTER (DTE)  
PIN DESIGNATIONS  
PIN DESIGNATIONS  
COM PORT  
PIN #  
PDIU-DI  
PIN #  
20  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
22  
RI  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DTR  
FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD  
NAME  
DCD RD TD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS RI  
NAME  
Rear view of asynchronous (serial)  
communication interface connector (DB9) of  
Toshiba laptop or IBM AT personal computer  
Rear view of PDIU-DI DB25,  
RS-232 female connector  
8
7
6 5 4 3 2 1  
1
2
3
4
5
DB25  
FEMALE  
CONNECTOR  
22  
22  
20  
6
6
7
7
8
9
20  
DB25  
MALE  
CONNECTOR  
8
9
8
7
6 5 4 3 2 1  
1
2
3
4
5
DB9  
MALE  
CONNECTOR  
DB9  
FEMALE  
CONNECTOR  
DB9  
PIN # NAME  
DB25  
PIN #  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DCD  
RD  
8
3
TD  
2
DTR  
SG  
20  
7
IBM PC AT modem style (serial)  
DB25 to DB9, RS-232 cable.  
Pin to pin connections are  
confiqured as a straight cable,  
not as a null modem cable  
(50 ft max, 24AWG;  
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
RI  
6
4
5
customer-supplied).  
22  
NOTES:  
1. Some RS-232 EIA leads may be called by other names by some manufacturers.  
2. The computer receives data on Pin 2 (RD) and sends data on Pin 3 (TD).  
FIGURE 7-25  
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DI TO IBM AT-TYPE COMPUTER, RS-232 CONNECTOR/CABLE CONNECTIONS  
7-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
PDIU-DI  
(FUNCTIONS LIKE A DCE)  
IBM XT PERSONAL COMPUTER  
OR ASCII TERMINAL  
(FUNCTIONS LIKE A DTE)  
DB25 PIN DESIGNATIONS  
DB25 PIN DESIGNATIONS  
PDIU-DI  
PIN #  
PDIU-DI  
PIN #  
20  
20  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
22  
RI  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
22  
RI  
DTR  
DTR  
FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD  
FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD  
NAME  
NAME  
Rear view of personal computer  
or ASCII terminal DB25,  
RS-232 connector  
Rear view of PDIU-DI DB25,  
RS-232 female connector  
DB25 FEMALE  
CONNECTOR  
DB25 MALE  
CONNECTOR  
8
7
6 5 4 3 2 1  
1 2 3 4  
5
6
7 8  
20  
22  
22  
20  
22  
22  
20  
7 8  
20  
1 2 3 4  
5
6
8
7
6 5 4 3 2 1  
DB25 FEMALE  
CONNECTOR  
DB25 MALE  
CONNECTOR  
DB25  
PIN # NAME  
DB25  
PIN #  
8
3
DCD  
RD  
8
3
2
TD  
2
RS-232 CABLE  
20  
7
DTR  
SG  
20  
7
6
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
RI  
6
IBM PC XT modem style (serial)  
DB25 to DB25 (M/F) RS-232  
cable (50 ft max, 24 AWG,  
customer-supplied).  
4
4
5
5
NOTE:  
The PC/ASCII terminal receives  
data on Pin 3 (RD) and transmits  
data on Pin 2 (TD).  
22  
1
22  
1
FG  
FIGURE 7-26  
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DI TO IBM XT-TYPE COMPUTER, RS-232 CONNECTOR/CABLE CONNECTIONS  
7-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
PDIU-DS  
TOSHIBA PS321SL PRINTER  
(CONFIGURED IN THE "CONNECT TO DTE" MODE:  
P1 ~ P9 = A-B SO PDIU FUNCTIONS LIKE A DCE)  
(FUNCTIONS LIKE A DTE)  
DB25 PIN DESIGNATIONS  
DB25 PIN DESIGNATIONS  
PRINTER  
PIN #  
PDIU-DS  
20  
20  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
22  
RI  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
22  
RI  
PIN #  
DTR  
DTR  
FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD  
FG TD RD RTS N/C DSR SG DCD  
NAME  
NAME  
Rear view of printer  
or ASCII terminal DB25,  
RS-232 connector.  
Rear view of PDIU-DI DB25,  
RS-232 female connector  
DB25 FEMALE  
CONNECTOR  
DB25 FEMALE  
CONNECTOR  
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
8
7
6 5 4 3 2 1  
22  
22  
20  
22  
20  
20  
20  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5 4 3 2 1  
DB25 MALE  
DB25 MALE  
CONNECTOR  
CONNECTOR  
DB25  
PIN # NAME  
DB25  
PIN #  
8
3
DCD  
RD  
8
3
2
TD  
2
RS-232 CABLE  
20  
7
DTR  
SG  
20  
7
(50 ft max, 24 AWG;  
customer supplied).  
6
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
RI  
6
NOTES:  
4
4
1. The printer receives data on Pin 3  
(RD) and transmits data on Pin 2  
(TD).  
2. The PDIU-DS should be in the  
connect-to-DTE mode (P1 ~ P9 are  
strapped A-B), so that it transmits  
data on Pin 3 (RD) and receives  
data on Pin 2 (TD).  
N/C  
N/C  
1
5
22  
1
FG  
FIGURE 7-27  
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DS TO TOSHIBA PRINTER, RS-232 CONNECTOR/CABLE CONNECTIONS  
7-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
PDIU-DS  
HAYES-TYPE SMART MODEM  
(FUNCTIONS LIKE A DCE)  
(CONFIGURED IN THE "CONNECT TO MODEM"  
MODE, P1 ~ P9 = B-C, SO IT FUNCTIONS LIKE A DTE)  
MODEM  
PIN #  
PDIU-DS  
20  
20  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
22  
RI  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
22  
RI  
PIN #  
DTR  
DTR  
FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD  
FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD  
NAME  
NAME  
Rear view of modem DB25 connector  
Rear view of PDIU-DS DB25, connector  
DB25 FEMALE  
CONNECTOR  
DB25 FEMALE  
CONNECTOR  
8
7
6
5 4  
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
22  
22  
20  
22  
20  
22 20  
20  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
DB25 MALE  
DB25 MALE  
CONNECTOR  
CONNECTOR  
DB25  
PIN # NAME  
DB25  
PIN #  
8
3
DCD  
RD  
8
3
2
TD  
2
RS-232 CABLE  
20  
7
DTR  
SG  
20  
7
(50 ft max, 24 AWG;  
customer supplied)  
6
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
RI  
6
4
4
5
5
22  
1
22  
1
FG  
NOTES:  
1. Modem receives data on pin 2 (TD) and transmits data on pin 3 (RD).  
2. The PDIU-DS must be in the connect to modem mode (P1 ~ P9 strapped B-C) so that it transmits  
data on pin 2 (TD) and receives data on pin 3 (RD).  
FIGURE 7-28  
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DS TO HAYES-TYPE SMART MODEM, RS-232 CONNECTOR/CABLE CONNECTIONS  
7-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
CONNECTION EXAMPLE 1  
DIGITAL TELEPHONE  
TOSHIBA LAPTOP OR IBM AT TYPE  
PERSONAL COMPUTER (PC)  
PDIU-DI BASE  
TYPE 1 MODULAR ADAPTER1  
TYPE B MODULAR CORD (CROSSED)1  
(50 ft max, 24AWG)  
TYPE 2 MODULAR ADAPTER1  
IMPORTANT!  
Will not function with applications that require the RI signal to PC.  
CONNECTION EXAMPLE 2  
IBM PC OR XT TYPE  
PERSONAL COMPUTER (PC)  
DIGITAL TELEPHONE  
PDIU-DI BASE  
TYPE 3 MODULAR ADAPTER1  
TYPE A MODULAR CORD (STRAIGHT)1  
(50 ft max, 24AWG)  
TYPE 2 MODULAR ADAPTER1  
IMPORTANT!  
Will not function with applications that require the RI signal to PC.  
CONNECTION EXAMPLE 3  
TOSHIBA P321SL OR SIMILAR  
STANDARD TYPE SERIAL PRINTER  
STAND-ALONE DIU  
PDIU-DS  
TYPE 2 MODULAR ADAPTER1  
TYPE A MODULAR CORD1  
(50 ft max, 24AWG)  
TYPE 2 MODULAR ADAPTER1  
NOTES:  
1. See Figure 7-30 for detailed pin out information of modular cords and adapters.  
2. Never use modular cords and adapters when connecting a PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS to a modem.  
3. Connection examples 1 and 2 work when using the PDIU-DI to make calls with personal computer applications (auto-  
dialers, printer sharing, outgoing modem calls, etc). If the PC PDIU-DI must receive calls, the RI lead is normally  
required; therefore, a standard RS-232 cable must be used (see Figures 7-25 and 7-28).  
4. In Connection Example 3, PDIU-DS must be in the connect to DTE mode (P1 ~ P9, strapped A-B).  
5. All modular cords and adapters are customer-supplied.  
FIGURE 7-29  
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS MODULAR CABLE/RJ-45 ADAPTER CONNECTIONS  
7-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
TYPE 1  
RJ45 TO DB9 (FEMALE) ADAPTER  
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1  
8
7
6
RD  
2
5
4
TD  
3
2
1
N/C  
RI  
9
RJ45  
LEAD  
NAME  
DSR RTS  
DCD  
1
GND CTS  
6
7
5
8
DB9  
5
4
3
2
1
9 8  
7
6
TYPE 2  
RJ45 TO DB25 (MALE) ADAPTER  
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1  
8
CTS  
5
7
SG  
7
6
5
TD  
2
4
DCD  
8
3
RD  
3
2
1
N/C  
RI  
RJ45  
LEAD  
NAME  
DTR  
20  
RTS DSR  
4 6  
22  
DB25  
2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
20  
TYPE 3  
RJ45 TO DB25 (FEMALE) ADAPTER  
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1  
8
CTS  
5
7
SG  
7
6
5
TD  
2
4
DCD  
8
3
RD  
3
2
1
N/C  
RI  
RJ45  
LEAD  
NAME  
DTR  
20  
RTS DSR  
4
6
22  
DB25  
8 7 6 5 4 3 2  
20  
RJ45 STRAIGHT THROUGH  
FRONT  
FRONT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TYPE A  
RJ45 FLAT MODULAR  
CORD (STRAIGHT)  
1
1
8
8
1
1
RJ45 CROSS PINNING  
FRONT  
FRONT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
TYPE B  
RJ45 FLAT MODULAR  
CORD (CROSSED)  
8
8
Modular Cords (50 ft max, 24AWG; customer-supplied)  
FIGURE 7-30  
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS MODULAR CORDS AND RJ-45/RS-232 ADAPTER PIN CONNECTIONS  
7-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
PDIU-DS (FRONT VIEW)  
PDIU-DS (REAR VIEW)  
MODULAR JACK  
FOR CONNECTING  
1- OR 2-PAIR  
DIU  
TO DIGITAL CIRCUIT  
POWER  
READY CONNECT  
1 2 3 4  
DNTA  
CONNECT LED  
READY LED  
POWER LED  
SW1: SEE FIGURE 8-36 FOR  
SWITCH (1 ~ 4) OPTIONS  
INFORMATION  
CTS  
DSR  
SG  
RTS  
RD  
TD  
5
PERCEPTION  
DCD  
FG  
(SEE PARAGRAPH 10.72)  
13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14  
RI  
DTR  
RS-232, DB25  
(FEMALE) CONNECTOR  
P1 ~ P9 LOCATED ON PCB INSIDE  
OF PDIU-DS UNIT (SEE NOTES)  
SIGNAL DIRECTION AND FUNCTION OF P1 ~ P9  
PDIU-DS CONNECTED TO DTE PDIU-DS CONNECTED TO DCE  
FUNCTION:  
A-B  
(DTE MODE)  
FUNCTION:  
B-C  
(MODEM MODE)  
SIGNAL NAME/  
FUNCTION  
SIGNAL  
ABBREVIATON  
PDIU-DS  
PIN NO.  
SIGNAL  
DIRECTION  
SIGNAL  
DIRECTION  
FRAME GROUND  
FG  
1
7
SIGNAL GROUND  
TRANSMIT DATA  
SG  
TD  
2
DTE  
DTE  
DTE  
DTE  
DTE  
DTE  
DTE  
DTE  
DIU  
DIU  
DIU  
DIU  
DIU  
DIU  
DIU  
DIU  
P1  
P2  
MODEM  
DIU  
DIU  
DIU  
DIU  
DIU  
DIU  
DIU  
DIU  
P1  
P2  
RECEIVE DATA  
RD  
3
MODEM  
MODEM  
MODEM  
MODEM  
MODEM  
MODEM  
MODEM  
REQUEST TO SEND  
CLEAR TO SEND  
DATA SET READY  
DATA TERMINAL READY  
DATA CARRIER DETECT  
RING INDICATOR  
RTS  
CTS  
DSR  
DTR  
DCD  
RI  
4
P6  
P6  
5
P7/P5  
P4  
P7/P5  
P4  
6
20  
8
P3  
P3  
P8  
P8  
22  
P9  
P9  
NOTES:  
1. Mode select (P1 ~ P9) “A-B” if PDIU-DS is connected to a terminal-type device (DTE).  
2. Mode select (P1 ~ P9) “B-C” if PDIU-DS is connected to a modem-type device (DCE).  
3. See Figure 7-33 to disassemble/assemble PDIU-DS.  
4. Some RS-232 leads go by different names depending on the equipment manufacturer.  
5. Do not cut the Perception strap when installing a PDIU-DS in Strata DK systems.  
FIGURE 7-31  
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DS JUMPER PLUG OPTIONS/RS-232 CONNECTOR INFORMATION  
7-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
PDIU-DI (BOTTOM VIEW)  
DIP SWITCH  
ACCESS FROM BOTTOM  
— OUTSIDE OF PDIU-DI  
DIP SWITCH SW1 BACK VIEW  
(ACCESS FROM BACK  
— OUTSIDE OF PDIU-DS)  
PDIU-DS (REAR VIEW)  
1 2 3 4  
DNTA  
DIRECTORY TRAY:  
REMOVE FROM ORIGINAL  
TELEPHONE BASE AND  
INSTALL ON PDIU-DI BASE  
DB25 CONNECTOR (FEMALE)  
FOR DTE OR DCE RS-232  
CABLE CONNECTION  
MODULAR  
CONNECTOR FOR  
DIGITAL PORT  
CONNECTION  
PDIU-DI DIGITAL TELEPHONE BASE  
PDIU-DI AND -DS SW1 DIP SWITCH (1 ~ 4) FUNCTIONS  
INITIAL  
FUNCTION  
SWITCH  
POSITION  
Forced hang up when DIU does not  
detect space signal on TD or RD for  
about 9 minutes  
ON: enable (auto-disconnect)  
OFF: disable  
SW1  
(1)  
OFF  
NOTES:  
1
1. DIU port must have  
LED 02 ON in Program 20  
to enable auto disconnect.  
2. See Paragraphs 10.20  
and 10.30 for more details  
regarding SW1 option  
settings.  
3. When a PDIU-DS is connec-  
ted to a modem that tracks  
the DCD signal (AT&C1)  
SW1(4) must be ON.  
4. If using Toshiba Personal  
Computers and Toshiba  
Printers using X-ON/X-OFF  
flow control, set SW1(4) ON  
on PDIU-DIs and -DSs.  
5. SW1(2) should be off when  
PDIU-DS is connected to a  
modem.  
SW1  
(2)  
DCD, DSR control  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON: continuous on  
OFF: DSR depends on DTR  
(DCD is on during  
communication state)  
SW1  
(3)  
RI control  
ON: RI is on continuously during  
ringing state  
OFF: RI is 1 sec ON/3 sec OFF  
during ringing state  
RTS control  
SW1  
(4)  
ON: DTE doesn't have RTS signal  
OFF: DTE has RTS signal (ready/busy  
flow control: RTS/CTS:DCD)  
FIGURE 7-32  
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS SW1 DIP SWITCH INFORMATION  
7-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
SIDE GROOVES  
EX.  
POWER  
W3  
PERCEPTION  
W1  
W2  
SW1  
DTE/MODEM  
JUMPER PLUGS  
P1~P9  
PDIU-DS  
PCB  
BOTTOM  
PANEL  
NOTES:  
1. Do not cut the PERCEPTION jumper wire for  
STRATA DK8 or DK16 installations.  
Jumper wire is for PERCEPTION applications only.  
2. See Table 8-D regarding external power requirements.  
FIGURE 7-33  
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DS DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM  
7-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
10.80 PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS Installation Tests  
2) Make sure PC 1 and PC 2 are on-line with a  
communications software package and that  
the communication parameters of each PC  
and communication software package are set  
to the same values (data transmission rate,  
parity, data bits, stop bits, flow control, etc.).  
10.81 Paragraphs 10.82 ~ 10.86 provide tests for  
five DIU call applications. The telephone and port  
numbers used in these figures are provided for  
explanation purposes only; when actually testing,  
use port and telephone numbers appropriate for  
the system. Each of these tests can be conducted  
with manual dialing from a digital telephone’s dial-  
pad or AT dialing from a personal computer’s  
keyboard; however, only the preferred method of  
dialing for application is presented.  
3) From PC 1’s keyboard, type A T D D 1 1and  
press ENTER (AT commands must be capi-  
tal letters).  
The Data Call LEDs will be lit on DKT 10  
and 11  
PC 1 displays, CONNECT XXXX.  
PC 2 displays, RING.  
PC 1 and PC 2 are connected as shown  
bythethicksolidlines.PDIU-DIsarenow  
in the communication mode.  
10.82 PC-to-PC Test Call Using AT Commands  
(see Figure 7-34)  
1) DIU Programming:  
Program 20: Ports 00 and 01. LEDs 01,  
02, and 17 ON; all other LEDs OFF.  
Program 39: Ports 00 and 01. Data  
Call (56) and Data Release (54) but-  
tons should be provided.  
4) Typing from PC 1 keyboard will display on PC  
2 display and vice versa.  
5) To terminate the call: Press Data Release,  
or;  
a) Type XXX from either PC keyboard.  
The PC screen displays, OK.  
Default settings for PDIU-DI S-Regis-  
ters.  
LAPTOP PC 1  
STRATA DK8 OR DK16  
RS-232  
MDF  
DKT/PDIU-DI  
(10)  
DIGITAL  
(PORT 00)  
LAPTOP PC 2  
RS-232  
MDF  
DKT/PDIU-DI  
(11 )  
DIGITAL  
(PORT 01)  
FIGURE 7-34  
DK8 AND DK16 PC TO PC TEST CALL USING AT COMMANDS  
7-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
b) Type A T Hfrom the PC keyboard used  
in step 5a.  
normally accomplished using the DOS and  
MODE commands.  
PC 1 and PC 2 screens both display,  
NO CARRIER.  
TheDataCallLEDsoneachDKTare  
off.  
3) Using the manufacturer’s documentation,  
make sure the communication parameters  
(data speed, parity, data bits, stop bits, etc.) of  
the PC COM port match the printer’s serial  
interface parameters.  
XXX = PDIU-DI escape sequence (see Para-  
graph 10.63)  
10.83 PC to Printer Test Call Using Manual  
Dialing (see Figure 7-35)  
4) To connect the PC to the printer, press the  
DKT’s Data Call button and dial 1 3.  
The CONNECT on the PDIU-DS will be  
lit.  
1) DIU Programming:  
Program 20: Port 01. LEDs 01, 02, and  
17 ON; all other LEDs OFF.  
Program 20: Port 03. LEDs 01, 04, and  
17 ON; all other LEDs OFF.  
Program 39: Port 01. Data Call (56)  
and Data Release (54) buttons should  
be provided.  
The connection between the PC and the  
printer is completed, as shown by the  
thick lines above (PDIU-DS 13 is in the  
communication mode).  
If busy tone is sent to the DKT, the  
connection is not complete; press Data  
Release and try step 4 again.  
Default settings for PDIU-DI, S-Regis-  
ters.  
5) Operate the PC to print data as required.  
2) Make sure the PC is configured to print data  
from its serial COM port (the PC COM port  
connected to DKT/PDIU-DI port 01). This is  
6) To terminate the call, press the DKT’s Data  
Release button.  
LAPTOP PC  
STRATA DK8 OR DK16  
RS-232  
MDF  
DKT/PDIU-DI  
(11)  
DIGITAL  
(PORT 01)  
MDF  
SERIAL  
TOS HIBA  
PRINTER  
RS-232  
DIGITAL  
(PORT 03)  
PDIU-DS  
TOS HIBA  
DIU  
POWER  
READY CONNECT  
(13)  
FIGURE 7-35  
DK8 AND DK16 PC TO PRINTER TEST CALL USING MANUAL DIALING  
7-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
3) From PC 1’s keyboard, type A T D D 1 4 and  
press ENTER (AT commands must be capi-  
tal letters).  
10.84 Internal PC to External PC Test Call Using  
AT Commands (see Figure 7-36)  
The Data Call LED on DKT 14 will be lit.  
The CONNECT LED on PDIU-DS 14 will  
be lit.  
1) DIU Programming:  
Program 20: Port 00. LEDs 01, 02, and  
17 ON; all other LEDs OFF.  
The screen on PC 1 displays, CON-  
NECT XXXX, where XXXX is the data  
transmission speed set by the communi-  
cations software.  
Program 20: Port 04. LEDs 01, 02, 03,  
04, 06, and 17 ON; all other LEDs OFF.  
Program 21: Digital port 04 assigned  
with KSTU port 08.  
At this time, PC 1 and PDIU-DS 14 are  
connected as shown by the thick lines  
above(PDIU-DS14isinthecommunica-  
tion mode); PC 1 is now linked directly to  
the RS-232 side of the internal modem;  
PC 1 can issue AT commands to the  
internal modem, which is now in the  
command mode.  
If Digital/PDIU-DS port 04 is the only DIU  
port connected to the modem (Program  
20, LED 03 ON), the Modem LEDs on all  
DKTs will be lit.  
Program 39: Port 00. Data Call (56),  
Data Release (54), and Modem (55)  
buttons should be provided.  
Default settings for PDIU-DI and PDIU-  
DS S-Registers.  
2) Make sure PC 1 and PC 2 are on-line with a  
communications software package and that  
the communication parameters of each PC  
and communication software package are set  
to the same values (data transmission rate,  
parity, data bits, stop bits, flow control, etc.).  
583-3700  
MDF  
STRATA DK8 OR DK16  
MDF  
PUBLIC  
TELEPHONE  
NETWORK  
QSTU OR  
KSTU  
(PORT 08)  
CO  
LINE 1  
INTERNAL  
MODEM  
(18)  
TELEPHONE  
LINE  
DIGITAL  
(PORT 04)  
RS-232  
674-4700  
RS-232  
PDIU-DS  
(14)  
TOSHIBA  
DIU  
EXTERNAL  
MODEM  
(AUTO  
POWER  
READY CONNECT  
ANSWER)  
LAPTOP PC 1  
MDF  
DKT/PDIU-DI  
(10)  
RS-232  
LAPTOP  
PC 2  
DIGITAL  
(PORT 00)  
FIGURE 7-36  
DK8 AND DK16 INTERNAL PC TO EXTERNAL PC TEST CALL USING AT COMMANDS  
7-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
4) From PC 1’s keyboard, type A T D T 7 0 1  
6 7 4 4 7 0 0 and press ENTER.  
The internal modem (18) goes off-hook,  
dials 701 to seize the CO line, and then  
dials the external modem’s telephone  
number (674-4700).  
5) To terminate the call: Press the telephone  
Data Release button and;  
a) Type + + + from PC2 keyboard.  
The PC screen displays, OK.  
b) Type A T H from the PC keyboard used  
in step 5a.  
The external modem rings and auto an-  
swers; the modems handshake and es-  
tablish communications.  
If the modems send result codes, the  
screen on PC 1 displays, CONNECT  
XXXX, whereXXXXisthedatatransmis-  
sion speed set by the communication  
software.  
PC 1 and PC 2 screens both display,  
NO CARRIER.  
The Data Call LED on DKT 10 will be  
unlit.  
10.85 External PC to Internal PC Test Call Using  
AT Commands (see Figure 7-37)  
At this time PC 1 and PC 2 are con-  
nected,asshownbythethicklinesabove,  
to exchange data (file transfers, type  
messages, etc.).  
1) DIU Programming:  
Program 20: Port 00. LEDs 01, 02, and  
17 ON; all other LEDs OFF.  
583-3700  
STRATA DK8 OR DK16  
MDF  
MDF  
PUBLIC  
TELEPHONE  
NETWORK  
QSTU OR  
KSTU  
(PORT 08)  
CO  
LINE 1  
INTERNAL  
MODEM  
(18)  
TELEPHONE  
LINE  
DIGITAL  
(PORT 04)  
RS-232  
674-4700  
RS-232  
PDIU-DS  
(14)  
TOS HIBA  
DIU  
EXTERNAL  
MODEM  
POWER  
READY CONNECT  
LAPTOP PC 1  
MDF  
LAPTOP  
PC 2  
DKT/PDIU-DI  
(10)  
RS-232  
DIGITAL  
(PORT 00)  
FIGURE 7-37  
DK8 AND DK16 EXTERNAL PC TO INTERNAL PC TEST CALL USING AT COMMANDS  
7-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
Program 20: Port 04. LEDs 01, 02, 03,  
04, 06, and 17 ON; all other LEDs OFF.  
Program 21: Digital port 04 assigned  
with PSTU port 08.  
Program 39: Port 00. Data Call (56),  
Data Release (54), and Modem (55)  
buttons should be provided.  
The CONNECT LED on the PDIU-DS  
(14) will be lit; the Data Call and Modem  
LEDs on DKT 10 will also be lit.  
The screens on PC 1 and PC 2 display,  
CONNECT XXXX, where XXXX is the  
data transmission speed set by the com-  
munication software.  
Program 81: Port 08. LED 01 ON (CO  
line 01 rings QSTU/KSTU port 08).  
Internal modem: set to auto answer  
(S0=1).  
At this time, PC 1 and PC 2 are con-  
nected, as shown by the thick lines, to  
exchangedata(filetransfers,typedmes-  
sages, etc.).  
Default settings for PDIU-DI and PDIU-  
DS, S-Registers.  
5) To terminate the call: Press the telephone  
Data Release button, and  
a) Type + + + from PC2 keyboard.  
The PC screen displays, OK.  
b) Type A T H from the PC keyboard used  
in step 5a.  
2) Make sure PC 1 and PC 2 are on-line with a  
communications software package and that  
the communication parameters of each PC  
and communication software package are set  
to the same values (data transmission rate,  
parity, data bits, stop bits, flow control, etc.).  
PC 1’s and PC 2’s screens both dis-  
play, NO CARRIER.  
The DATA and MODEM LEDs on  
DKT 10 will turn off.  
3) From PC 2’s keyboard, type A T D T 5 8 3  
3 7 0 0 and press ENTER.  
The external modem originates the call  
to STRATA DK16 CO line 01.  
10.86 PC Auto Dial Voice Call Test (see Figure  
7-38)  
CO line 01 rings incoming to the internal  
modem (QSTU or KSTU port 08).  
The internal modem rings and auto an-  
swers; the modems handshake and es-  
tablish communications.  
If the modems send result codes, the  
PC’sscreensdisplay,CONNECTXXXX,  
where XXXX is the data transmission  
speed set by the communications soft-  
ware.  
There are many off-the-shelf, IBM/MS-DOS com-  
patible, desktop organizer software packages that  
provide an auto dialer function. One of these is the  
terminal resident SideKick. It is used in this section  
for test explanation purposes only. If you choose  
another auto dialer software package, the detailed  
response may be different than that shown here.  
1) DIU Programming:  
At this time, PC 2 is connected to PDIU-  
DS (14), as shown by the thick lines  
above (PDIU-DS 14 is in the command  
mode). PC 2 can now issue AT com-  
mands to PDIU-DS 14.  
If Digital/PDIU-DS port 04 is the only  
PDIU port connected to a modem (Pro-  
gram 20, LED 03 ON), then the Modem  
LEDs on all DKTs will light.  
Program 20: Port 01. LEDs 01, 02, and 17  
ON; all other LEDs OFF.  
Program 39: Port 01. Data Call (56) and  
Data Release (54) buttons are optional; if  
the PDIU-DI is only used for the PC auto dial  
application, the Data Call and Data  
Release buttons are unnecessary.  
2) Make sure that the auto dial application soft-  
ware is installed on the PC root directory and  
that the communication parameters of the PC  
and application software are set to the same  
values (in this test example, Sidekick  
“SKINSTAL” program).  
4) FromPC2’skeyboard, type ATDD10and  
press ENTER (AT commands must be capi-  
tal letters); this prompts PDIU-DS (14) to dial  
and connect to PDIU-DI (10).  
7-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
STANDARD  
TELEPHONE  
DIALED LINE  
LAPTOP PC 2  
STRATA DK8 OR DK16  
MDF  
MDF  
DKT/PDIU-DI  
(11)  
RS-232  
PUBLIC  
TELEPHONE  
NETWORK  
DIGITAL  
(PORT 01)  
CO  
LINE 1  
FIGURE 7-38  
DK8 AND DK16 PC AUTO DIAL VOICE CALL TEST  
3) Makesurethatadialingdirectoryconsistingof  
names and telephone numbers you wish to  
auto dial is installed within the application  
software (include the appropriate STRATA  
COlineaccesscodeprefixingeachtelephone  
number).  
5) Take the DKT’s handset off-hook at any time  
after the telephone number is dialed (press  
the SPACE bar to release the Data Call  
button only); or, remain on-hook and use the  
DKT’s speakerphone to talk when the called  
party answers (LCD model only, do not press  
the SPACE bar when using the speaker-  
phone).  
4) To auto dial using Sidekick from the PC key-  
board:  
a) Press the ALT and CTRL keys simulta-  
neously.  
6) To terminate the call anytime:  
a) If off-hook, press the SPACE bar and  
place the DKT handset on-hook.  
b) Iftalkingviathespeakerphone,pressthe  
SPACE bar.  
The PC screen displays the Sidekick  
menu window.  
b) PressF5twice(Sidekickprompts“search  
for INITials:” to display on the PC’s  
screen).  
c) Type the initials or name of the person or  
organization you wish to auto dial.  
d) Press ENTER.  
11 DK16 TWO-CO LINE EXTERNAL  
AMPLIFIED CONFERENCE  
Sidekick finds and highlights the de-  
11.00 General  
sired name/number.  
e) Press ENTER again.  
11.01 A customer-supplied two-way amplifier can  
be installed to amplify two-CO line tandem, DISA,  
and conference calls. The amplifier will only sup-  
portonecallatatime:Anyconference, twoCO-line  
tandem, orDISAcallsoriginatedwhiletheamplifier  
is being used for another call will be unamplified.  
TheamplifierisconnectedtotwodesignatedPEKU  
or PESU station ports and will automatically be  
switchedintoatwo-COlineconnectionestablished  
between any CO lines in the system.  
DKT/PDIU-DI 11 seizes the appro-  
priate CO line and auto dials the  
selected telephone number.  
The LEDs of the DKT’s Data Call  
and CO line 01 buttons will be lit (if  
assigned in Program 39).  
Dial tone, DTMF tones, and ringback  
or busy tones are audible from the  
DKT’s speaker.  
7-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
SLOT 04  
EXPANSION  
UNIT  
R-TEC, VFR5050  
AMPLIFIER  
(see NOTES)  
R-TEC EDGE  
CONNECTOR  
BASE UNIT  
24AWG  
25-PAIR  
CABLE  
PESU or  
PEKU  
MDF  
OUTSIDE  
PARTY 1  
PCM  
CONFERENCE  
SWITCH  
VT(6), P36/BK-BL  
T, P51  
T
CKT, X  
PORT A  
(CKT 6)  
CO  
LINE  
CKTA  
R, P33  
VR(6), P11/BL-BK  
DT(6)  
R
PUBLIC  
24AWG  
TWISTED  
PAIR  
NOT USED  
DR(6)  
TELEPHONE  
NETWORK  
AMP  
OUTSIDE  
PARTY 2  
VT(7), P38/BK-GN  
T, P41  
T
CKT, Y  
CO  
LINE  
PORT B  
(CKT 7)  
CKTB  
R, P49  
P35  
VR(7), P13/GN-BK  
DT(7)  
R
–24  
POWER  
SUPPLY  
NOT USED  
DR(7)  
P17  
GND  
ANY CO LINE  
MAY BE USED FOR  
CONFERENCE; SEE  
PROGRAMMING NOTES  
FOR TANDEM AND/OR  
DISA CO LINES  
ANY  
STATION  
CALL  
SYSTEM  
TELEPHONE  
THAT SETS UP  
2-CO LINE  
CONFERENCE  
CALL  
R-TEC, PS16  
POWER ADAPTER  
(NOTES)  
NOTES (PROGRAMMING):  
+
• Program 10-3, circuit assignments  
117VAC  
60HZ  
24VDC  
–
PROGRAM 10-3  
PESU/PEKU PORT PESU OR  
CONF. ENABLE PEKU SLOT PEKU PORT PEKU  
PESU OR PESU OR  
DUPLEX  
AC-PLUG  
BUTTON/LED  
POSITION  
NUMBER  
CIRCUIT  
NOTES (Amplifier):  
1. All amplifier equipment is customer or dealer-  
supplied.  
A = 17  
B = 18  
CKT6  
CKT7  
LED 02, ON  
04  
2. Use a 2-way, telephone CO line amplifier that is  
FCC Part 68 registered and provides automatic  
gain control; the above example is with a Reliance  
Electric Co., R-TEC VFR5050 (VVSG) Repeater,  
with 500-X or 500-X-CT mounting assembly and a  
PS16 power adapter.  
• Program 10-1, LED 19 and 20 ON.  
• Program 15-5, enable appropriate CO lines for  
tandem connection.  
• Program 78-2, enable appropriate CO lines if  
amplified DISA is required.  
• Program 10-2, LED 18 and 19 ON.  
3. Recommended switch settings for VFR5050 are:  
• FLAT GAIN (1, 2, 4, 8): all ON  
• Equalizer (1 ~ 5): all OFF  
• Sensitivity: NORM  
• S1 screw: down = Data DIS OFF  
4. The above R-TEC options may be different for  
some installations; see R-TEC VFR5050  
installation Practice before installing VFR5050.  
FIGURE 7-39  
DK16 AMPLIFIED TWO-CO LINE CONFERENCE AND/OR AMPLIFIED DISA FUNCTIONAL WIRING  
DIAGRAM  
7-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS  
SECTION 100-816-207  
MARCH 1993  
following steps (see Figures 7-39 and 8-27).  
11.02AmplifiedTalkPath. Figure7-39providesa  
functional diagram of a two-CO line amplified con-  
ference connection (an R-TEC VFR5050 amplifier  
is used here). The talk path for the connection is as  
follows: outside party 1—public telephone net-  
work—CO, CKTX—STRATA DK16—PEKU, port  
A—into AMP, CKTA—Out AMP, CKT B—PEKU,  
port B—STRATA DK16—CO, CKTY—public tele-  
phone network—outside party 2. This path is two-  
way so when outside party 2 talks, the talk level is  
amplified in the reverse direction.  
1) At the main distribution frame (MDF), connect  
the voice pair (VT, VR, port A) of circuit 6 on  
the designated PEKU or PESU PCB to one  
input of the customer-supplied two-way am-  
plifier. In the example in Figure 7-39, this is  
CKTA(CentralOfficeSideA)oftheVFR5050.  
2) At the MDF, connect the voice pair (VT, VR,  
port B) of circuit 7 on the designated PESU or  
PEKU PCB to the other input of the amplifier.  
In the Figure 7-39 example, this is CKTB  
(subscriber side B) of VFR5050.  
NOTE:  
3) Plug the amplifier’s power cord into the 117  
VAC (standard) wall outlet.  
Only the outside party 1 talk path is amplified  
to/from a system telephone when it is con-  
nected into a two-CO line conference.  
4) Set the gain and other amplifier parameters  
options per the amplifier manufacturer’s in-  
stallation documentation.  
11.03 Amplifier Requirements.  
Customer-supplied.  
5) Program the STRATA DK16 system as  
follows:  
Must be FCC-registered, Part 68, and  
provide automatic gain control.  
Requires two PEKU or PESU station  
ports (17 and 18).  
Refer to the amplifier manufacturer’s in-  
stallation documentation for amplifier  
grounding instructions.  
Program 10-3: Enables the appropriate  
PEKU or PESU PCB ports for amplifier  
connection. Only enable the ports that  
will be connected with the amplifier(s).  
Program 15-5: Enables appropriate CO  
lines for tandem connection.  
Program 10-1: LEDs 19 and 20 must be  
ON.  
11.04 Installation. Connect a two-way amplifier to  
the STRATA DK16 system in accordance with the  
Program 10-2: LED 18 and 19 must be  
ON.  
7-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES  
DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
INSTALLATION  
CHAPTER EIGHT  
WIRING DIAGRAMS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
SUBJECT  
PARAGRAPH  
PAGE  
1
GENERAL .............................................................................................................. 8-1  
WIRING DIAGRAMS .............................................................................................. 8-1  
Station Wiring Diagrams..................................................................................... 8-1  
CO Line Wiring Diagrams................................................................................... 8-1  
PIOU and PIOUS Wiring Diagrams .................................................................... 8-1  
2
2.10  
2.20  
2.30  
FIGURE LIST  
FIGURE  
8-1  
8-2  
TITLE  
PAGE  
SECONDARY PROTECTOR DIAGRAM ............................................................... 8-5  
DK8 MDF WIRING TO KSU AMPHENOL STATION AND RELAY  
CONNECTIONS ..................................................................................................... 8-7  
DK8 MDF WIRING TO CO LINES (KSU AND QCDU) ........................................... 8-8  
DK8/DK16 MDF WIRING DDCB AND DOOR LOCK CONTROL ........................... 8-9  
DK8 QSTU/DK16 KSTU STATION/MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD ............... 8-10  
DK8 AND DK16 CO LINE RECORD ...................................................................... 8-10  
DK8 QSMU TTY/SMDR WIRING ........................................................................... 8-11  
DK16 MDF WIRING/BASE UNIT P5 AMPHENOL STATION AND RELAY  
8-3  
8-4  
8-5  
8-6  
8-7  
8-8  
CONNECTIONS ..................................................................................................... 8-12  
DK16 MDF WIRING/CO LINES TO BASE UNIT .................................................... 8-13  
DK16 MDF WIRING FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONES (DKTS) AND DIGITAL  
8-9  
8-10  
DSS CONSOLE (DDSS) TO PDKU ....................................................................... 8-14  
DK16 MDF WIRING FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONES (DKTS) WITH  
PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2 AND PDIU-DS TO PDKU, KCDU, OR BASE UNIT.................. 8-15  
DK8 OR DK16 PDKU, KCDU, DK8 KSU, OR DK16 BASE KSU DIGITAL  
8-11  
8-12  
STATION/MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD ....................................................... 8-16  
DK16 MDF WIRING/ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE TO PEKU ................................ 8-17  
DK16 MDF WIRING/HDSS CONSOLE AND ASSOCIATED ELECTRONIC  
8-13  
8-14  
TELEPHONE WIRING TO PEKU .......................................................................... 8-18  
DK16 PEKU BACKGROUND MUSIC CONNECTION ............................................ 8-19  
DK16 PEKU STATION/MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD .................................. 8-20  
DK16 MDF WIRING/STANDARD TELEPHONE, VOICE MAIL TO PSTU ............. 8-21  
DK16 PSTU STATION/MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD .................................. 8-22  
DK16 PESU CIRCUIT CARD WIRING DIAGRAM.................................................. 8-23  
DK16 PESU STATION/MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD .................................. 8-24  
DK16 MDF WIRING/CO LINES TO PCOU ............................................................ 8-25  
DK16 MDF WIRING/CO LINES AND DIGITAL TELEPHONES TO KCDU ............ 8-26  
DK16 MDF WIRING/PIOU PERIPHERALS (25-PAIR) ........................................... 8-27  
DK16 PIOUS/TTY AND SMDR WIRING ................................................................ 8-28  
DK16 PIOUS PAGE/RELAY/ALARM CONNECTIONS .......................................... 8-29  
DK16 PIOU SMDR/TTY OPTIONS AND WIRING .................................................. 8-30  
DK16 MDF WIRING/AMPLIFIED TWO-CO LINE CONFERENCE ......................... 8-31  
DK16 EXTERNAL POWER FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONE CONNECTION ............. 8-32  
8-15  
8-16  
8-17  
8-18  
8-19  
8-20  
8-21  
8-22  
8-23  
8-24  
8-25  
8-26  
8-27  
8-28  
8-i  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE LIST  
TITLE  
TABLE  
PAGE  
8-A  
8-B  
8-C  
8-D  
FCC REGISTRATION NUMBERS STRATA DK8 AND DK16 ................................ 8-1  
STATION LOOP REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................... 8-2  
NETWORK REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................... 8-3  
DIGITAL TELEPHONE/DIU/DDSS CONSOLE/ADM/LOOP LIMITS ...................... 8-4  
8-ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
Figure 8-13 — DK16 MDF Wiring/Electronic  
Telephone to PEKU  
1 GENERAL  
Figure 8-14 — DK16 MDF Wiring/HDSS Con-  
sole and Associated Electronic Telephone Wir-  
ing to PEKU  
Figure 8-15 — DK16 PEKU Background Mu-  
sic Connection  
1.00 This chapter contains point-to-point wiring  
diagrams for connection of telephones, lines, pe-  
ripheral equipment, and power supply to the DK  
systems. Wiring diagrams are divided into groups  
according to the PCB or unit which provides the  
interface for, or controls the operation of, the asso-  
ciated equipment.  
Figure 8-16 — DK16PEKUStation/MDFCross  
Connect Record  
Figure 8-17 — DK16 MDF Wiring/Standard  
Telephone, Voice Mail to PSTU  
Figure 8-18 — DK16PSTUStation/MDFCross  
Connect Record  
Figure 8-21 — DK16 MDF Wiring/CO Lines to  
PCOU  
2 WIRING DIAGRAMS  
2.01 The following paragraphs list and identify the  
wiring diagrams provided in this chapter.  
Figure 8-27 — DK16 MDF Wiring/Amplified  
Two-CO Line Conference  
Figure 8-28 — DK16 External Power for  
Digital Telephone Connection  
2.10 Station Wiring Diagrams  
Figure 8-1 — Secondary Protector Diagram  
Figure 8-2 — DK8 MDF Wiring to KSU  
Amphenol Station and Relay Connections  
Figure 8-3 — DK8 MDF Wiring to CO Lines  
(KSU and QCDU)  
2.20 CO Line Wiring Diagrams  
Figure 8-5 — DK8 QSTU/DK16 KSTU Sta-  
tion/MDF Cross Connect Record  
Figure 8-19 — DK16 PESU Circuit Card Wir-  
ing Diagram  
Figure 8-4 — DK8/DK16 MDF Wiring DDCB  
and Door Lock Control  
Figure 8-6 — DK8andDK16COLineRecord  
Figure 8-7 — DK8 QSMU TTY/SMDR Wiring  
Figure 8-8 — DK16 MDF Wiring/Base Unit  
P5 Amphenol Station and Relay Connections  
Figure 8-9 — DK16 MDF Wiring/CO Lines to  
Base Unit  
Figure 8-10 — DK16 MDF Wiring for Digital  
Telephones (DKTS) and Digital DSS Console  
(DDSS) to PDKU  
Figure 8-20 — DK16 PESU Station/MDF  
Cross Connect Record  
2.30 PIOU and PIOUS Wiring Diagrams  
Figure 8-22 — DK16 MDF Wiring/CO Lines  
and Digital Telephones to KCDU  
Figure 8-23 — DK16 MDF Wiring/PIOU Pe-  
ripherals (25-Pair)  
Figure 8-11 — DK16 MDF Wiring for Digital  
Telephones(DKTS)withPDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2and  
PDIU-DS to PDKU, KCDU, or Base Unit  
Figure 8-12 — DK8 or DK16 PDKU, KCDU,  
DK8 KSU or DK16 Base KSU Digital Station/  
MDF Cross Connect Record  
Figure 8-24 — DK16 PIOUS/TTY and SMDR  
Wiring  
Figure 8-25 — DK16 PIOUS Page/Relay/  
Alarm Connections  
Figure 8-26 — DK16 PIOU SMDR/TTY  
Options and Wiring  
TABLE 8-A  
FCC REGISTRATION NUMBERS STRATA DK8 AND DK16  
System  
DK16  
DK8  
Manufacture Country  
Made in Singapore  
Made in Malaysia  
Key System  
Hybrid System  
CJ6 SNG-73672-KF-E  
CJ6 MLA-74479-KF-E  
CJ6 SNG-73673-MF-E  
CJ6 MLA-74478-MF-E  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE 8-B  
STATION LOOP REQUIREMENTS  
Max Loop Resistance  
(Including Device)  
Max Distance from  
KSU to Device  
Number of  
Wire Pairs1  
Device Description  
Electronic4 telephone  
HDSS console  
40 ohms  
20 ohms  
1000 ft. (303 m)  
500 ft. (152 m)  
2-pair. EKTs which  
receive OCA calls  
need 3-pair.  
Approx. 3000 ft. (909 m)  
with 150 ohm device. See  
manufacturer's product  
specifications for exact  
resistance of device.  
Standard telephones,  
voice mail,  
auto attendant, etc.  
300 ohms  
1-pair  
Digital telephone  
1-pair4  
1-pair4  
or  
DDCB  
40 ohms  
1000 ft. (303 m)  
3
40 ohms  
40 ohms  
40 ohms  
40 ohms  
1000 ft. (303 m)  
1000 ft. (303 m)  
1000 ft. (303 m)  
1000 ft. (303 m)  
DDSS console  
Shares digital  
PDIU-DI  
PDIU-DI2  
telephone wire-pair.4  
1-pair4  
PDIU-DS  
ADM  
Shares digital  
telephone wire-pair.4  
NOTES:  
1. Use 24 AWG twisted pairs.  
2. PESU circuits 3 and 4 are not used.  
3. DDCB can connect only to Circuit 5 of the DK16 Base Unit or Circuit 1 of the PDKU or KCDU.  
4. Two-pair, larger wire, or local telephone power supply is required to achieve maximum range,  
see Table 8-D.  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE 8-C  
NETWORK REQUIREMENTS  
TOSHIBA  
Facility  
Network  
Ringer  
Printed Circuit Board or Interface Interface Code  
Jack  
Equivalence  
QCDU/KCDU/PCOU/PCOU2  
(Loop Start Line)  
02LS2  
02LS2  
0L13A  
RJ14C  
0.2B  
0.2B  
N/A  
DK8 KSU DK16 Base KSU  
(Loop Slant Line)  
RJ11C  
RJ21X  
QSTU/KSTU/PESU*/PSTU/  
PSTU2 (Off-premises Station)  
*Circuits 1 and 2  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE 8-D  
DIGITAL TELEPHONE/DIU/DDSS CONSOLE/ADM/LOOP LIMITS  
Maximum line length (24 AWG)  
QPSU/KPSU  
or  
1 Pair plus  
Battery Backup1  
external power3  
MODE  
DKT Ringing  
1 Pair  
2 Pair  
QPSU/KPSU  
Battery Backup  
QPSU/KPSU  
Battery Backup  
QPSU/KPSU  
Battery Backup  
QPSU/KPSU  
Battery Backup  
QPSU/KPSU  
Battery Backup  
QPSU/KPSU  
Battery Backup  
QPSU/KPSU  
Battery Backup  
QPSU/KPSU  
Battery Backup  
QPSU/KPSU  
Battery Backup  
QPSU/KPSU  
Battery Backup  
1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)  
675 ft (204 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)  
1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)  
495 ft (150 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)  
1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)  
330 ft (100 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)  
495 ft (150 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)  
165 ft (50 m) 675 ft (200 m) 1000 ft (303 m)  
1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)  
675 ft (204 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)  
495 ft (150 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)  
33 ft (10 m) 330 ft (100 m) 1000 ft (303 m)  
1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)  
500 ft (151 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)  
1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)  
500 ft (151 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)  
1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)  
165 ft (50 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)  
675 ft (204 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)  
165 ft (50 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)  
(Volume Max)  
DKT with  
DVSU (OCA)  
DKT with HHEU  
or  
Carbon Handset  
DKT with PDIU-DI/  
PDIU-DI2  
PDIU-DS  
DKT with HHEU  
and PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2  
DDSS2060A  
DDCB  
DKT with DVSU  
and HHEU  
DKT with ADM  
NOTES:  
1. Battery backup applies to instances when the system is being powered by batteries exclusively.  
2. Digital telephones and other digital devices can operate at maximum lengths with two pair wiring or an external  
power source.  
3. See Figure 8-28 for external power wiring.  
4. Digital cable runs must not have the following:  
Cable splits (single or double)  
Cable bridges (of any length)  
High resistance or faulty cable splices  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
BUILDING #1  
BUILDING #2  
QSTU  
STANDARD  
PESU  
KSTU  
PSTU  
TELEPHONE  
OR OTHER  
DEVICE  
HESB  
DK8 KSU  
DK16 KSU  
BASE UNIT  
QCDU  
DIGITAL OR  
ELECTRONIC  
TELEPHONE  
DSS  
CONSOLE  
(DK16 only)  
209  
208  
207  
219  
218  
217  
216  
229  
228  
227  
239  
249  
NT1  
AC  
238  
237  
248  
247  
257  
206  
226  
225  
224  
223  
222  
221  
220  
236  
235  
234  
233  
232  
231  
230  
246  
245  
244  
256  
255  
254  
205  
204  
215  
214  
203  
202  
201  
200  
213  
212  
211  
210  
243  
242  
253  
252  
241  
240  
251  
250  
PDKU  
PEKU  
PESU  
KCDU  
DIGITAL OR  
ELECTRONIC  
TELEPHONE  
MDFB  
DDCB  
Secondary protectors  
CO LINE  
DK8 KSU  
DK16 KSU  
BASE UNIT  
KCDU  
PCOU  
QCDU  
FIGURE 8-1  
SECONDARY PROTECTOR DIAGRAM  
IMPORTANT!  
To protect against transient voltages and currents, secondary protectors must be installed if  
there is outside wiring (Figure 8-1). These protectors, which contain fast semiconductors in  
additiontofuses,shallcomplywiththerequirementsforsecondaryprotectorsforcommunication  
circuits, UL 497A. As of October 1, 1990, the following manufacturers offer secondary  
protectors that are UL listed.  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
1. Certron Corp; Anaheim, California 92807  
Secondary protector: Model 08450.  
2. Curtis Mfg. Co. Inc; Jaffrey, New Hampshire 03452  
Secondary protector: Model Diamond Chip. For indoor use on the protected side of the  
telephone circuit only.  
3. Oneac Corp; Libertyville, Illinois 60048  
Secondary protector: Model OnLine 614+ and OnLine DG/S. For indoor use on the  
protected side of primary telephone protector only.  
4. Siemon Co.; Watertown, Connecticut 06795  
Secondary protector for communication circuits: Model PM-2305. Intended for use with  
Listed Siemon 66M1 Block: Models PG-04, -25, -50, or PK-04 ground kit and Listed Type  
1 enclosure. For use on the protected side of a Listed Primary Telecommunications  
Protector for indoor use only.  
5. Simplex Time Recorder Co.; Gardner, Massachusetts 01440  
Isolated loop circuit protectors: Models 2081-9027 and 2081-9028. Intended for use  
between data communication equipment or signal lines of building system equipment.  
Install and test the secondary protectors per the installation instructions of the applicable  
manufacturer.  
8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
TO BASE UNIT (P5)  
W/FEMALE CONNECTOR  
JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS  
24AWG (1 OR 2 PAIR, SEE NOTE 2)  
STATION CABLING  
T1 (VOICE/DATA)4  
BRIDGING  
CLIPS  
(-)  
W-BL  
BL-W  
W-O  
26  
1
1
1
(GND) R1 (VOICE/DATA)  
(-) PT1 (ADD, POWER)  
(GND) PR1 (ADD. POWER)  
T2  
2
2
27  
2
3
3
O-W  
4
4
W-GN  
GN-W  
W-BR  
BR-W  
W-S  
28  
3
5
5
R2  
PT2  
CIRCUIT 2 TO DKT24  
6
6
R
GN  
Y
29  
4
OR PDIU-DS  
7
7
R1  
PT1  
T1  
PR1  
PR2  
T3  
8
8
BK  
30  
5
9
9
S-W  
CIRCUIT 3 TO DKT34  
R3  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
OR PDIU-DS OR  
PT3  
R-BL  
BL-R  
R-O  
31  
6
W
BL  
DDCB  
PR3  
RJ11  
32  
7
T4  
CIRCUIT 4 TO DKT44  
OR PDIU-DS OR  
DDCB  
6 5 4 3 2 1  
O-R  
R4  
R-GN  
GN-R  
R-BR  
BR-R  
R-S  
33  
8
PT4  
PR4  
T5  
2 3 4 5  
34  
9
GND  
(-)  
T
GND (-)  
R PT  
PR TR PT  
R5  
CIRCUIT 5 TO DKT55  
OR PDIU-DS  
PR  
MODULAR  
CORD  
35  
10  
PT5  
PR5  
T6  
S-R  
BK-BL 36  
BL-BK 11  
R6  
CIRCUIT 6 TO DKT65  
OR PDIU-DS  
DIGITAL  
BK-O  
O-BK  
37  
12  
PT6  
PR6  
T7  
TELEPHONE (DKT 1)  
(WITH OR WITHOUT ADM,  
PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2)  
BK-GN 38  
GN-BK 13  
BK-BR 39  
BR-BK 14  
R7  
CIRCUIT 7 TO DKT75  
OR PDIU-DS  
PT7  
PR7  
T8  
BK-S  
S-BK  
Y-BL  
BL-Y  
Y-O  
40  
15  
41  
16  
42  
17  
43  
18  
44  
19  
45  
20  
46  
21  
47  
22  
48  
23  
49  
24  
50  
25  
R8  
CIRCUIT 8 TO DKT85  
OR PDIU-DS  
PT8  
PR8  
RELAY  
CONTACTS  
NOTES:  
1. Voltage levels:  
O-Y  
Y-GN  
GN-Y  
Y-BR  
BR-Y  
Y-S  
NOT USED  
T, PT = -26.3 ~ 27.8 VDC  
R, PR = 0.0 VDC (GND)  
(Reference to FG Ground  
R1  
T1  
STD TEL3  
CIRCUIT 1  
2. T/R wires are always required; PT/PR are additional power  
wires required only for long station runs per Table 8-D.  
PT/PR may be used with normal station runs also.  
3. Standard Telephone circuits 1 ~ 2 require a QSTU to be  
installed.  
4. DKT circuits (1 ~ 4) are standard on the DK8 main PCB.  
5. DKT circuits (5 ~ 6) require one optional QCDU circuit and  
DKT circuit (7 ~ 8) require a second QCDU to be installed.  
NOT USED  
S-Y  
V-BL  
BL-V  
V-O  
R1  
T1  
STD TEL  
CIRCUIT 2  
OR BGM  
O-V  
V-GN  
GN-V  
V-BR  
BR-V  
V-S  
NOT USED  
S-V  
66M150 SPLIT BLOCK  
FIGURE 8-2  
DK8 MDF WIRING TO KSU AMPHENOL STATION AND RELAY CONNECTIONS  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
TO  
NETWORK  
RJ11 MODULAR JACKS  
BRIDGING  
CLIPS  
MODULAR  
CORDS  
T1  
R1  
T2  
R2  
T3  
R3  
T4  
R4  
T1  
R1  
T2  
R2  
T3  
R3  
T4  
R4  
1
1
CO1  
CO2  
CO3  
2
2
3
3
CO42  
4
4
5
5
R
T
6
6
4
3
7
7
8
8
1-6  
9
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
CO32  
R
T
4
3
1-6  
CO21  
R
T
4
3
1-6  
CO11  
R
T
4
3
1-6  
CO4  
R
T
4
3
1-6  
PFT1  
NOTES:  
(BOTTOM)  
1. PFT, CO1, and CO2 modular  
jacks are equipped on the main  
circuit card of the DK8.  
2. CO3 requires one optional  
QCDU and CO4 requires a  
second QCDU to be installed.  
POWER FAILURE  
STANDARD TELEPHONE  
NETWORK JACK: RJ11  
FIC: 02LS2  
66M150 SPLIT BLOCK  
FIGURE 8-3  
DK8 MDF WIRING TO CO LINES (KSU AND QCDU)  
8-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
TO KCDU OR PDKU IN DK16 EXPANSION  
UNIT OR AMPHENOL CONNCECTOR OF  
DK8 OR DK16 KSU. W/FEMALE  
CONNECTOR  
SCREW  
TERMINALS  
R
GN  
BRIDGINGCLIPS  
CONNECT  
DDCB TO  
CIRCUIT 1  
OF KCDU  
OR PDKU  
T1  
W-BL  
BL-W  
W-O  
26  
1
1
1
R1  
PT1  
PR1  
BK  
W
Y
2
2
27  
2
3
3
1
2
L1 L2  
O-W  
4
4
BL  
W-GN  
GN-W  
W-BR  
BR-W  
W-S  
28  
3
NOT  
USED  
5
5
6
6
CIRCUIT 2  
29  
4
7
7
6 5 4 3 2 1  
DOOR PHONE A  
MDFB (REAR VIEW)  
8
8
30  
5
9
9
3 4  
S-W  
DDCB  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
CIRCUIT 3  
(DK8 DDCB)  
R-BL  
BL-R  
R-O  
31  
6
DOOR PHONE  
MDFB  
32  
7
MODULAR  
CORD  
A B C  
HKSU  
O-R  
CIRCUIT 4  
(DK8 DDCB)  
R-GN  
GN-R  
R-BR  
BR-R  
R-S  
33  
8
- T5 (VOICE/DATA)  
(GND) R5 (VOICE/DATA)  
PT 5  
34  
9
2-PAIR  
35  
10  
MODULAR  
CORDS  
(SEE TABLE 8-D)  
PR 5  
S-R  
BK-BL 36  
BL-BK 11  
R
GN  
Y
CIRCUIT 6  
BK-O  
O-BK  
37  
12  
BK-GN 38  
GN-BK 13  
BK-BR 39  
BR-BK 14  
BK  
W
MDFB  
DOOR  
PHONE B  
OR DOOR  
LOCK  
CIRCUIT 7  
CIRCUIT 8  
BL  
BK-S  
S-BK  
Y-BL  
BL-Y  
Y-O  
40  
15  
41  
16  
42  
17  
43  
18  
44  
19  
45  
20  
46  
21  
47  
22  
48  
23  
49  
24  
50  
25  
6 5 4 3 2 1  
CONTROL  
2 3 4 5  
O-Y  
Y-GN  
GN-Y  
Y-BR  
BR-Y  
Y-S  
MDFB  
DOOR  
PHONE C  
MODULAR  
CORD  
See Note 3 & 4  
MDFB (DOOR PHONE) STATION NUMBERS  
S-Y  
V-BL  
BL-V  
V-O  
DK8 PORT # DK16 PORT #  
A
B
C
02  
03  
4
551  
554  
552  
555  
553  
556  
O-V  
12  
V-GN  
GN-V  
V-BR  
BR-V  
V-S  
NOTES:  
1. This figure shows DDCB connected to CKT5 of Base Unit  
2. DDCB "B" output options:  
SW1: Always in DOOR position.  
SW2: DOOR position; “B” connects to door phone.  
LOCK position; “B” connects to door lock.  
3. DDCB may be connected to DK8 circuit 3 (Port 02) and/or  
circuit 4 (Port 03)  
S-V  
66M150 SPLIT BLOCK  
4. DDCB may be connected to circuit 5, Port 4, of DK16 Base Unit  
or circuit 1 (Port 12) of KCDU or PDKU of DK16 Expansion  
Unit.  
5. See Table 8-D for cable lengths.  
FIGURE 8-4  
DK8/DK16 MDF WIRING DDCB AND DOOR LOCK CONTROL  
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
MDF BLOCK NO.  
KSTU/QSTU  
CKT PORT  
STANDARD TELEPHONE/  
DEVICE LOCATION  
COLOR  
INTERCOM  
NUMBER  
DESIGNATION  
CODE  
NUMBER NUMBER  
Y-BR  
BR-Y  
Y-S  
T
R
1
NOT USED  
S-Y  
NOT USED  
V-BL  
BL-V  
V-O  
T
R
3
2
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
T
O-V  
V-GN  
GN-V  
V-BR  
BR-V  
V-S  
R
1
3
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
T
S-V  
R
1,2  
4
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
NOTE:  
1. Circuit 3 and 4 are available on DK16 KSTU only.  
2. Circuit 4 can support a Background Music (BGM) source, KSTU or PSTU, DK16 only.  
3. Circuit 2 can support a Background Music (BGM) source, QSTU Port 19, DK8 only.  
FIGURE 8-5  
DK8 QSTU/DK16 KSTU STATION/MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD  
CO LINE CROSS-CONNECT RECORD  
MDF PAIR  
NUMBERS  
RJ11C/RJ14C  
BASE UNIT  
(KCDU/PCOU)  
CO LINE  
NUMBER  
RJ11C  
RJ11C  
RJ11C  
RJ11C  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DK8 KSU  
DK16 BASE UNIT,  
FIXED SLOT 02  
KCDU/PCOU  
SLOT 04, 05  
(DK16 ONLY)  
RJ14C  
RJ14C  
FIGURE 8-6  
DK8 AND DK16 CO LINE RECORD  
8-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
NOTE 1:  
If connected to an external Hayes compatible  
modem, interchange pin 2 and pin 3, and pin 20  
and 8. Send AT&C1 ATSO = 1 <ENTER>  
command to external modem to track status of  
carrier detect signal.  
DB-25 RS-232  
(MALE)  
1
14  
20  
25  
2 TD  
3 RD  
4
Y
W
1 (BL)  
NOTE 2: Wire colors may vary with other  
types of modular adaptors.  
TO:  
PDIU-DS,  
ASCII  
TERMINAL,  
EXTERNAL  
MODEM,  
SMDR PRINTER,  
OR ACCOUNTING  
DEVICE  
5
TTY  
6 DSR  
7 SG  
8 CD  
DTR  
6
1
6
1
G
BL  
R
(6-PIN  
MODULAR  
JACK)  
BK  
6-WIRE  
MODULAR CORD  
6 (W)  
6-PIN MODULAR  
JACK  
QSMU TTY/SMDR  
6-PIN MODULAR  
JACK  
13  
QSMU PCB  
PIOU MODULAR PIN-OUT  
PPTC PIN-OUT  
TD RD JUMPER DSR SG CD DTR  
PIN NO.  
TTY  
SMDR  
SMRD  
SMTD  
LEAD NAME  
DB25 PINS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
TYRD  
TYTD  
2
5
Y
3
6
4-5  
N/A  
BR  
6
4
7
1
8
2
20  
3
COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS:  
MODULAR PINS  
WIRE COLOR  
TYDSR SMDSR  
TYDTR SMDTR  
W
G
BL BK  
R
DATA STOP  
OPTION BITS BITS PARITY  
NOTE: QSMU TTY/SMDR  
PROGRAM OPTION:  
TYCD  
TYSG  
SMCD  
SMSG  
TTY  
7
8
1
1
EVEN  
NONE  
SMDR  
PROGRAM 10-3  
TTY/SMDR SPEED: 1200 BPS  
LED04 ON  
TTY  
LED04 OFF  
SMDR  
FIGURE 8-7  
DK8 QSMU TTY/SMDR WIRING  
8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
TO BASE UNIT (P5)  
W/FEMALE CONNECTOR  
JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS  
STATION CABLING  
T1 (VOICE/DATA)  
BRIDGING  
CLIPS  
24AWG (1 OR 2 PAIR, SEE NOTE 2)  
(-)  
W-BL  
BL-W  
W-O  
26  
1
1
1
(GND) R1 (VOICE/DATA)  
(-) PT1 (ADD, POWER)  
(GND) PR1 (ADD. POWER)  
T2  
2
2
27  
2
3
3
O-W  
4
4
W-GN  
GN-W  
W-BR  
BR-W  
W-S  
28  
3
5
5
R2  
PT2  
6
6
CIRCUIT 2 TO DKT2  
R
GN  
Y
29  
4
7
7
OR PDIU-DS  
R1  
PT1  
T1  
PR1  
PR2  
T3  
8
8
BK  
30  
5
9
9
S-W  
R3  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
CIRCUIT 3 TO DKT3  
R-BL  
BL-R  
R-O  
31  
6
PT3  
OR PDIU-DS  
W
BL  
PR3  
T4  
RJ11  
32  
7
6 5 4 3 2 1  
O-R  
R4  
CIRCUIT 4 TO DKT4  
R-GN  
GN-R  
R-BR  
BR-R  
R-S  
33  
8
PT4  
OR PDIU-DS  
2 3 4 5  
PR4  
T5  
34  
9
GND  
(-)  
T
GND (-)  
R PT  
PR TR PT  
CIRCUIT 5 TO DKT5  
R5  
OR PDIU-DS  
PT5  
OR DDCB  
PR5  
PR  
MODULAR  
CORD  
35  
10  
S-R  
BK-BL 36  
BL-BK 11  
T6  
R6  
CIRCUIT 6 TO DKT6  
DIGITAL  
BK-O  
O-BK  
37  
12  
PT6  
TELEPHONE (DKT 1)  
(WITH OR WITHOUT  
PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2)  
OR PDIU-DS  
PR6  
(SEE  
NOTE 2)  
BK-GN 38  
GN-BK 13  
BK-BR 39  
BR-BK 14  
T7  
R7  
CIRCUIT 7 TO DKT7  
PT7  
OR PDIU-DS  
PR7  
(-)  
(GND) R8 (VOICE/DATA)  
(-) PT (ADD, POWER)  
T8 (VOICE/DATA)  
BK-S  
S-BK  
Y-BL  
BL-Y  
Y-O  
40  
15  
41  
16  
42  
17  
43  
18  
44  
19  
45  
20  
46  
21  
47  
22  
48  
23  
49  
24  
50  
25  
(GND) PR (ADD. POWER)  
RELAY CONTACT  
NOT USED  
O-Y  
R
GN  
Y-GN  
GN-Y  
Y-BR  
BR-Y  
Y-S  
R8  
PT8  
T8  
R1  
BK  
Y
STD TEL  
T1  
PR8  
CIRCUIT 1  
W
BL  
NOT USED  
S-Y  
RJ11  
V-BL  
BL-V  
V-O  
R1  
STD TEL  
T1  
6 5 4 3 2 1  
CIRCUIT 2  
NOT USED  
O-V  
2 3 4 5  
V-GN  
GN-V  
V-BR  
BR-V  
V-S  
R3  
GND  
PR  
(-)  
T
GND (-)  
PT  
PR TR PT  
STD TEL  
T3  
R
CIRCUIT 3  
MODULAR  
CORD  
NOT USED  
R4  
STD TEL CIRCUIT 4  
T4  
S-V  
209  
208  
207  
206  
205  
204  
203  
202  
201  
200  
219  
218  
217  
216  
215  
214  
213  
212  
211  
210  
229  
228  
227  
226  
225  
224  
223  
222  
221  
220  
239  
238  
237  
236  
235  
234  
233  
232  
231  
230  
249  
248  
247  
246  
245  
244  
243  
242  
241  
240  
Night  
1
OR OPTIONAL BGM  
SOURCE  
All Call  
257  
DDSS/BLF CONSOLE  
(CIRCUIT 8 0NLY)  
— OR —  
66M150 SPLIT BLOCK  
256  
255  
NOTES:  
254  
253  
Voltage levels:  
1.  
252  
DIGITAL  
TELEPHONE (DKT 8)  
T, PT =  
R, PR =  
-26.3 ~ 27.8 VDC  
0.0 VDC (GND)  
251  
250  
— OR —  
PDIU-DS  
(Reference to FG ground)  
2. T/R wires are always required; PT/PR are additional power wires required only for  
long station runs per Table 8-D. PT/PR may be used with normal station runs also.  
3. Standard Telephone circuits 1 ~ 4 require a KSTU in the base unit.  
FIGURE 8-8  
DK16 MDF WIRING/BASE UNIT P5 AMPHENOL STATION AND RELAY CONNECTIONS  
8-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
TO  
NETWORK  
RJ11 MODULAR JACKS  
BRIDGING  
CLIPS  
MODULAR  
CORDS  
T1  
R1  
T2  
R2  
T3  
R3  
T4  
R4  
T1  
R1  
T2  
R2  
T3  
R3  
T4  
R4  
DK16 BASE UNIT  
MAIN CIRCUIT  
BOARD MODULAR  
JACKS (TOP)  
1
1
CO1  
CO2  
CO3  
2
2
3
3
4
4
CO4  
5
5
R
T
6
6
4
3
7
7
8
8
1-6  
9
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
CO3  
R
T
4
3
1-6  
CO2  
R
T
4
3
1-6  
CO1  
R
T
4
3
1-6  
CO4  
R
T
4
3
1-6  
PFT  
(BOTTOM)  
POWER FAILURE  
STANDARD TELEPHONE  
NETWORK JACK: RJ11  
FIC: 02LS2  
66M150 SPLIT BLOCK  
FIGURE 8-9  
DK16 MDF WIRING/CO LINES TO BASE UNIT  
8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
TO PDKU  
W/FEMALE CONNECTOR  
JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS  
STATION CABLING  
T1 (VOICE/DATA)  
BRIDGING  
CLIPS  
24AWG (1 OR 2 PAIR, SEE NOTE 2)  
(-)  
W-BL  
BL-W  
W-O  
26  
1
1
1
(GND) R1 (VOICE/DATA)  
(-) PT1 (ADD, POWER)  
(GND) PR1 (ADD. POWER)  
T2  
2
2
27  
2
3
3
O-W  
4
4
W-GN  
GN-W  
W-BR  
BR-W  
W-S  
28  
3
5
5
R2  
PT2  
6
6
CIRCUIT 2 TO DKT2  
R
GN  
Y
29  
4
7
7
OR PDIU-DS  
R1  
PT1  
T1  
PR1  
PR2  
T3  
8
8
BK  
30  
5
9
9
S-W  
R3  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
CIRCUIT 3 TO DKT3  
R-BL  
BL-R  
R-O  
31  
6
PT3  
OR PDIU-DS  
W
BL  
PR3  
T4  
RJ11  
32  
7
6 5 4 3 2 1  
O-R  
R4  
CIRCUIT 4 TO DKT4  
R-GN  
GN-R  
R-BR  
BR-R  
R-S  
33  
8
PT4  
OR PDIU-DS  
2 3 4 5  
PR4  
T5  
34  
9
GND  
(-)  
T
GND (-)  
R PT  
PR TR PT  
R5  
PR  
CIRCUIT 5 TO DKT5  
MODULAR  
CORD  
35  
10  
PT5  
OR PDIU-DS  
S-R  
PR5  
T6  
BK-BL 36  
BL-BK 11  
R6  
CIRCUIT 6 TO DKT6  
BK-O  
O-BK  
37  
12  
PT6  
DIGITAL  
TELEPHONE (DKT 1)  
OR PDIU-DS  
PR6  
BK-GN 38  
GN-BK 13  
BK-BR 39  
BR-BK 14  
T7  
R7  
CIRCUIT 7 TO DKT7  
PT7  
OR PDIU-DS  
PR7  
(-)  
(GND) R8 (VOICE/DATA)  
(-) PT (ADD, POWER)  
T8 (VOICE/DATA)  
BK-S  
S-BK  
Y-BL  
BL-Y  
Y-O  
40  
15  
41  
16  
42  
17  
43  
18  
44  
19  
45  
20  
46  
21  
47  
22  
48  
23  
49  
24  
50  
25  
(GND) PR (ADD. POWER)  
O-Y  
R
GN  
Y-GN  
GN-Y  
Y-BR  
BR-Y  
Y-S  
(SEE NOTE 2)  
R8  
PT8  
T8  
BK  
W
Y
PR8  
BL  
S-Y  
RJ11  
V-BL  
BL-V  
V-O  
NOT USED  
6 5 4 3 2 1  
O-V  
2 3 4 5  
V-GN  
GN-V  
V-BR  
BR-V  
V-S  
GND  
PR  
(-)  
T
GND (-)  
PT  
PR TR PT  
R
MODULAR  
CORD  
S-V  
209  
208  
207  
206  
205  
204  
203  
202  
201  
200  
219  
218  
217  
216  
215  
214  
213  
212  
211  
210  
229  
228  
227  
226  
225  
224  
223  
222  
221  
220  
239  
238  
237  
236  
235  
234  
233  
232  
231  
230  
249  
248  
247  
246  
245  
244  
243  
242  
241  
240  
Night  
1
All Call  
257  
66M150 SPLIT BLOCK  
DDSS/BLF CONSOLE  
(CIRCUIT 8 0NLY)  
NOTES:  
256  
255  
Voltage levels:  
1.  
254  
— OR —  
253  
T, PT =  
R, PR =  
(Reference to FG ground)  
-26.3 ~ 27.8 VDC  
0.0 VDC (GND)  
252  
DIGITAL  
TELEPHONE (DKT 8)  
251  
250  
— OR —  
2. T/R wires are always required; PT/PR are additional power wires required only for  
long station runs per Table 8-D. PT/PR may be used with normal station runs also.  
PDIU-DS (WITH PDKU2)  
FIGURE 8-10  
DK16 MDF WIRING FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONES (DKTS) AND DIGITAL DSS CONSOLE (DDSS) TO PDKU  
8-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
TO PDKU/KCDU/BASE UNIT  
W/FEMALE CONNECTOR  
JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS  
24AWG (1 OR 2 PAIR, SEE NOTE 2)  
STATION CABLING  
T1 (VOICE/DATA)  
BRIDGING  
CLIPS  
(-)  
W-BL  
BL-W  
W-O  
26  
1
1
1
(GND) R1 (VOICE/DATA)  
(-) PT1 (ADD, POWER)  
(GND) PR1 (ADD. POWER)  
T2  
2
2
27  
2
3
3
O-W  
4
4
W-GN  
GN-W  
W-BR  
BR-W  
W-S  
28  
3
5
5
R2  
PT2  
6
6
CIRCUIT 2 TO DKT2  
R
GN  
Y
29  
4
7
7
OR PDIU-DS  
R1  
PT1  
T1  
PR1  
PR2  
T3  
8
8
BK  
30  
5
9
9
S-W  
R3  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
CIRCUIT 3 TO DKT3  
R-BL  
BL-R  
R-O  
31  
6
PT3  
OR PDIU-DS  
W
BL  
PR3  
T4  
RJ11  
32  
7
6 5 4 3 2 1  
O-R  
R4  
CIRCUIT 4 TO DKT4  
R-GN  
GN-R  
R-BR  
BR-R  
R-S  
33  
8
PT4  
OR PDIU-DS  
2- OR 4-WIRE  
MODULAR CORD  
TO RJ11 JACK  
ON BOTTOM  
OF PDIU-DI/  
PR4  
T5  
DB-25  
FEMALE  
CONNECTOR  
34  
9
GND  
PR  
(-)  
T
GND (-)  
PT  
R5  
R
CIRCUIT 5 TO DKT5  
35  
10  
PT5  
TO PERSONAL  
COMPUTER  
OR ASCII  
OR PDIU-DS  
PDIU-DI2  
S-R  
PR5  
T6  
BK-BL 36  
BL-BK 11  
TERMINAL, ETC.  
R6  
RS-232  
CABLE3  
(SEE SECTION 100-016-207)  
CIRCUIT 6 TO DKT6  
BK-O  
O-BK  
37  
12  
PT6  
OR PDIU-DS  
(SEE NOTE 2)  
PR6  
(-)  
(GND) R7 (VOICE/DATA)  
(-) PT (ADD, POWER)  
T7 (VOICE/DATA)  
BK-GN 38  
GN-BK 13  
BK-BR 39  
BR-BK 14  
DIGITAL  
TELEPHONE (DKT 1)  
(WITH OR WITHOUT  
PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2)  
(GND) PR (ADD. POWER)  
T8  
BK-S  
S-BK  
Y-BL  
BL-Y  
Y-O  
40  
15  
41  
16  
42  
17  
43  
18  
44  
19  
45  
20  
46  
21  
47  
22  
48  
23  
49  
24  
50  
25  
R8  
CIRCUIT 8 TO DKT8  
PT8  
OR DDSS  
PR8  
O-Y  
R
GN  
Y
Y-GN  
GN-Y  
Y-BR  
BR-Y  
Y-S  
R8  
PT8  
T8  
BK  
PR8  
W
BL  
S-Y  
RJ11  
V-BL  
BL-V  
V-O  
NOT USED  
6 5 4 3 2 1  
O-V  
V-GN  
GN-V  
V-BR  
BR-V  
V-S  
GND (-)  
PR  
GND (-)  
R PT  
T
DB-25  
2- OR 4-WIRE  
FEMALE CONNECTOR  
MODULAR CORD  
TO RJ11 JACK ON  
THE BACK SIDE  
OF PDIU-DS  
TO MODEM, PRINTER,  
OR HOST COMPUTER  
ETC.  
S-V  
TOSHIBA  
DIU  
66M150 SPLIT BLOCK  
POWER  
READY CONNECT  
RS-232  
NOTES:  
1. Voltage levels:  
T, PT = -26.3 ~ 27.8 VDC  
CABLE3  
(SEE SECTION 100-016-207)  
PDIU-DS  
R, PR = 0.0 VDC (GND)  
(Reference to SG ground)  
2. T/R wires are always required; PT/PR are additional power wires required only for long station runs or when operating on  
reserve power per Table 8-D. PT/PR may be used with normal station runs also.  
RS-232 cable length is max 50 ft with 24 AWG wire.  
3
DIUs can be connected to circuits 1 ~ 7 with PDKU1; all Base Unit, KCDU, and PDKU2 digital circuits support DIUs.  
4. Expansion Unit slots 04 and 05 only can support DIU.  
5. KCDU provides circuits 1 ~ 4 only.  
FIGURE 8-11  
DK16 MDF WIRING FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONES (DKTS) WITH PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2 AND PDIU-DS TO  
PDKU, KCDU, OR BASE UNIT  
8-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
MDF BLOCK NO.  
SLOT NO.  
CKT PORT  
DIGITAL TELEPHONE/  
DEVICE LOCATION  
COLOR  
INTERCOM  
NUMBER  
DESIGNATION  
CODE  
NUMBER NUMBER  
W-Bl  
Bl-W  
W-O  
O-W  
W-G  
G-W  
W-Br  
Br-W  
W-S  
S-W  
R- Bl  
Bl-R  
R-O  
O-R  
R-G  
G-R  
R-Br  
Br-R  
R-S  
T
R
6
1
PWR T  
PWR R  
T
R
2
PWR T  
PWR R  
T
7
7
6
R
3
4
5
6
7
8
PWR T  
PWR R  
T
R
PWR T  
PWR R  
T
R
PWR T  
PWR R  
T
S-R  
Bk-Bl  
Bl-Bk  
Bk-O  
O-Bk  
Bk-G  
G-Bk  
Bk-Br  
Br-Bk  
Bk-S  
S-Bk  
Y-Bl  
R
PWR T  
PWR R  
T
R
PWR T  
PWR R  
T
R
PWR T  
PWR R  
Bl-Y  
NOTES:  
1. Indicate if PDIU-DS, digital telephone (with or without PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2 or ADM) or DDSS console  
(number 1 or 2) is connected.  
2. PDIU-DS and PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2 can be connected to circuits 1 ~ 7 only on PDKU1; all Base Unit,  
KCDU, and PDKU2 digital circuits support DIUs.  
3. Expansion Unit slots 04 and 05 only can support DIUs.  
4. For KCDU, only ckt number 1 thru 4 apply.  
5. Make copies as necessary.  
6. PDKU and KCDU Circuit 1 can support DDCB. Base Unit Circuit 5 can support DDCB.  
7. DK8 circuit 3 and or circuit 4 can support DDCB.  
FIGURE 8-12  
DK8 OR DK16 PDKU, KCDU, DK8 KSU OR DK16 BASE KSU DIGITAL STATION/MDF  
CROSS CONNECT RECORD  
8-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
TO PEKU W/FEMALE  
CONNECTOR  
STATION CABLING  
BRIDGING  
CLIPS  
JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS  
24 AWG  
W-BL  
BL-W  
W-O  
26  
1
VOICE T1 (VT)  
VOICE R1 (VR)  
DATA T1 (DT)  
DATA R1 (DR)  
1
1
2
2
27  
2
3
3
O-W  
4
4
W-GN  
GN-W  
W-BR  
BR-W  
W-S  
28  
3
VT  
VR  
DT  
DR  
VT  
VR  
DT  
DR  
VT  
VR  
DT  
DR  
VT  
VR  
DT  
DR  
VT  
VR  
DT  
DR  
VT  
VR  
DT  
DR  
VT  
VR  
DT  
DR  
VR  
VT  
5
5
6
6
R
GN  
CIRCUIT 2  
CIRCUIT 3  
CIRCUIT 4  
CIRCUIT 5  
CIRCUIT 6  
CIRCUIT 7  
CIRCUIT 8  
29  
4
7
7
8
8
30  
5
DR  
DT  
BK  
W
Y
9
9
S-W  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
R-BL  
BL-R  
R-O  
31  
6
BL  
OCAR  
OCAT  
32  
7
O-R  
6 5 4 3 2 1  
R-GN  
GN-R  
R-BR  
BR-R  
R-S  
33  
8
1 2 3 4 5 6  
34  
9
35  
10  
S-R  
MODULAR  
CORD  
BK-BL 36  
BL-BK 11  
STATION  
BK-O  
O-BK  
37  
12  
BK-GN 38  
GN-BK 13  
BK-BR 39  
BR-BK 14  
BK-S  
S-BK  
Y-BL  
BL-Y  
Y-O  
40  
15  
41  
16  
42  
17  
43  
18  
44  
19  
45  
20  
46  
21  
47  
22  
48  
23  
49  
24  
50  
25  
ELECTRONIC  
TELEPHONE  
ONLY IF ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE  
RECEIVES "OFF-HOOK" CALLS  
OCA T1 (OT)  
OCA R1 (OR)  
O-Y  
Y-GN  
GN-Y  
Y-BR  
BR-Y  
Y-S  
OT  
OR  
OT  
OR  
OT  
OR  
OT  
OR  
OT  
OR  
OT  
OR  
OT  
OR  
CIRCUIT 2  
NOTES:  
1. To receive OCA, the 6500-series electronic telephone  
must have HVSU2 subassembly or combined  
HVSU/HVSI subassemblies installed.  
2. Program 31, button/LED 03 must be “on” for  
electronic telephone to receive OCA.  
3. An HHEU must be installed inside 6500-series  
electronic telephones for headset or HESB,  
loud bell option.  
CIRCUIT 3  
CIRCUIT 4  
CIRCUIT 5  
CIRCUIT 6  
CIRCUIT 7  
CIRCUIT 8  
NOT USED  
S-Y  
V-BL  
BL-V  
V-O  
O-V  
4.  
All cable 24 AWG, max 40 ohm loop resistance from  
PEKU to electronic telephone (1000 ft).  
V-GN  
GN-V  
V-BR  
BR-V  
V-S  
S-V  
66M150 SPLIT BLOCK  
FIGURE 8-13  
DK16 MDF WIRING/ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE TO PEKU  
8-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
TO PEKU W/FEMALE  
BRIDGING  
CONNECTOR  
CLIPS  
W-BL  
BL-W  
W-O  
26  
1
VOICE T1  
VOICE R1  
DATA T1  
DATA R1  
1
1
2
2
27  
2
3
3
O-W  
4
4
W-GN  
GN-W  
W-BR  
BR-W  
W-S  
28  
3
5
5
6
6
R
GN  
CIRCUIT 2  
CIRCUIT 3  
CIRCUIT 4  
CIRCUIT 5  
CIRCUIT 6  
29  
4
7
7
8
8
30  
5
BK  
W
Y
9
9
S-W  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
R-BL  
BL-R  
R-O  
31  
6
JACKETED  
STATION CABLE  
TWISTED PAIR  
24 AWG  
BL  
X
Y
32  
7
TO  
OCA  
R1  
TO  
OCA  
T1  
O-R  
6 5 4 3 2 1  
R-GN  
GN-R  
R-BR  
BR-R  
R-S  
33  
8
1 2 3 4 5 6  
34  
9
35  
10  
MODULAR  
CORD  
STATION  
S-R  
BK-BL 36  
BL-BK 11  
NOTE: See Program 28  
for electronic telephone  
to DSS assignments.  
BK-O  
O-BK  
37  
12  
BK-GN 38  
GN-BK 13  
BK-BR 39  
BR-BK 14  
VOICE PAIR-NOT USED  
CIRCUIT 7  
DATA TIP 7  
ELECTRONIC  
TELEPHONE  
ASSOCIATED  
WITH HDSS  
DATA RING 7  
BK-S  
S-BK  
Y-BL  
BL-Y  
Y-O  
40  
15  
41  
16  
42  
17  
43  
18  
44  
19  
45  
20  
46  
21  
47  
22  
48  
23  
49  
24  
50  
25  
VOICE PAIR-NOT USED  
CIRCUIT 8  
DATA TIP 8  
DATA RING 8  
R
GN  
R8  
T7  
OCA T1  
X
T8  
R7  
OCA R1  
Y
O-Y  
Y-GN  
GN-Y  
Y-BR  
BR-Y  
Y-S  
BK  
W
Y
CIRCUIT 2  
ONLY IF  
ELECTRONIC  
TELEPHONE  
RECEIVES  
CIRCUIT 3  
BL  
CIRCUIT 4  
S-Y  
OFF-HOOK CALLS  
6 5 4 3 2 1  
2 3 4 5  
V-BL  
BL-V  
V-O  
CIRCUIT 5  
CIRCUIT 6  
CIRCUIT 7  
CIRCUIT 8  
NOT USED  
CIRCUITS 7&8 T/R  
PAIR ORDER MUST BE  
WIRED AS SHOWN  
O-V  
V-GN  
GN-V  
V-BR  
BR-V  
V-S  
MODULAR  
CORD  
NOTE: Place  
PEKU SW1 to DSS.  
DSS  
EKT  
S-V  
SW1  
66M150 SPLIT BLOCK  
NOTE: See Program 29 to assign DSS buttons.  
NOTE: All cable 24 AWG max  
loop resistance: 20 ohms  
from PEKU to DSS (500 ft).  
HDSS/BLF CONSOLE  
FIGURE 8-14  
DK16 MDF WIRING/HDSS CONSOLE AND ASSOCIATED ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE WIRING TO PEKU  
8-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
TO PEKU W/FEMALE  
CONNECTOR  
STATION CABLING (24 AWG, TWISTED PAIRS)  
BRIDGING  
CLIPS  
W-BL  
BL-W  
W-O  
26  
1
VOICE T1 (VT)  
VOICE R1 (VR)  
DATA T1 (DT)  
DATA R1 (DR)  
1
1
2
2
TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE  
27  
2
3
3
O-W  
4
4
VT2  
VR2  
DT2  
DR2  
VT3  
VR3  
DT3  
DR3  
VT  
W-GN  
GN-W  
W-BR  
BR-W  
W-S  
28  
3
5
5
CIRCUIT 2 TO ELECTRONIC  
TELEPHONE  
6
6
29  
4
7
7
8
8
30  
5
BACKGROUND MUSIC  
SOURCE OUTPUT  
9
9
S-W  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
(600 OHMS; 1V RMS MAX)  
R-BL  
BL-R  
R-O  
31  
6
NOT USED  
32  
7
VR  
DT  
O-R  
R-GN  
GN-R  
R-BR  
BR-R  
R-S  
33  
8
CIRCUIT 4 TO ELECTRONIC  
TELEPHONE  
DR  
VT  
34  
9
VR  
DT  
CIRCUIT 5 TO ELECTRONIC  
TELEPHONE  
35  
10  
DR  
VT  
S-R  
BK-BL 36  
BL-BK 11  
NOTES:  
VR  
DT  
1. Program 10-2, button/LED 09 "on", for  
BGM connection to port 02. See Program 19 for  
slot assignment.  
CIRCUIT 6 TO  
ELECTRONIC  
TELEPHONE  
BK-O  
O-BK  
37  
12  
DR  
VT  
2. Cut W5 jumper on PEKU.  
BK-GN 38  
GN-BK 13  
BK-BR 39  
BR-BK 14  
3. Provide BGM to electronic telephone speakers  
and external page.  
4. Volume is adjusted at BGM source  
only (not at PEKU).  
CIRCUIT 7 TO  
ELECTRONIC  
TELEPHONE  
OR HDSS  
VR  
DT  
DR  
VT  
BK-S  
S-BK  
Y-BL  
BL-Y  
Y-O  
40  
15  
41  
16  
42  
17  
43  
18  
44  
19  
45  
20  
46  
21  
47  
22  
48  
23  
49  
24  
50  
25  
CIRCUIT 8 TO  
ELECTRONIC  
TELEPHONE  
OR HDSS  
VR  
DT  
DR  
OCA T1 (OT)  
OCA R1 (OR) TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES THAT RECEIVE OCA  
O-Y  
OT  
OR  
OT  
OR  
OT  
OR  
OT  
OR  
OT  
OR  
OT  
OR  
OT  
OR  
Y-GN  
GN-Y  
Y-BR  
BR-Y  
Y-S  
CIRCUIT 2 TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES THAT RECEIVE OCA  
CIRCUIT 3 TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES THAT RECEIVE OCA  
CIRCUIT 4 TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES THAT RECEIVE OCA  
CIRCUIT 5 TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES THAT RECEIVE OCA  
CIRCUIT 6 TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES THAT RECEIVE OCA  
CIRCUIT 7 TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES THAT RECEIVE OCA  
CIRCUIT 8 TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES THAT RECEIVE OCA  
NOT USED  
S-Y  
V-BL  
BL-V  
V-O  
O-V  
V-GN  
GN-V  
V-BR  
BR-V  
V-S  
S-V  
66M150 SPLIT BLOCK  
FIGURE 8-15  
DK16 PEKU BACKGROUND MUSIC CONNECTION  
8-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
MDF BLOCK NO.  
SLOT NO.  
CKT  
PORT  
COLOR  
INTERCOM  
NUMBER  
ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE/  
DEVICE LOCATION  
DESIGNATION  
CODE  
NUMBER NUMBER  
W-Bl  
Bl-W  
W-O  
O-W  
W-G  
G-W  
W-Br  
Br-W  
W-S  
S-W  
R- Bl  
Bl-R  
R-O  
O-R  
R-G  
G-R  
R-Br  
Br-R  
R-S  
VT  
VR  
DT  
DR  
VT  
VR  
DT  
DR  
VT  
VR  
DT  
DR  
VT  
VR  
DT  
DR  
VT  
VR  
DT  
DR  
VT  
VR  
DT  
DR  
VT  
VR  
DT  
DR  
VT  
VR  
DT  
DR  
1
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
S-R  
Bk-Bl  
Bl-Bk  
Bk-O  
O-Bk  
Bk-G  
G-Bk  
Bk-Br  
Br-Bk  
Bk-S  
S-Bk  
Y-Bl  
2
2
Bl-Y  
NOTES:  
1. Indicate if BGM or electronic telephone is connected (see Program 10-2 and 19); BGM connects to VT  
and VR, circuit 3 only (DT and DR not used).  
2. Indicate if electronic telephone or HDSS console.  
3. OCA wiring not shown, see MDF-to-electronic telephone wiring.  
FIGURE 8-16  
DK16 PEKU STATION/MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD  
8-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
TO PSTU  
W/FEMALE CONNECTOR  
BRIDGING  
CLIPS  
JACKETED TWISTED STATION CABLE  
24 AWG  
TIP 1  
W-BL  
BL-W  
W-O  
26  
1
1
1
RING 1  
2
2
27  
2
3
3
NOT USED  
O-W  
4
4
W-GN  
GN-W  
W-BR  
BR-W  
W-S  
28  
3
5
5
T2  
6
6
R
GN  
Y
R2  
29  
4
7
7
NOT USED  
8
8
30  
5
BK  
W
9
9
T3  
R3  
(ckt 3 CAN SUPPORT BGM)  
NOT USED  
S-W  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
R-BL  
BL-R  
R-O  
31  
6
BL  
32  
7
T4  
R4  
O-R  
6 5 4 3 2 1  
R-GN  
GN-R  
R-BR  
BR-R  
R-S  
33  
8
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
1 2 3 4 5 6  
34  
9
T5  
R5  
35  
10  
S-R  
MODULAR  
CORD  
BK-BL 36  
BL-BK 11  
T6  
R6  
BK-O  
O-BK  
37  
12  
TIP  
RING  
STANDARD TELEPHONE,  
VOICE MAIL PORT, OR  
SIMILAR DEVICE  
BK-GN 38  
GN-BK 13  
BK-BR 39  
BR-BK 14  
T7  
R7  
NOT USED  
NOTES:  
BK-S  
S-BK  
Y-BL  
BL-Y  
Y-O  
40  
15  
41  
16  
42  
17  
43  
18  
44  
19  
45  
20  
46  
21  
47  
22  
48  
23  
49  
24  
50  
25  
1. All cable 24 AWG; max loop resistance -  
300 ohms from PSTU to standard  
telephone/VM port.  
2. Standard telephones may be on- or  
off-premises. Off-premises connection  
is made via OL13A FIC, and RJ21X jack.  
3. Connect up to two telephone ringers  
to each Tip and Ring pair.  
T8 (ckt 8 CAN  
R8 SUPPORT BGM)  
O-Y  
Y-GN  
GN-Y  
Y-BR  
BR-Y  
Y-S  
4. W1, ring voltage option;  
L = 130V P-P  
H = 190V P-P  
5. Two ringers maximum per port, "H" or "L"  
position.  
NOT USED  
S-Y  
V-BL  
BL-V  
V-O  
O-V  
DPFT  
POWER FAILURE  
TRANSFER BOX  
(J1)  
V-GN  
GN-V  
V-BR  
BR-V  
V-S  
DG  
(J1, 50)  
-24 VOLTS  
(J1, 25)  
DG  
S-V  
-24 V  
66M150 SPLIT BLOCK  
FIGURE 8-17  
DK16 MDF WIRING/STANDARD TELEPHONE, VOICE MAIL TO PSTU  
8-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
MDF BLOCK NO.  
DKSU SLOT NO.  
CKT  
PORT  
STANDARD TELEPHONE/  
DEVICE LOCATION  
COLOR  
INTERCOM  
NUMBER  
DESIGNATION  
CODE  
NUMBER NUMBER  
W-Bl  
Bl-W  
W-O  
O-W  
W-G  
G-W  
W-Br  
Br-W  
W-S  
S-W  
R- Bl  
Bl-R  
R-O  
O-R  
R-G  
G-R  
R-Br  
Br-R  
R-S  
T
R
1
2
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
T
R
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
T
R
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
T
R
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
T
R
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
S-R  
Bk-Bl  
Bl-Bk  
Bk-O  
O-Bk  
Bk-G  
G-Bk  
Bk-Br  
Br-Bk  
Bk-S  
S-Bk  
Y-Bl  
T
R
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
T
R
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
T
2
R
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
Bl-Y  
NOTES:  
1. Indicate if standard telephone, voice mail port, etc.  
2. Circuit 3 or 8 can support a Background Music (BGM) source.  
FIGURE 8-18  
DK16 PSTU STATION/MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD  
8-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
TO PESU W/FEMALE  
CONNECTOR  
STATION CABLING JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS (24 AWG)  
BRIDGING CLIPS  
TIP 1  
W-BL  
BL-W  
W-O  
26  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
RJ11  
RING 1  
1
2
R
GN  
27  
2
3
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
O-W  
BK  
4
Y
TIP 2  
W-GN  
GN-W  
W-BR  
BR-W  
W-S  
28  
3
5
W
BL  
RJ11  
RING 2  
6
R
GN  
29  
4
7
6 5 4 3 2 1  
TIP RING  
BK  
8
Y
30  
5
9
W
S-W  
CIRCUIT 3  
NOT USED  
BL  
STANDARD TELEPHONE 1  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
R-BL  
BL-R  
R-O  
31  
6
VOICE MAIL PORT OR  
SIMILAR DEVICE  
6 5 4 3 2 1  
RING  
(PORTS COUNT  
IN SOFTWARE)  
32  
7
TIP  
24  
O-R  
STANDARD TELEPHONE 2  
AWG  
CIRCUIT 4  
NOT USED  
R-GN  
GN-R  
R-BR  
BR-R  
R-S  
33  
8
VOICE MAIL PORT OR  
SIMILAR DEVICE  
VOICE T1 (VT) 5  
34  
9
VOICE R1 (VR) 5  
DATA T1 (DT) 5  
DATA R1 (DR) 5  
VT  
NOTE:  
Two-ringers max may be  
connected (high or low)  
to Tip/Ring.  
35  
10  
S-R  
RJ11  
VR  
VT  
BK-BL 36  
BL-BK 11  
R
GN  
VR  
DT  
DR  
VT  
VR  
DT  
DR  
VT  
VR  
DT  
DR  
CIRCUIT 6  
TO ELECTRONIC  
TELEPHONE 2  
BK-O  
O-BK  
37  
12  
BK  
DT  
DR  
Y
BK-GN 38  
GN-BK 13  
BK-BR 39  
BR-BK 14  
OCAT  
W
BL  
OCAR  
OT AND OR:  
ONLY IF  
ELECTRONIC  
TELEPHONE  
RECEIVES  
CIRCUIT 7 TO  
ELECTRONIC  
TELEPHONE 3  
6 5 4 3 2 1  
1 2 3 4 5 6  
BK-S  
S-BK  
Y-BL  
BL-Y  
Y-O  
40  
15  
41  
16  
42  
17  
43  
18  
44  
19  
45  
20  
46  
21  
47  
22  
48  
23  
49  
24  
50  
25  
CIRCUIT 8 TO  
ELECTRONIC  
TELEPHONE 4  
OR BGM  
OFF-HOOK CALL  
ANNOUNCE CALLS  
MODULAR  
CORD  
STATION  
(NOTE 5)  
ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE  
(NOTE 5)  
O-Y  
Y-GN  
GN-Y  
Y-BR  
BR-Y  
Y-S  
NOT USED  
STRAP OPTION:  
P90 - RING VOLTAGE OPTION (CIRCUIT 1 & 2):  
L = LOW LEVEL (130V P-P)  
S-Y  
H = HIGH LEVEL (190V P-P)  
OCA T1 (OT) 5  
OCA R1 (OR) 5  
OT  
V-BL  
BL-V  
V-O  
NOTES: (Electronic telephone Circuits 5~8)  
CIRCUIT 6  
CIRCUIT 7  
CIRCUIT 8  
NOT USED  
OR  
OT  
OR  
OT  
OR  
O-V  
1. To receive OCA, the 6500-series electronic telephone must  
have an HVSU2 or the combined HVSI and HVSU installed.  
2. Program 31, button/LED 03 must be “on” for electronic  
telephone to receive OCA.  
3. An HHEU must be installed inside 6500-series electronic  
telephones for headset or HESB; Loud Ringing Bell option.  
4. All cable 24 AWG, max 40 ohm loop resistance from PESU  
to electronic telephone (1000 ft).  
V-GN  
GN-V  
V-BR  
BR-V  
V-S  
S-V  
5. HDSS connection is not available with PESU.  
66M150 SPLIT BLOCK  
NOTES: (Standard telephone circuits 1 & 2)  
1. All cable 24 AWG; max loop resistance - 300 ohms from PESU to standard telephone/VM port.  
2. Standard telephones may be on- or off-premises. Off-premises connection is made via OL13A FIC, and RJ21X jack.  
3. Two ringers max per port.  
4. Circuit 6 and 7 can provide interface for an external conference amplifier (Prog 10-3).  
FIGURE 8-19  
DK16 PESU CIRCUIT CARD WIRING DIAGRAM  
8-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
MDF BLOCK NO.  
CKT  
PORT  
COLOR  
CODE  
INTERCOM  
NUMBER  
DEVICE/STANDARD TELEPHONE/  
ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE LOCATION  
DESIGNATION  
NUMBER NUMBER  
W-Bl  
Bl-W  
W-O  
O-W  
W-G  
G-W  
W-Br  
Br-W  
W-S  
S-W  
R- Bl  
Bl-R  
R-O  
O-R  
R-G  
G-R  
R-Br  
Br-R  
R-S  
T
R
1
2
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
T
R
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
NOT USED  
VT  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
3
4
5
6
7
8
VR  
DT  
DR  
VT  
VR  
DT  
DR  
VT  
VR  
DT  
DR  
VT  
VR  
DT  
S-R  
2
Bk-Bl  
Bl-Bk  
Bk-O  
O-Bk  
Bk-G  
G-Bk  
Bk-Br  
Br-Bk  
Bk-S  
S-Bk  
Y-Bl  
1, 2  
1, 3  
Bl-Y  
DR  
NOTES:  
1. HDSS is not allowed.  
2. Indicate if external amplifier is connected.  
3. Indicate if BGM or electronic telephone is connected; BGM connects to VT and VR,  
circuit 8 only (DT and DR not used).  
4. OCA wiring not shown, see MDF-to-electronic telephone wiring.  
FIGURE 8-20  
DK16 PESU STATION/MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD  
8-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
TO  
NETWORK  
BRIDGING  
CLIPS  
T1  
R1  
T2  
R2  
T1  
R1  
T2  
R2  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
R
GN  
Y
R1  
7
7
T1  
T2  
8
8
BK  
W
9
9
R2  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
TELCO-PROVIDED  
MODULAR BLOCK,  
625-TYPE OR  
BL  
EQUIVALENT  
6 5 4 3 2 1  
PCOU  
#4  
#3  
#2  
#1  
2 3 4 5  
MODULAR  
CORD  
5 R4  
4 R3  
CO3+4  
3 T3  
2 T4  
SAME  
5 R2  
4 R1  
3 T1  
2 T2  
CO1+2  
PCOU  
PIN-OUT  
NETWORK JACK: RJ14C  
FIC: 02LS2  
66M150 SPLIT BLOCK  
FIGURE 8-21  
DK16 MDF WIRING/CO LINES TO PCOU  
8-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
TO  
NETWORK  
CO LINE CABLING  
BRIDGING  
CLIPS  
T1  
R1  
T2  
R2  
T1  
R1  
T2  
R2  
1
2
1
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
R
GN  
6
6
R1  
T1  
T2  
7
7
BK  
R2  
Y
8
8
9
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
W
BL  
6 5 4 3 2 1  
2 3 4 5  
KCDU  
CO2 LED  
CO1 LED  
MODULAR  
CORD  
48  
49  
50  
48  
49  
50  
5 R2  
4 R1  
3 T1  
2 T2  
66M150 SPLIT BLOCK  
CO1+2  
KCDU  
PIN-OUT  
NETWORK JACK: RJ14C  
FIC: 02LS2  
MODULAR  
JACK  
STATION CABLING  
TO KCDU  
W/FEMALE CONNECTOR  
JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS  
24AWG (1 OR 2 PAIR, SEE NOTE 2)  
BRIDGING  
CLIPS  
(-)  
(GND) R1 (VOICE/DATA)  
(-) PT1 (ADD, POWER)  
T1 (VOICE/DATA)  
W-BL  
BL-W  
W-O  
26  
1
1
2
1
2
27  
2
3
3
(GND) PR1 (ADD. POWER)  
T2  
O-W  
4
4
W-GN  
GN-W  
W-BR  
BR-W  
W-S  
28  
3
5
5
R2  
PT2  
R
GN  
Y
6
6
CIRCUIT 2 TO DKT2  
29  
4
7
7
R1  
PT1  
T1  
PR1  
OR PDIU-DS  
PR2  
T3  
8
8
BK  
30  
5
9
9
S-W  
R3  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
CIRCUIT 3 TO DKT3  
W
BL  
R-BL  
BL-R  
R-O  
31  
6
PT3  
OR PDIU-DS  
RJ11  
PR3  
T4  
32  
7
6 5 4 3 2 1  
O-R  
R4  
CIRCUIT 4 TO DKT4  
R-GN  
GN-R  
R-BR  
BR-R  
R-S  
33  
8
PT4  
OR PDIU-DS  
PR4  
2- OR 4-WIRE  
MODULAR CORD  
TO RJ11 JACK  
ON BOTTOM  
OF PDIU-DI  
GND  
(-)  
GND (-)  
34  
9
PR (5) T (4) R (3) PT (2)  
35  
V-BR  
BR-V  
V-S  
49  
24  
50  
25  
47  
48  
49  
50  
47  
48  
49  
50  
NOT USED  
DIGITAL  
S-V  
TELEPHONE  
(WITH OR WITHOUT  
PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2) OR  
PDIU-DS  
66M150 SPLIT BLOCK  
NOTES:  
Voltage levels:  
T, PT =  
R, PR =  
1.  
-26.3 ~ 27.8 VDC  
0.0 VDC (GND)  
- or -  
DDCB  
(Reference to SG ground)  
2. T/R wires are always required; PT/PR are additional power wires required only for long station runs or when operating  
on reserve power per Table 8-D. PT/PR may be used with normal station runs also.  
3. ADMs and/or DIUs can be connected to circuits 1 ~ 4, DDCB can be connected to Circuit 1.  
FIGURE 8-22  
DK16 MDF WIRING/CO LINES AND DIGITAL TELEPHONES TO KCDU  
8-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
MDF 66M  
BLOCK  
PIOU 25PR.  
CONNECTIONS  
PIOU PCB  
MULTI-ZONE PAGE  
30W MAX./COMPOSITE IMPEDANCE  
300 OHMS  
PIN  
15  
COLOR  
S-Bk  
PIN  
30  
.
.
PG.OUT 1  
PG.IN 1  
ZONE (35)  
40  
29  
Bk-S  
.
.
PG.OUT 2  
PG.IN 2  
17  
42  
O-Y  
Y-O  
34  
33  
ZONE (36)  
ALL  
ZONE  
PAGE  
(39)  
38  
37  
.
.
PG.OUT 3  
PG.IN 3  
19  
44  
Br-Y  
Y-Br  
PIOU  
ONLY  
ZONE (37)  
.
.
21  
46  
Bl-V  
V-Bl  
42  
41  
PG.OUT 4  
PG.IN 4  
ZONE (38)  
SELECT RELAY FUNCTION  
WITH PROGRAM 77-1  
DOOR LOCK OR  
AMP. CONTROL  
BREAK  
DOOR  
LOCK  
CONTROL  
.
.
32  
7
R-O  
O-R  
13  
14  
PI0  
MAKE  
RCA JACK  
MUTE  
MUTE CONTROL ALSO  
PROVIDED BY BASE  
UNIT PAGE RELAY  
(PIN 42 AND 17 OF  
P5 AMPHENOL)  
BASE UNIT  
600Ω (DUPLEX)  
AMPLIFIER  
MULTI-ZONE  
J 7  
.
23  
Gn-V  
46  
COMMON  
ALARM  
SYSTEM  
36  
11  
.
.
Bk-Bl  
Bl-Bk  
21  
22  
N.C.  
AMP.  
ALARM  
SENSOR  
P12  
N.O.  
TAPE  
PLAYER  
P11  
BREAK  
MAKE  
EXTERNAL  
BACKGROUND  
MUSIC  
CONTROL  
.
.
34  
9
R-Br  
Br-R  
17  
18  
SOURCE  
MDF  
CONNECTIONS  
SELECT RELAY FUNCTION  
WITH PROGRAM 77-1:  
NIGHT RELAY OR  
TO MUSIC-ON-HOLD  
INPUT ON P6 CONNECTOR  
ON BASE UNIT.  
NIGHT  
BELL  
ALL WIRES SHOULD  
BE JACKETED 24 AWG.  
TWISTED PAIRS  
MOH CONTROL  
NOTE:  
This figure shows PIOU relay callouts. See Chapter 5 for PIOUS relay callouts.  
FIGURE 8-23  
DK16 MDF WIRING/PIOU PERIPHERALS (25-PAIR)  
8-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
NOTE 1: If connected to external modem, interchange pin 2 and pin 3,  
and pin 20 and 8. Send AT&C1 command to external modem  
to track status of carrier detect signal.  
DB-25 RS-232  
(MALE)  
1
14  
2 TD  
Y
W
1 (BL)  
NOTE 2: Wire colors may vary with other  
types of modular adaptors.  
PDIU-DS,  
TO ASCII  
TERMINAL,  
OR  
EXTERNAL  
MODEM  
3 RD  
4
5
6 DSR  
7 SG  
8 CD  
DTR  
6
G
BL  
R
20  
25  
PIOUS  
CARD  
MAINTENANCE  
PORT  
1
BK  
• 7–BIT  
• EVEN PARITY  
• 1–STOP  
TYSG  
TTY  
6 (W)  
TYCD  
TYDTR  
TYDSR  
TYTD  
6
1
6-PIN MODULAR  
JACK  
(IMDU)  
(6-PIN  
MODULAR  
JACK)  
13  
3-PAIR  
TYRD  
MODULAR  
CORD MAX.  
50 FT WITH  
24 AWG  
TOSHIBA RS-232/MODULAR  
ADAPTOR PART NO. PPTC  
SMSG  
SMCD  
SMDTR  
SMDSR  
SMTD  
SMDR  
(6-PIN  
MODULAR  
JACK)  
6
1
DB-25 RS-232  
(MALE)  
1
14  
20  
25  
2 TD  
3 RD  
4
Y
W
SMRD  
1 (BL)  
TO PRINTER  
PDIU-DS,  
OR CALL  
ACCOUNTING  
DEVICE  
5
STATION MESSAGE  
DETAIL RECORDING  
PORT  
6 DSR  
7 SG  
8 CD  
DTR  
6
1
SW2  
LED  
CD4  
G
BL  
BK  
R
• 8–BIT  
• NO–PARITY  
• 1–STOP BIT  
TB1 TO MDF:  
NOTE: 600 ohm Page  
is not functional  
on DK16  
6 (W)  
6-PIN MODULAR  
JACK  
600 OHM  
PAGE  
13  
DOOR LOCK/  
AMP, MUTE  
PIOU MODULAR PIN-OUT  
NOTE 3: PIOUS option settings:  
SW1 – Sets the SMDR baud rate  
to be 300 or 1200 BPS.  
SW2 – Sets the PIOU programming speed to be  
300 or 1200 BPS (for IMDU or TTY jack).  
LED CO4 “On” = 300 BPS/SW2 set “In”.  
LED CO4 “Off” = 1200 BPS/SW2 set “Out”.  
SW3 – Sets the PIOUS to operate with the  
IMDU or an external device  
PIN NO.  
TTY  
SMDR  
SMRD  
SMTD  
NIGHT  
RELAY/ MOH  
CONTROL  
1
2
3
4
5
6
TYRD  
TYTD  
ALARM  
TYDSR SMDSR  
TYDTR SMDTR  
TYCD  
TYSG  
SMCD  
SMSG  
connected to the TTY modular jack.  
– For IMDU operation (7, even, 1)  
– For ASCII terminal (8, none, 1)  
or external modem (8, none, 1).  
MODEM  
TTY  
PPTC PIN-OUT  
TD RD JUMPER DSR SG CD DTR  
W4 – Sets the IMDU and TTY jack  
for bell or CCITT specification.  
BELL - "W4 not installed".  
LEAD NAME  
DB25 PINS  
2
5
Y
3
6
4-5  
N/A  
BR  
6
4
7
1
8
2
20  
3
MODULAR PINS  
WIRE COLOR  
NOTE 4: PDIU-DS jumpers should be set to  
the B-C position when connected  
W
G
BL BK  
R
to the PIOUS TTY or SMDR port.  
FIGURE 8-24  
DK16 PIOUS/TTY AND SMDR WIRING  
8-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
BASE UNIT  
KSU BACKPLANE  
Amplifier mute  
control can also  
be provided by  
MDF  
HESB  
Page relay in  
OR  
PAGE  
AND  
BGM  
Base Units (Pin 42  
PAGE  
RCA PAGE JACK J7  
600Ω  
and 17 of P5  
AMPLIFIER  
amphenol  
connector).  
BREAK  
MUTE  
CONTROL  
DOOR  
DET  
DER  
W1  
MAKE  
LOCK  
CONTROL  
DE  
NH  
K1  
BREAK  
W2  
NHT  
NHR  
MOH  
SOURCE  
UNIT  
MAKE  
K2  
NIGHT BELL  
NORMAL OPEN  
ALMT  
ALMR  
FACILITY  
ALARM  
UNIT  
W3  
ALARM  
SENSOR  
ALM  
NORMAL  
CLOSE  
PIOUS  
•
•
All wiring connections must be 24 AWG twisted pairs.  
Dotted lines show optional connections; only one optional connection is allowed.  
RELAY OPTIONS:  
• K1 (DE): DOOR LOCK OR AMP MUTE CONTROL; PROGRAM 77-1, LED 07  
• K2 (NH): NIGHT RELAY OR MUSIC-ON-HOLD CONTROL; PROGRAM 77-1, LED 05  
• K1 & K2: 24 VDC, 1 AMP MAXIMUM  
FIGURE 8-25  
DK16 PIOUS PAGE/RELAY/ALARM CONNECTIONS  
8-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
DB-25 RS-232  
(MALE)  
NOTE 1:  
1 (BL)  
If connected to an external Hayes compatible modem, interchange pin 2  
and pin 3, and pin 20 and 8. Send AT&C1 8D2SO = 6AW <ENTER>  
command to external modem  
1
14  
2 TD  
3 RD  
4
PDIU-DS,  
TO ASCII  
TERMINAL,  
OR  
EXTERNAL  
MODEM  
Y
W
NOTE 2: Wire colors may vary with other  
types of modular adaptors.  
5
6 DSR  
7 SG  
8 CD  
DTR  
6
G
BL  
R
20  
25  
MAINTENANCE  
PIOU  
PORT  
CARD  
1
• 7–BIT  
• EVEN PARITY  
• 1–STOP BIT  
BK  
TYSG  
6 (W)  
TTY  
(6-PIN  
MODULAR  
JACK)  
TYCD  
TYDTR  
TYDSR  
TYTD  
6
1
6-PIN MODULAR  
JACK  
13  
3-PAIR  
TYRD  
MODULAR  
CORD MAX.  
50 FT WITH  
24 AWG  
TOSHIBA RS-232/MODULAR  
ADAPTOR PART NO. PPTC  
SMSG  
SMCD  
SMDTR  
SMDSR  
SMTD  
SMDR  
(6-PIN  
MODULAR  
JACK)  
6
1
DB-25 RS-232  
(MALE)  
1
14  
20  
25  
2 TD  
3 RD  
4
Y
W
SMRD  
1 (BL)  
TO PRINTER  
PDIU-DS,  
OR CALL  
ACCOUNTING  
DEVICE  
5
STATION MESSAGE  
DETAIL RECORDING  
PORT  
6 DSR  
7 SG  
8 CD  
DTR  
6
1
SW2  
LED  
CD4  
G
BL  
BK  
R
• 8–BIT  
• NO PARITY  
• 1–STOP BIT  
6 (W)  
6-PIN MODULAR  
JACK  
(25-PAIR  
FEMALE  
AMP.  
13  
JACK)  
NOTE 3: PIOU option settings:  
SW1 – Sets the SMDR baud rate  
to be 300 or 1200 BPS.  
SW2 – Sets the PIOU programming speed to be  
300 or 1200 BPS (for IMDU or TTY jack).  
LED CO4 “On” = 300 BPS/SW2 set “In”.  
LED CO4 “Off” = 1200 BPS/SW2 set “Out”.  
SW3 – Sets the PIOU to operate with the  
IMDU or an external device  
PIOU MODULAR PIN-OUT  
SEE  
PIOU/MDF  
DRAWING  
IN THIS  
PIN NO.  
TTY  
SMDR  
SMRD  
SMTD  
1
2
3
4
5
6
TYRD  
TYTD  
SECTION  
TYDSR SMDSR  
TYDTR SMDTR  
TYCD  
TYSG  
SMCD  
SMSG  
connected to the TTY modular jack.  
– For IMDU operation (7, even, 1)  
– For ASCII terminal (8, none, 1)  
or external modem (8, none, 1).  
MODEM  
TTY  
PPTC PIN-OUT  
P13 – Sets the IMDU and TTY jack  
for bell or CCITT specification.  
LEAD NAME  
DB25 PINS  
TD RD JUMPER DSR SG CD DTR  
2
5
Y
3
6
4-5  
N/A  
BR  
6
4
7
1
8
2
20  
3
NOTE 4: PDIU-DS jumpers should be set to  
the B-C position when connected t  
o the PIOU TTY or SMDR port.  
MODULAR PINS  
WIRE COLOR  
W
G
BL BK  
R
FIGURE 8-26  
DK16 PIOU SMDR/TTY OPTIONS AND WIRING  
8-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
TO PEKU W/FEMALE  
CONNECTOR  
BRIDGING  
CLIPS  
VT1  
VR1  
DT1  
DR1  
VT2  
VR2  
DT2  
DR2  
VT3  
VR3  
DT3  
DR3  
VT4  
VR4  
DT4  
DR4  
VT5  
VR5  
DT5  
DR5  
VT6  
VR6  
DT6  
DR6  
VT7  
VR7  
DT7  
DR7  
VT8  
VR8  
DT8  
DR8  
W-BL  
BL-W  
W-O  
26  
1
1
1
NOTES:  
2
2
1. Amplifier or Repeater must have  
Automatic Gain Control and be  
FCC Registered from Part 68.  
2. Refer to Manufacturer’s Installation  
Documentation for Amplifier or  
Line Repeater Pin numbering.  
3. Connect to PEKU or PESU.  
CIRCUIT 1 TO EKT  
CIRCUIT 2 TO EKT  
27  
2
3
3
O-W  
4
4
W-GN  
GN-W  
W-BR  
BR-W  
W-S  
28  
3
5
5
6
6
29  
4
7
7
8
8
30  
5
9
9
S-W  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
CIRCUIT 3 TO EKT  
R-BL  
BL-R  
R-O  
31  
6
32  
7
O-R  
CIRCUIT 4 TO EKT  
CIRCUIT 5 TO EKT  
R-GN  
GN-R  
R-BR  
BR-R  
R-S  
33  
8
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED  
TWO-WAY AMPLIFIER  
OR  
34  
9
35  
10  
LINE REPEATERS (SEE NOTE 1)  
S-R  
PEKU (OR PESU) CIRCUIT 6  
VOICE PAIR  
BK-BL 36  
BL-BK 11  
PORT A (CENTRAL OFFICE SIDE)  
BK-O  
O-BK  
37  
12  
NOT USED  
PEKU (OR PESU) CIRCUIT 7  
VOICE PAIR  
BK-GN 38  
GN-BK 13  
BK-BR 39  
BR-BK 14  
PORT B (SUBSCRIBER SIDE)  
(SEE NOTE 2)  
NOT USED  
BK-S  
S-BK  
Y-BL  
BL-Y  
Y-O  
40  
15  
41  
16  
42  
17  
43  
18  
44  
19  
45  
20  
46  
21  
47  
22  
48  
23  
49  
24  
50  
25  
TO 117VAC  
CIRCUIT 8 TO EKT  
OCA T1 (OT)  
OCA R1 (OR)  
O-Y  
OT2  
OR2  
OT3  
OR3  
OT4  
OR4  
OT5  
OR5  
OT6  
OR6  
OT7  
OR7  
OT8  
OR8  
Y-GN  
GN-Y  
Y-BR  
BR-Y  
Y-S  
SYSTEM PROGRAMS  
CIRCUIT 2  
• Program 10-3, circuit assignments:  
CIRCUIT 3  
CIRCUIT 4  
CIRCUIT 5  
CIRCUIT 6  
CIRCUIT 7  
CIRCUIT 8  
NOT USED  
PEKU  
OR PESU  
CIRCUIT  
PEKU OR  
PROGRAM 10-3  
LED  
SLOT  
POSITION  
PESU PORT  
NUMBER  
S-Y  
V-BL  
BL-V  
V-O  
A = 17  
B = 18  
CKT6  
CKT7  
LED 02, ON  
04  
• Program 10-1, LED 19 and 20 ON.  
• Program 15-5, enable appropriate CO  
lines for tandem connection.  
• Program 78-2, enable appropriate CO  
lines if amplified DISA is required.  
• Program 10-2, LED 18 and 19 ON.  
O-V  
V-GN  
GN-V  
V-BR  
BR-V  
V-S  
S-V  
66M150 SPLIT BLOCK  
FIGURE 8-27  
DK16 MDF WIRING/AMPLIFIED TWO-CO LINE CONFERENCE  
8-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS  
SECTION 100-816-208  
MARCH 1993  
JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS  
24AWG (1 PAIR)  
STATION CABLING  
T1 (VOICE/DATA)  
PDKU CONNECTOR  
BRIDGING  
CLIPS  
(-)  
W-BL  
BL-W  
W-O  
26  
1
1
1
(GND) R1 (VOICE/DATA)  
PT1  
2
2
27  
2
3
3
(NOT USED)  
RT2  
O-W  
4
4
T2  
W-GN  
GN-W  
W-BR  
BR-W  
W-S  
28  
3
5
5
DC OUTPUT  
R2  
PT2  
6
6
R
GN  
Y
CKT 2  
CKT 3  
CKT 4  
CKT 5  
CKT 6  
CKT 7  
CKT 8  
29  
4
7
7
R1  
T1  
PR2  
T3  
8
8
AC/DC EXTERNAL  
POWER SOURCE  
BK  
30  
5
9
9
S-W  
R3  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
R-BL  
BL-R  
R-O  
31  
6
PT3  
PR3  
T4  
W
BL  
AC INPUT  
32  
7
6 5 4 3 2 1  
O-R  
R4  
R-GN  
GN-R  
R-BR  
BR-R  
R-S  
33  
8
PT4  
PR4  
T5  
TO 120 VAC  
COMMERCIAL POWER  
OUTLET  
2 3 4 5  
TR  
34  
9
R5  
2-PAIR  
MOD CORD  
REQUIRED  
35  
10  
PT5  
PR5  
T6  
S-R  
RJ11  
BK-BL 36  
BL-BK 11  
R6  
BK-O  
O-BK  
37  
12  
PT6  
PR6  
T7  
BK-GN 38  
GN-BK 13  
BK-BR 39  
BR-BK 14  
(-)  
T
GND  
R7  
R
PT7  
PR7  
T8  
BK-S  
S-BK  
Y-BL  
BL-Y  
40  
15  
41  
16  
R8  
PT8  
PR8  
DIGITAL (1000 OR 2000 SERIES)  
TELEPHONE  
(WITH OR WITHOUT PDIU-DI/  
PDIU-DI2)  
-OR-  
DDSS, DDCB, PDIU-DS  
AC/DC EXTERNAL POWER SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS:  
EXTERNAL POWER STRAPS:  
AC IN:  
DC OUT:  
120 VDC ± 10%  
24 VDC ± 10%  
160 MA (MIN.) DC CURRENT  
200 MV P-P (MAX) AC RIPPLE ON DC OUTPUT  
If the external power is installed, cut the  
external power straps located inside the  
digital telephone, DDSS, DDCB, or PDIU-  
DS.  
See Table 8-D at the front of this section for  
external power requirements.  
AC/DC power supplies that meet the above  
requirements are available from most telephone  
equipment supply houses.  
FIGURE 8-28  
DK16 EXTERNAL POWER FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONE CONNECTION  
8-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES  
DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS  
FAULT FINDING  
SECTION 100-816-500  
MARCH 1993  
FAULT FINDING PROCEDURES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STRATA DK FAULT FINDING  
SECTION 100-816-500  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
SUBJECT  
PARAGRAPH  
PAGE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8.01  
8.10  
8.20  
9
GENERAL ..............................................................................................................  
1
1
1
2
2
2
4
4
4
5
5
5
7
7
8
9
FAULT CLASSIFICATION......................................................................................  
FAULT CLEARING PROCEDURES ......................................................................  
DEFECTIVE APPARATUS RETURNS ..................................................................  
FAULT IDENTIFICATION AND ELIMINATION PROCEDURES ...........................  
DK8 HARDWARE FAULT ISOLATION ..................................................................  
DK16 HARDWARE FAULT ISOLATION ................................................................  
STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK...............................................................  
Voltmeter Test ....................................................................................................  
Ohmmeter Test...................................................................................................  
Cable Installation ................................................................................................  
FAULT ISOLATION FLOWCHARTS......................................................................  
FLOWCHARTS ......................................................................................................  
CHART NO. 1 — FAULT CLASSIFICATION ...................................................  
CHART NO. 2 — CATASTROPHIC FAULTS ..................................................  
CHART NO. 3 — STATION DIAL TONE FAULTS...........................................  
CHART NO. 4 — CO DIAL TONE FAULTS ..................................................... 10  
CHART NO. 5 — DSS CONSOLE FAULTS .................................................... 11  
CHART NO. 6 — VOICE MAIL/(EXTERNAL) AUTO ATTENDANT  
FAULTS ............................................................................... 12  
CHART NO. 7 — STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING  
FAULTS ............................................................................... 13  
CHART NO. 8 — REMOTE MAINTENANCE FAULTS.................................... 14  
TABLE LIST  
TABLE  
TITLE  
PAGE  
A
B
C
D
E
FLOWCHARTS ......................................................................................................  
STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK USING VOLTMETER ...........................  
STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK USING OHMMETER ............................  
STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK USING VOLTMETER ...........................  
STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK USING OHMMETER ............................  
1
6
6
6
6
FIGURE LIST  
FIGURE  
TITLE  
PAGE  
1
2
3
FLOWCHART SYMBOLS ......................................................................................  
QPSU8 DC VOLTAGE TEST .................................................................................  
KPSU16 DC VOLTAGE TEST ...............................................................................  
1
3
3
-i-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FAULT FINDING  
SECTION 100-816-500  
MARCH 1993  
asdescribedinProgrammingProcedures.  
It is very important to verify that the sys-  
tem programming is correct and func-  
tional before troubleshooting the hard-  
ware.  
1 GENERAL  
1.01 This section describes the maintenance pro-  
cedures used to diagnose faults in the STRATA  
DK8andDK16digitalkeytelephonesystem.Faults  
are classified and then cleared by replacing the  
malfunctioning unit and performing operational  
tests in the sequences prescribed by the fault  
clearing flowcharts in Paragraph 9.  
3.02 Initialize the system (Program 90, 92, and  
03) before testing new systems or when in DK16  
cases,, changing the KFCU, Feature cartridge (if  
instructions specify).  
2 FAULT CLASSIFICATION  
3.03 Faults in the DK8 and DK16 are cleared by  
replacing PCBs, telephones (digital or electronic)  
or the power supply, as instructed in the flow-  
charts.  
2.01AFaultClassificationFlowchartisprovidedto  
ensure that fault clearing is pursued in a logical  
sequence (Chart No. 1).  
3.04 Five symbols are used in the flowcharts,  
which are identified in Figure 1.  
2.02 An assumption is made in the flowcharts that  
the fault was discovered and reported by a digital  
or electronic telephone user. All faults, therefore,  
are classified according to the way they would  
appear at the digital or electronic telephone.  
3.05 The flowcharts are sequentially arranged to  
permit rapid fault localization within the system. All  
fault clearing must begin with the Fault Classifica-  
tion Flowchart, which is arranged in the correct  
2.03 Faults and associated flowcharts in Table A  
are organized into the following categories:  
Marking points of a  
flowchart sequence.  
TABLE A  
FLOWCHARTS  
Important notes affecting the  
fault clearing procedure.  
Flowchart  
Title  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Fault Classification  
Catastrophic Faults  
Station Dial Tone Faults  
CO Line Dial Tone Faults  
DSS Console Faults  
Voice Mail/(External) Auto Attendant  
(VM/AA) Faults  
Station Message Detail Recording  
(SMDR) Faults  
Remote Maintenance Faults  
Question to be answered  
YES or NO.  
Progression TO or FROM  
another flowchart location.  
Letters and numbers denote  
the exact entrance or exit  
points.  
7
8
Statement of a required  
action.  
3 FAULT CLEARING PROCEDURES  
3.01 Before attempting to clear any fault, ensure  
that it is in the system and not caused by associ-  
ated external equipment, such as wiring, MOH  
source, etc.  
FIGURE 1  
FLOWCHART SYMBOLS  
IMPORTANT!  
Many system features are assigned, en-  
abled or disabled using software entries  
fault locating sequence.  
-1-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FAULT FINDING  
SECTION 100-816-500  
MARCH 1993  
3.06 The following precautions must be observed  
when handling PCBs:  
6 DK8 HARDWARE FAULT ISOLATION  
6.01 If a DK8 hardware fault is suspected, check  
the hardware using the following procedure:  
DO NOT:  
Drop a PCB.  
Stack one PCB on top of another.  
Handle a PCB without discharging any  
static electricity from your person by  
touching the grounded cabinet.  
Touch PCB contacts with your fingers.  
1) MakesuretheBATTjumperplug(SW1onthe  
KSU motherboard) is in the ON position to  
save the system’s customer data base.  
2) Unplug HPFB battery cable from BATT con-  
nector on QPSU8 Power Supply (see Figure  
2).  
Important!  
If the fault is not cleared by substituting a  
PCB, the original PCB must be reinstalled  
in the KSU before trying another PCB.  
3) Remove all piggy-back PCBs from the DK8  
motherboard one at a time. Retest to check if  
the problem is cleared each time a PCB is  
removed. If it is found that a particular PCB is  
causing the problem, replace that PCB and  
retest (piggy-back PCBs include QSTU,  
QCDU, QRCU, QCNU, and QSMU).  
4 DEFECTIVE APPARATUS RETURNS  
4.01 When a defective system apparatus is  
shippedforrepair,theapparatusmustbepacked  
in a suitable container (the original box is highly  
recommended), as follows:  
4) Test power supply as follows (refer to Figure  
2):  
a) Anti-static containers for all other PCBs and  
Feature cartridge.  
b) Plastic bags for digital or electronic tele-  
phones, KSU, etc.  
a) Plug the AC power cable into an outlet.  
The “AC” LED on the power supply  
should light green.  
b) Turn the power supply switch to the ON  
position.  
4.02 NEVER WRITE ON THE APPARATUS  
ITSELF! Describe the nature of the defect on an  
information tag. Attach the tag to the front of the  
unit with string (not wire) so the tag can remain  
attached during the testing and repair process.  
Return tags are available from Toshiba America  
Information Systems, Inc., TSD Division.  
The “DC” LED on the power supply  
should light green.  
c) Using the voltmeter, measure the volt-  
agesreferencedtoframeground(FG)at  
the power supply connector CN3 pins  
(test points) and pin 42 of IC5 located on  
the motherboard (Figure 2). The volt-  
agesshouldfallwithintherangesbelow.  
If the voltages do not fall within the  
range, unplug the DC power pins from  
power supply connector CN3 and mea-  
sure +24V again at the same location; if  
the voltages remain unacceptable, re-  
place the power supply (see Section  
100-816-204).  
5 FAULT IDENTIFICATION AND  
ELIMINATION PROCEDURES  
5.01 The DK8 or DK16, KSU common control  
circuits or DK16 KFCU may contain a “soft” fault  
duetoanextremelyhighlevelofstaticelectricity.  
If it is found defective during the fault finding  
procedures, attempt to clear a soft fault prior to  
returning the KSU or KFCU for repair. The  
correct procedure for this is to perform the  
initialization procedure, and then re-program  
the system as necessary to test for the fault. If  
the fault returns after these procedures are  
performed, tag the defective KSU or KFCU and  
return it for repair.  
J19 Green Wires: 0V  
J19 Yellow Wires: +24V  
Range: +26.3V ~ +27.8V  
IC5, Pin 42, +5V  
Range: +4.5V ~ +5.5V  
d) If the +24V tests within range but +5V is  
not with-in specification, the KSU must  
be replaced.  
-2-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FAULT FINDING  
SECTION 100-816-500  
MARCH 1993  
RAM STORAGE  
BATTERY  
RAM STORAGE BATTERY JUMPER PLUG  
J20-CONNECTOR FOR QSMU  
PCB INSTALLATION  
IC5, PIN 42, +5V  
TEST POINT (+4.5 ~ +5.5)  
POWER SUPPLY  
MOUNTING SCREW  
QPSU8 POWER SUPPLY  
CN4, BATTERY  
CONNECTOR PLUG  
POWER SUPPLY  
MOUNTING SCREW  
BATTERY  
CONNECTOR  
FOR HPFB  
F.G. SCREW FOR  
THIRD WIRE GROUND  
CONNECTION  
CN4  
AC  
DC POWER  
ON/OFF SWITCH  
HPFB  
GROUND WIRE  
AC AND DC  
POWER  
INDICATOR LEDs  
CN3  
DC  
CN1, AC  
POWER CORD  
CONNECTOR  
F201, 3 AMP FUSE  
ON OFF  
SW1  
FG  
J19  
POWER SUPPLY  
MOUNTING SCREW  
42  
QMA  
ROM  
YELLOW WIRES:  
+26.3V ~ +27,8V  
IC5  
GREEN WIRES:  
(FG) OV  
FIGURE 2  
QPSU8 DC VOLTAGE TEST  
DK16 KSU  
KPSU 16A POWER SUPPLY  
BATT  
±
RESERVE  
BATTERY  
CONNECTOR  
FOR PBTC CABLE  
PULL  
LOCK  
PUSH  
UNLOCK  
AC  
DC  
DC POWER  
–24 VOLT  
CIRCUIT BREAKER  
(FG) SCREW  
DK16 BASE UNIT  
MOTHERBOARD  
GREEN/YELLOW: 0V  
BLACK: 0V  
DC OUT (P9)  
CONNECTOR  
(VOLTAGE  
YELLOW: –26.3V ~ –27.8V  
RED: +4.5 ~ +5.5  
BLUE: –4.5 ~ –5.5  
GREEN: 0V  
TEST POINTS)  
FIGURE 3  
KPSU16 DC VOLTAGE TEST  
-3-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FAULT FINDING  
SECTION 100-816-500  
MARCH 1993  
Usingavoltmeterorotherdevicewhichchecks  
voltage, measure the voltages referenced to  
frame ground (FG) at the DC OUT connector  
pins (test points) located on the motherboard  
(Figure 2). The voltages should fall within the  
ranges below. If the voltages do not fall within  
the ranges, unplug the DC power pins from  
the DC OUT connector and measure again at  
the same location; if the ranges remain unac-  
ceptable, replace the Power Supply.  
(FG) Yellow-Green Wire: 0V  
Important Note:  
Do not attempt to replace Fuse F201  
7 DK16 HARDWARE FAULT ISOLATION  
7.01 If a DK16 hardware fault is suspected, check  
the hardware using the following procedure:  
1) Make sure the BATT jumper plug (SW1 on  
the base unit motherboard) is in the ON  
position to save the system’s customer data  
base.  
Yellow Wire: – 24V  
• Range: –26.3V ~ –27.8V  
Red Wire: 5V  
2) Unplug the PBTC battery cable from BATT  
connector on KPSU16 Power Supply (see  
Figure 2).  
• Range: 4.5V ~ 5.5V  
Blue Wire: –5V  
• Range: –4.5V ~ –5.5V  
3) Lightly press the -24V circuit breaker to en-  
sure it has not opened (Figure 3). If the circuit  
breaker has opened and will not rest, remove  
assemblies (KSTU, KCOU, Expansion Unit  
PCBs, Expansion Unit) one at a time and try  
to reset -24V circuit breaker. If it is found lthat  
one of the removable assemblies causes the  
circuit breaker to open, replace that assem-  
bly. (See Section 100-816-205 for PCB re-  
moval and Expansion Unit installation and  
removal.)  
4) Check system third wire ground per Section  
100-816-202.  
5) If the –24V circuit breaker, DC power, and  
third wire ground are within required limits,  
remove all hardware assemblies, one at a  
time, and test to see if the fault is cleared  
(remove KSTU, KCOU, K4RCU and Expan-  
sion Unit PCBs and remove Expansion Unit  
per Section 100-816-205).  
a) If the -24V circuit breaker cannot be  
reset with all removable assemblies dis-  
connected,disconnecttheDCOUTcon-  
nect(P9)fromtheBaseunitmotherboard  
and try to reset the -24V breaker.  
6) If the above hardware check did not clear the  
fault, call your Technical Support Group.  
8 STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK  
b) If the circuit breaker resets when the DC  
OUT connector is removed, the Base  
Unit or Power Supply may be defective.  
ReplacethePowerSupplyfirst(perSec-  
tion 100-816-205) to avoid reprogram-  
ming the system.  
c) If the -24V breaker continues to open  
;after the power Supply is replaced, in-  
stall the original Power supply onto the  
DK16 Key Service Unit (KSU) and re-  
place the KSU with another KSU.  
8.01 Voltmeter Test  
8.02 The continuity of the cable run between the  
DK16 KSU and the digital or electronic telephone  
is checked with a voltmeter as follows:  
NOTE:  
Perform the following at the locations indi-  
cated:  
1. Modular block: Check all stations cables.  
2. MDF: Check cable from KSU to MDF.  
3. These tests also apply for troubleshooting  
cable problems with DDCB and PDIU-DS  
devices.  
4) Ifthe–24Vcircuitbreakerisnotopen(Step3)  
check the Power Supply DC voltages as  
follows:  
4. Refer to Section 100-816-208 for appropriate  
MDF wiring diagrams.  
-4-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FAULT FINDING  
SECTION 100-816-500  
MARCH 1993  
eliminate all cable splits.  
1) Disconnectthedigitalorelectronictelephone.  
2) Cable bridge taps – Digital telephones will  
not operate if cable runs contain any type  
(short or long) of cable bridge. Test for and  
eliminate all cable bridges.  
2) Using a DC voltmeter, measure between the  
wires of the two pairs to verify the readings  
shown in Table B for electronic telephone  
ports (PEKU or PESU). Refer to Table D for  
digital telephone ports. The reading will be a  
plusorminusdependingonmeterlead place-  
ment.  
3) When installing the station cable, do not run  
parallel to and within 3 feet of an AC power  
line. AC power lines should be crossed at  
right (90°) angles only. In particular, avoid  
running station wire pairs near devices that  
generate electrical noise, such as neon or  
fluorescent light fixtures.  
3) An improper reading indicates an open,  
crossed or shorted wire.  
4) For the MDF-to-telephone (digital or elec-  
tronic) cable, a more precise check is made  
using an ohmmeter.  
4) Check Table 8-D, in Section 100-816-208.  
Verify that your telephone is wired correctly  
(2-pair or External power) for the options it  
supports (ADM, PDIU-DI, HHEU, DVSU,  
etc.).  
8.10 Ohmmeter Test  
8.11 The continuity of the cable run between the  
KSU and digital or electronic telephone is checked  
with an ohmmeter as follows:  
9 FAULT ISOLATION FLOW CHARTS  
9.01 The following troubleshooting flow charts are  
availabletoaidinfaultisolation.Itisrecommended  
to read paragraph 1~5 of this section and then  
proceed to CHART 1, page 7, to begin fault isola-  
tion.  
1) Disconnect the electronic or digital tele-  
phone.  
2) At the MDF, remove the bridging clips.  
3) At the MDF, place shorting jumper wires  
between the T and R of pair #1 (green-red),  
the T and R of pair #2 (black-yellow) and the  
T and R of OCA pair #3 (blue-white), for  
PEKU/PESU only. (For MDF pin numbers,  
see Section 100-816-208.)  
4) At the modular block, measure the resis-  
tance between all wire combinations. The  
proper readings are shown in Table C for  
electronictelephonesandHDSSs,andTable  
Efordigitaltelephones,DDSSsandDDCBs.  
8.20 Cable Installation  
8.21 If cable voltmeter and ohmmeter tests are  
within limits, digital telephones may not operate  
because of the following:  
1) Digital telephone cable runs must be free of  
cable splits (single or double). Test for and  
-5-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FAULT FINDING  
SECTION 100-816-500  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE B  
TABLE C  
(ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE CABLES)  
STATION CABLE CONTINUITY  
CHECK USING VOLTMETER  
(ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE CABLES)  
STATION CABLE CONTINUITY  
CHECK USING OHMMETER  
FROM  
TO  
FROM  
TO  
VOLTAGE 3  
Resistance  
Pair Wire Color Pair Wire Color  
Pair Wire Color Pair Wire Color  
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
T
R
T
R
T
T
T
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
Green  
Red  
2
2
2
2
1
2
3
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
T
T
Black  
Black  
Yellow  
Yellow  
Red  
24 3  
24 3  
24 3  
24 3  
0
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
T
R
T
R
T
T
T
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
Green  
Red  
2
2
2
2
1
2
3
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
T
T
Black  
Black  
Yellow  
Yellow  
Red  
open  
open  
open  
open  
Green  
Red  
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
Green  
Red  
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
1
Green  
Black  
White  
White  
Blue  
Green  
Black  
White  
White  
Blue  
40 ohms  
40 ohms  
40 ohms  
open  
1
1
Yellow  
Blue  
0
Yellow  
Blue  
0
Red  
0
Red  
Red  
0
Red  
open  
White  
Blue  
Green  
Green  
Black  
Black  
Yellow  
Yellow  
0
White  
Blue  
Green  
Green  
Black  
Black  
Yellow  
open  
T
0
T
open  
White  
Blue  
T
0
White  
Blue  
T
open  
T
0
T
open  
White  
Blue  
R
R
0
White  
R
open  
0
TABLE E  
TABLE D  
(DIGITAL TELEPHONE CABLES)  
STATION CABLE CONTINUITY  
CHECK USING OHMMETER  
(DIGITAL TELEPHONE CABLES)  
STATION CABLE CONTINUITY  
CHECK USING VOLTMETER  
FROM  
TO  
FROM  
TO  
VOLTAGE  
Resistance  
Pair Wire Color Pair Wire Color  
Pair Wire Color Pair Wire Color  
1
1
1
1
1
2
T
R
T
R
T
T
Green  
Red  
2
2
2
2
1
2
T
T
Black  
Black  
Yellow  
Yellow  
Red  
0
1
1
1
1
1
2
T
R
T
R
T
T
Green  
Red  
2
2
2
2
1
2
T
T
Black  
Black  
Yellow  
Yellow  
Red  
open  
open  
24 3  
24 3  
0
Green  
Red  
R
R
R
R
Green  
Red  
R
R
R
R
open  
open  
Green  
Black  
24 3  
24 3  
Green  
Black  
40 ohms1  
40 ohms1  
Yellow  
Yellow  
NOTES:  
1. This is the maximum allowable reading for all Digital and Electronic telephone cable runs except if connecting an HDSS  
console to Circuits 7 and 8 of a PEKU—then the maximum cable restriction is 20 ohms, not 40 ohms.  
2. The green-red, black-yellow and white-blue measurements should be within 10% of each other.  
3. Nominal voltage—within the limits of ±26.3 ~ ±27.8 VDC while under AC power, polarity depending on voltmeter lead  
placements.  
-6-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FAULT FINDING  
SECTION 100-816-500  
MARCH 1993  
CHART NO. 1  
FAULT CLASSIFICATION  
START  
Please read  
Chapters 1~5 of  
this section  
before  
1-1  
proceeding.  
Is it a  
remote  
YES  
Go to  
maintenance  
fault?  
Chart 8  
Is the  
system completely  
non-operational?  
YES  
YES  
Go to  
Chart 2  
NO  
NO  
Go to  
appropriate  
Chart 1~12  
Is the fault  
classified on  
this page?  
YES  
Is it a station  
no dial tone  
fault?  
Go to  
Chart 3  
NO  
NO  
Call your  
technical support  
group.  
Is it a CO  
line no dial  
tone fault?  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
Go to  
Chart 4  
NO  
Is a DSS  
console non-  
operational?  
Go to  
Chart 5  
NO  
Is it a  
voice mail/auto  
attd fault?  
Go to  
Chart 6  
NO  
Is it  
an SMDR  
fault?  
Go to  
Chart 7  
NO  
1-1  
-7-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FAULT FINDING  
SECTION 100-816-500  
MARCH 1993  
CHART NO. 2  
CATASTROPHIC FAULTS  
START  
Is the system  
completely  
non-operational?  
NO  
Go to  
Chart 1  
YES  
2-1  
Check system  
hardware per  
paragraph 6.01 for DK8  
or 7.01 for DK16  
of this section.  
2-2  
Was the fault  
isolated by completing  
the system hardware  
check?  
YES  
Tag the defective  
unit(s) and return  
for repair.  
2-3  
NO  
2-5  
END  
Re-initialize the system  
(Programs 90, 92, and  
03) and re-check fault  
using default program  
data (do not enter  
NOTE:  
Program 03 is not used for DK8.  
customer data base).  
2-4  
Reprogram customer  
data base, one program  
at a time, and check  
2-6  
to see if fault re-occurs.  
Was the  
fault cleared  
after re-initializing  
the system?  
YES  
2-7  
NO  
2-8  
Does the fault  
re-occur after  
entering customer  
data base?  
YES  
Call your  
technical support  
group.  
NO  
END  
-8-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FAULT FINDING  
SECTION 100-816-500  
MARCH 1993  
CHART NO. 3  
STATION DIAL TONE FAULTS  
Check station wiring  
per paragraph 8  
of this section.  
START  
3-1  
Repair if necessary.  
Is the fault  
cleared?  
YES  
END  
NO  
3-2  
Replaceable Station  
PCBs  
DK8: QCDU and  
QSTU  
DK16 Base: KSTU  
DK16 Expansion:  
KCDU, PDKU,  
PEKU, PESU  
Is  
the  
faulty station on a  
replaceable station  
PCB?  
YES  
Replace the PCB  
and retest  
3-8  
NO  
3-3  
YES  
Is the fault  
cleared?  
NO  
3-4  
Are the  
faulty station(s) only  
in the DK16 expansion  
unit?  
Replace the defective  
unit and return it to the  
repair center  
YES  
Change the expansion  
unit and retest.  
3-5  
NO  
3-7  
END  
3-6  
Is the  
fault  
cleared?  
Replace the DK8 or  
DK16 Base KSU and  
initialize the system  
(Prog: 90, 92, 03).  
YES  
Go to  
3-4  
Retest.  
NO  
Is the  
fault  
cleared?  
Call your technical  
support group.  
NO  
YES  
Go to  
3-4  
-9-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FAULT FINDING  
SECTION 100-816-500  
MARCH 1993  
CHART NO. 4  
CO LINE DIAL TONE FAULTS  
START  
1. Check CO line wiring  
per section 100-816-008.  
2. Test central office line  
using a standard telephone  
or butt set at the  
TELCO block.  
Repair as necessary.  
4-1  
Is the fault  
cleared?  
YES  
YES  
END  
Replaceable CO Line  
PCBs  
Change the PCB  
and retest.  
DK8: QCDU  
NO  
4-3  
DK16 Base: KCOU  
4-2  
DK16 Expansion:  
KCDU, PCOU  
4-4  
Are all  
faulty CO lines  
on a replaceable PCB  
(not including KSU  
Main PCB )?  
Is the  
fault  
NO  
cleared?  
NO  
4-7  
YES  
4-5  
Replace the defective  
unit and return it to the  
repair center.  
END  
Are the  
faulty CO lines  
only in the DK16  
expansion  
YES  
Change the expansion  
unit and retest.  
4-9  
unit?  
NO  
4-6  
4-10  
Is the  
fault  
cleared?  
Change the DK8 or  
DK16 Base KSU and  
initialize the system  
(Prog: 90, 92, 03).  
YES  
Go to  
4-5  
NOTE:  
Retest.  
Program 03 is not used on DK8.  
Is the  
fault  
cleared?  
NO  
Call your technical  
support group.  
YES  
Go to  
4-5  
-10-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FAULT FINDING  
SECTION 100-816-500  
MARCH 1993  
CHART NO.5  
DSS CONSOLE FAULTS (DK16 ONLY)  
START  
Enter correct PCB slot  
DSS  
console  
type?  
Is the correct  
NO  
DDSS  
code using Program 03;  
then turn power OFF  
(for 5 seconds) and  
then ON.  
PCB slot code entered  
5-1  
5-0  
in Program 03?  
HDSS  
YES  
5-3  
5-2  
On PEKU connected  
to HDSS, set SW1  
to the DSS position.  
Refer to section 100-816-008 and  
verify wiring:  
Is the  
fault  
cleared?  
NO  
Go to  
5-3  
•
For DDSS, circuit 8 of the base  
unit or PDKU (KCDU does not  
support DDSS).  
Go to  
5-0  
•
For HDSS, circuit 7 and 8 of  
PEKU (PESU does not support  
HDSS).  
YES  
END  
Correct as necessary.  
5-4  
Is the  
fault  
cleared?  
YES  
END  
NO  
Test DSS cable with  
cable continuity. Check  
in paragraph 8 of  
this section.  
Correct as necessary.  
5-5  
Is the  
fault  
cleared?  
YES  
END  
NO  
Call your technical  
support group.  
-11-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FAULT FINDING  
SECTION 100-816-500  
MARCH 1993  
CHART NO.6  
VOICE MAIL/(EXTERNAL) AUTO ATTENDANT (VM/AA) FAULTS  
START  
6-1  
This chart assumes  
the VM/AA device  
has no faults.  
Check that QRCU (DK8) or  
K4RCU (DK16) is installed  
correctly and programmed with  
Code 92 in Prog. 03.  
(Prog. 03 is not required for DK8,  
QRCU).  
Is VM/AA  
YES  
integration completely  
non-operational?  
Is the  
fault  
YES  
END  
cleared?  
NO  
6-2  
NO  
Check that the VM/AA ports are  
connected to the standard  
telephone station ports correctly.  
Read “Voice Mail Options” in paragraph 9 of  
Section 100-816-207. Also read programming  
instructs (in Chapter 2 of Section 100-816-  
302) for the following programs: 03 (Code 92,  
slot 00 for K4RCU DK16 only), 15-0 and 15-3  
(Auto release), and 31 (LEDs: 04, 05, 09, 15 ~  
20). This information explains System  
(Refer to QSTU, KSTU, PSTU, or  
PESU wiring diagrams in Section  
100-816-208.)  
Correct if necessary.  
Hardware and Programming options related to  
Voice Mail and external auto attendant.  
6-4  
Correct Hardware and/or System  
Programming as necessary.  
Is the  
fault  
YES  
END  
6-3  
cleared?  
NO  
Is the  
YES  
fault  
Using a standard DTMF  
telephone, check all standard  
telephone circuits (QSTU, KSTU,  
PSTU, or PESU).  
END  
cleared?  
NO  
Replace defective PCB if  
necessary.  
Check that the VM I.D. codes (656 and  
657) are stored correctly in users’ Digital  
or Electronic telephones. Use operating  
procedures in the manual for instructions.  
6-5  
Is the  
fault  
YES  
END  
cleared?  
Other VM/AA related programs:  
• 10-2, LED 11 – No DTMF tones  
• 13 – Message center  
• 33 – Station hunting  
• 35 – Busy station transfer/ringing  
• 36 – Fixed call forward  
NO  
6-6  
• 37 – Ring transfer recall time  
Call your technical  
support group.  
-12-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FAULT FINDING  
SECTION 100-816-500  
MARCH 1993  
CHART NO.7  
STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR) FAULTS  
START  
7-4  
7-8  
Read the SMDR  
installation  
instructions in  
paragraph 7 of  
Section 100-816-207  
before proceeding  
with this chart.  
This chart assumes  
the SMDR device  
has no faults.  
On DK8 only, verify that the  
QSMU is installed and  
programmed for SMDR: Prog.  
10-3, LED 04 is off for SMDR.  
(QSMU is 1200 bps only)  
Is the  
fault  
cleared?  
YES  
END  
No  
SMDR data or  
garbled data is  
detected at the QSMU,  
PIOU/PIOUS SMDR  
port.  
On DK16 only, Verify that the  
PIOU/PIOUS baud rate switch  
(SW1) is in the correct position  
(300 bps or 1200 bps) to match  
the SMDR device baud rate.  
(Refer to PIOU/PIOUS  
NO  
YES  
Change the QSMU,  
PIOU or PIOUS PCB.  
NO  
7-1  
installation instructions in  
Section 100-816-205.)  
7-9  
Change as required.  
SMDR  
Is the  
fault  
cleared?  
No other faults are  
classified. Call your  
technical support  
YES  
data records are  
sent correctly but not  
when the customer  
requires.  
NO  
7-5  
END  
group for assistance.  
NO  
Is the  
fault  
cleared?  
YES  
YES  
7-2  
END  
Call your technical  
support group.  
NO  
Set SMDR options in  
Program 60: Threshold  
time, long distance  
calls only, etc.  
Verify that the SMDR device  
communication parameters are  
set for: 8-data bits, no-parity,  
1-stop bit.  
1200 bps on KD8,  
300 or 1200 bps on DK16  
7-3  
Change as required.  
7-6  
Is the  
fault  
cleared?  
NO  
Call your technical  
support group.  
YES  
Is the  
fault  
YES  
END  
cleared?  
END  
NO  
7-7  
• On DK16, the SMDR  
port is the bottom  
Check that the SMDR device  
is wired correctly to the QSMU,  
PIOU/PIOUS SMDR port.  
(Refer to PIOU or PIOUS wiring  
in Section 100-816-208.)  
modular jack (TTY is on  
top) of PIOU/PIOUS.  
• On DK8 & DK16, the  
modular cord connecting  
to the SMDR port must  
be 6-wires.  
Fix as required.  
-13-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FAULT FINDING  
SECTION 100-816-500  
MARCH 1993  
CHART NO.8  
REMOTE MAINTENANCE FAULTS  
START  
Read the Remote Maintenance Section  
100-816-600, Paragraphs 1 to 7. This chart  
assumes that the remote terminal and  
modem have no fault and that Remote  
Maintenance does not operate.  
If a Digital or Electronic telephone  
is in the programming mode, it is  
not possible to enter the Remote  
Maintenance mode.  
On DK16, check that the IMDU, PIOU, or  
PIOUS is installed correctly per Section 100-  
816-205.  
On DK16, check that the baud rate switch  
(SW2, push-button switch on PIOU/PIOUS)  
is set to the correct position (300 bps LED  
ON, 1200 bps LED OFF) to match the  
remote terminal baud rate.  
QSMU, TTY Port is 1200 bps only.  
Correct as necessary.  
8-1  
External modem  
connected to QSMU,  
PIOU, PIOUS TTY port  
Is Remote  
Maintenance connection  
via external modem on TTY  
port or IMDU  
IMDU modem installed on  
PIOU or PIOUS (DK16 only)  
modem?  
8-2  
8-4  
Check that the communication parameters of  
the remote terminal are set to match the  
IMDU (7-data bits, even parity, 1-stop bit).  
On DK8, check that Prog. 10-3, LED 04 is on  
for QSMU TTY operation. Check that the  
communication parameters of the remote  
terminal are set to match the TTY port (7-data  
bits, even-parity, 1-stop bit).  
Check that the PIOU/PIOUS SW3  
switch is in the MODEM position.  
Enable the IMDU by turning LED 14 ON in  
Program 77-1.  
If required, assign CO lines for DISA or to  
ring IMDU in system Program 78, Code  
51~53.  
•
•
On DK16, check that PIOU/PIOUS SW3  
switch  
is in the TTY position.  
Correct as necessary.  
8-3  
When calling IMDU via DISA or ring  
transfer, dial 619.  
•
Correct above if necessary or  
replace IMDU or PIOU(S).  
8-5  
Is the  
YES  
fault  
END  
cleared?  
Is the  
fault  
cleared?  
NO  
Check that the modem or terminal connected  
to the TTY port is wired correctly per the  
Remote Maintenance Section 200-816-600  
and QSMU, PIOU/PIOUS MDF wiring in  
Section 100-816-208.  
On DK16, the TTY port is the top  
modular jack (SMDR is bottom) of  
the PIOU/PIOUS.  
On DK8 & DK16 the modular cord  
connecting the TTY port to the  
•
•
Call your technical  
support group.  
Correct above if necessary or  
replace QSMU, PIOU or PIOUS.  
terminal or external modem must be  
6-wires.  
-14-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES  
DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION  
AND  
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION & MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE LIST  
PARAGRAPH  
SUBJECT  
PAGE  
1
2
3
4
USING REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE............................................  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION................................................................................................  
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS........................................................................................  
TERMINAL/MODEM INSTALLATION ...............................................................................  
Maintenance Terminal/External Modem Option System Hardware Requirements ......  
DK8 and DK16 Local Maintenance Terminal Installation ..............................................  
Remote Maintenance Option Installation ......................................................................  
Programming ................................................................................................................  
DK16 IMDU On-site Testing..........................................................................................  
LOCAL TERMINAL OPERATION .....................................................................................  
Requirements................................................................................................................  
Set-up ...........................................................................................................................  
Local Operation.............................................................................................................  
REMOTE TERMINAL OPERATION ..................................................................................  
Requirements................................................................................................................  
Set-up ...........................................................................................................................  
Remote Operation.........................................................................................................  
Operation ...................................................................................................................... 10  
MODE SELECTION .......................................................................................................... 10  
Selecting a Mode .......................................................................................................... 10  
PROGRAM MODE ............................................................................................................ 10  
General ......................................................................................................................... 10  
System Record Sheets ................................................................................................. 10  
Program Types ............................................................................................................. 11  
Multiple Station (Range) Programming ......................................................................... 11  
Programming Procedures ............................................................................................. 11  
DATA DUMP MODE ......................................................................................................... 11  
General ......................................................................................................................... 11  
TEST MODE ..................................................................................................................... 12  
General ......................................................................................................................... 12  
CO Line Testing ............................................................................................................ 13  
LCD MESSAGE MODE..................................................................................................... 13  
General ......................................................................................................................... 13  
Remote Called Station Message Mode......................................................................... 13  
Remote Calling Station Message Mode ........................................................................ 13  
SPEED DIAL MODE ......................................................................................................... 14  
General ......................................................................................................................... 14  
MODE EXIT....................................................................................................................... 14  
DISCONTINUE OPERATION............................................................................................ 14  
Local Terminal .............................................................................................................. 14  
Remote Terminal .......................................................................................................... 14  
EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY ......................................................................................... 14  
1
2
2
5
6
6
6
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
4.10  
4.20  
4.30  
4.40  
4.50  
5
5.00  
5.10  
5.20  
6
6.00  
6.10  
6.20  
6.30  
7
7.00  
8
8.00  
8.10  
8.20  
8.30  
8.40  
9
9.00  
10  
10.00  
10.10  
11  
11.00  
11.10  
11.20  
12  
12.00  
13  
14  
14.00  
14.10  
15  
-i-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION & MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE LIST  
TABLE  
SUBJECT  
PAGE  
RM-A  
RM-B  
PPTC MODIFIED WIRING FOR EXTERNAL MODEM TO TTY CONNECTION ...............  
PPTC WIRING FOR LOCAL TERMINAL OR PERSONAL COMPUTER TO  
4
TTY CONNECTION ...........................................................................................................  
5
RM-C  
RM-D  
RM-E  
PROGRAMMING PROMPTS............................................................................................. 10  
PROGRAM 90: INITIALIZING PROGRAMS 00 ~ 97 ......................................................... 15  
PROGRAM 92: STATION SPEED DIAL, SPEED DIAL MEMO, VM ID CODES  
INITIALIZATION ................................................................................................................. 16  
PROGRAM 92 (CONTINUED): SYSTEM SPEED DIAL, SPEED DIAL MEMO  
INITIALIZATION ................................................................................................................. 17  
PROGRAM 92 (CONTINUED): LCD CHARACTER MESSAGE MEMORY  
RM-F  
RM-G  
INITIALIZATION ................................................................................................................. 18  
PROGRAM 92 (CONTINUED): TIMED REMINDERS INITIALIZATION ............................ 19  
PROGRAM 92 (CONTINUED): DIGITAL TELEPHONE VOLUME LEVEL  
RM-H  
RM-I  
INITIALIZATION ................................................................................................................. 20  
PROGRAM 92 (CONTINUED): CALL FORWARD BACKUP RAM INITIALIZATION ......... 21  
PROGRAM 03: SLOT ASSIGNMENTS ............................................................................. 22  
PROGRAM 00: SOFTWARE CHECK/REMOTE  
RM-J  
RM-K  
RM-L  
MAINTENANCE—SECURITY CODE ................................................................................ 23  
PROGRAM 01: LOGICAL PORT DISPLAY ....................................................................... 24  
PROGRAM 02: PHYSICAL PORT DISPLAY ..................................................................... 24  
PROGRAM 04: PORT/STATION NUMBER ASSIGNMENT .............................................. 25  
PROGRAM 05: FLEXIBLE ACCESS CODE NUMBERING ............................................... 25  
TYPE 1 PROGRAM PROCEDURE EXAMPLE (PROGRAMS: 10-1, 10-2, 10-3,  
RM-M  
RM-N  
RM-O  
RM-P  
RM-Q  
15, 16, 42-0, 77-1, 77-2)..................................................................................................... 26  
TYPE 2 PROGRAM PROCEDURE EXAMPLE (PROGRAMS: 20, 30, 31, 35, 40,  
RM-R  
41, 43, 79, 81 ~ 89) ............................................................................................................ 27  
PROGRAM 12: SYSTEM ASSIGNMENTS—BASIC TIMING ............................................ 28  
PROGRAM 13: DEFINING THE MESSAGE CENTER ...................................................... 28  
PROGRAM 19: BACKGROUND MUSIC SLOT IDENTIFICATION .................................... 29  
PROGRAM 21: MODEM POOLING ................................................................................... 29  
PROGRAM 22: DATA STATION HUNTING (DATA CALL ONLY) ..................................... 30  
PROGRAM 28: DSS CONSOLE/ATTENDANT TELEPHONE ASSIGNMENTS ................ 30  
PROGRAM 29: DSS CONSOLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS ............................................. 31  
PROGRAM 32: AUTOMATIC PREFERENCE ................................................................... 32  
PROGRAM 33: STATION HUNTING ................................................................................. 32  
PROGRAM 34: HOLD RECALL TIMING ........................................................................... 33  
PROGRAM 36: FIXED CALL FORWARD .......................................................................... 33  
PROGRAM 37: RING TRANSFER (CAMP-ON) RECALL TIME ........................................ 34  
PROGRAM 38: DIGITAL AND ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE BUTTONSTRIP TYPE ........ 35  
PROGRAM 39: FLEXIBLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENT ......................................................... 36  
PROGRAM 42-1~8: PBX ACCESS CODE ........................................................................ 37  
PROGRAM 60: SMDR OUTPUT/ACCOUNT CODE DIGIT LENGTH................................ 38  
PROGRAM 69: VERIFIABLE ACCOUNT CODE ENTRY .................................................. 39  
PROGRAM 70: VERIFY ACCOUNT CODE/TOLL RESTRICTION ASSIGNMENT ........... 40  
RM-S  
RM-T  
RM-U  
RM-V  
RM-W  
RM-X  
RM-Y  
RM-Z  
RM-AA  
RM-AB  
RM-AC  
RM-AD  
RM-AE  
RM-AF  
RM-AG  
RM-AH  
RM-AI  
RM-AJ  
-ii-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION & MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE LIST (Continued)  
SUBJECT  
TABLE  
PAGE  
RM-AK  
PROGRAM 78: CO LINE SPECIAL RINGING ASSIGNMENTS  
DISA/IMDU/NIGHT RINGING OVER EXTERNAL PAGE .................................................. 41  
PROGRAM 80: DIGITAL AND ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE RINGING TONES ............... 42  
PROGRAM 93: CO LINE IDENTIFICATION ...................................................................... 43  
PROGRAM 44 (A OR B): TOLL RESTRICTION TRAVELING CLASS  
RM-AL  
RM-AM  
RM-AN  
OVERRIDE CODE ENTRY ................................................................................................ 44  
PROGRAM 45-1: TOLL RESTRICTION DIAL PLAN ......................................................... 44  
PROGRAM 45-2: TOLL RESTRICTION DISABLE ............................................................ 45  
PROGRAM 45-3 ~ 6: EQUAL ACCESS, SPECIAL COMMON CARRIER NUMBERS,  
AND AUTHORIZATION CODE DIGIT LENGTH ................................................................ 45  
PROGRAM 45-8 ~ 9: TOLL RESTRICTION OVERRIDE CODE ....................................... 46  
PROGRAM 46-2 ~ 4: TOLL RESTRICTION ALLOWED/DENIED  
RM-AO  
RM-AP  
RM-AQ  
RM-AR  
RM-AS  
AREA CODES ASSIGNED BY CLASS .............................................................................. 46  
PROGRAM 46-6 ~ 8: TOLL RESTRICTION ALLOWED/DENIED  
RM-AT  
OFFICE CODES ASSIGNED BY CLASS .......................................................................... 47  
PROGRAM 46-10 ~ 40: TOLL RESTRICTION CLASS PARAMETERS ............................ 48  
PROGRAM 47: TOLL RESTRICTION EXCEPTION OFFICE CODES  
RM-AU  
RM-AV  
ASSIGNED BY AREA CODE ............................................................................................. 49  
PROGRAM 48: STATION TOLL RESTRICTION CLASSIFICATION ................................. 50  
PROGRAM 50-1: LCR PARAMETERS .............................................................................. 50  
PROGRAM 50-2: LCR HOME AREA CODE...................................................................... 51  
PROGRAM 50-31 ~ 35: LCR SPECIAL CODES................................................................ 51  
PROGRAM 50-4: LCR LDI PLAN NUMBER ...................................................................... 52  
PROGRAM 50-5: LCR LOCAL CALL PLAN NUMBER ...................................................... 52  
PROGRAM 50-6: LCR DIAL ZERO TIMEOUT................................................................... 53  
PROGRAM 51: LCR AREA CODES .................................................................................. 53  
PROGRAM 52: LCR OFFICE CODE EXCEPTIONS FOR SPECIFIED AREA CODE ....... 54  
PROGRAM 53: LCR SCHEDULE ASSIGNMENT.............................................................. 55  
PROGRAM 54: LCR ROUTE DEFINITION ........................................................................ 56  
PROGRAM 55-0: LCR MODIFIED DIGITS-DELETE ......................................................... 57  
PROGRAM 55-1: LCR MODIFIED DIGITS-ADD ............................................................... 58  
PROGRAM 55-2: LCR MODIFIED DIGITS-END ............................................................... 59  
PROGRAM 56: LCR STATION GROUP ASSIGNMENT ................................................... 60  
PROGRAM DATA DUMP................................................................................................... 60  
SPEED DIALING DATA DUMP .......................................................................................... 61  
LCD MESSAGING DATA DUMP ....................................................................................... 61  
MODE 95: REMOTE CALLING STATION MESSAGING (ADD/REVIEW/CHANGE)......... 62  
MODE 97: REMOTE CALLING STATION MESSAGING (ADD/CHANGE)........................ 63  
MODE 94: REMOTE CALLED STATION MESSAGING (ADD/REVIEW/CHANGE) .......... 64  
MODE 96: REMOTE CALLED STATION MESSAGING (ADD/CHANGE) ......................... 65  
STATION/CO LINE STATUS CHECK ................................................................................ 66  
GENERAL STATION ACCESS AND BUTTON ACTIVATION ........................................... 66  
CO LINE TEST................................................................................................................... 67  
SYSTEM DATE/DAY/TIME SETTING PROCEDURE ........................................................ 68  
SPEED DIAL MODE (CHANGE/REVIEW)......................................................................... 69  
RM-AW  
RM-AX  
RM-AY  
RM-AZ  
RM-BA  
RM-BB  
RM-BC  
RM-BD  
RM-BE  
RM-BF  
RM-BG  
RM-BH  
RM-BI  
RM-BJ  
RM-BK  
RM-BL  
RM-BM  
RM-BN  
RM-BO  
RM-BP  
RM-BQ  
RM-BR  
RM-BS  
RM-BT  
RM-BU  
RM-BV  
RM-BW  
-iii-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION & MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
FIGURE LIST  
SUBJECT  
FIGURE  
PAGE  
1
2
SECTION FLOWCHART....................................................................................................  
REMOTE MAINTENANCE EXTERNAL MODEM CONNECTION FOR DK8/16  
(METHOD ONE OF ONE) ..................................................................................................  
REMOTE MAINTENANCE EXTERNAL MODEM CONNECTION FOR DK8/16  
(METHOD TWO OF TWO).................................................................................................  
REMOTE MAINTENANCE USING IMDU MODEM (DK16 ONLY) .....................................  
LOCAL MAINTENANCE USING ASCII TERMINAL OR PERSONAL COMPUTER...........  
DATA DUMP PRINTOUT EXAMPLE ................................................................................. 12  
SAMPLE PRINTOUT OF SYSTEM MESSAGES ............................................................... 12  
TEST MODE FUNCTION DIAGRAM ................................................................................. 13  
1
3
3
3
4
5
4
5
6
7
8
INDEX  
PAGE  
INDEX ........................................................................................................................................................ 70  
MESSAGE RECORD SHEET  
PAGE  
MESSAGE RECORD SHEET ................................................................................................................... 71  
-iv-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
1 USING REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE  
1.01 Figure 1 is provided as a quick reference aid in using this section.  
General Description: The functions available on  
STRATA DK systems via a Local or Remote Terminal  
are explained in Paragraph 2.  
The hardware and installation requirements are  
explained in Paragraphs 3 and 4.  
To set-up and operate a Local  
To set-up and operate a Remote  
Terminal, see Paragraph 5.  
Terminal, see Paragraph 6.  
To enter Operation Modes from a Local or Remote  
Terminal:  
• Program  
• Data Printout  
• Test  
• LCD Message Entry  
• Speed Dial Entry  
See Paragraph 7.  
To output data  
to a printer via  
a terminal;  
To change or  
To test via a  
terminal;  
Paragraph 10.  
To set messages  
via a terminal;  
Paragraph 11.  
Programming via  
a terminal;  
Paragraph 8.  
review speed dial  
via a terminal;  
Paragraph12.  
Paragraph 9.  
To exit and/or change modes; Paragraph 13.  
To terminate Local and Remote Terminal operation;  
Paragraph 14.  
Paragraph 15provides an equipment compatibility list.  
FIGURE 1  
SECTION FLOWCHART  
-1-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
data base programs, including Speed Dial num-  
bers and LCD messages.  
2.01 With the STRATA DK8, Remote Adminis-  
Message Mode: Provides for sending, adding, or  
changing digital and electronic telephone LCD  
messages.  
tration and Maintenance is accomplished with a  
remote terminal/modem communicating over the  
public telephone network, but only via an exter-  
nal modem connected to a dedicated CO line or  
standard telephone port. See Figures 2 and 3.  
With STRATA DK16 Remote Administration and  
Maintenance is accomplished with a remote ter-  
minal/modem communicating over the public  
telephone network via either an external modem  
(connected to a dedicated CO line or a standard  
telephone port); or, a modem unit (IMDU) in-  
stalled on a PIOU or PIOUS PCB in the Expan-  
sion Unit. See Figures 2, 3 and 4.  
Speed Dial Mode: Allows Station and System  
SpeedDialnumberstobeprogrammedremotely.  
NOTE:  
All the functions in the preceding paragraphs  
are also available via an on-site terminal con-  
nected directly to an optional PIOU(S) PCB  
with DK16, or the optional QSMU PCB with  
DK8. These functions are also available to a  
terminal with a modem connected to a stan-  
dard telephone port (Paragraph 5 and Figure  
5).  
2.02 RemoteAdministrationandMaintenancecalls  
with the STRATA DK16 may connect to the IMDU  
automatically via programmable CO line ringing  
assignments (Program 81 ~ 89) or Direct Inward  
System Access (DISA) CO lines (Program 78), or  
manually via the standard call transfer feature to  
intercom number 619. Automatic connection and  
DISA allow remote programming to be accom-  
plished after business hours without on-site assis-  
tance. Remote Administration calls with the DK8 or  
the DK16 via an external modem connected di-  
rectly to a CO line (instead of an IMDU) connect to  
theexternalmodemautomaticallywithoutanyspe-  
cial station or CO line ringing assignments. When  
the external modem is connected to a standard  
telephone port, the call transfer feature, DISA, and  
ringing assignments can be utilized to access the  
Remote Administration.  
2.04 There are two levels of Remote Administra-  
tion and Maintenance.  
Level 1: Allows access to all programs.  
Level 2: Allows access to Programs 30 ~ 39 and  
77 ~ 89, which pertain only to individual station  
options such as button assignments, class of  
service, etc.  
2.05 Each Remote Administration and Mainte-  
nance level has a different programmable pass-  
word for customer data base protection. This al-  
lows a customer to make certain station moves,  
adds, and changes in Level 2; while protecting the  
critical system assignments in Level 1 (refer to  
Program 00).  
3 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS  
2.03 Remote Administration and Maintenance al-  
lows the following functions to be accomplished  
remotely:  
Program Mode: Provides for complete program-  
ming of all STRATA DK8 or DK16 programs.  
3.01 ForRemoteAdministrationandMaintenance  
operation, the STRATA DK16 system must be  
configured with either an IMDU-equipped PIOU(S)  
PCB in the optional Expansion Unit or an external  
modem connected to a PIOUS(S) and a dedicated  
CO line or standard telephone circuit. (See Figures  
2, 3, and 4.) The STRATA DK8 must be configured  
with a QSMU PCB and an external modem con-  
nected to a dedicated CO line or standard tele-  
phone circuit. (See Figures 2 and 3.)  
TestMode:ProvidesfortestingofSTRATADK8or  
DK16 CO lines and stations.  
DataDumpMode:Providesacompleteprintoutof  
all or individual STRATA DK8 or DK16 customer  
-2-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
PPTC: ADAPTOR, MODIFIED FOR  
EXTERNAL MODEM CONNECTION  
AS SHOWN IN TABLE RM-A OF  
THIS SECTION  
REMOTE PERSONAL  
COMPUTER  
OR  
ASCII TERMINAL  
DEDICATED  
CO LINE  
CO LINE  
QSMU (DK8)  
— OR —  
ROM  
AND  
RAM  
RS232  
REMOTE  
MODEM  
EXTERNAL  
MODEM  
TELEPHONE  
NETWORK  
PIOU  
OR  
DK16  
PIOUS  
RS-232  
CABLE  
DK8 OR DK16  
MODEM LINE JACK  
3-PAIR MODULAR CORD  
TTY MODULAR JACK  
(7-BITS, EVEN PARITY, 1-STOP BIT)  
FIGURE 2  
REMOTE MAINTENANCE EXTERNAL MODEM CONNECTION FOR DK8 & DK16 METHOD ONE  
TTY MODULAR JACK  
(7-BITS, EVEN PARITY, 1-STOP BIT)  
PPTC: ADAPTOR, MODIFIED FOR EXTERNAL  
MODEM CONNECTION AS SHOWN IN  
TABLE RM-A OF THIS SECTION  
QSMU (DK8)  
MODEM LINE JACK  
— OR —  
ROM  
AND  
RAM  
RS232  
EXTERNAL  
MODEM  
PIOU  
OR  
DK16  
PIOUS  
3-PAIR MODULAR CORD  
QSTU  
— OR —  
PSTU  
— OR —  
PESU  
REMOTE PERSONAL  
COMPUTER  
OR  
STANDARD TELEPHONE CIRCUIT  
TIME  
SWITCH  
ASCII TERMINAL  
CO LINE  
DK8 OR DK16  
CO LINE  
CIRCUIT  
REMOTE  
MODEM  
TELEPHONE  
NETWORK  
DK8 OR DK16  
RS-232  
CABLE  
CO line connects to modem station port  
via: DISA, Ring Transfer, or ringing  
assignments (Programs 81 ~ 89)  
FIGURE 3  
REMOTE MAINTENANCE EXTERNAL MODEM CONNECTION FOR DK8 & DK16 METHOD TWO  
-3-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-A  
PPTC MODIFIED WIRING FOR EXTERNAL MODEM TO TTY CONNECTION  
PPCT (Modular to DB25) ADAPTOR, MODIFIED WIRING FOR  
CONNECTING TTY JACK TO AN EXTERNAL MODEM:  
QSMU OR PIOU/PIOUS,  
TTY JACK  
MODULAR PIN NO.  
PPTC1A-5M ADAPTOR  
MODEM  
RS-232  
LEAD NAME  
MODULAR PIN NO.  
DB25 PIN NO.  
3*  
1
2
3
4
5
6
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
RD  
RD,  
TD,  
6
5
to  
to  
RD  
TD  
2*  
TD  
DSR  
DTR  
DCD  
SG  
DSR, 4 to  
DTR, 3 to  
DCD, 2 to  
6
DSR  
DTR  
20*  
8*  
DCD  
SG  
SG,  
1
to  
7
4 Jumper to 5  
RTS to CTS  
IMPORTANT: PPTC1A-5M, pins 2 & 3 and pins 8 & 20 must  
*
be reversed in the field, as shown, for modem  
connection. Set Hayes modem to track status of  
carrier detect signal (AT & C1) and to answer  
(ATS0 = 1).  
PIOU OR PIOUS  
IMDU  
ROM  
AND  
RAM  
TIME  
SWITCH  
DK16  
CO LINE  
CIRCUIT  
CO LINE  
CO LINE  
REMOTE  
MODEM  
TELEPHONE  
NETWORK  
DK16  
RS-232  
CABLE  
CO line connects to IMDU port (619)  
via: DISA, Ring transfer, or ringing  
assignments in Program 78  
FIGURE 4  
REMOTE MAINTENANCE USING IMDU MODEM (DK16 ONLY)  
-4-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
QSMU (DK8)  
— OR —  
PPTC ADAPTER  
SEE WIRING GUIDE BELOW (TABLE B)  
ROM  
AND  
RAM  
PIOU  
OR  
DK16  
PIOUS  
TTY MODULAR JACK  
(7-BITS, EVEN PARITY, 1-STOP)  
DK8 OR DK16  
3-PAIR MODULAR CORD  
FIGURE 5  
LOCAL MAINTENANCE USING ASCII TERMINAL OR PERSONAL COMPUTER  
TABLE RM-B  
PPTC WIRING FOR LOCAL TERMINAL OR PERSONAL COMPUTER TO TTY CONNECTION  
PPTC (MODULAR TO DB25) ADAPTOR WIRING FOR CONNECTING TTY JACK TO A  
LOCAL TERMINAL OR PERSONAL COMPUTER SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT.  
QSMU OR PIOU/PIOUS,  
TTY JACK  
MODULAR PIN NO.  
PPTC1A-5M ADAPTOR  
MODULAR PIN NO. DB25 PIN NO.  
DTE  
RS-232  
LEAD NAME  
1
2
3
4
5
6
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
RD  
RD  
TD  
6
5
to  
to  
3
RD  
TD  
2
TD  
DSR  
DTR  
DCD  
SG  
DSR 4 to  
DTR 3 to  
DCD 2 to  
6
DSR  
DTR  
20  
8
DCD  
SG  
SG  
1
to  
7
4 Jumper to 5  
RTS to CTS  
PIOU/PIOUS (DK16) so that maintenance and  
programming can be administered internally or  
externally from desktop personal computers or  
terminals connected to Integrated Data Inter-  
face Units (PDIU-DIs).  
4 TERMINAL/MODEM INSTALLATION  
4.01 DK8 and DK16 provide customers with a  
number of Remote Administration and Mainte-  
nance configuration options:  
A customer-supplied maintenance terminal can  
be connected to the system TTY port (DK8  
QSMU, or DK16 PIOU or PIOUS) via an exter-  
nal modem either locally (Figure 5) or remotely  
(Figures 2 and 3).  
With the DK16, the IMDU modem (300 or 1200  
baud full-duplex) can be connected to the DK16  
PIOU or PIOUS to allow system programming  
and testing to be accomplished from a remote  
location (Figure 4).  
NOTES:  
1. AnexternalmodemisrequiredforRemote  
Maintenance if a QSMU is installed on  
DK8,orifanIMDUisnotinstalledonDK16  
PIOU or PIOUS. The IMDU has a built-in  
maintenance channel for remote  
connection; however, an external modem  
requires a CO line or standard telephone  
port (Figures 2 and 3).  
Instead of a modem or terminal, a Stand-alone  
Data Interface Unit (PDIU-DS) can be con-  
nected to the TTY port on the QSMU (DK8) or  
2. The DK16 PIOU or PIOUS can only be  
installed in the Expansion Unit.  
-5-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
6) For DK8 and DK16, set terminal communica-  
tion parameters to seven bits, even parity,  
one-stop bit (300, or 1200 bps. See step 3  
above).  
4.10 Maintenance Terminal/External Modem  
Option System Hardware Requirements  
4.11 The STRATA DK8 must be equipped with a  
QSMU PCB and the DK16 with a PIOU or PIOUS  
PCB to support the maintenance terminal/external  
modem options. Connecting the maintenance ter-  
minalorexternalmaintenancemodemtotheQSMU,  
PIOU, or PIOUS PCB is accomplished with a  
NOTE:  
If a digital or electronic telephone is in the  
program mode, programming from the main-  
tenance terminal is not allowed.  
standard three-pair modular cord and a PPTC  
adaptor connected to the PCB TTY jack.  
4.30 Remote Maintenance Option Installation  
4.31 DK16 IMDU Maintenance Modem (Figure  
4). The IMDU mounts on the PIOU or PIOUS PCB  
and provides 300 or 1200 bps, full-duplex commu-  
nication for remote maintenance (seven bits, even  
parity, one-stop bit). If the IMDU is employed, a  
dedicated CO line or standard telephone port is not  
required. Connection of the remote maintenance  
terminal is through existing system CO lines via  
intercom number 619. Refer to the PIOU or PIOUS  
portionofSection200-816-205forhardwareinstal-  
lation and programming requirements.  
4.20 DK8 and DK16 Local Maintenance  
Terminal Installation  
4.21 Install the ASCII terminal in accordance with  
the following steps (Figure 5):  
1) Connectthethree-pairmodularcable(24AWG  
twisted pairs) and the PPTC adaptor from the  
DK8QSMUorDK16PIOUorPIOUSTTYport  
to the remote maintenance terminal DB25  
connector.  
4.32 DK8 and DK16 External Maintenance Mo-  
dem Installation. Refer to Figure 2 or 3, as appli-  
cable, and install the external modem in accor-  
dance with the following steps:  
2) For the DK8 QSMU, set Program 10-3, LED  
04 ON for TTY operation.  
3) For the DK16, set the PIOU or PIOUS SW2  
switch to match the modem or terminal baud  
rate as follows:  
NOTE:  
Push in for 300 bps (baud rate indicator  
CD4 is lit); let out (by pushing again) for  
1200 bps (CD4 is not lit).  
The ToshibaPPTC RS-232 modular-to-DB25  
adaptor is factory configured for ASCII termi-  
nalconnection.Pins2and3andPins8and20  
of the adaptor must be reversed for external  
modem connection (see Table RM-A).  
NOTE:  
TheDK8QSMUbaudrateisalways1200bps.  
1) ConnectthemodularcordfromtheDK8 QSMU  
orDK16PIOUorPIOUSTTYporttothePPTC  
adaptor and then to the external maintenance  
modem RS-232 25-pin connector.  
4) ForDK16, setthePIOUorPIOUSSW3switch  
to the TTY position.  
NOTE:  
The PIOU or PIOUS SW3 switch is set to  
MODEM position for IMDU operation only.  
2) Connect the external maintenance modem  
line-side to a dedicated CO line (tip and ring)  
or to a dedicated standard telephone port, tip  
and ring (QSTU with DK8; KSTU, PSTU, or  
PESU with DK16). Refer to Wiring Diagrams,  
Section200-816-208,forwiring/interconnect-  
ing details.  
5) For DK16, set the P13 jumper plug on the  
PIOUtotheBELLconfiguration, orcuttheW4  
jumper on the PIOUS (also for BELL configu-  
ration).  
NOTE:  
3) ForDK16, setthePIOUorPIOUSSW2switch  
to match the modem or terminal baud rate:  
Push in for 300 bps (baud rate indicator  
The P13 (PIOU) and W4 (PIOUS) CCITT  
configurations are not normally used in the  
USA.  
-6-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
CD4 is lit); let out (by pushing again) for  
1200 bps (CD4 is not lit).  
modem with STRATA DK16 or DK8, skip LED 14 in  
Program 77-1.  
NOTE:  
4.42 For DK8 only, turn LED 04 “ON” in Program  
10-3 to activate the QSMU for external modem  
operation.  
TheDK8QSMUbaudrateisalways1200bps.  
4) ForDK16, setthePIOUorPIOUSSW3switch  
to the TTY position.  
4.43 For DK16 only, if Remote Administration and  
Maintenance calls are to connect to the IMDU  
automatically, assign the designated CO lines to  
ring the IMDU intercom number (619) in Program  
78 as required (use standard STRATA DK16 pro-  
gramming procedures).  
NOTE:  
The PIOU or PIOUS SW3 switch is set to the  
MODEM position for IMDU operation only.  
5) For DK16, set the P13 jumper plug on the  
PIOUtotheBELLconfiguration, orcuttheW4  
jumper on the PIOUS (also for BELL configu-  
ration).  
4.44 For all cases of Remote/Local Maintenance  
withaPCorASCIIterminal foreitherSTRATADK8  
or STRATA DK16 program the security codes for  
Levels 1 and 2 as in the Programming Procedures,  
Section 200-816-300. Reference Program 00.  
NOTE:  
The P13 (PIOU) and W4 (PIOUS) CCITT  
configurations are not normally used in the  
USA.  
6) The communication parameters for the termi-  
nal that will be used to communicate through  
the external modem connected to the TTY  
port should be set to seven-bits, even parity,  
one-stop bit. (300 or 1200 bps, see step 3  
above).  
NOTE:  
The security codes are initialized as “0000”.  
These codes may also be changed via a local  
or remote terminal.  
4.50 DK16 IMDU On-site Testing  
7) Programming and system testing, via the ex-  
ternalmaintenancemodem, isdescribedlater  
in this section. Access to the external mainte-  
nance modem is accomplished as follows:  
If the modem is connected to a dedicated  
CO line, call the CO line number to estab-  
lish modem communication.  
4.51 Fromanyworkingstation, testthefunctioning  
of the IMDU for DK16.  
1) Press the Intercom button.  
Receive intercom dial tone.  
If the modem is connected to a standard  
telephone port, call a STRATA DK CO  
line that can be transferred to (or pro-  
grammed to ring) the standard telephone  
modem port to establish modem commu-  
nication. It is also possible to establish  
communications by calling in on a  
STRATADKDISACOlineanddialingthe  
intercomnumberofthemodemconnected  
to the standard telephone port.  
2) Dial 6 1 9.  
Receive modem tone from the IMDU after  
a two-second delay.  
3) Press the Speaker button to release.  
4) Make an incoming call over each CO line that  
is programmed to ring the IMDU (station 619).  
Receive modem tone from the IMDU after  
a two-second delay with each call.  
4.40 Programming  
NOTE:  
4.41 IfanIMDUisusedonDK16, enabletheIMDU  
in Program 77-1 (LED 14). If using an external  
ThistestchecksbasicprogrammingandIMDU  
operation, and should be completed before  
-7-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
continuing with Remote Administration and  
Maintenance installation.  
4) Set the keyboard for “Caps Lock” on.  
5) Settheparametersoftheterminal(ormodem)  
connected to the TTY to:  
Word length: Seven bits  
Stop bits: One  
5) If a terminal is to be utilized on-site, refer to  
Paragraph5.Foroff-siteprogrammingreferto  
Paragraph 6.  
Parity: Even  
5 LOCAL TERMINAL OPERATION  
5.20 Local Operation  
5.00 Requirements  
5.21 Use the procedure below to establish com-  
munications between the local terminal and the  
PIOU(S)ortheQSMUsothatprogrammingmaybe  
accomplished via the terminal.  
5.01 For DK16, the optional Expansion Unit must  
have a PIOU or PIOUS PCB installed to perform  
on-site Remote Administration from a local termi-  
nal. For DK8, a QSMU PCB is required. Paragraph  
4 and Figure 5 provide installation details on local  
terminal installation.  
NOTE:  
Hereafter, whenever the term CR is used, it  
means the return or enter key, depending on  
the keyboard being used. SPACEmeans the  
space bar. An empty square indicates one of  
several characters will appear in that location  
(either on the terminal screen or in a printout).  
5.02 The local terminal for either the STRATA  
DK16 or the DK8 must have an EIA RS-232 inter-  
face, communicate in ASCII code at 300 or 1200  
bps (1200 bps only for DK8), have a standard  
typewriter-type keyboard, and display data via a  
CRT display or printer. A personal computer (PC)  
capable of emulating the described terminal with a  
communications software package (such as  
PROCOMM) may also be used (Figure 5).  
1) Set-uptheterminalasdescribedinParagraph  
5.10.  
2) Set the terminal to on-line.  
3) Set “Caps Lock” on (upper case).  
4) Press CR key.  
5.03 Operating the PC or terminals, local or re-  
mote, is identical. The only difference is the physi-  
cal connection and the method used to establish  
initial communications.  
The system responds, and the terminal  
displays:  
DK CONNECT  
> CODE  
5.10 Set-up  
5) Type the four-digit security code, and press  
5.11 Refer to Figure 2 and verify that the local  
terminal is connected and set-up as follows:  
CR. (Default code = 0000.)  
The system responds, and the terminal  
displays:  
OK  
1) Connect the RS-232 cable to the terminal  
connector and the PIOU(S) or QSMU TTY  
connector.  
MODE  
NOTE:  
Thesecuritycodecanbeenteredanytimethe  
CODE prompt appears.  
NOTE:  
If a personal computer is being used, connect  
the cable to the serial “COM” port.  
6) To continue, go to Paragraph 7.  
6 REMOTE TERMINAL OPERATION  
6.00 Requirements  
2) Set the PC or terminal baud rate to match the  
DK16 SW2 PIOU(S) setting (300 or 1200 bps)  
or the DK8 QSMU setting (1200 bps).  
6.01 Terminal: For the STRATA DK8 or the  
STRATA DK16, the terminal must interface with an  
3) Set the terminal for “Full Duplex” operation.  
-8-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
asynchronousmodem,communicateinASCIIcode  
remote terminal and the IMDU or an external  
modem connected to a dedicated CO line, call the  
number of the system CO line assigned to ring the  
IMDU or the external modem via the remote termi-  
nal/modem set-up:  
at 300 or 1200 bps (1200 only for DK8), have a  
standard typewriter-type keyboard, and display  
data via a CRT display or printer. A personal  
computer capable of emulating the described ter-  
minal with a communications software package  
(such as PROCOMM) may also be used. (See  
Paragraph 15 for compatible personal computers).  
1) Observe the following:  
When the CO line rings-in, it will connect  
to the IMDU or the external modem and  
the IMDU or external modem will respond  
by returning modem answer tone to the  
remote modem.  
The remote modem will return modem  
tone to the IMDU or external modem and  
communication will be established.  
When communication is established, the  
terminal will display: CONNECTED or  
COMMUNICATIONS (see Note in Para-  
graph 6.22).  
6.02 Modem: For either system, the modem must  
be full-duplex asynchronous, operate at 300 or  
1200 bps (1200 only for DK8) and have an RS-232  
interface to connect with a terminal or PC (as  
describedinParagraph6.01). Itmustinterfacewith  
the public telephone network and be compatible  
with Bell 103 or 212 modem specifications.  
6.10 Set-up  
6.11 RefertoFigures2,3,and4,andverifythatthe  
remoteterminalisconnectedandset-upasfollows:  
2) To continue, Press CR and enter the security  
1) Connect the terminal and modem together  
with the RS-232 cable.  
code per Paragraph 6.30.  
6.22 Manual connection via call transfer:  
NOTE:  
If a personal computer is being used, connect  
the cable to the serial “COM” port.  
1) Usingatelephone(attheremotelocation)that  
can switch to the terminal/modem, dial the  
number of a system CO line.  
2) Connect the modem line input to a CO/PBX  
line for access to the public telephone net-  
work.  
2) When the call is answered, request that it be  
transferred to station 619 if an IMDU is being  
used. For applications where an external mo-  
dem is connected to a dedicated standard  
telephone port, ask to be transferred to the  
intercom number assigned to the modem.  
3) Set the terminal and modem baud rate to  
match the DK16 PIOU(S) setting (300 or 1200  
bps) or DK8 QSMU setting (1200 bps).  
4) Set the terminal and modem for “Full Duplex”  
operation.  
3) After the call is transferred and you hear  
modem tone from the IMDU or external mo-  
dem, switch the call from the telephone to the  
terminal/modem.  
5) Set the terminal parameters to:  
Word length: Seven bits  
Stop bits: One  
4) Observe the following:  
Parity: Even  
When the CO line is transferred, it will  
connect to the IMDU or external modem.  
The IMDU or the external modem and the  
remote modem will respond to each other  
with modem tone and communication is  
established.  
6.20 Remote Operation  
6.21 Automatic connection via ringing assign-  
ments: To establish communication between the  
-9-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
When communication is established, the  
terminal will display: CONNECTED or  
COMMUNICATIONS (see Note).  
the terminal, enter the security code, and press the  
CR key to receive the MODE prompt.  
NOTE:  
Refer to Paragraphs 5.20 or 6.20 to accom-  
plish the above.  
NOTE:  
If the connection is not completed or commu-  
nication is unsuccessful, the remote terminal  
will display: NO CARRIER. If this is the case,  
checkthattheequipmentisinstalledperPara-  
graph 5.10 or 6.10 of this section and try  
again.  
1) Set the keyboard for “Caps Lock” on (the  
mode name must be entered in capital let-  
ters).  
2) At the MODE prompt, enter the desired mode  
name (Table RM-C).  
6.30 Operation  
TABLE RM-C—PROGRAMMING PROMPTS  
6.31 Once communication is established between  
the remote terminal and the IMDU or external  
modem, followthestepsbelowtoenterthesecurity  
code and receive the MODE prompt.  
Mode Function Mode Name  
Prompt Return  
Program  
Data Dump  
Test  
PROG  
DUMP  
TEST  
MESG  
REPT  
P
D
T
(NONE)  
R
NOTE:  
LCD Messages  
Speed Dial No.  
Hereafter, whenever the term CR is used, it  
means the return or enter key, depending on  
the keyboard being used. SPACEmeans the  
space bar. An empty square indicates one of  
several characters will appear in that location  
(either on the terminal’s screen or in a print-  
out).  
3) Press the CR key.  
4) Verifythecorrectpromptreturn(TableRM-C).  
8 PROGRAM MODE  
1) Set the keyboard for “Caps Lock” on.  
8.00 General  
2) Press the CR key.  
8.01 Data governing overall system operation and  
feature execution for the systems are stored in  
read-only memory (ROM) and cannot be altered in  
the field. However, the data controlling operation of  
the various options, both system and station, are  
stored in random-access memory (RAM) and can  
easily be changed according to individual installa-  
tion requirements.  
The system responds, and the terminal  
displays:  
DK CONNECT  
>CODE  
3) Enter the four-digit security code and press  
the CR key. (Default code is “0000”.)  
The system responds, and the terminal  
displays:  
OK  
8.02 All options are controlled by selections made  
in the System Record Sheet. An initialization proc-  
ess is provided for verifying predetermined system  
assignments. The installer can then proceed with  
any necessary changes.  
MODE  
7 MODE SELECTION  
7.00 Selecting a Mode  
8.03 Internal battery power is provided to prevent  
loss of system data memory in the event of a power  
failure.  
7.01 To enter an operating mode for either the  
DK8 or the DK16, establish communication with  
-10-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
8.10 System Record Sheets  
dialed group: Y = button/LED "ON"; N = button/  
LED "OFF."  
U: If DATA is not the same for all ports, U indicates  
that the button/LED is "ON" for at least one, but  
not all ports, in that group.  
8.11 Before system data can be programmed, the  
SystemRecordSheetswhichcontainthecustomer  
data base must be available (see Programming,  
Section 200-816-302).  
8.40 Programming Procedures  
8.20 Program Types  
1) Refer to a completed System Record Sheet.  
8.21 There are three types of programs:  
2) Place the terminal into the program mode per  
Paragraph 7.  
Type 1: All Type 1 programs use the same proce-  
dure; however, each button/LED has a different  
meaning, depending on the program number.  
The status of this data is reviewed, changed,  
and stored in system memory using Type 1  
program procedures.  
3) Programproceduresarecategorizedandpre-  
sented in the following order. Use these pro-  
cedurestostoreSystemRecordSheetdatain  
working memory.  
a) Initialization procedures:  
These procedures must be completed  
whenever a system is first installed (see  
Type 3 programs).  
Type 2: All Type 2 programs follow the same entry  
procedure; however, they require port number  
and button/LED entries. Each button/LED has a  
different meaning, depending on the program  
number.  
b) Type 1 programs:  
10-1, 10-2, 10-3, 15, 16, 42-0, 77-1, 77-  
2.  
c) Type 2 programs:  
Station Class of Service;  
20, 30, 31, 35, 40, 41, 43, 79, 81 ~ 89.  
d) Type 3 programs:  
Type3: Inthistypeprogram,theinformationshown  
intheSystemRecordSheetindicatesthedatato  
be stored in system memory. Each program has  
a different meaning, and the data is reviewed,  
changed or stored in memory using an individual  
procedure for each program.  
Initialization; 90, 92  
General;00, 01, 0203, 04, 05, 12, 13,  
21, 22, 19, 28, 29, 32, 33, 34, 36, 37,  
38, 39, 42-1 ~ 8, 44, 60, 69, 70, 78,  
80, 93.  
8.30 Multiple Station (Range) Programming  
Toll Restriction; 45 ~ 48.  
Least Cost Routing; 50 ~ 56.  
8.31 Some programs select options for individual  
stations (where ■ ■ represents the port number  
being programmed). To save time, it is possible to  
program all ports or a range of ports simultane-  
ously.  
9 DATA DUMP MODE  
9.00 General  
9.01 This mode allows three types of data to be  
displayed or output to a printer: Programs (Cus-  
tomer Data Base), Speed Dialing Numbers (Sta-  
tion/System), and LCD Messages (Station/Sys-  
tem).  
8.32 Multiplestationprogrammingisaccomplished  
by substituting a range of ports (■ ■ * ■ ■) for the  
port number part (■ ■) of the program.  
Example, all ports: 0 0 * 0 9 (DK8) or 0 0 * 1  
9
(DK16)  
9.02 The three procedures for the Data Dump  
mode are called: Program Dump, Speed Dialing  
Dump, and LCD Messages Dump.  
8.33 When the multiple station range is entered,  
the terminal displays existing data as follows:  
9.03 Program Dump: While in the dump mode  
(see Paragraph 7), enter "PRG" and up to three  
characters and press CR. The alphanumeric char-  
Y or N: Y or N indicates if a button LED is ON or  
OFF; if DATA is the same for all ports in the  
-11-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
and CO line circuits from an off-site location.  
acters represent a program group or a particular  
program, i.e., ALL, 03, 04, 10, 39, etc. Foraprintout  
example, see Figure 6.  
10.02 This testing function is accomplished by  
accessing stations from the remote terminal, and  
activating various buttons on digital and elec-  
tronic telephones to make telephone calls, set  
function buttons, change the system time and  
date, etc. (see Figure 8 and Tables RM-BS ~ BV).  
IMPORTANT!  
NOTE:  
Programs are output only in the groups indi-  
cated. To print out or review a program not  
included above, use Program Mode proce-  
dures.  
Any digital or electronic telephone button  
can be activated from the remote terminal  
at any time while in the Test Mode (even  
while the end user is using the telephone).  
Therefore,cautionmustbeusedtoprevent  
service interruption or interference. The  
Test Mode provides status tests to check  
whetherornotastationorCOlineisinuse.  
The status checks should always be made  
before performing other tests (see Table  
RM-BS).  
9.04 Speed Dialing Dump: While in the dump  
mode (see Paragraph 7), enter “REP” and two or  
three characters and press CR. The characters  
represent the speed dialing codes for either an  
individual station, A L L (all stations and system  
data) S Y S (system data only).  
9.05 LCD Messages Dump: While in the dump  
mode (see Paragraph 7), enter “MSG” and two or  
three characters and press CR. The characters  
represent stored messages for either an individual  
station, A L L (all stations and system data) or  
S Y S (system data only). For a printout example,  
see Figure 7.  
10.10 CO Line Testing  
10.11 To test CO line transmission, two or three  
CO lines must be available at the remote site (see  
Figure 8 and Table RM-BU).  
9.06 Tables provide a quick reference to the step-  
by-step procedures to output the appropriate data.  
10.12 CO line testing is accomplished by using all  
of the following two methods:  
10 TEST MODE  
10.00 General  
1) Establish a talk path between the two remote  
stations (B & C) via a CO-to-CO connection  
through STRATA DK8 or DK16.  
10.01 The remote test mode (see paragraph 7)  
can be used to test STRATA DK8 or DK16 stations  
>MODE DUMP  
D MSG SYS  
CO LINE  
NUMBERS  
1:SELECT(LED ON)  
8
1
SYS M60 OUT TO LUNCH  
SYS M61 IN A MEETING  
SYS M62 CALL  
SYS M63 BACK AT  
SYS M64 RETURN ON  
SYS M65  
SYS M66  
SYS M67  
SYS M68  
SYS M69  
81 00  
81 01  
81 02  
81 03  
81 04  
81 05  
81 06  
11111111  
00000000  
00000000  
00000000  
00000000  
00000000  
00000000  
CO LINE 08  
STATION PORT NUMBER  
PROGRAM NUMBER  
CO LINE 01  
D
FIGURE 6  
DATA DUMP PRINTOUT EXAMPLE  
FIGURE 7  
SAMPLE PRINTOUT OF SYSTEM MESSAGES  
-12-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
PUBLIC TELEPHONE  
REMOTE SITE  
NETWORK  
STRATA DK16/DK8  
PC OR  
TERMINAL  
RS-232  
CO LINE  
CO LINE A  
MODEM  
CO LINE A  
T
S100  
(DK16: 300 or 1200 BPS)  
(DK8: 1200 BPS)  
IMDU OR EXT. MODEM  
DATA  
BUS  
CPU  
TOS HIBA  
STATION  
CKT  
REMOTE  
STATION B  
CO LINE  
CO LINE  
CO LINE B  
CO LINE C  
CO LINE B  
CO LINE C  
Digital Telephone XX  
CO-to-CO  
CONNECTION  
REMOTE  
STATION C  
TIME OR  
WEATHER  
FIGURE 8  
TEST MODE FUNCTION DIAGRAM  
2) Establishatalkpathbetweenaremotestation  
and the time or weather service via a CO-to-  
COconnectionthroughSTRATADK8orDK16.  
stations.  
11.12 When the message is set, the Msg LED(s)  
on the destination station(s) flash.  
10.13 The procedures in the tables provide ex-  
amples of the types of tests and functions that can  
beaccomplishedwiththeTestMode. Theseproce-  
dures do not cover all the possible tests that can be  
performed remotely; however, by using the prin-  
ciples given, other tests are possible.  
11.13 Whenadestinationstationcallstheoriginat-  
ing station, the message is displayed on the desti-  
nation station’s LCD.  
Mode 94: To edit and/or review a Called Station  
Message before setting it, use this mode. It will  
print out the existing message and allow addi-  
tionstoit(suchasatimeoradate)beforeitisset.  
(The message cannot be changed with this  
mode—just added to.)  
11 LCD MESSAGE MODE  
11.00 General  
Mode 96: To add or change a Called Station  
Message before setting it, use this mode. It does  
not display the existing message, but allows a  
completely new message to be entered before it  
is set.  
11.01 This mode allows a local or remote terminal  
tosetCalledandCallingStationLCDmessagesfor  
station users (see Table RM-BO ~ BR). The mes-  
sagesmaybesystemorstationtypeandarestored  
in their respective memory locations when set.  
11.10 Remote Called Station Message Mode  
11.20 Remote Calling Station Message Mode  
11.11 Allows the terminal to set a Called Station  
Message for an originating station with the destina-  
tion of the message being a station or group of  
11.21 Allows the terminal to set a Calling Station  
Message for a station. The message will be set on  
-13-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
At the P, D, T or R prompt, enter Q U I T CR and  
observe:  
>MODE  
the station’s LCD and is automatically displayed on  
other stations’ LCDs whenever they call that sta-  
tion.  
13.03 To exit the LCD Message (MESG) mode:  
At anytime while in the message mode, enter: m  
0 q and observe:  
Mode 95: To edit and/or review a Calling Station  
Message before setting it, use this mode. It will  
displaytheexistingmessageandallowadditions  
toit(suchasatimeoradate)beforeitisset. (The  
message cannot be changed with this mode—  
just added to.)  
>MODE  
NOTE:  
To exit the Message Mode, the terminal key-  
board must be in lower case.  
14 DISCONTINUE OPERATION  
14.00 Local Terminal  
Mode 97: To add or change a Calling Station  
Message before setting it, use this mode. It does  
not display the existing message, but allows a  
completely new message to be entered before it  
is set.  
14.01 Exit current operating mode via Paragraph  
13 and observe that the MODE prompt is displayed  
on the terminal.  
11.22 Use the procedures in the tables to set  
messages via Modes 94/96 and 95/97.  
14.10 Remote Terminal  
14.11 Exit current operating mode via Paragraph  
13 and observe that the MODE prompt is displayed  
on the terminal.  
12 SPEED DIAL MODE  
12.00 General  
14.12 To discontinue remote operation:  
12.01 The Speed Dial Mode (see Table RM-BW)  
can be used to add or change speed dial numbers  
to any of the System Speed Dial memory locations  
(60 ~ 99) and Station Speed Dial memory locations  
(10 ~ 49).  
1) Take the terminal off-line.  
2) Verify that the modem drops the line.  
15 EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY  
12.02 Chain Speed Dial numbers can also be  
programmed using the Speed Dial Mode. See the  
Digital or Electronic Telephone User Guide for  
more information regarding chain Speed Dialing.  
15.01 Equipment that is known to be compatible  
with STRATA DK8 and DK16 Remote Administra-  
tion and Maintenance is listed as follows. This list  
does not show all of the equipment that will work,  
only the equipment that has been proven compat-  
ible in the field or lab.  
12.03 To program Speed Dial numbers, enter the  
REPT mode per Paragraph 7 of this section. Then  
use the Speed Dial Mode Procedure at the end of  
this section.  
Terminals  
Texas Instruments: Silent 700  
Panasonic: KXD-4920  
Personal Computers with the PROCOMM com-  
munications software package.  
Modems  
13 MODE EXIT  
13.01 Exit the current mode per Paragraph 13.02  
and select the desired mode via Paragraph 7.  
Hayes compatible  
13.02 To exit the Program (PROG), Data Dump  
(DUMP), Test(TEST)orSpeedDial(REPT)mode:  
-14-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-D  
PROGRAM 90  
INITIALIZING PROGRAMS 00 ~ 97  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter the Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt enter P R O G CR.  
2
3
Enter Program Number 90  
Press CR.  
P 90  
P90  
To Initialize All Programs Enter 0 0  
NOTE: Single programs can be initialized by entering a single  
9 7  
P90 00 97  
*
*
program number plus #. Group numbers are separated by an  
.
*
4
5
6
Enter button/LED number 0 1.  
Change 01 button/LED to “ON” by entering Y.  
Press SP ACE.  
P90 00 97 01 N  
*
P90 00 97 01 N Y  
*
P90 00 97 01 N Y  
*
02 N  
7
8
P90 00 97 01 N Y  
Change LED 02 to “ON” by entering Y.  
*
02 N Y  
Press CR.  
Initialization complete.  
P90 00 97 01 N  
*
02 N Y  
P90  
NOTE: If program data is not entered correctly, then CR will  
not respond. To retry, press DELETE CR.  
Exit Program 90  
Press # # CR.  
9
P90 #  
P
For DK16, Enter Program 77  
Press 7 7 CR.  
P77  
10  
11  
Press 1 1 4 .  
P77 1 14 N  
P77 1 14 N Y  
P77  
then: Y CR.  
12  
To Exit this Program:  
Press # # CR.  
IMPORTANT NOTE:  
For DK16 only: If all programs are initialized, the "IMDU enabled" has also been turned off in  
Program77-1,LED14.IfusingtheIMDUforremoteprogramming,gointoProgram77-1andturn  
button/LED 14 on as shown in steps 9, 10, and 11. If this is not completed, remote programming  
must be reactivated locally from the programming digital or electronic telephone.  
-15-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-E  
PROGRAM 92  
STATION SPEED DIAL, SPEED DIAL MEMO, VM ID CODES INITIALIZATION  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter Program Mode  
>MODE PROG  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
2
3
4
5
6
Enter Program Number 92  
Press CR.  
P 92  
P92  
Enter 1.  
P92  
P92 1  
Enter button/LED number: 0 1.  
Change LED 01 to “ON” by entering Y.  
Press SP ACE two times.  
P92  
P92 1 01 N  
P92  
P92 1 01 N Y  
P92  
P92 1 01 N Y  
02 N  
03 N  
7
8
Change LED 03 to “ON” by entering Y.  
P92  
P92 1 01 N Y  
02 N  
03 N Y  
Press CR.  
P92  
Initialization complete.  
P92 1 01 N Y  
02 N  
03 N Y  
P92  
NOTE: If program data is not entered correctly, CR will  
not respond. To retry, press DELETE CR at the same time.  
9
Clear system speed dial using the procedure on the next page.  
-16-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-F  
PROGRAM 92 (continued)  
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL, SPEED DIAL MEMO INITIALIZATION  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter Program Mode  
>MODE PROG  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
2
3
4
5
6
Enter Program Number 92  
Press CR.  
P 92  
P92  
Enter 2.  
P92  
P92 2  
Enter button/LED number 0 1.  
Change LED 01 to “ON” by entering Y.  
Press SP ACE three times.  
P92  
P92 2 01 N  
P92  
P92 2 01 N Y  
P92  
P92 2 01 N Y  
02 N  
03 N  
04 N  
7
8
Change LED 04 to “ON” by entering Y.  
P92  
P92 2 01 N Y  
02 N  
03 N  
04 N Y  
Press CR.  
P92  
Initialization complete.  
P92 2 01 N Y  
02 N  
03 N  
04 N Y  
P92  
NOTE: If program data is not entered correctly, CR will  
not respond. To retry, press DELETE CR at the same time.  
9
Clear LCD message memory, using the procedure on the  
next page.  
-17-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-G  
PROGRAM 92 (continued)  
LCD CHARACTER MESSAGE MEMORY INITIALIZATION  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter Program Mode  
>MODE PROG  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
2
3
4
5
6
Enter Program Number 92  
Press CR.  
P 92  
P92  
Enter 3.  
P92  
P92 3  
Enter button/LED number 0 2.  
Change LED 02 to “ON” by entering Y.  
Press SP ACE.  
P92  
P92 3 02 N  
P92  
P92 3 02 N Y  
P92  
P92 3 02 N Y  
03 N  
7
8
Change LED 03 to “ON” by entering Y.  
P92  
P92 3 02 N Y  
03 N Y  
Press CR.  
P92  
Initialization complete.  
P92 3 02 N Y  
03 N Y  
P92  
NOTE: If program data is not entered correctly, CR will  
not respond. To retry, press DELETE CR at the same time.  
9
Clear the timed reminders using the procedure on the next page.  
-18-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-H  
PROGRAM 92 (continued)  
TIMED REMINDERS INITIALIZATION  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
2
3
Enter Program Number 92  
Press CR.  
P 92  
P92  
Enter 4 .  
P92  
P92 4  
P92  
P92 4 02 N  
4
5
6
Enter button/LED number 0 2.  
Change LED 02 to "ON" by  
entering Y.  
P92  
P92 4 02 N Y  
Press SP ACE two times.  
P92  
P92 4 02 N Y  
03 N  
04 N  
P92  
P92 4 02 N Y  
7
8
Change key 04 to "ON" by  
entering Y.  
03 N  
04 N Y  
P92  
Press CR.  
P92 4 02 N Y  
Initialization complete.  
03 N  
04 N Y  
P92  
NOTE: If program data is not entered correctly, CR will  
not respond. To retry, press DELETE CR at the same time.  
9
To exit this program, press # # CR.  
-19-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-I  
PROGRAM 92 (continued)  
DIGITAL TELEPHONE VOLUME LEVEL INITIALIZATION  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
>MODE PROG  
P
2
3
4
5
Enter Program Number 92  
Press CR.  
P 92  
P92  
Enter 5.  
P92 5  
Enter 0 1; change button/LED 01 to "ON" by entering Y.  
P92 5 01 N Y  
Press SP ACE four times.  
P92 5 01 N Y  
02 N  
03 N  
04 N  
05 N  
6
7
Change LED 05 to “ON” by entering Y.  
P92 5 01 N Y  
02 N  
03 N  
04 N  
05 N Y  
NOTE: If program data is not entered correctly, CR will not  
respond. To retry, press DELETE CR at the same time.  
Press CR.  
P92 5 01 N Y  
Initialization complete.  
02 N  
03 N  
04 N  
05 N  
P92  
8
To exit this program, press # # CR.  
-20-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-J  
PROGRAM 92 (continued)  
CALL FORWARD BACKUP RAM INITIALIZATION  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
2
3
Enter Program Number 92  
Press CR.  
P 92  
P92  
Enter 9 .  
P92  
P92 9  
P92  
P92 9 03 N  
4
5
6
Enter button/LED number 0 3.  
Change LED 03 to "ON" by  
entering Y.  
P92  
P92 9 03 N Y  
Press SP ACE.  
P92  
P92 9 03 N Y  
04 N  
P92  
P92 9 03 N Y  
7
8
Change LED 04 to "ON" by  
entering Y.  
04 N Y  
P92  
Press CR.  
P92 9 03 N Y  
Initialization complete.  
04 N Y  
P92  
NOTE: If program data is not entered correctly, CR will  
not respond. To retry, press DELETE CR at the same time.  
9
To exit this program, press # # CR.  
IMPORTANT NOTE:  
This program clears Call Forward memory for all stations, but does not reset the Call Forward  
indication on the station (Call Forward LCD information and/or Call Forward button/LED). To  
clearstationCallForwardindications, systempowermustbeturnedOFFforfiveseconds, then  
ON. Fixed Call Forward is not cleared by this program.  
-21-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-K  
PROGRAM 03  
SLOT ASSIGNMENTS  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter the Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 03  
Press CR.  
P 03  
P03  
Enter the Slot Number  
P03  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the desired  
slot number.  
P03 00 91  
Example: Slot number 00, enter 0 0 .  
4
5
Enter the PCB Code Number  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the desired  
PCB code number.  
P03  
P03 00 91 92  
Example: PCB code 92, enter 9 2.  
To Exit Program/Store Data  
P03  
A) To store data, press CR.  
P03 00 91 92  
B) Continue returning to Step 3 until allProgram 03  
data is entered.  
P03 ##  
P
C) To exit this program, press # #, press CR.  
6
Turn system power "OFF" for 5 seconds and then turn  
power "ON" to store data in working memory (see Notes).  
Remote maintenance is disconnected.  
IMPORTANT NOTES:  
1. This program only applies to DK16 and must be completed with on-site assistance (after  
installing PCBs, if any) because the system must be powered down momentarily after PCB  
code entry.  
2. Even though PCB codes display as being changed, they are not entered into working  
memory until the system DC power is cycled OFF and ON.  
3. If PCB codes are not entered into working memory by cycling DC power, PCB options will  
not function.  
4. Only Program 03 requires the system power to be turned OFF and ON to store data into  
working memory.  
-22-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-L  
PROGRAM 00  
SOFTWARE CHECK/REMOTE MAINTENANCE—SECURITY CODE  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter Program Mode  
>MODE PROG  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 00  
Press CR.  
P 00  
P00  
•
To Check Software Version  
P00 0 Version = PSSA  
Enter Action Code 0. System will display the system's software  
version.  
P00  
or  
Version = QMA  
Press CR.  
Software version  
For DK16, PSSA. For DK8, QMA  
4
5
6
To Change Level 1 Security Code  
P00 1 0000  
P00  
Enter Action Code 1. The system will display the present  
level 1, four-digit code. Refer to the System Record Sheet  
and change if required. Press CR.  
To Change Level 2 Security Code  
P00 2 0000  
P00  
Enter Action Code 2. The system will display the present  
level 2, four-digit code. Refer to the System Record Sheet  
and change if required. Press CR.  
To Exit This Program  
Press # # CR.  
P00 ##  
P
-23-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-M  
PROGRAM 01  
LOGICAL PORT DISPLAY  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter the Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 01  
Press CR.  
P 01  
P01  
Enter the Physical Port Number  
Enter the desired physical port number.  
Example: Port number 01, enter 0 1.  
P01  
P01 01  
Logical Port Displays  
Physical Port  
(
= Logical Port)  
P01 01  
4
5
Verify Physical Port's Associated Logical Port  
P01 01  
P01 ##  
##  
To Display More Ports/Exit Program  
A) To display more logical ports, press CR and go to Step 3.  
B) To exit this program, enter # # CR (twice).  
P
(after exit)  
TABLE RM-N  
PROGRAM 02  
PHYSICAL PORT DISPLAY  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter the Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
>MODE PROG  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 02  
Press CR.  
P 02  
P02  
P02  
P02 02  
Enter the Logical Port Number  
Enter the desired logical port number.  
Example: Port number 02, enter 0 2.  
Physical Port Displays  
Logical Port  
(
= Physical Port)  
4
5
Verify Logical Ports Associated Physical Port  
P02 02  
To Display More Ports/Exit Program  
A) To display more physical ports, press CR and go to Step 3.  
B) To exit this program, enter # # CR (twice).  
P02 02  
P02 ##  
##  
P
(after exit)  
-24-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-O  
PROGRAM 04  
PORT/STATION NUMBER ASSIGNMENT  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter the Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 04  
Press CR.  
P 04  
P04  
Enter the Logical Port Number  
P04  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the desired  
logical port number.  
P04 01  
Example: Port number 01, enter 0 1.  
4
5
Press # button.  
P04  
System displays present station number. Refer to the  
System Record Sheet and enter the desired station number.  
Example: Station number 16, enter 1 6 .  
P04 01# 11 06  
To Exit Program/Store Data  
P04  
A) To store data; press CR.  
P04 01# 11 06  
B) Continue returning to Step 3 until all Program 04  
data is entered.  
P04 ##  
P
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
NOTE:  
A blank is displayed by "N".  
TABLE RM-P  
PROGRAM 05  
FLEXIBLE ACCESS CODE NUMBERING  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter the Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
2
3
Enter Program Number 05  
Press CR.  
P 05  
P05  
Enter Access Code number that you wish to change (0 ~ 9)  
Example: 4 (if it was not previously changed, the system  
will print another 4. If it has been previously changed,  
the system will print the number to which it was changed).  
P05 4 4  
P05 4 4 6  
4
5
6
Change the number if required (one or two digits)  
Example: Change to 6, press CR.  
Continue returning to Step 3 until all required access  
codes have been changed.  
P
To Exit this Program  
Press # # CR.  
NOTE:  
Programs 10-1, 10-2, and 10-3 use Type 1 procedure.  
-25-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-Q  
TYPE 1 PROGRAM PROCEDURE EXAMPLE  
(PROGRAMS: 10-1, 10-2, 10-3, 15, 16, 42-0, 77-1, 77-2)  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
4
5
Enter Program Number  
Refer to the record sheet and enter the desired program number. P10  
Example: Program 10-1, enter 1 0 , press CR.  
P 10  
Enter Program Code or Digit(s) Per Record Sheet  
1 or other digit required.  
NOTE: Most programs do not require a second digit.  
P10 1  
Enter Button/LED Number  
Enter the desired button/LED number.  
Example: Button/LED 01, enter 0 1.  
P10 1 01 N (see note)  
To Change Button/LED Status  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change the button/LED  
status, if required (Y or N).  
P10 1 01 N Y  
Example: Enter Y.  
6
7
To Advance to Next Button/LED  
Press SP ACE. Repeat step 5 if necessary.  
P10 1 01 Y  
02 N  
To Review Button/LED Status Change  
Enter CR.  
Re-enter Steps 3 and 4.  
P10 1 01 Y-  
Button LED "ON"  
Button LED Number  
Program Code  
NOTE: This step is optional and not required to save data.  
Program Number  
8
To Exit Program/Store Data  
P10  
A) To store data, press CR.  
P10 ##  
P
B) To exit this program, press # #, then press CR.  
C) Continue returning to step 2 until all Type 1 programs  
are completed.  
9
To Exit the Program Mode  
> MODE  
Press # # CR.  
To Enter Another Mode  
10  
Press  
D U M P CR (data dump)  
D
T E S T CR  
M E S G CR (LCD messages)  
R E P T CR (speed dial)  
(test)  
T
(no prompt)  
R
NOTE:  
Y = button/LED "ON", N = button/LED "OFF"  
-26-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-R  
TYPE 2 PROGRAM PROCEDURE EXAMPLE  
(PROGRAMS: 20, 30, 31, 35, 40, 41, 43, 79, 81 ~ 89)  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number  
Refer to the record sheet and enter the desired program number.  
Example: Program 30, enter 3 0 , press CR.  
P 30  
Enter Port Number  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the desired  
or Port Range  
P30  
P30 04  
*
port number(s). Example: 0 4 .  
4
5
Press # button.  
P30 04#  
Enter the Desired Button/LED Number  
P30 04# 01 N  
(Note)  
Example: Button/LED 01, enter: 0 1.  
6
To Change Button/LED Status  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change the button/LED  
status, if required (Y or N).  
P30 04# 01 N Y  
Example: Enter Y.  
7
8
To Advance to Next Button/LED  
Press SP ACE (repeat Step 6 if necessary).  
To Review Button/LED Status Change  
Press CR.  
Re-enter Steps 3, 4, and 5.  
P30 04# 01 Y-  
LED "ON"  
Button LED Number  
Port Number  
Program Number  
9
To Exit Program/Store Data  
P10  
A) To store data, press CR.  
P10 ##  
P
B) To exit this program, press # #, then press CR.  
C) Continue returning to Step 2 until all Type 2 programs  
are completed.  
10 To Exit the Program Mode  
>MODE  
Press # # CR.  
11 To Enter Another Mode,  
Press  
D U M P CR (data dump)  
T E S T CR (test)  
M E S G CR (LCD messages)  
R E P T CR (speed dial)  
D
T
(no prompt)  
R
NOTE:  
Y = button/LED(s) "ON", N = button/LED(s) "OFF"; U = button/LED(s) "ON" some ports and "OFF" other ports.  
-27-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-S  
PROGRAM 12  
SYSTEM ASSIGNMENTS – BASIC TIMING  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter the Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 12  
Press CR.  
P 12  
P12  
Check the record sheet and enter the program code that is  
required.  
P12 3 1  
As an example, feature 3, enter 3.  
The present selection will be displayed.  
4
5
Refer to the record sheet and change if required.  
As an example, change it to 2.  
Enter 2.  
P12 3 1 2  
To Exit Program/Store Data  
A) To store data, press CR.  
B) Continue returning to Step 3 until all Program 12 data is  
entered.  
P12 3 1 2  
P12 ##  
P
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
TABLE RM-T  
PROGRAM 13  
DEFINING THE MESSAGE CENTER  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter the Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
>MODE PROG  
P
2
3
4
5
P 13  
P13  
Enter Program Number 13  
Press CR.  
Enter the number 1. The present port number will be displayed.  
P13  
P13 1 NN  
Refer to the record sheet and enter the required port number.  
Example: Port 00, enter 0 0 CR.  
P13 1 NN 00  
P13  
To Exit this Program  
P13 1 NN 00  
P13 ##  
P
Press # # CR.  
NOTES:  
1. A blank is displayed by "N".  
2. Programs 15 and 16 use Type 1 procedure.  
-28-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-U  
PROGRAM 19  
BACKGROUND MUSIC SLOT IDENTIFICATION  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter the Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 19  
Press CR.  
P 19  
P19  
Enter the number 1.  
P19  
The present slot number will be displayed.  
P19 1 NN  
4
Refer to the record sheet and enter the required slot number.  
Example: Slot 04, enter 0 4 CR.  
P19 1 NN 04  
P19  
5
To Exit this Program  
Press # # CR.  
P1 19 ##  
P
NOTE:  
Program 20 uses Type 2 procedure.  
TABLE RM-V  
PROGRAM 21  
MODEM POOLING  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
2
3
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
>MODE PROG  
P
Enter Program Number 21  
Press CR.  
P 21  
P21  
Refer to the System Record Sheet, and enter the required port  
number for the PDIU-DS.  
P21 04  
Example: port 04; Enter: 0 4 .  
4
5
Press #.  
P21 04 # NN  
P21 04 # NN 08  
The system will display the presently selected standard telephone  
port number.  
Refer to the System Record Sheet, and enter the required  
standard telephone port number.  
Example: Port 08; Enter: 0 8 .  
6
To Exit Program/Store Data  
P21 04 # NN 08  
A) To store data, press CR.  
B) Continue returning to Step 3 until all Program 21 data  
is entered.  
P21 ##  
P
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
-29-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-W  
PROGRAM 22  
DATA STATION HUNTING (DATA CALL ONLY)  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter the Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
>MODE PROG  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 22  
Press CR.  
P 22  
P22  
Refer to the record sheet and enter the required  
port number.  
P22 03  
Example: Port 03, enter 0 3.  
P22 03# NN  
4
5
Enter #. The present data will be displayed.  
P22 03# NN 00  
Refer to the record sheet and enter the port number  
that will be the hunt point.  
Example: Port 00, enter 0 0 .  
P22 03# NN 00  
6
To Exit Program/Store Data  
P22 ##  
P
A) To store data, press CR.  
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 22  
data is entered.  
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
TABLE RM-X  
PROGRAM 28  
DSS CONSOLE/ATTENDANT TELEPHONE ASSIGNMENTS  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
>MODE PROG  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 28  
Press CR.  
P 28  
P28  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required DSS  
console number (1 ~ 2).  
P28 1 1 2  
The system will display the telephone to which the  
DSS console is assigned.  
Example: DSS console number 1 is assigned to telephone  
number 1.  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required.  
Example: Assign DSS console 1 to electronic telephone 2.  
Enter: 2.  
4
To Exit Program/Store Data  
A) To store data, press CR.  
B) Continue returning to Step 3 until all data has  
been entered for this program.  
P28 1 1 2  
P28 ##  
P
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
NOTE:  
This program applies to digital and electronic DSS consoles and digital and electronic telephones.  
-30-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-Y  
PROGRAM 29  
DSS CONSOLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number  
Press 2 9 CR.  
P 29  
P29  
Enter Console Number and Buttonstrip Group Number  
P29  
Press  
Button Group Number (1 ~ 3)  
Console Number (1 ~ 2)  
4
5
Enter the 2-digit Button Number to be Programmed (01 ~ 20):  
P29  
P29  
(current feature code displays  
Enter New (2- or 3-digit) Feature Code  
Press or  
after button entry).  
Key code  
Button Old  
New  
code  
3-digit code  
2-digit code  
Console  
No.  
code  
Button group  
6
Press SP ACE to go to next button.  
P29  
or  
Press CR to store data.  
7
8
Continue with Step 3 until allProgram 29 data is entered.  
To Exit this Program  
Press # # CR.  
NOTE:  
Programs 30 and 31, use Type 1 procedure.  
-31-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-Z  
PROGRAM 32  
AUTOMATIC PREFERENCE  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter the Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter the Program Number 32  
Press CR.  
P 32  
P32  
Refer to the record sheet and enter the required port number.  
P32 01  
Example: Port 01, enter 0 1.  
4
5
Enter #. The present status for this port will be displayed.  
P32 01# 100  
P32 01 # 100 0  
Refer to the record sheet and enter the required  
ringing code. Example: Code 0, enter 0 .  
6
7
Refer to the record sheet and enter the required  
automatic off-hook code. Example: Code 11, enter 1 1.  
P32 01# 100 011  
P32 01# 100 011  
P32 ##  
P
To Exit Program/Store Data  
A) To store data, press CR.  
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 32 data  
is entered.  
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
TABLE RM-AA  
PROGRAM 33  
STATION HUNTING  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter the Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
>MODE PROG  
P
P 33  
P33  
2
3
Enter Program Number 33  
Press CR.  
Refer to the record sheet and enter the required  
port number.  
P33 03  
Example: Port 03, enter 0 3.  
P33 03# NN  
4
5
Enter #. The present data will be displayed.  
P33 03# NN 00  
Refer to the record sheet and enter the port number  
that will be the hunt point.  
Example: Port 00, enter 0 0 .  
P33 03# NN 00  
6
To Exit Program/Store Data  
P33 ##  
P
A) To store data, press CR.  
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 33  
data is entered.  
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
-32-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-AB  
PROGRAM 34  
HOLD RECALL TIMING  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter the Program Mode  
>MODE PROG  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 34  
Press CR.  
P 34  
P34  
Refer to the record sheet and enter the required  
port number.  
P34 05  
Example: Port 05, enter 0 5.  
P34 05# 032  
4
5
Press #. The present data will be displayed.  
P34 05# 032 160  
Refer to the record sheet and enter the required timing.  
Example: 160 seconds, enter 1 6 0 .  
P34 05# 032 160  
6
To Exit Program/Store Data  
P34 ##  
P
A) To store data, press CR.  
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 34  
data has been entered.  
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
NOTE:  
Program 35, use Type 2 procedure.  
TABLE RM-AC  
PROGRAM 36  
FIXED CALL FORWARD  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter the Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
>MODE PROG  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 36  
Press CR.  
P 36  
P36  
P36 00  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the  
port number for the station that will have a Fixed  
Call Forward button. Example: Port 00, enter 0 0 .  
P36 00# NN  
4
5
Press #. The present data will be displayed.  
P36 00# NN 04  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter  
the port to be forwarded to when the Fixed  
Call Forward button is pressed. Example: Port 04, enter 0 4 .  
P36 00# NN 04  
6
To Exit Program/Store Data  
P36 ##  
P
A) To store data, press CR.  
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 36  
data is entered.  
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
-33-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-AD  
PROGRAM 37  
RING TRANSFER (CAMP-ON) RECALL TIME  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter the Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter the Program Number 37  
Press CR.  
P 37  
P37  
P37 01  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the  
required port number. Example: Port 01, enter 0 1.  
P37 01# 064  
4
5
Press #. System will display the present ring transfer  
recall time.  
P37 01# 064 070  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter  
the required ring transfer timeout.  
Example: 70 seconds. Enter 0 7 0 .  
P37 01# 064 070  
6
To Exit Program/Store Data  
P37 ##  
P
A) To store data, press CR.  
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 37  
data is entered.  
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
-34-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-AE  
PROGRAM 38  
DIGITAL AND ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE BUTTONSTRIP TYPE  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter the Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter the Program Number 38  
Press CR.  
P 38  
P38  
P38 00  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the  
required port number. Example: Port 00, enter 0 0 .  
P38 00# 31  
4
5
Press #. The system will display the present  
telephone code.  
P38 00# 31 21  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter  
the required telephone code number.  
Example: Code 21, enter 2 1.  
P38 00# 31 21  
6
To Exit Program/Store Data  
P38 ##  
P
A) To store data, press CR.  
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 38  
data is entered.  
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
-35-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-AF  
PROGRAM 39  
FLEXIBLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENT  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter the Program Mode  
P
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
Enter the Program Number 39  
Press CR.  
P 39  
P39  
2
3
P39 00  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter  
the required port number.  
Example: Port 00, enter 0 0 .  
P39 00#  
Press #.  
4
5
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter  
the button number.  
P39 00# 01 00  
Example: Button 01, enter 0 1.  
The system will display the feature code presently  
assigned to this button.  
6
7
P39 00# 01 00 01  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required  
feature code (2 or 3 digits).  
Example: Code 01, enter 0 1.  
P39 00# 01 00 01  
02 02  
To select the next button number, press SP ACE.  
Continue returning to step 6 until all port  
00 features are programmed.  
8
9
P39  
Press CR to store data.  
A) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 39  
data has been entered.  
P39 00# 01 00 01  
02 02  
P39 ##  
P
B) To exit this program and store data, press # # CR.  
NOTES:  
1. Program 40, 41: use Type 2 procedure.  
2. Program 42-0: use Type 1 procedure.  
-36-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-AG  
PROGRAM 42-1 ~ 8  
PBX ACCESS CODE  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter Program Mode  
>MODE PROG  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 42  
Press CR.  
P 42  
P42  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required  
PBX group number (1 ~ 8).  
P42 1 NN  
System will display present PBX access code.  
P42 1 NN 9N  
4
5
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required  
access code.  
N = Space  
# = Don't care  
Example: 9, enter 9 N.  
P42 1 NN 9N  
To Exit Program/Store Data  
P42 ##  
P
A) To store data press CR.  
B) Return to step 3 to continue in this program.  
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
-37-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-AH  
PROGRAM 60  
SMDR OUTPUT/ACCOUNT CODE DIGIT LENGTH  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P ROGCR  
.
P
2
Enter Program Number 60  
P 60  
P60  
.
Press CR  
3A SMDR Threshold Time  
Enter: Item code 2.  
P60 21  
The system will display either "0" or "1". "0" indicates that the  
threshold time is set at 0.1 seconds. "1" indicates 10 seconds.  
The default is "1".  
Refer to the System Record Sheet, and enter the correct digit—  
if it is not already being displayed—and then CR.  
If you wish to change another parameter within this program,  
enter its associated item code. To exit this program, go to step 4.  
3B  
P60 3 1  
P60  
Allow SMDR printout.  
Enter: Action code 3.  
System will print out "1" if incoming and outgoing calls will be  
printed on SMDR. A "0" will be printed out if only outgoing calls  
will be printed.  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change (to 1 or 0), if  
required, and press CR.  
If you wish to change another parameter within this program,  
enter its associated item code. To exit this program, go to step 4.  
3C Set Account Code Digit Length  
Enter: Item code 4.  
P60 4 06  
The system will display the number of digits allowed in the  
account code. The default is 06.  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required number  
of digits (04 ~ 15) and press CR.  
If you wish to change another parameter within this program,  
enter its associated item code. To exit this program, go to step 4.  
3D SMDR Toll Calls Only  
Enter: Action code 5.  
P60 5 0  
The system will display the presently selected feature (0 ~ 5).  
The default is 0. Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the  
required feature code and press CR.  
If you wish to change another parameter within this program,  
enter its associated item code. To exit this program, go to step 4.  
P60 6 NNNN  
3E Enter DISA ID Code  
Enter: Item code 6.  
System will display last entered ID code number. Default = Blank.  
Refer to the System Record Sheets, and enter a new code if  
desired, and then press CR.  
If you wish to change another parameter within this program,  
enter its associated item code. To exit this program, go to step 4.  
3F Credit Card Call Digit Length  
Enter: Item code 7.  
P60 7 13  
The system will display the current digit length.  
Refer to the System Record Sheet, and enter the desired length,  
01 ~ 30 digits, and then CR. Example: 13 digits; enter 1 3 CR.  
If you wish to change another parameter within this program,  
enter its associated item code. To exit this program, go to step 4.  
4
To Exit Program/Store Data  
Press # # CR.  
P60 6 NNNN  
P60 ##  
P
-38-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-AI  
PROGRAM 69  
VERIFIABLE ACCOUNT CODE ENTRY  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 69  
Press CR.  
P 69  
P69  
P69 001 NNNNNNNNNNNNNNN  
Refer to the System Record Sheet, and enter the required code  
number (000 ~ 299).  
Example: code number 001; Enter: 0 0 1.  
The system will display the present account code number  
assigned to 001.  
Note:  
The number of digits will be as defined in Program 60-4.  
4
5
A) Refer to the System Record Sheets, and enter the required  
account code number.  
Example: number 987654; Enter: 9 8 7 6 5 4 .  
B) To clear and erase all data enter (all caps)  
N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N .  
P69 001 NNNNNN 987654  
To Exit Program/Store Data  
P69 001 NNNNNN 987654  
A) To store data, press CR.  
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 69 data  
is entered.  
P69 ##  
P
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
-39-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-AJ  
PROGRAM 70  
VERIFY ACCOUNT CODE/TOLL RESTRICTION ASSIGNMENT  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
>MODE PROG  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 70  
Press CR.  
P 70  
P70  
P70 002 YZ  
Refer to the System Record Sheet, and enter the required code  
number (000 ~ 299).  
Example: code number 002; Enter: 0 0 2.  
The system will display the present digit Restrict (Y) and Toll  
Restriction Status (Z) for entered code number.  
4
5
Refer to the System Record Sheet, and enter the required  
digit Restrict and Toll Restriction data.  
Example: digit Restrict (1) and Toll Restriction (3);  
Enter: 1 3.  
P70 002 YZ 13  
To Exit Program/Store Data  
P70 002 YZ 13  
A) To store data, press CR.  
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 70 data  
is entered.  
P70 ##  
P
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
NOTE:  
Programs 77-1 and 77-2, use Type 1 procedure.  
-40-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-AK  
PROGRAM 78  
CO LINE SPECIAL RINGING ASSIGNMENTS-DISA/IMDU/  
NIGHT RINGING OVER EXTERNAL PAGE  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter Program Mode  
>MODE PROG  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 78  
Press CR.  
P 78  
P78  
P78 1  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the feature number  
for the feature to be programmed.  
Example: Feature code 1, enter 1.  
4
5
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the code number  
for the area of the feature being programmed.  
Example: Code 3, enter 3.  
P78 13  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the CO line buttons P78 13 01 N  
that will be associated with this feature.  
02 N Y  
Example: CO button 01, enter 0 1.  
The system will designate whether the CO button/LED is on/off.  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required.  
Press SP ACE to display next CO button/LED.  
6
To Exit Program/Store Data  
A) To store data, press CR.  
P78 13 01 N  
02 N Y  
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered  
for this program.  
P78 ##  
P
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
NOTE:  
Program 79 uses Type 2 procedure.  
-41-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-AL  
PROGRAM 80  
DIGITAL AND ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE RINGING TONES  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter Program Mode.  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
>MODE PROG  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 80  
Press CR.  
P 80  
P80  
P80 01  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required  
port number.  
Example: Port 01, enter 0 1.  
4
Press # key.  
P80 01# 1  
The system will display 1 or 2 corresponding to tone 1 or tone 2.  
5
6
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required.  
Example: Tone 2, enter 2.  
P80 01# 1 2  
To Exit Program/Store Data  
P80 01# 1 2  
A) To store data, press CR.  
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered  
for this program.  
P80 ##  
P
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
NOTE:  
Programs 81 ~ 89 use Type 2 procedure.  
-42-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-AM  
PROGRAM 93  
CO LINE IDENTIFICATION  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 93  
Press CR.  
P 93  
P93  
(up to 16)  
Enter Action Code 1  
P93 1 02  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the appropriate  
CO line number.  
Current I.D.  
Example: CO line 2, enter 0 2.  
The system will display previously entered identification  
characters (up to 16 characters).  
(up to 16)  
4
5
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change identification  
P93 1 02  
P93 1 02  
if required:  
. . . . . . . . . .  
(16 characters maximum).  
OVERSEAS  
Example: OVERSEAS.  
(up to 16)  
To Exit Program/Store Data  
A) To store data, press CR.  
OVERSEAS  
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered  
for this program.  
P93 ##  
P
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
NOTE:  
Use SP ACE to clear characters.  
-43-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-AN  
PROGRAM 44 (A OR B)  
TOLL RESTRICTION TRAVELING CLASS OVERRIDE CODE ENTRY  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
>MODE PROG  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 44 (Do not enter A or B)  
Press CR.  
P 44  
P44  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required Toll  
Restriction Class number (1 ~ 4).  
P44 1 NNNN  
Example: Class 1; Enter: 1.  
The system will display the present override code assigned to  
that class number.  
4
5
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required override P44 1 NNNN 3456  
code number.  
Example: 3456; Enter 3 4 5 6 .  
To Exit Program/Store Data  
P44 1 NNNN 3456  
A) To store data, press CR.  
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 44 data  
is entered.  
P44 ##  
P
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
TABLE RM-AO  
PROGRAM 45-1  
TOLL RESTRICTION DIAL PLAN  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter the Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
>MODE PROG  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 45  
Press CR.  
P 45  
P45  
Enter the number 1.  
P45 1 1  
The system will display the present dial plan code number (1 ~ 5).  
Refer to the record sheet and enter the required code number.  
Example: Code 2, enter 2.  
P45 1 1 2  
4
5
P45 1 1 2  
P45 ##  
P
To Exit Program/Store Data  
A) To store data, press CR.  
B) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
-44-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-AP  
PROGRAM 45-2  
TOLL RESTRICTION DISABLE  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter the Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
Enter Program Number 45  
Press CR.  
P 45  
P45  
3
4
Enter the number 2.  
P45 2  
Refer to the record sheet and enter the required CO line number. P45 2 01 N  
Example: CO line 01, enter 0 1. The system will display  
N or Y to define if the LED is on or off.  
5
6
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change the CO line  
status as required (Y or N).  
Press SP ACE to step to next CO line number.  
P45 2 01 N Y  
02 N  
To Exit Program/Store Data  
A) To store data, press CR.  
B) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
P45 2 01 N Y  
02 N  
P45 ##  
P
TABLE RM-AQ  
PROGRAM 45-3 ~ 6  
EQUAL ACCESS, SPECIAL COMMON CARRIER NUMBERS, and AUTHORIZATION CODE DIGIT LENGTH  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 45  
Press CR.  
P 45  
P45  
Refer to the record sheet and enter the item number (3 ~ 6).  
Example: Item 3, enter 3. The system will display  
the present equal access number or EA1 Code.  
P45 3 NNNNN  
4
5
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required number. P45 3 NNNNN 12345  
Example: 12345, enter 1 2 3 4 5 CR. P45  
Enter code number 4. The system will display present authorization P45 4 00 12  
code digit length. Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter  
the required authorization code number digit length.  
Example: 12, enter: 1 2 CR.  
P45  
6
To exit this program, press # # CR.  
P45 ##  
P
NOTE:  
Items 5 and 6 are entered the same way as 3 and 4, respectively.  
-45-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-AR  
PROGRAM 45-8 ~ 9  
TOLL RESTRICTION OVERRIDE CODE  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter the Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter the Program Number 45  
Press CR.  
P 45  
P45  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter 8 or 9 for the  
desired code number. The system will display the present  
override code number.  
P45 8 NNNN  
4
5
Refer to the record sheet and enter a new number if required.  
Example: 1234. Enter: 1 2 3 4 .  
P45 8 NNNN 1234  
To Exit Program/Store Data  
A) To store data, press CR.  
B) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
P45 8 NNNN 1234  
P45 ##  
P
TABLE RM-AS  
PROGRAM 46–2 ~ 4  
TOLL RESTRICTION ALLOWED/DENIED AREA CODES ASSIGNED BY CLASS  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
>MODE PROG  
P
2
3
4
Enter Program Number 46  
Press CR.  
P 46  
P46  
Enter class number (1 ~ 4).  
P46  
Class Number  
Enter 2, 3, or 4 SP ACE  
P46  
• 2 — to add codes to memory (allow).  
2, 3 or 4  
• 3 — to delete codes from memory (deny).  
ALLOW? or DENY?  
P46 X Y  
• 4 SP ACE — to display codes in memory (allowed codes).  
5
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the area code or  
area code group. Single  
Press SP ACE to enter more codes.  
. Group  
.
ALLOW  
or DENY  
–
*
6
7
8
Press SP ACE to temporarily store data. Press CR when  
completed.  
P46  
Continue returning to step 3 until all data input is completed for  
this program.  
To Exit this Program  
Press # # CR.  
P46 ##  
P
-46-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-AT  
PROGRAM 46-6 ~ 8  
TOLL RESTRICTION ALLOWED/DENIED OFFICE CODES ASSIGNED BY CLASS  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter Program Mode  
>MODE PROG  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
4
Enter Program Number 46  
Press CR.  
P 46  
P46  
Enter class number (1 ~ 4).  
P46  
Class Number (X)  
6, 7, or 8 (Y)  
Enter 6 , 7, or 8 SP ACE.  
• 6 — to add codes to memory (allowed).  
P46  
• 7 — to delete codes from memory (deny).  
• 8 SP ACE — to display codes in memory (allowed codes).  
5
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the office code or  
P46 X Y  
ALLOW  
or DENY  
office code group. Single  
. Group  
.
–
*
Press SP ACE to enter more codes.  
6
7
8
Press SP ACE to temporarily store data. Press SP ACE when  
completed.  
P46  
Continue returning to step 3 until all data input is completed for  
this program.  
To Exit this Program  
Press # # CR.  
P46 ##  
P
-47-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-AU  
PROGRAM 46-10 ~ 40  
TOLL RESTRICTION CLASS PARAMETERS  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter Program Mode  
>MODE PROG  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 46  
Press CR.  
P 46  
P46  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the Toll Restriction  
class number (1 ~ 4). Then enter the number 0 .  
Example: Class 1, enter 1 0 .  
P46 10  
4
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required  
button/LED number.  
P46 10 11 TABLE 1N  
Example: Button number 11, enter 1 1. The system will display  
the status of the button/LED.  
5
6
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required (Y or N). P46 10 11 TABLE1 N Y  
To access next button number, press SP ACE.  
12 TABLE2 N  
To Exit Program/Store Data  
A) To store data, press CR.  
P46 10 11 TABLE1 N Y  
12 TABLE2 N  
B) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
P46 ##  
P
-48-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-AV  
PROGRAM 47  
TOLL RESTRICTION EXCEPTION OFFICE CODES ASSIGNED BY AREA CODE  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
Enter Program Number 47  
Press CR.  
P 47  
P47  
3
4
Enter exception table (1 ~ 8) and press 1.  
P47 Y 1 AREA CODE NNN  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required area  
code and press CR.  
P47 Y 1 AREA CODE NNN 714  
P47  
Example: AC 714, enter 7 1 4 CR.  
5a To Add Exception Office Codes to Table  
P47  
2
• Enter exception table (1 ~ 8) and press 2.  
Except  
Except  
• Enter exception codes  
or  
.
.
*
• Press SP ACE to add more codes.  
• Press SP ACE CR to store codes.  
5b To Delete Exception Office Codes from Table  
P47  
3
• Enter exception table (1 ~ 8) and press 3.  
Delete  
Delete  
• Enter exception codes  
or  
*
• Press SP ACE to delete more codes.  
• Press SP ACE CR to store codes.  
5c To Display Exception Office Codes in Table  
P47  
4
• Enter exception table (1 ~ 8) and press 4 SP ACE.  
• Press SP ACE to display more codes.  
• Press CR to exit display.  
Except  
6
To Exit Program/Store Data: # # CR.  
P47 Y 2  
Except  
P47 ##  
P
-49-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-AW  
PROGRAM 48  
STATION TOLL RESTRICTION CLASSIFICATION  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter the Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 48  
Press CR.  
P 48  
P48  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required port  
P48 00  
number.  
Example: Port 00, enter 0 0 .  
4
5
Press # key. The system will display the present data as a  
two-digit code: The first digit designates digit free or digit restrict.  
The second digit is the station restriction code. Refer to the  
System Record Sheet and change if required.  
P48 00# 13  
To Exit Program/Store Data  
A) To store data, press CR.  
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data is recorded for this  
program.  
P48 00# 13  
P48 ##  
P
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
TABLE RM-AX  
PROGRAM 50-1  
LCR PARAMETERS  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
>MODE PROG  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 50.  
Press CR.  
P 50  
P50  
Enter 1. Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required P50 1 01 N  
button/LED number.  
Example: Button 01, enter 0 1.  
4
5
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change button/LED status, P50 1 01 N  
if required.  
02 N  
Press SP ACE to move to next button/LED.  
To Exit Program/Store Data  
A) To store data, press CR.  
P50 1 01 N  
02 N  
B) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
P50 ##  
P
-50-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-AY  
PROGRAM 50-2  
LCR HOME AREA CODE  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
Enter Program Mode  
1
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 50  
Press CR.  
P 50  
P50  
Enter the number 2. The system will display the last area code  
programmed. Refer to the System Record Sheet and change  
if required.  
P50 2 NNN  
4
To Exit Program/Store Data  
A) To store data, press CR.  
B) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
P50 2 NNN  
P50 ##  
P
TABLE RM-AZ  
PROGRAM 50-31 ~ 35  
LCR SPECIAL CODES  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
>MODE PROG  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 50  
Press CR.  
P 50  
P50  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter 31 ~ 35 as required. P50 31 NNNN  
Example: 31, enter 3 1.  
System will display previously programmed number. Refer to the  
System Record Sheet and change if required.  
4
To Exit Program/Store Data  
A) To store data, press CR.  
P50 31 NNNN  
P50 ##  
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data for this program has P  
been entered.  
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
-51-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-BA  
PROGRAM 50-4  
LCR LDI PLAN NUMBER  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 50  
Press CR.  
P 50  
P50  
Enter the number 4  
P50 4 1  
The system will display the present LDI route number.  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required.  
4
Exit Program/Store Data  
A) To store data, press CR.  
B) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
P50 4 1  
P50 ##  
P
TABLE RM-BB  
PROGRAM 50-5  
LCR LOCAL CALL PLAN NUMBER  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
>MODE PROG  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 50  
Press CR.  
P 50  
P50  
Enter the number 5  
P50 5 1 2  
The system will display the present local route plan number.  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required.  
Example: 2, enter 2.  
4
Exit Program/Store Data  
A) To store data, press CR.  
B) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
P50 5 1 2  
P50 ##  
P
-52-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-BC  
PROGRAM 50-6  
LCR DIAL ZERO TIMEOUT  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 50  
Press CR.  
P 50  
P50  
Enter the number 6  
P50 6 06 10  
The system will display the present dial zero timeout.  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required.  
Example: 10, enter 1 0 .  
4
Exit Program/Store Data  
P50 6 06 10  
A)  
B)  
P50 ##  
P
To store data, press CR.  
To exit this program, press # # CR.  
TABLE RM-BD  
PROGRAM 51  
LCR AREA CODES  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
>MODE PROG  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 51  
Press CR.  
P 51  
P51  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required  
route plan number (1 ~ 8).  
P51 1  
Example: Route plan 1, enter 1.  
4
P51  
Enter 2, 3, or 4 SP ACE  
• 2 — To add area codes to table.  
2, 3 or 4  
Plan No.  
• 3 — To delete area codes from table.  
• 4 SP ACE — to display area codes in table,  
continue to press SP ACE to display more codes.  
Press CR to exit display.  
P51  
<— CODES  
5
6
P51  
Enter codes  
press SP ACE after each code entry.  
or  
and  
*
P51 12  
Exit Program/Store Data  
A) To store data, press CR.  
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been  
entered for this program.  
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
212  
or  
P51 ##  
P
-53-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-BE  
PROGRAM 52  
LCR OFFICE CODE EXCEPTIONS FOR SPECIFIED AREA CODE  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
>MODE PROG  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 52  
Press CR.  
P 52  
P52  
Define Route Plan Number  
P52 10 3  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the  
LCR Plan No.  
exception table number (1 ~ 8).  
Action Code  
Example: Table 1, enter 1.  
Exception Table No.  
Enter Action code 0 .  
The system will print out the currently defined route  
plan number. Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter  
new plan number if required. Example: Change to 3.  
4
Define Area Code Number  
Press CR.  
Enter exception table number (1 ~ 8) defined in step 3.  
Enter Action code 1.  
P52 11  
P52  
212  
Area Code  
Action Code  
Exception Table No.  
The system will print out the currently defined area  
code number. Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the  
new area code number if required.  
Example: Change to 212, enter 2 1 2.  
Press CR.  
5
6
Display Office Codes  
Enter exception table number defined in step 3.  
Enter Action code 4 .  
Press SP ACE to display previously selected office codes.  
Continually press SP ACE until all previously selected  
codes have been displayed, then press CR.  
P52 14  
P52 12  
Office Codes  
To Add (2) or Delete (3) Office Codes  
Press CR.  
300-325  
Enter exception table number defined in step 3.  
Refer to the System Record Sheets and enter 2  
to add office codes or 3 to delete office codes.  
Example: Add office codes 300-325  
P52  
Enter 2 (or 3) 3 0 0  
3 2 5 CR.  
*
7
P52 ##  
P
To Exit Program/Store Data  
A) Data was stored when CR was pressed in step 6.  
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data is entered  
for this program.  
C) To exit this program.  
Press # # CR.  
-54-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-BF  
PROGRAM 53  
LCR SCHEDULE ASSIGNMENT  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 53  
Press CR.  
P 53  
P53  
Define Route Plan Number  
P53 1  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the route  
plan number (1 ~ 8).  
Example: Route Plan 1, enter 1.  
4
5
Define Schedule Number  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required  
schedule number (1 ~ 3).  
P53 11  
Example: Schedule 1, enter 1.  
P53 110 0000 0800  
P53  
Enter Code Number 0  
The system will display the previously selected time for  
the route plan number (step 3) and the schedule number (step 4).  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change the time if required.  
Example: Change to 0800. Enter 0 8 0 0 .  
Press CR and repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for all plans/schedules.  
NOTE: Enter time using 24-hour format: H H M M .  
6
P53 111 NNNN 12  
P53  
Priority Class Assignment  
Enter the route plan number as defined in step 3.  
Enter the schedule number as defined in step 4.  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required  
station group number (1 ~ 4).  
Example: Group 1, enter 1.  
The system will display the previously entered route definition  
numbers (reference Program 54 ).  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter required  
route definition numbers (1 ~ 4) and press CR.  
Example: Enter 1 and 2 CR.  
Continue to repeat steps 3, 4, and 6 until all plans/schedules  
are entered.  
7
To Exit Program/Store Data  
A) Data was stored when pressing CR in step 6.  
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data is entered  
for this program.  
P53 ##  
P
C) To exit this program.  
Press # # CR.  
-55-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-BG  
PROGRAM 54  
LCR ROUTE DEFINITION  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 54  
Press CR.  
P 54  
P54  
P54 1  
Enter Route Plan Number  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required  
route plan number (1 ~ 8).  
Example: Route plan 1, enter 1.  
4
Enter Route Definition Number  
P54 12 11 32  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required  
route definition number (1 ~ 4).  
Modified Digit Table No.  
Example: Enter route definition number 2, enter 2.  
The system will display the previously entered CO line  
group number (1 ~ 8) and the modified digits table number (1 ~ 6).  
CO Line Group No.  
Route Definition No.  
Plan No.  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the CO line  
group and modified digit numbers as required, then press CR.  
Example: Change the CO line group number to 3 and the  
modified digits table to 2. Enter: 3 2 CR.  
5
To Exit Program/Store Data  
P54 12 11 32  
A) To store data, press CR.  
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered  
for this program.  
P54 ##  
P
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
-56-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-BH  
PROGRAM 55-0  
LCR MODIFIED DIGITS-DELETE  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 55  
Press CR.  
P 55  
P55  
P55 1  
Enter Modified Digits Table Number  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the modified  
digits table number (1 ~ 6).  
Example: Enter modified digits table number 1, enter 1.  
4
5
Enter Code 0  
P55 10 05 10  
The system will display any previously entered number of  
digits to be deleted (01 ~ 10).  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change number if required.  
Example: Change to 10, enter: 1 0 .  
To Exit Program/Store Data  
P55 10 05 10  
A) To store data, press CR.  
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered  
for this program.  
P55 ##  
P
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
-57-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-BI  
PROGRAM 55-1  
LCR MODIFIED DIGITS-ADD  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 55  
Press CR.  
P 55  
P55  
P55 1  
Enter Modified Digits Table Number  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required  
modified digits table number (1 ~ 6).  
Example: Enter table number 1, enter 1.  
(up to 22 digits)  
4
Enter Code 1  
P55 11  
1 2 3 4 P3  
The system will display any previously entered digits (up to 22).  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter new numbers,  
if required.  
Example: Enter 1 2 3 4 P 3.  
NOTE: Pause codes may also be entered. To enter pauses,  
press "P" plus the pause number (1 ~ 8).  
Special Code Input  
Pause = P 1 ~ P 8 .  
Tone = T at beginning of digits to convert.  
Clear = C as first digit, then CR.  
5
To Exit Program/Store Data  
P55 11  
A) To store data, press CR.  
1 2 3 4 P3  
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered  
for this program.  
P55 ##  
P
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
-58-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-BJ  
PROGRAM 55-2  
LCR MODIFIED DIGITS-END  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 55  
Press CR.  
P 55  
P55  
P55 1  
Enter Modified Digits Table Number  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required  
modified digits table number (1 ~ 6).  
Example: Enter table number 1, enter 1.  
(up to 22 digits)  
4
Enter Code 2  
P55 12  
1 2 3 4 P3  
The system will display any previously entered digits (up to 22).  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter new numbers,  
if required.  
Example: Enter 1 2 3 4 P 3.  
NOTE: Pause codes may also be entered. To enter pauses,  
press "P" plus the pause number (1 ~ 8).  
Special Code Input  
Pause =  
Tone  
Clear =  
P 1 ~ P 8 .  
=
T at beginning of digits to convert.  
C as first digit, then CR.  
(up to 22 digits)  
5
To Exit Program/Store Data  
P55 12  
A) To store data, press CR.  
1 2 3 4 P3  
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered  
for this program.  
P55 ##  
P
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
-59-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-BK  
PROGRAM 56  
LCR STATION GROUP ASSIGNMENT  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE PROG  
1
Enter Program Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.  
P
2
3
Enter Program Number 56  
Press CR.  
P 56  
P56  
P56 01  
Enter Port Number  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the  
required port number,  
Example: Port 01, enter 0 1.  
or  
.
*
4
5
P56 01# 1 4  
Press # Key (if single port  
entry in step 3).  
The system will display any previously entered group number (1 ~ 4).  
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change as required.  
Example: Change to 4, enter 4 .  
To Exit Program/Store Data  
P56 01# 1 4  
A) To store data, press CR.  
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered  
for this program.  
P56 ##  
P
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.  
TABLE RM-BL  
PROGRAM DATA DUMP  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter the Data Dump Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter D U M P CR.  
>MODE DUMP  
D
2
To Output Program Data  
D PROG  
Enter P R G  
CR  
= Program number or A L L for all programs.  
3
4
To Stop Printout at Any Time  
Enter DELETE CR at the same time.  
D
To Exit the Dump Mode  
>MODE  
Enter Q U I T CR.  
-60-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-BM  
SPEED DIALING DATA DUMP  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE DUMP  
1
Enter the Data Dump Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter D U M P CR.  
D
2
To Output Speed Dialing Data  
Enter R E P  
CR ---or--- R E P  
CR  
= A L L or S Y S  
= Port number for individual station speed dial.  
3
4
To Stop Printout at Any Time  
Enter DELETE CR at the same time.  
D
To Exit the Dump Mode  
Enter Q U I T CR.  
TABLE RM-BN  
LCD MESSAGING DATA DUMP  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE DUMP  
1
Enter the Data Dump Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter D U M P CR.  
2
To Output Message Data  
D MSG  
Enter M S G  
CR ---or--- M S G  
CR  
= A L L or S Y S  
= Port number of individual station.  
3
4
To Stop Printout at Any Time  
Enter DELETE CR at the same time.  
D
To Exit the Dump Mode  
>MODE  
Enter Q U I T CR.  
-61-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-BO  
MODE 95  
REMOTE CALLING STATION MESSAGING (ADD/REVIEW/CHANGE)  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter the Message Mode  
>MODE MESG  
At the >MODE prompt, enter M E S G CR.  
2
To Add Or Review a Calling Station Message  
Set the terminal keyboard to the lower case (cap lock off) and  
enter m 9 5.  
m 95  
NOTE:  
Enter “m” anytime it is desired to start over in this procedure.  
3
4
Enter X X X (XXX = station number where the message will be m95 XXX  
set and stored).  
Enter p  
(p = page command and  
m95 XXX p  
[M]  
= 2-digit message memory location: 10 ~ 19 personal  
messages and 60 ~ 99 = system message).  
NOTES:  
1. To store system messages permanently, DKT or EKT XXX  
must be the station at port 00.  
2. After p  
is entered, the previously stored message is  
displayed. If there is no stored message, nothing is displayed.  
5
6
7
To Change Previous Message  
Set the terminal keyboard to upper case and change message  
(alphanumeric, 32 characters max.).  
m95 XXX p  
[M+]  
To Set the Message on DKT or EKT XXX’s LCD  
Set the terminal keyboard to lower case and enter p m 0 .  
m95 XXX p  
m 0  
[M+] p  
Zero  
To Exit the Message Mode  
m 0  
At any time, enter m 0 q (lower case).  
q
> MODE  
NOTES:  
1. To cancel a message set via Mode 95, use Mode 97 procedure.  
2. [M] represents the message entered.  
3. DKT = digital telephone; EKT = electronic telephone.  
-62-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-BP  
MODE 97  
REMOTE CALLING STATION MESSAGING (ADD/CHANGE)  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE MESG  
1
Enter the Message Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter M E S G CR.  
2
To Add a Message (or change a previously stored message)  
Set the terminal keyboard to lower case (caps lock off) and  
enter m 9 7.  
m 97  
NOTE:  
Enter “m” at anytime it is desired to start over in this procedure.  
3
4
Enter X X X (XXX = station number for which the message will m97 XXX  
be set and stored).  
Enter: p  
(p = page command and  
m97 XXX p  
= 2-digit message memory location: 10 ~ 19 personal  
messages and 60 ~ 99 = system messages).  
NOTE:  
To store system message change permanently, DKT or EKT XXX  
must be station assigned to port 00.  
5
To Add a Message  
m97 XXX p  
m97 XXX p  
[M]  
Set the terminal keyboard to upper case and enter message  
(alphanumeric, 32 characters max.). New message displays as  
it is entered.  
6
7
To Set the Message on the DKT/EKT LCD  
Set the terminal keyboard to lower case and enter p m 0 .  
[M] p  
m 0  
Zero  
To Exit the Message Mode  
At any time, enter m 0 q (lower case).  
m 0  
q
>MODE  
NOTES:  
1. To cancel a message set via Mode 95, use Mode 97 with any message number in step 4 and skip  
step 5.  
2. [M] represents the message entered.  
3. DKT = digital telephone; EKT = electronic telephone.  
-63-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-BQ  
MODE 94  
REMOTE CALLED STATION MESSAGING (ADD/REVIEW/CHANGE)  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter the Message Mode  
>MODE MESG  
At the >MODE prompt, enter M E S G CR.  
2
To Add Or Review a Called Station Message  
Set the terminal keyboard to the lower case (cap lock off) and  
enter m 9 4 .  
m 94  
3
4
5
Enter X X X (XXX = Destination station number or destination  
group number [30 = all stations, 31-34 per system, Program 31]).  
m94 XXX  
Enter p Y Y Y (p = page command [lower case] and  
Y Y Y = originating station number).  
m94 XXX p YYY  
m94 XXX p YYY p  
Enter p  
(p = page command [lower case] and  
[M]  
= 2-digit message memory location: 10 ~ 19 personal  
messages and 60 ~ 99 = system messages).  
After p  
is entered, the previously stored message (M) is  
displayed. (If there is no stored message, nothing is displayed.)  
6
7
To Change the Message (M+)  
Set the terminal keyboard to upper case and change message  
as required (alphanumeric, 32 characters max. for total message).  
m94 XXX p YYY p  
[M+]  
To Set Message  
m94 XXX p YYY p  
[M+] p  
Set the terminal keyboard to lower case and enter p m 0 .  
Destination station: Msg LED flashes, “CALL YYYM” is  
displayed.  
m 0  
Zero  
Origination station: “SENT XXXM” is displayed.  
8
To Exit the Message Mode  
At any time, enter m 0 q (lower case).  
m 0  
q
>MODE  
NOTES:  
1. Press m at any time to start over.  
2. [M] represents the message entered.  
-64-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-BR  
MODE 96  
REMOTE CALLED STATION MESSAGING (ADD/CHANGE)  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE MESG  
1
Enter the Message Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter M E S G CR.  
2
To Change or Add a New Called Station Message  
Set the terminal keyboard to the lower case (cap lock off) and  
enter m 9 6 .  
m 96  
NOTE:  
Enter “m” (lower case) anytime it is desired to start over  
in this procedure.  
3
Enter X X X (XXX = destination station number or destination  
station group number – 30 = all DKTs/EKTs, 31 ~ 34 per system,  
Program 31).  
m96 XXX  
4
5
Enter p Y Y Y (p = page command and YYY = originating  
station number).  
m96 XXX p YYY  
Enter p  
(p = page command and  
m96 XXX p YYY p  
= 2-digit message memory location: 10 ~ 19 personal  
messages and 60 ~ 99 = system messages).  
6
7
To Add the New Message [M]  
m96 XXX p YYY p [M]  
Set the terminal keyboard to upper case and enter message  
as required (alphanumeric, 32 characters max.). New message  
displays as it is entered.  
To Set the Message  
m96 XXX p YYY p [M] p  
Set the terminal keyboard to lower case and enter p m 0 .  
Destination station: Msg LED flashes, “CALL YYYM” is  
displayed on LCD.  
m 0  
Zero  
Origination station: “SENT XXXM” is displayed on LCD.  
8
To Exit the Message Mode  
At any time, enter m 0 p (lower case).  
m 0  
q
>MODE  
NOTES:  
1. [M] represents the message entered.  
2. DKT = digital telephone; EKT = electronic telephone.  
-65-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-BS  
STATION/CO LINE STATUS CHECK  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE TEST  
1
Enter the Test Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter T E S T CR.  
2
To Check Station Line Status  
T SEKT XX IDLE ON-HOOK  
T
Enter S E K T X X (X X = port number).  
Possible status: Idle on-hook, idle off-hook, busy on-hook,  
busy off-hook.  
IMPORTANT!  
To prevent service interference, station line status must be  
idle on-hook before initiating a test from that station.  
3
4
To Check CO Line Status  
Enter S C O Y Y (Y Y = CO line number).  
Possible status: Idle, busy.  
T SCOYY – BUSY  
T
To Exit the Test Mode  
At the T prompt, enter Q U I T CR.  
T QUIT  
> MODE  
TABLE RM-BT  
GENERAL STATION ACCESS AND BUTTON ACTIVATION  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter the Test Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter T E S T CR.  
>MODE TEST  
T
2
3
To Activate A Button  
Enter T K X X K Y Y CR.  
XX = Port number and YY = button number.  
NOTE: Button numbers begin at 01.  
T TKXX KYY  
T
To Activate A Function Button  
Enter T K X X F CR F = function button designator  
TTKXX F  
T
SPKR  
HOLD  
CONF  
MIC  
S
H
C
M
F = S, H, C, M  
4
To Access A CO Line (via CO Access Code) and Dial Out  
TTKXX K01 AAA  
T
Enter T K X X K 0 1 A A A  
AAA = 1, 2, or 3-digit CO line access code and  
= telephone number.  
CR.  
5
6
To Access A CO Line (via CO Line Button) and Dial Out  
TTKXX KYY  
T
Enter T K X X K Y Y  
CR.  
YY = CO line number.  
Telephone Number  
To Exit the Test Mode  
At T prompt, enter Q U I T CR.  
-66-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-BU  
CO LINE TEST  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
1
Enter the Test Mode  
>MODE TEST  
At the >MODE prompt, enter T E S T CR.  
2
3
To Verify Station/CO Line Status  
Station line status, enter S E K T X X (X X = station port).  
CO line status, enter S C O Y Y (Y Y = CO line number).  
T SEKT XX IDLE ON-HOOK  
T
T SCO YY IDLE  
Call Remote Station B (from SEKT XX and CO line YY)  
T TK XX KYY  
T
Enter T K X X K Y Y  
= station B’s telephone number)  
CR.  
(
Answer station B.  
NOTE:  
If the system is equipped with Music-on-hold, go to step 4. If the  
line must be tested via a CO-to-CO connection, go to step 6.  
4
A) Press the Ho ld button on TK XX (station B on hold).  
Enter T K X X H CR.  
T TKXX H  
T
B) Listen at station B and check that the transmission from the  
music source is acceptable.  
C) Press the Sp k r button on TKXX (to release the call).  
Enter T K X X S CR.  
T TKXX S  
T
5
6
Continue returning to step 2 until all CO lines are tested.  
To Set Up A CO-to-CO Connection  
Press the Cn f/Tr n button on T K X X.  
Enter T K X X C CR.  
T TKXX C  
T
NOTES:  
1. Station B is connected via step 3.  
2. Verify that Program 15-5 allows CO-to-CO connections.  
3. The next step must be completed immediately to avoid  
dial tone timeout.  
7
Call station C (or local time/weather) via CO line C.  
T TKXX KYY  
T
Enter: T K X X K Y Y  
CR.  
X X = CO line C’s button number and = telephone number of  
station C.  
Answer station C (or verify time/weather connection) and go to  
next step.  
8
9
Press the Cn f/Tr n button on STXX to establish a conference  
between all parties.  
T TKXX C  
T
If you wish to tie the two CO lines together and hang up:  
Enter T K X X C CR.  
T TKXX C  
TTKXX S  
T
Enter T K X X S CR.  
10 Continue returning to step 2 until all CO lines are tested.  
11 To Exit the Test Mode,  
At the T prompt, enter Q U I T CR.  
-67-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-BV  
SYSTEM DATE/DAY/TIME SETTING PROCEDURE  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE TEST  
1
Enter the Test Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter T E S T CR.  
T
2
3
4
To Set Date  
T TK00 K01 651YYMMDD#  
T
Enter T K 0 0 K 0 1 6 5 1 Y Y M M D D # CR.  
To Set Time Of Day  
Enter T K 0 0 K 0 1 6 5 2 H H M M S S # CR.  
TTK00 K01 652HHMMSS#  
To Set Day Of The Week  
Enter T K 0 0 K 0 1 6 5 3 D # CR.  
(D = day of week with Sunday = 1 ~ Saturday = 7)  
TTK00 K01 653D#  
T
5
To Exit the Test Mode  
At T prompt, enter Q U I T CR.  
-68-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
TABLE RM-BW  
SPEED DIAL MODE (CHANGE/REVIEW)  
STEP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY/PRINTOUT  
>MODE REPT  
1
Enter the Speed Dial Mode  
At the >MODE prompt, enter R E P T CR.  
2
Enter the station port number for which the speed  
dial number will be programmed  
Press  
R
Station Port Number  
(00 ~ 19)  
NOTE: If programming system speed dial, enter  
port number 0 0 .  
3
4
Enter Speed Dial Memory Location to be Programmed  
R
R
N
A) Press  
(current memory will display)  
10 ~ 49 Station  
60 ~ 99 System  
Memory Nothing in  
location memory  
B) Press SP ACE to review each memory location or go to Step 4.  
1) To enter speed dial number (20 digits max)  
N
20-digit number  
. . . . . . . . . .  
Press  
. . . . . . . . . .  
New speed dial number  
2) To enter chain dial number  
17-digit number  
Press A  
. . . . . . . . . . . .  
System speed dial location (90 ~ 99)  
(Refer to Digital or Electronic Telephone User Guide for  
information regarding chain dialing.)  
Special Entries: F=Flash; P=1.5 or 3-sec Pause (Prog. 12);  
L=10-sec Pause; N=Clear Memory.  
Special code entry: I = Intercom  
H = Hold  
C = Conference  
5
6
To store data, press CR  
R
NOTE: If program entry is not correct, CR will not  
respond. To try again, press DELETE CR at the same time.  
To Exit the Speed Dial Mode  
>MODE  
Press Q U I T CR.  
-69-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
REMOTE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES INDEX  
PROGRAM  
46-10 ~ 40  
47  
PROGRAM TYPE PAGE NUMBER  
INITITAILIZATION PROGRAMS PAGE NUMBER  
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
3
2
3
2
3
48  
49  
50  
50  
51  
51  
52  
52  
53  
43  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
38  
39  
40  
26  
41  
27  
42  
27  
43  
System Programs (90)  
Station Speed Dial, VM I.D. Codes (92)  
System Speed Dial (92)  
LCD Messages (92)  
Timed Reminders (92)  
Digital Telephone Volume Level (92)  
Call Forward Backup (92)  
PCB Slot Assignments (03)  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
48  
50-1  
50-2  
50-31 ~ 35  
50-4  
50-5  
50-6  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55-0  
55-1  
55-2  
56  
60  
69  
70  
77 (-1, -2)  
78  
79  
80  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM TYPE PAGE NUMBER  
TYPE 1  
TYPE 2  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
10 (-1, -2, -3)  
12  
13  
15  
16  
19  
20  
21  
22  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
1
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
3
3
1
1
3
2
3
3
3
3
2
2
3
3
3
2
3
3
3
3
2
2
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
26  
27  
23  
24  
24  
22  
25  
25  
26  
28  
28  
26  
26  
29  
27  
29  
30  
30  
31  
27  
27  
32  
32  
33  
27  
33  
34  
35  
36  
27  
27  
26  
37  
44  
44  
45  
45  
46  
46  
47  
81 ~ 89  
93  
DATA DUMP PROCEDURES  
System Programs  
Speed Dial Numbers  
LCD Messages  
60  
61  
61  
REMOTE LCD  
MESSAGING PROCEDURES  
Remote Calling Station (Edit) (Mode 95)  
Remote Calling Station (New) (Mode 97) 63  
Remote Called Station (Edit) (Mode 94)  
Remote Called Station (New) (Mode 96)  
62  
64  
65  
REMOTE TEST PROCEDURES  
Station/Line Status Check  
Station Button Activation  
CO Line Test  
42-0  
42-1 ~ 8  
44 (A, B)  
45-1  
45-2  
45-3 ~ 6  
45-8 ~ 9  
46-2 ~ 4  
46-6 ~ 8  
66  
66  
67  
68  
Set: Date/Day/Time  
REMOTE  
Speed Dial (Change/Review)  
69  
-70-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
SECTION 100-816-600  
MARCH 1993  
MESSAGE RECORD SHEET—Use several sheets if necessary  
MESG.#______  
MESG.#______  
MESG.#______  
MESG.#______  
MESG.#______  
MESG.#______  
MESG.#______  
MESG.#______  
MESG.#______  
MESG.#______  
MESG.#______  
-71-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Teledex Conference Phone B250D User Manual
Teledyne Microscope Magnifier T360U User Manual
Thermador Range P30 P36 User Manual
Timex Clock Radio T228 User Manual
TP Link Security Camera tlsc3130g User Manual
Tripp Lite Computer Hardware SRXFANROOF User Manual
United States Stove Gas Heater B2045L User Manual
Vantec Network Card CB IUSB20 User Manual
VocoPro Microphone DA2277 User Manual
Wayne Water Pump 350705 001 User Manual